54 Desmi Pumps

z
m
•o
c
3
•o
ET
A/S DE SMITHSKE DESMI
IMO 9190731
L171
Marine Pumps
- efficient and dependable pumps you can rely on
DE SMI
t
!>|
•««««««•
> !I
(" :*
i)jj.|y,on:^j(î
[©ijKlIt/ '
I
• ,•?• 7
i' j
>ModuIar Pumps ] f ' DESMI

"--r/'-1'' Marine
J \ complete family of \ :in Marine Pumps
Applications
"pumps built to fulfil the i ; | The natural
Lub. oil
needs of our customers. ; .à choice for high-
fuel oil
Self-priming is the ?i quality pumps.
3:H :l ! Etc.
speciality of DESMI, but
standard non-selfpriming Thousands of DESMI
pumps are also available. marine pumps at work
Long, tall or compact with on the seven seas
electric or hydraulic motor,v1 have proved our
petrol or diesel engine, or : ; customers' satisfaction
V-belt drive. - with the performance
Capacity range: 1-400 mVh. of our pumps.
Pressure range: 1-150 mWC.
Having supplied
marine pumps for
. À DESMI Pump Sets
I* decades we know the
For fire-fighting, irrigation etc. DESMI
owners' demands for
. pumps-are supplied with all major makes many years of trouble
. pf diesel engines, bailor made or standard |î free operation.
r .» to comply'with*i,Dternational standards.
We offer 100+
xfifferent types and
designs which ensure
the right pump to fit
SA Pumps „i the job.
< Vertical in-line
Our wëllknown old I
centrifugal pump,
timer but still going strong!. We offer global
typeNSL.
With the open impeller !? service from 50+
Available in spacer
the natural choies for | distributors all over
or monobloc
dirty water. the world.
design.
Capacity range: ! !
, ' Capacity range:
1-650 m7h. | is
10-1400 mVh. Spare parts are
Pressure range:
Pressure range: available from stock
1-110 mWC. •!.
5-140 mWC. at reasonable costs.
m A/S DE SMITHSKE
Vertical Incline centri1|!^äl,;i

pump, ty|e DSL In ^ r ^ | ä c t
design a'nti with s p ä t e r ' &
coupling. Capacity-rê:i3^
to 4000 mVh. Pressüjp rari-i
ge:3-40 mWC. :•
!
( DRm)
—r—: "
<f
y
••m
< Vertical.in-line.centrifugal pump with •'" -

spacer coupling, type S L
DES!
Available with or without" separate priming*
pump or air-driven priming ejector.
Capacity,,range]!: 10-1400 mVh. Pressure,»,,
. range: 2-200 mWC. m
• '•-....... • • / -ir
—-. ^ DESMI Super Primer - „
| specially made for
- guaranteed, super
' fast priming.
The standard pumps have <
been equipped with a priming •». -
star wheel.
Other DESMI
Pump Products
DESMI marine pumps have for decades had a reputation of
being sturdy and reliable marine pumps.
These values are also required forapplications within industry
generally, public water supply, agriculture etc.
DESMI offers a wide range of pumps and pump systems.

Contact your local DESMI dealer and get information about
our wide product range for onshore applications.
Pump Units
Complete pump units for sprinkler
and booster systems and mobile Sewage Pumps
pump units with self-priming Submersible and dry
pumps. Driven by eletric motor, mounted sewage pumps. DESMI
diesel or petrol engine. offers the complete pump
station including pump,
valves, rails, sump, and
control systems.
Internal Gear Pumps for Industry . '

The Rotan internal gear pumps are ideal for industrial
purposes. They provide favourable flow conditions, as the
direction of the liquid flow is only changed slightly through the
pump. This means that superior self-priming capability and
gentle liquid handling are achieved, and also that highly
viscous liquids may be pumped.
DESMI is a modern company with many years of experience. Centrifugal,

sewage, and internal gear pumps, gearboxes and environmental
equipment are among our products. Our customers rely on our quality.
DESMI's quality system is in accordance with ISO 9001.
AS DE SMITHSKE DESMI
Tagholm 1 Phone: +45 96 32 81 11
P.O. Box 226 Telefax: +45 98 1754 99
DK-9400 Nørresundby Internet: http://www.desmi.com
Denmark e-mail: desmi@desmi.com
WSDESMITHSKE DESMI
SPECIFICATION - DESMI PUMPS
SHIPYARD: ODENSE STÅLSKIBSVÆRFT A/S
NEW BUILDING: 171
NAME OF VESSEL:
Cap. Motor Pump

Pump type Application mWC rpm
m3/h kW No.
CR8-50 F.W.hydrophore 8 65 3500 3
VNC1-125420 Fire/G.S. 300/100 82/90 1780 125
NSL80-265/D02 Add. Fire 72 90 3550 43. 196928
SL250-330/D-G2-K-P Ballast 500 25 1775 65 196934-1/2
QT2-250 Heeling 400 16 1750 65

5 30
CRN4-30 Circ.F.CIeaning 3500 .1,1
CR8-50 Air Cooler Drain 14 50 3500 -3

1785/
DSL300-320/D-F-P S.W. Cooling 1228/850 20/8,5 90/30 196958-1/2/3
1190
NSL250-330/D02 S.W.Reefer Cooling 771 20 1775 88 197057-1/2/3
NSL200-415/A02 F.W.Reefer Cooling 623 45 1775 125 197015-1/2

1775/
NSL200-415/A02 F.W.Reefer Cooling 623/520 45/7,5 125/38 197015-3
1190
SL250-330/A-G2-K-P F.W. Cooling L.T. 890/1200 25/12 1765 88 196957-1/2/3
SL150-330/A-G2-K-P F.W. Cooling HT. 360 30 1775 55 196996-1/2
VDL1-3045 Lub. Oil M.E. 1020 50 . 1800 230
NSL80-215/D02-K-P S.W.f.FW Generator 70 50 3505 17,5 196953
01-03-19
EK
S Tlrtonea *1*7i rir\r>
Tagholm 1 Phone: +45 96 32 81 11 Reg. No. 538 Bank: Den Danske Bank
P.O. Box 226 Telefax +45 98 17 54 99 S.E. No. 1935 1211 Swift code dabadkkk
DK-9400 Nørresundby Telex 69620 desmi dk Vat No.: 46837150 Account No. 3201-3694103286
Denmark Cable: DESMIDK e-mail: desmi@desmi.com
A/SPESMITHSKE DE SMI
NEW BUILDING: 171
NAME OF VESSEL:
TYPE: NSL80-265/D02-K-P PARTS LIST No.: 673175-01-03-02-01
POS. No.: 05.14.02.001 QUANTITY: 1
PUMP No.: 196928
Capacity: 72 m3/h x 90 mWC x 3550 rpm
Electric motor: ABB - M2BA200MLB-2 - 43 kW
Impeller diameter: 0226 mm
PUMP MATERIALS:
Pump casing and rear cover: Bronze

Impeller: ALBZ
Shaft: Stainless steel
Shaft seal: Mech. - Burgmann MG1S20/38-G50-AVPGG
ø38 mm
Bearings - life-time lubricated: Pos. 13-6310-2RS1
This instruction includes the following pages:
NSL monobloc instruction No. T1380
H:\Dokumontor\lnotb. Odonoo 171 .doo

DK-9400 Nørresundby Telex 69620 desmi dk Vat No.: 46837150 Account No. 3201-3694103286-
A/SDESMITHSKE DESMI
NEW BUILDING: 171
NAME OF VESSEL:
TYPE: SL250-330/D-G2-K-P PARTS LIST No.: 654644-01-01-02
POS. No.: 05.16.01.001/002 QUANTITY: 2
PUMP No.: 196934-1/2
Electric motor: ABB - M2BA 225SMC-4 - 65 kW
Impeller diameter: ø256 mm
PUMP MATERIALS:

Impeller: ALBZ
ø55 mm
Bearings - lubrification:
About 50 gr every 4000
hours of running: Pos. T - 7 3 1 3 - B G
SL monobloc instruction No. T1423
H:\Dokumontor\lnstb. Odonoo 17
P.O. Box 226 Telefax +45 98 1754 99 S.E. No. 1935 1211 Swift code dabadkkk
DK-9400 Nørresundby Telex 69620 desmi dk Vat No.: 46837150- Account No. 3201-3694103286
A/SDE SMITHSKE DESMI
NEW BUILDING: 171
NAME OF VESSEL:
TYPE: DSL300-320/D-F-P PARTS LIST No.: 654670-01-02-02
POS. No.: 05.23.09.001 QUANTITY: 1
PUMP No.: 196958-1
Capacity: 1228/850 m3/h x 20/8,5 mWC x 1785/1190 rpm
Electric motor: ABB - M2BA 280SMB-4/6 - 90/30 kW
PUMP MATERIALS:

Impeller: ALBZ
Mech. - Burgmann MG1S20/60-G50-AVPGG-E1
Shaft seal: ø60 mm
Top bearing - 6311 - 2RS
Bearings - life-time lubricated: Bottom bearing - roller bearing
Bearings - manual, paragraph 11.4
DSL instruction No. T1429
Tagholm, 1 Phone: +45 96 32 81 11 . Reg. No. 538 Bank: Den Danske Bank
P.O. Box 226 Telefax +45 98 17 54 99 S.E.No. 1935 1211 Swift code dabadkkk
Â/SDESMITHSKE DESMI
NEW BUILDING: 171
NAME OF VESSEL:
TYPE: DSL300-320/D-F-P PARTS LIST No.: 654670-01-02-01
POS. No.: 05.23.09.002/003 QUANTITY: 2
PUMP No.: 196958-2/3
Electric motor: ABB - M2BA280SMB-4/6 - 90/30 kW
PUMP MATERIALS:

Impeller: ALBZ
Shaft seal: Mech. - Burgmann MG1S20/60-G50-AVPGG-E1
ø60 mm
Bearings - life-time lubricated: Top bearing -.6311 - 2RS
Bearings- manual, paragraph 11.4 Bottom bearing - roller bearing
DSL instruction No. T1429
*\Dokumontor\lnotb. Odonoo 171.doc

Tagholm 7 Phone: +45 96 32 81 11 . Reg. No. 538 Bank: Den Danske Bank
Denmark Cable: DESMIDK . e-mail: desmi@desmi.com
A/SDESMITHSKE DESMI
NEW BUILDING: 171
NAME OF VESSEL:
TYPE: NSL250-330/D02-P PARTS LIST No. 673805-01-01-03-01-01
POS. No.: 05.23.11.001/002/003 QUANTITY: 3
PUMP No.: 197057-1/2/3
Electric motor: ABB - M2BA250SMB-4 - 88 kW
PUMP MATERIALS:

Impeller: ALBZ
ø55 mm
hours of running: Pos. 13 -7313- BG
o
A/SDE SMITHSKE DESMI
NEW BUILDING: 171
NAME OF VESSEL:
TYPE: NSL200-415/A02-P PARTS LIST No.: 673800-02-02-03-01-01
POS. No.: 05.24.06.002/003 QUANTITY: 2
PUMP No.: 197015-1/2
Electric motor: ABB M2BA280SMC-4 - 125 kW
PUMP MATERIALS:
Pump casing and rear cover: Cast iron

Impeller: Bronze
ø70 mm
hours of running: Pos. 13-7315-BECBP
H'\nnknmpntar\ln<;th Drlpncp 171 rinr
Tagholm 1 Phone: +45 96 32 81.11 Reg. No. 538 Bank: Den Danske Bank
NEW BUILDING: 171
NAME OF VESSEL:
TYPE: NSL200-415/A02-P PARTS LIST No.: 673800-01-02-03-01-01
POS. No.: 05.24.06.001 QUANTITY: 1
PUMP No.: 197015-3
Electric motor: ABB M2BA315SMB-4/6 - 125/38 kW
PUMP MATERIALS:

Impeller: Bronze
Shaft seal: Mech.
Burgmann MG1S20/70 - G50 - APVGG
About50 gr every 4000
hours of running: Pos. 13-7315BECBP
H:\Dokumontor\lnotb. Odpnoo 171 .doo

A/S DE SMITHSKE DE SMI
NEW BUILDING: 171
NAME OF VESSEL:
TYPE: SL250-330/A-G2-K-P PARTS LIST No.: 654645-02-01-02
POS. No.: 05.24.10.001/002/003 QUANTITY: 3
PUMP No.: 196957-1/2/3
Capacity: 890/1200 m3/h x 25/12 mWC x 1765 rpm
Electric motor: ABB M2BA250SMB-4 - 88 kW
PUMP MATERIALS:

Impeller: Bronze
Shaft seal: Mech.
Burgmann MG1S20/55 - G50 - APVGG
Bearings - lubrification::
hours of running: Pos. T-7313 BECBP

Q235
Tagholm 1 Phone: +45 96 32 81 U • Reg. No. 538 Bank: Den Danske Bank
NEW BUILDING: 171
NAME OF VESSEL:
TYPE: SL150-330/A-G2-K-P PARTS LIST No.: 654650-03-01
POS. No.: 05.24.11.001/002 QUANTITY: 2
PUMP No.: 196996-1/2
Electric motor: ABB M2BA225SMB-4 - 55 kW
PUMP MATERIALS:

Impeller: Bronze
ø55 mm
hours of running: Pos. T - 7313- BECBP
ë. M-M~lnlriimontnrMne?>h O H a n g n 171 rtnr-
P.O. Box 226 Telefax +45 98 17 54 99 S.E.No. 1935 1211 Swift code dabadkkk
A/SDESMITHSKE DESMI
NEW BUILDING: 171
NAME OF VESSEL:
TYPE: NSL80-215/D02-K-P PARTS LIST No.: 673175-01-02-02-01-01
POS. No.: 05.23.04.001 QUANTITY: 1
PUMP No.: 196953
Electric motor: ABB -M2BA160M-2-17,5kW
PUMP MATERIALS:

Impeller: ALBZ
ø38 mm
Bearings - life-time lubricated: Pos. 13-6310-2RS1
a ~ »donee» I7i.doc
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

DESMI vertical "in-line" centrifugal pump
NSL Monobloc
A/S De Smithske
Tagholm 1, DK-9400 Nørresundby Phone +45 96 32 81 11 Fax +45 98 17 54 99
Manual: Language: Revision:

T1380 English D(03/00)
Special pump No.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PAGE
1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2
1.1 DELIVERY 2
2. TECHNICALDATA ; : 2
2.1 EXPLANATION OF THE TYPE NUMBER 2
2.2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3
3. INSTALLATION 5
3.1 MOUNTING/FASTENING 5
3.2 WIRING 5
4. TRANSPORT/STORAGE , : 5
5. DISMANTLING 6
5.1 ACCESS TO IMPELLER 6
5.2 DISMANTLING SHAFT SEAL 6
5.3 DISMANTLING SEAT 7
5.4 DISMANTLING BEARING (ONLY 02-COMBINATION) 7
5.5 INSPECTION 7
5.6 DISMANTLING COUPLING 02-COMBINATION / SHAFT 12-COMBINATION... 7
6. ASSEMBLING 8
6.1 FITTING SEALING RINGS 8
6.2 FITTING BEARING (ONLY 02-COMBINATION) 8
6.3 FITTING WATER DEFLECTOR (ONLY 02-COMBINATION)).. 8
6.4 FITTING SHAFT SEAL 8
6.5 FITTING IMPELLER 9
6.6 FITTING BEARING COVER (02-COMBINATION) OR MOTOR
BRACKET (12-COMBINATION) .-. ..9
6.7 SHAFT 9
6.8 FITTING COUPLING (ONLY 02-COMBINATION) 9
7. FROST PROTECTION ...... 9
8. DISMANTLING. : : .10
9. START-UP 10
9.1 STARTING 10
10. SYSTEM BALANCING 10
11. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 11

11.1 DRAINING THE PUMP 12
11.2BEARING 12
12. REPAIRS 13
12.1 ORDERING SPARE PARTS 13
13. OPERATING DATA 13
14. EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 15
15. ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS .....16
16. SPARE PARTS LISTS 16
17. DIMENSIONAL SKETCHES 20

1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
These operation and maintenance instructions apply to the DESMINSL Monobloc pump.
The pump is a single-stage vertical "in-line" centrifugal pump (i.e. horizontal inlet and outlet on the same
line) equipped with stainless steel shaft, mechanical shaft seal, and closed impeller.
The pump is suitable for the pumping of liquids with temperatures between 0 and 80°C. With special
shaft seal up to 120°C. Max. working pressure and number of revolutions are indicated under Operating
Data.
The pump is particularly suitable for the pumping of water in connection with cooling systems, cooling
of diesel engines, as bilge pumps, ballast pumps, fire pumps, brine pumps, pumps for irrigation, fish
farms, water works, district heating, salvage corps, army and navy, etc.
The descriptions in the operation and maintenance instructions are divided into two parts covering the
groups 0215/265 and ø330/415, as the designs of these two groups are different. The numbers refer to
the standard impeller diameter of the pump. E.g. :
0215/265: Pumps with ø215 or ø265 impellers:

The back of the impeller is equipped with relief blades to reduce the load on the bearings. The line
through inlet and outlet is flush with the centre line of the shaft.
0330/415: Pumps with ø330 or ø415 impellers:

The back and the front of the impeller are equipped with sealing rings and relief holes to reduce the load
on the bearings. The pump inlet and outlet are tangential i.e. the line through inlet and outlet is offset
in relation to the centre line of the shaft.
1.1 DELIVERY
- Check on delivery that the shipment is complete and undamaged.

- Defects and damages, if any, to be reported to the carrier and the supplier
immediately in order that a claim can be advanced.
2. TECHNICAL DATA
The pumps are manufactured in various material combinations which appear from the type number on
the name plate. See below.
2.1 EXPLANATION OF THE TYPE NUMBER
All the NSL pumps are provided with a name plate. The type number indicated on the name plate is built
up as follows:
NSLXXX-YYY-MR-Z
XXX: Pressure branch diameter, YYY: Standard impeller diameter

M: The material combination of the pump.
R: The assembly combination of the pump.
Z: Other variants
M may be the following:
A: Casing and shaft seal cover : Cast iron + cast iron alloy. Impeller and sealing rings: Bronze
B: Casing and shaft seal cover : Cast iron + cast iron alloy. Impeller and sealing rings: Stainless.
C: All cast iron
D: Casing and shaft seal cover: Bronze. Impeller and sealing rings: NiAlBz
E: Special materials
U: Nonmagnetic material
The pumps can be delivered in other material combinations according to agreement with the supplier.
R may be the following:

02: Monobloc, with bearing in the pump
12: Monobloc, without bearing in the pump
13 : Spacer, light bearing housing
14: Spacer, heavy bearing housing
15: Spacer, heavy bearing housing and heavy motor bracket (special motor bracket)
Z may be the following:

i : PN16 flanges
j : PN25 flanges
k : Special flange
1 : Other stuffing box
m : BS flanges
n : ANSI flanges .
o : Shockproof design
p : Other design
q : JIS flanges
Any use of the pump is to be evaluated on the basis of the materials used in the pump. In case of doubt,
contact the supplier.
Pumps in material combinations A and C are primarily used for fresh water.
Pumps in material combination D are primarily used for sea water.
If the pumps are designed for special purposes the following is to be indicated:
Pump No.
Pump type
Application
Comment
2.2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
The noise level indicated is the airborne noise including the motor. The noise depends on the motor type
supplied, as the noise from the pump can be calculated as the noise level of the motor + 2dB(A). The
noise level is for pumps with SEVER motors.
The capacity of the pump appears from the name plate on the pump. If the pump has been delivered
without motor, the pump capacity is to be indicated on the plate when mounting the motor.
The permissible loads on the flanges appear from the following table. The values apply to standard
pumps in bronze (Rg5) and cast iron (GG20). As to pumps in SG iron (GGG40) the values are to be
increased by factor 1.5.
Fy Fz Fx SF My Mz Mx S Mt
Pump N N N Nm Nm Nm
NSL80-215 800 950 850 1500 550 350 400 750
NSL80-265
NSL80-330
NSL100-215 1000 1250 1150 2000 650 400 500 900
NSL100-265
NSL100-330
NSL100-415
NSL125-215 1250 1600 1430 2500 830 520 650 1160
NSL125-265
NSL125-330
NSL125-415
NSL150-215 1500 1900 1700 2950 1000 650 800 1400
NSL150-265
NSL150-330
NSL150-415
NSL200-265 2000 2520 2260 3920 1330 860 1060 1860
NSL200-330
NSL200-415
NSL250-265 2500 3150 2820 4900 1770 1140 1400 2470
NSL250-330
NSL250-415
NSL300-415 3000 3750 3350 5860 2750 1900 2200 4000
In connection with the permissible loads on the flanges the following is to be observed:
^ rar
where index "calc" is the values calculated by the user.
At the same time none of the forces or moments may exceed the indicated figure multiplied by 1.4.
3. INSTALLATION
3.1 MOUNTING/FASTENING
The pump should be mounted and fastened on a solid base plate with a flat and horizontal surface to
avoid distortion.
The max. permissible loads on the flanges stated in paragraph 2.2 are to be observed.
At installations pumping hot or very cold liquids, the operator must be aware that it is
dangerous to touch the pump surface and, consequently, he must take the necessary safety
measures.
3.2 WIRING
Wiring to be carried out by authorized skilled workmen according to the rules and regulations
in force.
4. TRANSPORT/STORAGE
The weights of the pumps in A and D combination (without motor) are stated in the following table, and
the pumps are to be lifted as shown below. The D12-combination is as standard only available in
0330/415.
Weight in kg Weight in kg
A02/D02/A12/D12 A02/D02/A12/D12
Pump comb. incl. base plate Pump comb. incl. base plate
NSL80-215 126/141/100/ — NSL150-215 167/191/141/ —
NSL80-265 135/152/109/ — NSL150-265 172/197/146/ —
NSL80-330 256/261/206/211 NSL150-330 339 / 329 / 289 / 279
NSL100-215 137/154/111/ — NSL150-415 454/474/404/424
NSL100-265 136/153/120/ — NSL200-265 207 / 240 / -— / —
NSL100-330 261/267/211/217 NSL200-330 399 / 394 / 349 / 344
NSL100-415 379 / 399 / 329 / 349 NSL200-415 529/549/479/499
NSL125-215 148/163/122/ — NSL250-265 / / /
NSL125-265 154/175/128/ — NSL250-330 479/479/429/429
NSL125-330 276/282/226/232 NSL250-415 594/614/544/564
NSL125-415 414/434/364/384 NSL300-415 714/729/664/679
The pump is to be stored in a dry area.
Before shipment the pump is to be fastened securely on pallets or the like.

The pump is to be lifted in the following way:
The lifting straps must not bear against

sharp edges and corners
5. DISMANTLING
5.1 ACCESS TO IMPELLER
The numbers in brackets refer to the position numbers on the assembly drawing.
0215/265 02-combination
Remove guards (28). Remove Allen screws (22) which hold the shaft seal cover (18) and the motor
bracket (20) to the pump casing (1). Dismantle copper pipe (58). Remove motor bracket and motor.
Loosen shaft seal cover (18) from pump casing by means of the two M12 bolts in the threaded holes in
the shaft seal cover. The shaft seal cover with shaft and impeller can now be lifted up allowing inspection
of the impeller.
Remove guards (28). Remove Allen screws (22) which hold the motor bracket (20) to the pump casing
(1). Dismantle copper pipe (58). The top piece can now be lifted up allowing inspection of the impeller.
Remove guards (28). Remove set screws (64) which hold the motor bracket (20) to the pump casing
(1). Dismantle copper pipe (58). Remove motor bracket and motor. Remove set screws (22) with
washers (23), which hold the shaft seal cover (18) to the pump casing. Loosen the shaft seal cover from
the pump casing by means of the pointed screws (86). The shaft seal cover with shaft and impeller can
now be lifted up allowing inspection of the impeller.
Remove guards (28). Remove set screws (64) which hold the motor bracket (20) to the pump casing
(1). Dismantle copper pipe (58). Remove set screws (22) with washers (23), which hold the shaft seal
cover (18) to the pump casing. Loosen the shaft seal cover from the pump casing by means of the
pointed screws (86). The motor and motor bracket with shaft seal cover and shaft with impeller can now
be lifted up allowing inspection of the impeller.
5.2 DISMANTLING SHAFT SEAL
Pull the shaft seal cover off the motor bracket, by which the coupling (19) is pulled off the motor
shaft. Remove nut (6). Pull off the impeller (5) and remove sunk key (9). Remove Allen screws
(16), which hold the bearing cover (15) to the shaft seal cover, pull shaft seal cover and bearing
cover apart, by which shaft seal (10) and water deflector (11) are pulled off the shaft.
Remove nut (6). Pull off the impeller (5), and remove sunk key (9). Remove set screws (71) and pull
motor bracket and electric motor with shaft (17) apart, by which the shaft seal is pulled off the shaft.
Remove set screw (6). Pull off the impeller, and remove sunk key (9). Remove set screws (16), which
hold the bearing cover (15) to the shaft seal cover, pull shaft seal cover and bearing cover apart, by
which the shaft seal (10) is pulled off the shaft.
Remove set screw (6). Pull off the impeller, and remove sunk key (9). Pull shaft seal cover out of motor
bracket, by which the shaft seal (10) is pulled off the shaft.
5.3 DISMANTLING SEAT
Press out the seat from behind the shaft seal cover or motor bracket (ø215/265 in 12-combination)
5.4 DISMANTLING BEARING (ONLY 02-COMBINATION)
Before dismantling bearing, remove ring lock (12). Pull the shaft/coupling out of the bearing cover and
press the bearing out of the bearing cover.
5.5 INSPECTION
When the pump has been dismantled, check the following parts for wear and damage:
- Sealing ring/impeller: Max. clearance 0.4-0.5 mm measured in radius.

- Shaft seal/shaft seal cover: Check the seat for flatness and cracks.
Check the rubber parts for elasticity.
- Bearings: Replace in case of wear and noise.
5.6 DISMANTLING COUPLING (02-COMBINATION) / SHAFT (12-COMBINATION)
It is not necessary to remove the coupling in the 02-combination or the shaft in the 12-combination
during normal maintenance. However, in the 12-combination the shaft must be removed when the
lower bearing in the electric motor is replaced.
02-combination:
Dismantle the coupling by removing the pointed screw (73) and pull off the coupling. If the coupling
is removed on the assembled pump, take care that the bearing is not damaged by pulling too hard on
the coupling. If the coupling is removed after dismantling the pump, fix the shaft at the thread at the
opposite shaft end, while the coupling is pulled off. The coupling might be heated to facilitate
dismantling.
12-combination:
Remove pointed screws (73). Pull off the shaft.. The coupling might be heated to facilitate
dismantling.
6. ASSEMBLING
6.1 FITTING SEALING RINGS
When fitted, the sealing ring (4) is to bear against the shoulder of the pump casing.
0330/415
When fitted the sealing ring (27) is to bear against the shoulder of the shaft seal cover (20).
6.2 FITTING BEARING (ONLY 02-COMBINATION)
Place the support disc (14) (grease valve ring in ø330/415 with angular ball bearings) in the bearing
cover and press the bearing into place in the bearing cover. Lead the shaft through the bearing cover,
support disc and bearing, and press the bearing into place up against the support disc. Fit ring lock
(12).
0330/415
Fit cover under bearing (26).
6.3 FITTING WATER DEFLECTOR (ONLY 02-COMBINATION)
0215/265
Assemble bearing cover and shaft seal cover. Lead the water deflector (11) over the shaft until it
touches the shaft seal cover and then further 1-1.5 mm into the shaft seal cover. Do not fasten
bearing cover and electric motor until the motor has been mounted and the shaft can rotate freely
without noise.
0330/415
Lead the water deflector (11) over the shaft until it touches the cover under bearing (26) and then
further 1-1.5 mm towards the cover under bearing. Assemble bearing cover and shaft seal cover. Do
not fasten bearing cover and electric motor until the motor has been mounted and the shaft can
rotate freely without noise.
6.4 FITTING SHAFT SEAL
Before fitting the seat, clean the recess in the shaft seal cover or the motor bracket (ø215/265 in 12-
combination). When fitting the seat, remove the protective coating without scratching the lapped
surface. Dip the outer rubber ring of the seat into soapy water. Now press the seat into place with
the fingers and check that all parts are correctly imbedded.
If it is necessary to use tools for assembling, then protect the sliding surface of the seat to prevent it
from being scratched or cut. Lubricate the inner surface of the slide ring rubber bellows with soapy
water and push it over the shaft. The use of a fitting bush as shown on the assembly drawing is
recommended to avoid that the rubber bellows is cut.
Push the slide ring over the shaft with the hand. If the rubber bellows is tight, use a fitting tool and
take care that the slide ring is not damaged. If the carbon ring is not fixed, it is important to check
8
that it is fitted correctly, i.e. the chamfered/lapped side is to face the seat. The carbon ring can be
held by a little grease.
When using soapy water on the shaft, the bellows will settle and seat in abt. 15 minutes, and until
then tightness should not be expected. After start, check by viewing the leak hole that there are no
leaks.
6.5. FITTING IMPELLER
Fit the sunk key in the shaft and lead the impeller towards the shoulder of the shaft. Take care that
the ring at the end of the shaft seal spring locates in the recess of the impeller. Secure the impeller
with washers (7 and 8) and a nut (ø215/265) or a set screw (ø330/415).
6.6 FITTING SHAFT SEAL COVER OR MOTOR BRACKET (12-COMBINATION)
Place the O-ring (21) between pump casing and shaft seal cover (or motor bracket in ø215/265 12
combination) in the O-ring groove and hold it with a little grease. However, check the material of the
O-ring first. As standard the material is nitrile, but it might be EPDM which will be damaged by
mineral grease. Use soft soap or silicone grease for EPDM. Fit and fasten shaft seal cover or motor
bracket, mounted with the electric motor, in the pump casing. Screw the pointed screws (86) back
into the shaft seal cover before tightening. Fit copper pipe (58).
6.7 SHAFT
When the pump has been assembled, check that the shaft rotates freely. In case the shaft has been
dismantled in the 12-combination, tap the shaft towards the shaft end of the electric motor by means
of a plastic hammer, and fasten the pointed screws (first the middle screw) according to the below
table. Check that the wobble, measured as close to the shaft end as possible, is within the limits
indicated in the table.
Torque
Motor size Pointed screws Max. wobble
100/112 10 Nm 70 (am
132 24 Nm 70 urn
160 45 Nm 70 urn
180 60 Nm 70 urn
200 80 Nm 70 p,m
225 180 Nm 70 urn
250 180 Nm 70 um
280 180 Nm 70 um
315 180 Nm 70 um
355 360 Nm 70 um
6.8 FITTING COUPLING (ONLY 02-COMBINATION)
Fit sunk key (76). If the coupling is fitted on the assembled pump, take care that you do not damage
the bearing by pressing the coupling too hard. The coupling might be heated to facilitate the fitting.
If the coupling is fitted before assembling the pump, the shaft must be supported at the opposite shaft
end while the coupling is pressed into place. When the coupling bears against the shoulder of the
pump shaft, fit the pointed screw.
7. FROST PROTECTION
Pumps which are not in operation during frost periods are to be drained to avoid frost damage.
Remove the plug (3) at the bottom to empty the pump. Alternatively, it is possible to use anti-freeze
liquids in normal constructions.
8. DISMANTLING
Before dismantling the pump make sure that it has stopped. Empty the pump of liquid
before it is dismantled from the piping system. If the pump has been pumping dangerous
liquids you are to be aware of this and take the necessary safety measures.
If the pump has been pumping hot liquids, take great care that it is drained before it is
removed from the piping system.
9. START-UP
A centrifugal pump will not function until it has been filled with liquid between the foot
valve and somewhat above the impeller of the pump.
The liquid also serves as coolant for the shaft seal. In order to protect the shaft seal the
pump must not run dry.
ATTENTION
For safety reasons the pump is only allowed to operate against closed suction and discharge valves
for a short time (max. 5-10 minutes and at a max. temperature of 130°C). Otherwise there is a risk of
damage to the pump and, at worst, of a steam explosion. If the pump is not manually observed, the
installation of a safety device is recommended.
9.1 START-UP
Before starting the pump check that:
- the shaft rotates freely without jarring sounds.

- the pump casing and the suction line are filled with liquid.
Start the pump for a moment to check the direction of rotation. If the direction is correct (i.e. in the
direction of the arrow) the pump may be started.
10
10. SYSTEM BALANCING
It is often difficult to calculate a manometric delivery head in advance. It is, however, decisively
important to the quantity of liquid delivered.
A considerably smaller delivery head than expected will increase the quantity of liquid delivered,
causing increased power consumption and perhaps cavitation in pump and piping. In the pump the
impeller may show signs of heavy erosion caused by cavitation (corrosion) which may at times
render an impeller unfit for use in a very short time. Not unusually do similar erosions occur in pipe
bends and valves elsewhere in the piping system.
Therefore, after start-up, it is necessary to check either the quantity of liquid delivered or the power
consumption of the pump e.g. by measuring the current intensity of the connected motor. Together
with a reading of the differential pressure the quantity of water delivered can be determined against
the characteristics of the pump.
Should the pump not function as intended, please proceed according to the fault-finding list. Bear in
mind, though, that the pump was carefully checked and tested at the factory and that the majority of
faults stem from the piping system
FAULT CAUSE REMEDY
The pump has no or 1. Wrong direction of Change direction of

too low capacity rotation rotation to clockwise when
viewed from shaft end (the
direction of the arrow)
2. Piping system choked Clean or replace
3. The pump is choked Clean the pump
4. Suction line leaks Find the leakage, repair the
Pump takes air fault, non-return valve not
submerged
5. Suction lift too high Check data sheet Q/H
curve and NPSH or contact
DESMI
6. Pump and piping As 5
system wrongly
dimensioned
The pump uses too 1. Counter-pressure too Insert orifice plate or check
much power low valve/Contact DESMI
2. The liquid is heavier Contact DESMI
than water
3. Foreign body in pump Dismantle the pump,
remove the cause
4. Electric motor is Check fuses, cable
running on 2 phases connection, and cable
The pump makes noise 1. Cavitation in pump Suction lift too high/
Suction line wrongly
dimensioned/Liquid
temperature too high
11
11. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Inspect the shaft seal for leaks at regular intervals.
- Before inspection of a pump without guard check that the pump cannot be started
unintentionally.
- The system is to be without pressure and drained of liquid.
- The repairman must be familiar with the type of liquid which has been pumped as well
as the safety measures he is to take when handling the liquid.
11.1 DRAINING THE PUMP
When the piping system has been drained, note that there is still liquid in the pump. Remove the
liquid by dismantling the pipe plug (3) at the bottom of the pump.
11.2 BEARING
In the 12-combination the life depends on the relubrication, size and quality of the bearing in the
motor.
0215/265 in 02-combination
The bearing in the 02-combination is dimensioned for a nominal life of 25,000 working hours. The
bearing is lubricated for life and requires no attention but is to be replaced in case of noise or bearing
wear.
0330/415 in 02-combination
The bearing is dimensioned for a nominal life of 100,000 working hours and is to be relubricated
according to the below table. The bearing is to be replaced in case of noise or bearing wear.
Light bearing housing (single-row ball bearing)

The bearing is to be relubricated through the lubricator nipple (84) in the bearing cover (15). In
connection with replacement, the bearings are to be mounted with the RS - sealing facing downwards,
fill the bearing itself with grease and place a grease bead on the bearing towards the shaft in a quantity
corresponding to the table below.
Heavy bearing housing (two angular ball bearings)

The bearings are to be relubricated through the lubricator nipple (84) in the bearing cover (15). Fill the
bearings with grease and place a grease bead on the bearing towards the shaft in a quantity
corresponding to the table below.
Pump Assembly Interval Quantity
0330/415 Light bearing 4500 hours 30g

housing
Heavy bearing 40 g
0330 + NSL150-415 4500 hours
housing
Heavy bearing
0415 4500 hours 50g
housing
12
If the pump liquid temperature is below 80°C the following types of grease are recommended:
ESSO Beacon 2
BP Energrease EP grease 2
Shell Alvania grease 2
Mobil Mobil lux grease EP 2 eller Mobil plex 47
Castrol Spherol AP 2
Texaco MultifakEP2
Q8 Rembrandt EP 2 eller Rubens
Statoil Statoil Uniway u2
If the pump liquid temperature is above 80°C, high-temperature grease is recommended, e.g. SKF
LGHQ3.
12. REPAIRS
12.1 ORDERING SPARE PARTS
When ordering spare parts please always state pump type, serial No. (appears on the name plate of the
pump), position No. on the assembly drawing and designation on the spare parts list.
13. OPERATING DATA
The following working pressures (pressure in piping ind. the pressure increase caused by the pump) and
number of revolutions are allowed in standard pumps.
0215/265
In the 02-combination the ø215 pumps are as standard available with motors up to frame size 225
(inclusive) and ø265 pumps with motors up to frame size 280 (inclusive).
In the 12-combination the ø215 pumps are as standard available with motors up to frame size 180
0330/415
In the 02/12-combination the ø330 pumps are as standard available with motors up to frame size 315
13
Max. Max.
working Max. working Max.
pressure working Max. pressure working Max. ^m
[bar] pressure RPM [bar] pressure RPM
Bronze / [bar] 12- / 02- Bronze / [bar] 12-/02-
Pump Cast iron SG-iron combination Pump Cast iron SG-iron combination
NSL80-215 16 32 1800/3600 NSL150-215 8 16 /1800
NSL80-265 14.5 29 1800/3600 NSL150-265 7 14 1800/1800
NSL80-330 8/13 27 1800/1800 NSL150-330 7/13 27 1800/1800
NSLlOO-215 13 26 1800/3600 NSL150-415 9/13 26 1800/1800
NSL100-265 14.5 29 1800/3600 NSL200-265 9 18 /1800
NSL100-330 8/14 29 1800/1800 NSL200-330 7/13 26 1800/1800
NSL100-415 10/12.5 25 1800/1800 NSL200-415 9/13 26 1800/1800
NSL125-215 10 20 1800/1800 NSL250-265 — — —
NSL125-265 14.5 29 1800/3600 NSL250-330 7/12 25 1800/1800
NSL125-330 7/12 25 1800/1800 NSL250-415 9/12 25 1800/ 180J^
NSL125-415 9/13 26 1800/1800 NSL300-415 9/12 25 1800/180«f
14
14. EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
DESMI, A/S De Smithske, hereby declare that our pumps of the NSL Monobloc type are manufactured
in conformity with the provisions of the COUNCIL DIRECTIVE of June 14, 1989, on mutual
approximation of the laws of the member states on the safety of machines (89/392/EEC with subsequent
amendments) with special reference to Annex I of the Directive on essential safety and health
requirements in relation to the construction and manufacture of machines.
The following harmonized standards have been used:
EN 292
CE - marks are applied to pumps with prime movers only. Pumps with CE - mark and electric motor are
manufactured in accordance with the low-voltage directive.
Pumps delivered by us without prime movers may only be used when the prime mover and the
connection between prime mover and pump comply with the above directive as well as the low-voltage
directive.
Nørresundby, October 13, 1999
Flemming Bertelsen
Technical Manager
DESMI
A/S De Smithske
Tagholm 1
9400 Nørresundby
15
15. ASSEMBLY DRAWING 0215/265 02-comb. 16. SPARE PARTS LIST ø215/265 02-comb.
See 0330/415 pump on the next pages
1 Pump casing
2 Pipe plug
3 Pipe plug
4 Sealing ring
5 Impeller
6 Nut
7 Spring collar
8 Washer
9 Sunkkey
10 Shaft seal
11 Water deflector
12 Ring lock
13 Ball bearing
14 Support disc
15 Bearing cover
16 Allen screw
17 Shaft
18 Shaft seal cover
19 Coupling
20 Motor bracket
21 O-ring
22 Allen screw
28 Guard
58 Copper pipe
59 Hexagon nipple
70 Allen screw
71 Setscrew
72 Intermediate flange
73 Pointed screw
75 INSEX-screw
76 Sunkkey
81 Sealing washer
93 Set screw
94 Base plate
95 Lock washer
96 Manometer
97 Nipple
98 Sleeve
107 Pipe plug
OPIION
16
15. ASSEMBLY DRAWING ø215/265 12-comb. 16. SPARE PARTS LIST ø215/265 12-comb.
1 Pump casing
2 Pipe plug
3 Pipe plug
4 Sealing ring
5 Impeller
6 Nut
7 Spring collar
8 Washer
9 Sunk key
10 Mech. shaft seal
17 Shaft
20 Motor bracket
21 O-ring
r— 22 Allen screw
" ["—. —-
28 Guard
58 Copper pipe
59 Hexagon nipple
71 Set screw
73 Pointed screw
75 INSEX-screw
81 Sealing washer
rrn-. 93 Set screw
94 Base plate
95 Lock washer
96 Manometer
97 Nipple
98 Sleeve
107 Pipe plug
OPTION
17
15. ASSEMBLY DRAWING ø330/415 02-comb. 16. SPARE PARTS LIST ø330/415 02-comb.
1 Pump casing
2 Pipe plug
3 Pipe plug
4 Sealing ring
5 Impeller
6 Set screw
7 Spring collar
8 Washer
9 Sunk key
10 Mech. shaft seal
11 Water deflector
12 Ring lock
13 Ball bearing
14 Grease valve ring*
15 Bearing cover
16 Set screw
17 Shaft
18 Shaft seal cover
19 Coupling
20 Motor bracket
21 O-ring
22 Set screw
23 Lock washer
26 Cover under bearing
27 Sealing ring 2
28 Guard
58 Copper pipe
59 Hexagon nipple
61 Hexagon nipple
64 Set screw
70 Allen screw
71 Set screw
72 Intermediate flange
73 Pointed screw
75 INSEX-screw
76 Sunk key
81 Sealing washer
84 Lubricator nipple
86 Pointed screw
93 Set screw
94 Base plate
95 Lock washer
96 Manometer
97 Nipple
98 Sleeve
107 Pipe plug
*) Support disc in light

bearing housing
OPTION
18
15. ASSEMBLY DRAWING ø330/415 12-comb. 16. SPARE PARTS LIST 0330/415 12-comb.
1 Pump casing
2 Pipe plug
3 Pipe plug
4 Sealing ring
5 Impeller
6 Set screw
7 Spring collar
8 Washer
9 Sunk key
10 Mech. shaft seal
17 Shaft
18 Shaft seal cover
20 Motor bracket
21 O-ring
22 Set screw
23 Lock washer
27 Sealing ring 2
28 Guard
58 Copper pipe
59 Hexagon nipple
64 Set screw
71 Set screw .
73 Pointed screw
75 INSEX-screw
81 Sealing washer
86 Pointed screw
93 Set screw
94 Base plate
95 Lock washer
96 Manometer
97 Nipple
98 Sleeve
107 Pipe plug
OPTION
19
17. DIMENSIONAL SKETCH ø215/265 02-combination
See 0330/415 pumps on the next pages
lilMOffiMBOfflüffiBI!
•IIOODOOOflOODOOOHHI
BASE PLATE
(OPTIONAL)
Manometer: 1/4" BSP. Drain: 3/8" BSP. Priming: 1/2" BSP
IfIk
Type H hl h2 L LI W DN D d2 k X Y Z B
NSL80-215 567 200 155 530 265 163 80 200 18 160 20 306 25 350
NSL80-265 574 200 155 580 290 193 80 200 18 160 20 306 25 350 175
NSL100-215 587 200 155 580 290 181 100 220 18 180 20 306 25 350 175
NSLl 00-265 593 200 155 630 315 193 100 220 18 180 20 306 25 350 175
NSL125-215 600 200 155 630 315 203 125 250 18 210 20 306 25 350 175
NSL125-265 617 200 155 680 340 227 125 250 18 210 20 306 25 350 175
NSL150-215 636 230 185 680 340 239 150 285 22 240 20 306 25 350 175
NSLl 50-265 640 200 155 730 365 250 150 285 22 240 20 306 25 350 175
NSL200-265 681 260 215 780 390 290 200 340 23 295 20 306 25 350 175
20
BASE PLATE
(OPTIONAL)
Type H hl h2 L Ll W DN D d2 k X Y Z B Bl
NSL80-215 444 200 155 530 265 163 80 200 18 160 20 306 25 350 175
NSL80-265 450 200 155 580 290 193 80 200 18 160 20 306 25 350 175
NSLlOO-215 465 200 155 580 290 181 100 220 18 180 20 306 25 350 175
NSLlOO-265 470 200 155 630 315 193 100 220 18 180 20 306 25 350 175
NSL125-215 478 200 155 630 315 203 125 250 18 210 20 306 25 350 175
NSL125-265 493 200 155 680 340 227 125 250 18 210 20 306 25 350 175
NSL150-265 517 200 155 730 365 250 150 285 22 240 20 306 25 350 175
21
BASE PLATE
(OPTIONAL)
Manometer: 1/4" JÖSJT. urain: J / 4 " tsar. jfnming: i/z ±ssjr
Type H hl h2 L LI W Ds Dd Ds Dd DNs DNd ks kd

A- A- D- D-
udf. udf. udf. udf.
NSL80-330 738 260 215 600 300 250 235 200 220 200 100 80 180 160
NSL100-330 743 260 215 650 325 250 270 235 250 220 125 100 210 180
NSL100-415 761 260 215 700 350 275 270 235 250 220 125 100 210 180
NSL125-330 788 300 255 700 350 250 300 270 285 250 150 125 240 2lfl
NSL125-415 799 300 255 750 375 278 300 270 285 250 150 125 240 210
NSL150-330 799 300 255 750 350 259 360 300 340 285 200 150 295 240
NSL150-415 845 340 340 800 400 293 360 300 340 285 200 150 295 240
NSL200-330 842 340 295 900 450 280 425 360 395 340 250 200 350 295
NSL200-415 860 340 295 900 450 308 425 360 395 340 250 200 350 295
NSL250-330 889 380 335 1000 500 303 485 425 445 395 300 250 400 350
NSL250-415 902 380 335 1000 500 330 485 425 445 395 300 250 400 350
NSL300-415 953 420 375 1200 600 344 555 485 505 445 350 300 460 400
Continued on the next page.
22
Type d2s d2d As Ad X Y Z B Bl 0
NSL80-330 18 18 8 8 20 306 25 350 175 200
NSLlOO-330 18 18 8 8 20 306 25 350 175 210
NSL100-415 18 18 8 8 20 450 25 500 250 250
NSL125-330 22 18 8 8 20 306 25 350 175 225
NSL125-415 22 18 8 8 20 450 25 500 250 260
NSL15O-33O 22 22 8 8 20 450 25 500 250 235
NSL150-415 22 22 8 8 20 450 25 500 250 275
NSL200-330 22 22 12 8 20 450 25 500 250 260
NSL200-415 22 22 12 8 24 560 28 500 250 285
NSL250-330 22 22 12 12 24 560 28 500 250 275
NSL250-415 22 22 12 12 24 560 28 500 250 305
NSL300-415 22 22 16 12 24 560 28 500 250 320
23
BASE PLATE
(OPTIONAL)
Type H hl h2 L Ll W Ds Dd Ds Dd DNs DNd ks kd

A- A- D- D-
udf. udf. udf. udf.
NSL80-330 499 260 215 600 300 250 235 200 220 200 100 80 180 160
NSLlOO-330 504 260 215 650 325 250 270 235 250 220 125 100 210 180
NSLlOO-415 547 260 215 700 350 275 270 235 250 220 125 100 210 180
NSL125-330
NSL125-415
549
585
300
300
255
255
700
750
350
375
250
278
300
300
270
270
285
285
250
250
150
150
125
125
240
240
4
210
NSL150-330 599 300 255 750 350 259 360 300 340 285 200 150 295 240
NSL150-415 631 340 340 800 400 293 360 300 340 285 200 150 295 240
NSL200-330 643 340 295 900 450 280 425 360 395 340 250 200 350 295
NSL200-415 676 340 295 900 450 308 425 360 395 340 250 200 350 295
NSL250-330 690 380 335 1000 500 303 485 425 445 395 300 250 400 350
NSL250-415 718 380 335 1000 500 330 485 425 445 395 300 250 400 350
NSL300-415 764 420 375- 1200 600 344 555 485 505 445 350 300 460 400
Continued on the next page.
24
Type d2s d2d As Ad X Y Z B Bl O
NSL8O-33O 18 18 8 . 8 20 306 25 350 175 200
NSL100-330 18 18 8 8 20 306 25 350 175 210
NSL100-415 18 18 8 8 20 450 25 500 250 250
NSL125-330 22 18 8 8 20 •306 25 350 175 225
NSL125-415 22 18 8 8 20 450 25 500 250 260
NSL150-330 22 22 8 8 20 450 25 500 250 235
NSL150-415 22 22 8 8 20 450 25 500 250 275
NSL200-330 22 22 12 8 20 450 25 500 250 260
NSL200-415 22 22 12 8 24 560 28 500 250 285
NSL250-330 22 22 12 12 24 560 28 500 250 275
NSL250-415 22 22 12 12 24 560 28 500 250 305
NSL300-415 22 22 16 12 24 560 28 500 250 320
25
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
WSDESMITHSKE DESM
DESMI "in-line" centrifugal pump
SL Monobloc (with bearing)
A/S De Smithske
Tagholm 1, DK-9400 Nørresundby - Phone +45 96 32 81 11 - Fax +45 98 17 54 99
Manual: Language: Revision:

T1423 English A(03/01)
Special pump No
TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 4
1.1 DELIVERY 4
2. TECHNICAL DATA 4
2.1 ACCESSORIES 4
2.2 SPACE AROUND THE PUMP : 4
2.3 EXPLANATION OF THE TYPE NUMBER 4
2.4 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 6
3. INSTALLATION 8
3.1 MOUNTING/FASTENING 8
3.2 WIRING .....8
4. TRANSPORT/STORAGE 8
5. DISMANTLING 9
5.1 ACCESS TO IMPELLER AND BEARINGS 9
5.2 ACCESS TO SHAFT SEAL AND BEARINGS 10
5.3 INSPECTION 10
6. ASSEMBLING 10
6.1 FITTING SEALING RING IN PUMP CASING 10
6.2 FITTING BEARINGS 10
6.3 FITTING SHAFT WITH BEARINGS 10
6.4 FITTING SHAFT SEAL 10
6.5 FITTING IMPELLER 11
6.6 FITTING REAR COVER AND MOTOR BRACKET 11
6.7 SHAFT 11
6.8 FITTING COUPLING 11
6.5 GUARD 11
7. FROST PROTECTION 11
8. DISMANTLING 11
9. START-UP 11
9.1 STARTING ...12
10. SYSTEM BALANCING 12
11. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 13

11.1 DRAINING THE PUMP 13
11.2 LUBRICATING BEARINGS 13
12. REPAIRS 14
12.1 ORDERING SPARE PARTS 14
13. OPERATING DATA 15
14. EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 16
15. ASSEMBY DRAWING (LIGHT BEARING HOUSING) 17
16. ASSEMBY DRAWING (HEAVY BEARING HOUSING) 18
17. DIMENSIONAL SKETCH 19

1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
These operation and maintenance instructions apply to the DESMI SL-pump series, type Monobloc (with
bearings). The pumps are available in sizes ranging from 70 mm to 250 mm on the pressure flange. The
suction flange is bigger than the pressure flange.
DESMI SL is a single-stage centrifugal pump with stainless steel shaft, mechanical shaft seal, and closed
impeller.
„The.pump is a so-called "in-line" type, which means that suction and pressure branches are mounted on the
centre line. It is vertical with impeller of the single-suction type with double-curved blades, and it has a
helical pump casing in one casting.
For the standard type max. temperature of the water is 80°C. With special shaft seal up to 120°C.
Regarding max. number of revolutions, see table in paragraph 2.4.
The pump is particularly suited for pumping water in connection with cooling of diesel engines and cooling
aggregates, as bilge, ballast and fire pump, for irrigation, fish farming, water works, water lowering etc.
The pump is driven by an electric motor, which may be a standard AC motor or a DC motor.
1.1 DELIVERY
Check on delivery that the shipment is complete and undamaged.
Defects and damages, if any, to be reported to the carrier or the supplier immediately in order that a
claim can be advanced.
2. TECHNICAL DATA
The pumps are manufactured in various material combinations which appear from the type number on the
name plate. See paragraph 2.3.
2.1 ACCESSORIES
As extra equipment the pump may be equipped with a self-priming pump of the water ring type, complete
with filter and feed water tank, or it may be delivered with an ejector pump.
Manometers are standard equipment.
2.2 SPACE AROUND THE PUMP
It is necessary to dismantle the motor for access to the internal parts of the pump. There has to be a minimum
distance above the motor which corresponds to the length of the motor's shaft end. Further sufficient space
for the lifting gear has to be available.
There has to be sufficient space in front of the pump and the coupling guard to allow inspection of the shaft
seal for leaks and to allow dismantling of the coupling and the internal parts of the pump.
2.3 EXPLANATION OF THE TYPE NUMBER
All the SL-pumps are provided with a name plate.

The type number indicated on the name plate is built up as follows:
••9
SL XXX-YYY/M/R
SL SL-pump.
XXX Diameter DN (mm) of the pressure branch (70, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250).
YYY Diameter (mm) of standard impeller (215,265, 330,415).
M The material combination of the pump (A, B, C, D, U or Q). See the table below.
R The assembly combination of the pump.
The letters used have the following meaning:
g2: Monobloc with one bearing m: BS-flanges

i: TN16 flanges n: ANSI-flanges
j: TN25 flanges o: Shock-proof type
k: Identical suction and pressure flanges p: Other type
1: Other stuffing box q: JIS-flanges
Material A B C D UorQ
Combination
Pump casing Cast iron Cast iron Cast iron Bronze See note 1)
Impeller Bronze Stainless steel Cast iron Alu-bronze See note 1)
Sealing ring Bronze Stainless steel Cast iron Alu-bronze See note 1)
Rear cover Cast iron Cast iron Cast iron Bronze See note 1)
Shaft Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel See note 1)
Elastomer Nitrile Nitrile Nitrile Nitrile Nitrile/See note 1)
Note 1):
"Q" The pumps are available in other material combinations at request
"U" Special non-magnetic materials
Before putting a pump into operation, the suitability of the material combination of the pump must always be
taken into consideration. In case of doubt, contact the supplier.
Pumps in material combinations A, B and C are primarily used for fresh water.
Pumps in material combination D are primarily used for seawater.
Pumps in material combination U and Q are used for specific tasks at the customer's request.
If the pumps are designed for special purposes, the following is to be indicated:
Pump No. : •
Pump type :
Application :
Comment :
2.4 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
The following table indicates the max. permissible number of revolutions for each individual pump type:
Motors: Motors:
Pump Type 4-pole at 50Hz 2-pole at 50Hz
4-pole at 60Hz 2-pole at 60Hz
SL-70-21-5 ~-x ......

SL 70-265 X
SL 80-215 X
SL 80-265 X
SL 80-330 X
SL 100-215 X
SL 100-265 X
SL 100-330 X
SL 125-215 X
SL 125-265 X
SL 125-330 X
SL 125-415 X
SL 150-265 X
SL 150-330 X
SL 150-415 X
SL 200-265 X
SL 200-330 X
SL 200-415 X
SL 250-330 X
SL-250-415 X
The noise level of the pump depends on the motor type supplied, as the noise from the pump can be
calculated as the noise level of the motor + 2dB(A).
The capacity of the pump appears from the name plate on the pump. If the pump has been delivered without
motor, the pump capacity is to be indicated on the plate when mounting the motor.
The permissible loads on the flanges appear from the following table. The value are valid for standard pumps
in bronze and cast iron. For pumps in ductile iron increase the value by factor 1.5.
Pump Types DN Forces (N) Torques (Nm)

Fy Fz Fx ZF My Mz MX E Mt
SL 70-215
70 700 840 750 1340 510 310 380 700
SL 70-265
SL 80-215
SL 80-265 80 800 950 850 1500 550 350 400 750
SL 80-330
SL 100-215
SL 100-265 100 1000 1250 1150 2000 650 400 500 900
SL 100-330
SL 125-215
SL 125-265
125 1250 1600 1430 2500 830 520 650 1160
SL 125-330
SL 125-415
SL 150-265
SL 150-330 150 1500 1900 1700 2950 1000 650 800 1400
SL 150-415
SL 200-265
SL 200-330 200 2000 2520 2260 3920 1330 860 1060 I860
SL 200-415
SL 250-330
250 2500 3150 2820 4900 1770 1140 1400 2470
SL 250-415
If there are forces or torques in any of the directions which exceed the values stated in above table, the
following has to be met:
<2
where index "calc" is the values calculated by the user.
However, none of the forces or torques are separately allowed to exceed 1.4 times the stated values.
7
3. INSTALLATION
3.1 MOUNTING/FASTENING
The pump should be mounted and fastened on a solid base plate with a flat and horizontal surface to avoid
distortion.
The max. permissible loads on the flanges stated in paragraph 2.4 are to be observed.
At installations pumping hot or very cold liquids the operator must be aware that it is dangerous to
touch the pump surface, and, consequently, he must take the necessary safely precautions.
3.2 WIRING
Wiring to be carried out by authorised skilled workmen according to the rules and regulations in
force.
4. TRANSPORT/STORAGE
The pumps are to be lifted as shown below. The weights of the pumps, without motor, appear from the table
below. Centre of gravity is in the centre line.
Weight in kg Weight in kg
Type Type
A/D-combination A/D-combination
SL 70-215 135/150 SL 125-330 300/315
SL 70-265 150/165 SL 125-415 360/385
SL 80-215 140/155 SL 150-265 280/295
SL 80-265 165/175 SL 150-330 355/410
SL 80-330 210/225 SL 150-415 410/445
SL 100-215 145/160 SL 200-265 360/405
SL 100-265 180/195 SL 200-330 410/465
SL 100-330 240/255 SL 200-415 495/540
SL 125-215 165/180 SL 250-330 • 465/515
SL 125-265 195/215 SL 250-415 655/725
The pump is to be stored in a dry area.

Before shipment the pump is to be fastened securely on pallets or the like.
The pump is to be lifted as shown below:
The lifting straps must not bear against sharp edges and corners.
5. DISMANTLING
The main components of the pump are:

1. Pump casing (A) (is not to be unbolted from pipe flanges for dismantling)
2. Parts which can be removed as a complete unit: Shaft (E), impeller (C), rear cover (B), bearing cover
(D) etc.
3. Motor bracket (M) which carries the motor
4. Coupling (CA)
5.1 ACCESS TO IMPELLER AND BEARINGS
Remove guard (N). Remove pipe (AS) which goes from suction side to rear cover (B). In case the pump is
equipped with manometers (AV) remove the pipes (AT) for these also.
Dismantle the motor by removing the screws (MO). Lift up the motor vertically until the shaft is free of the
coupling (CA). Dismantle the screws (AJ) and lift up the motor bracket (M). This can be removed together
with the motor.
It is now necessary to dismantle the coupling (CA) unless it has to be replaced or the bearings are to be
inspected. To dismantle the coupling remove the pointed screw (AG) and pull it off the shaft.
Remove the set screws (AH) which fasten rear cover (B) to the pump casing (A):
A vertical lift of the bearing cover (D) with shaft (E) and rear cover (B) etc. detaches this unit from the pump
casing. This can now be dismantled, see para. 5.2.
5.2 ACCESS TO SHAFT SEAL AND BEARINGS
Remove nuts (AO). Pull off impeller (C) and key (AF).
Loosen pointed screw (AP) in the labyrinth ring (P) through the opening in the rear cover (B).
Pull shaft (E) with bearing cover (D) off the rear cover, by which the shaft seal (V) and the labyrinth
ring are pulled off the shaft. The seat is pressed out from behind the rear cover.
Remove lock ring (U). At the same time pull bearings (T) and bearing cover (D) off the shaft. Remove
distance ring (O). If this operation is carried out it is necessary to replace the bearings. If the bearings are to
be reused, it is necessary to dismantle the coupling (CA) as described under para. 5.1. The rear cover can
now be pulled off, and it will not be necessary to pull the bearings off the shaft.
5.3 INSPECTION
When the pump has been dismantled, check the following parts for wear and damage:
- Sealing ring/impeller : Clearance max. 0.4 - 0.5 mm measured in radius.

- Shaft seal/rear cover : Check seat for flatness and cracks.
Check rubber parts for elasticity.
- Bearings : Remove old grease, re-lubricate, see para. 11.2
Replace in case of wear and noise.
6. ASSEMBLING
6.1 FITTING SEALING RING IN PUMP CASING
When fitted the sealing ring (J) is to bear against the shoulder of the pump casing (A).
6.2 FITTING BEARINGS
Lead distance ring (O) over the shaft and towards the shoulder. Press bearing (R) or bearings (T) onto the
shaft. Pay attention that the bearings (T) are turning correctly and that they are greased in accordance with
para. 11.2.2. Mount lock ring (U).
6.3 FITTING SHAFT WITH BEARINGS
Lead shaft with bearings into the bearing cover (D). If convenient mount coupling (CA) onto the shaft
already now (see para. 6.8). Push labyrinth ring (P) into the opening of the rear cover (B), lead the shaft into
the rear cover. Take care if the seat has already been mounted. See to it that the shaft catches the labyrinth
ring, push it as far against the shoulder of the shaft as possible before tightening the pointed screw (AP).
Tighten the screws (AK).
6.4 FITTING SHAFT SEAL
Before fitting the seat, clean the recess in the rear cover. When fitting the seat, remove the protective coating
without scratching the lapped surface. Dip the outer rubber ring of the seat in soapy water. Now press the
seat into place with the fingers, and check that all parts are correctly imbedded.
If it is necessary to use fitting tools, then protect the sliding surface of the seat to prevent it from being
scratched or cut. Lubricate the inner diameter of the rubber bellows on the slide ring with soapy water and
push it over the shaft. The use of a fitting bush is recommended to avoid that the rubber bellows is cut.
Push the slide ring over the shaft with the hand. If the rubber bellows is tight, use a fitting tool and take care
that the slide ring is not damaged. If the carbon ring is not fixed, it is important to check that it is fitted
correctly, i.e. the chamfered/lapped side is to face the seat. The carbon ring can be held by a little grease.
When using soapy water on the shaft, the bellows will settle and seat in about 15 minutes and until then
tightness should not be expected. After start, check by viewing the leak hole that there are no leaks.
10
6.5 FITTING IMPELLER
Fit the key (AF) in the shaft, and lead the impeller (C) towards the shoulder on the shaft (E).
Take care that the ring at the end of the shaft seal spring locates in the recess of the impeller. Secure the
impeller with a distance ring (K) and 2 nuts (AO).
6.6 FITTING REAR COVER AND MOTOR BRACKET
Place the O-ring (L) between pump casing (A) and rear cover (B) on the rear cover and hold with a little
grease. Check the material of which the O-ring is made. As standard Nitrile is used, but it may also be
EPDM which does not tolerate mineral grease.. For EPDM use soft soap or silicon grease. The unit with rear
cover, impeller, bearing cover etc. is lead into place and tightened with the screws (AH). Note that the copper
pipe connection faces the suction side. Mount motor bracket and motor. Fit copper pipes (AS) and (AT).
6.7 SHAFT
When the pump has been assembled, check that the shaft (E) rotates freely.
6.8 FITTING COUPLING
Place key (AG). If the coupling is fitted to the assembled pump, take care not to damage the bearing by
pressing too hard on the coupling. It may be an advantage to heat the coupling lightly to facilitate the
mounting. If the coupling is mounted before the pump is reassembled, see para. 6.3, support the shaft on the
opposite end while pressing on the coupling. When the coupling bears against the shoulder of the pump
shaft, mount the pointed screw.
6.5 GUARD
The coupling guard (N) protects against unintentional access to the shaft and coupling. The pump must not
be started when guard is dismantled. The coupling guard is perforated so that it is possible to inspect leaks at
the shaft seal (V).
7. FROST PROTECTION
Pumps which are not in operation during frost periods are to be drained to avoid frost damage.
Remove the plug at the bottom to empty the pump. Alternatively, it is possible to use anti-freeze liquids in
normal constructions.
8. DISMANTLING
Before dismantling the pump make sure that it has stopped. Empty the pump of liquid before it
is dismantled from the piping system. If the pump has been pumping dangerous liquids you are
to be aware of this and take the necessary safety precautions. If the pump has been pumping hot
liquids, take great care that it is drained before it is removed from the piping system.
9. START-UP
A centrifugal pump will not function until it has been filled with liquid between the foot valve
A * x
and somewhat above the impeller.
The liquid also serves as coolant for the shaft seal. In order to protect the shaft seal the
pump must not run dry.
11
ATTENTION
For safety reasons the pump is only allowed to operate against closed suction and discharge valves for a short
period (max. 5-10 minutes and at a max. temperature of 130°C). Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the
pump, and, at worst, of a steam explosion. If the pump room is unmanned, the installation of a safety device
is recommended.
9.1 STARTING
Before starting the pump check that:
- the shaft rotates freely without jarring sounds.

- the pump casing and the suction line are filled with liquid.
Start the pump for a moment to check the direction of rotation. If the direction is correct (i.e. in the direction
of the arrow) the pump may be started.
10. SYSTEM BALANCING
It is often difficult to calculate a manometric delivery head in advance. It is, however, decisively important to
the quantity of liquid delivered.
A considerably smaller delivery head than expected will increase the quantity of liquid delivered, causing
increased power consumption and perhaps cavitation in pump and piping. In the pump the impeller may
show signs of heavy erosion caused by cavitation (corrosion) which may at times, in a very short time, render
an impeller unfit for use. Not unusually do similar erosions occur in pipe bends and valves elsewhere in the
piping system.
Therefore, after start-up, it is necessary to check either the quantity of liquid delivered or the power
consumption of the pump, e.g. by measuring the current intensity of the connected motor. Together with a
reading of the differential pressure the quantity of water delivered can be determined against the
characteristics of the pump.
Should the pump not function as intended, please proceed according to the fault-finding list. Bear in mind,
though, that the pump was carefully checked and tested at the factory and that the majority of faults stem
from the piping system.
12
FAULT CAUSE REMEDY
The pump has no or 1. Wrong direction of Change direction of rota-

too low capacity rotation tion to clockwise when
viewed from shaft end (the
direction of the arrow)
2. Piping system choked Clean or replace
3. The pump is choked Clean the pump
4. Suction line leaks Find the leakage, repair
Pump takes air the fault, non-return valve
not submerged
5. Suction lift too high Check data sheet Q/H curve and
NPSH or contact DESMI
6. Pump and piping system As 5
wrongly dimensioned
The pump uses too 1. Counter-pressure too Insert orifice plate or
much power low check valve/Contact DESMI
2. The liquid is heavier Contact DESMI
than water
3. Foreign body in pump Dismantle the pump, remove
the cause
4. Electric motor is Check fuses, cable connection,
running on 2 phases and cable
The pump makes noise 1. Cavitation in pump Suction lift too high/ Suction
line wrongly dimensioned/-
liquid temperature too high
11. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Inspect the shaft seal for leaks at regular intervals.
Before inspection of a pump without guard check that the unit cannot be started unintentionally.
The system is to be without pressure and drained of liquid.
The repairman must be familiar with the type of liquid which has been pumped as well as with the
safety measures he is to take when handling the liquid.
11.1 DRAINING THE PUMP
When the piping system has been drained, be aware that there is still liquid left in the pump. Remove most of
the liquid by dismantling the pipe plug (AQ) at the bottom of the pump. Remove the remaining liquid by
tilting the pump casing (A) towards one of the flanges.
11.2 LUBRICATING BEARINGS
11.2.1 BEARINGS IN LIGHT BEARING HOUSING

The light bearing model can be recognised by the fact that there is no grease nipple in the bearing cover.
This type of bearings is used for medium-sized pumps with a max. number of rotation of 1800 rpm.
The bearings (R) of the light model are maintenance-free as the are closed and lift-time lubricated
(designation RS).
Do not clean the bearings in kerosene or other cleaning fluids.
13
11.2.2 BEARINGS IN HEAVY BEARING HOUSING
The heavy bearing model can be recognised by the fact that there is a grease nipple in the bearing cover.
This type of bearings is used for the minor models with a max. number of rotations of 3600 rpm and for the
big models at max. 1800 rpm.
The heavy bearings are angle contact ball bearings (T) with the designation "BG". These bearings have been
ground to such dimensions that they always fit together as a pair without the use of adjusting shims. The
bearings should always be replaced in sets.
When mounting the bearings take care that the bearings are placed correctly in relation to each other. The
bearings are to be arranged face-to-face, i.e. the_widesides_of the inner raceways are to face each other.
Lubricating procedure:
1. If the bearing has just been cleaned or if it is a new bearing, fill bearing completely. Further place a
grease bead on top of the bearing. Do not fill the hollow space on top of the bearing completely.
2. Use a recommended grease quality - see below table.
3. After lubrication the temperature will often rise. However, if the bearing has not been over-greased
the temperature will fall to normal in a few hours.
Lubricate the bearings at the following intervals:

Pump with 2-pole motor: 2500 hours (grease quantity 25 g)
Pump with 4-pole motor: 4500 hours (grease quantity 25 g)
If liquids with a temperature below 80°C are to be pumped the following types of grease are recommended:
ESSO Beacon 2
BP Energrease EP grease 2
Shell Alvania grease 2
Mobil Mobil lux grease EP 2 and Mobil plex 47
Castrol Spherol AP 2
Texaco MultifakEP2
Q8 Rembrandt EP 2 and Rubens
Statoil Statoil Uniway u2
For liquids above 80°C a high-temperature type of grease is recommended, e.g. SKF LGH Q3.
12. REPAIRS
12.1 ORDERING SPARE PARTS
When ordering spare parts please always state pump type and serial No. See the name plate of the pump and
the spare parts drawing with item numbers and designations. See assembly drawing.
14
13. OPERATING DATA
The powers indicated in the table below are the max. power consumption of the pump.
The following working pressures are allowed (pressure in piping system incl. the pressure rise given by the
pump):
Power
kW Power
Pressure 1450/1750/2950/ Pressure kW
Type bar 3500 Type bar 1450/1750
SL 70-215 16 1,9/3,2/16,5/28 SL-125-330 10 29/48
SL 70-265 16 4,0/7,4/33/48 SL-125-415 12 45/81
SL 80-215 10 3,3/6,0/27/47 SL-150-265 6,5 18,4/31
SL 80-265 16 5,9/10,1/43/79 SL-150-330 9 35/61
SL 80-330 16 11,2/19,6/79/124 SL-150-415 10 62/107
SL 100-215 14 5,5/9,6/48/83 SL-200-265 6 24/41
SL 100-265 14 10,5/17,5/74/119 SL-200-330 9 47/80
SL 100-330 11 18,4/31/-/- SL-200-415 10 75/147
SL 125-215 8 6,8/11,6/--/-- SL-250-330 6 78/135
SL-125-265 9 14,3/25/--/- SL-250-415 10 121/210
15
14. EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
DESMI, A/S De Smithske, hereby declare that our "in-line" pumps of the type SL Monobloc with bearing
are manufactured in conformity with the provisions of the COUNCIL DIRECTIVE of June 22, 1998, on
mutual approximation of the laws of the member states on the safety of machines (98/37/EEC with
subsequent amendments) with special reference to Annex I of the Directive on essential safety and health
requirements in relation to the construction and manufacture of machines.
The following harmonized standards have been used:
EN292 :
CE-marks are applied to pumps with prime movers only. Pumps with CE-mark and electric motor are
manufactured in conformity with the low-voltage directive.
Pumps delivered by us without prime movers may only be used when the prime mover and the connection
between prime mover and pump comply with the above directive as well as the low-voltage directive.
Nørresundby, March 8, 2001
Poul-Erik Mikkelstrup
R&D Manager
DESMI
A/S De Smithske
Tagholm 1
DK-9400 Nørresundby
16
15. ASSEMBY DRAWING (LIGHT BEARING HOUSING)
SPARE PARTS LIST

Pump casing
Rear cover
Impeller
Bearing cover
Shaft
Sealing ring
Distance ring
O-ring
Motor bracket
Coupling guard
Distance ring
Labyrinth ring
Ball bearing
Lock ring
Shaft seal
Nipple pipe piece
Screw cap
Reducing nipple
T-piece
Union
Key
Key/pointed screw
Set screw
Set screw
Set screw
BH-screw
Nut
Pointed screw
Pipe plug
Pipe plug
Copper pipe
Copper pipe
Manometer cock
Manometer
Coupling
Set screw
AQ AF A0 K C J
17
16. ASSEMBY DRAWING (HEAVY BEARING HOUSING)
SPARE PARTS LIST
A Pump casing
B Rear cover
C Impeller
D Bearing cover
E Shaft
J Sealing ring
K Distance ring
L O-ring
M Motor bracket
N Coupling guard
0 Distance ring
P Labyrinth ring
T Angular contact
bearing
U Lock ring
V Shaft seal
z Nipple pipe piece
AA Screw cap
AB Reducing nipple
AC T-piece
AD Union
AE Grease nipple
AF Key
AG Key/pointed screw
AH Set screw
AJ Set screw
AK Set screw
AM BH-screw
AO Nut
AP Pointed screw
AQ Pipe plug
AR Pipe plug
AS Copper pipe
AT Copper pipe
AU Manometer cock
AV Manometer
CA Coupling
MO Set screw
18
17. DIMENSIONAL SKETCH
SUGEFLANGE
SUCTIONFLANGE
Dn1
K1
D1
TRYKFLANGE
DELIVERYFLANGE
ML
K2
D2
See also table on following page:
Type Dn Dl Kl 11 Dn2 D2 K2 12 A B C D E
1
SL-70-215 80 200 160 4x18 70 185 145 4x18 500 250 20 140 426
SL 70-265 80 200 160 4x18 70 185 145 4x18 500 250 20 140 -
SL 80-215 100 220 180 8x18 80 200 160 4x18 500 250 20 160 -
SL 80-265 100 220 180 8x18 80 200 160 4x18 560 280 20 160 -
SL 80-330 100 220 180 8x18 80 200 160 4x18 630 315 20 160 -
SL 100-215 125 250 210 8x18 100 220 180 8x18 500 250 20 180 -
SL 100-265 125 250 210 8x18 100 220 180 8x18 560 280 20 180 -
SL 100-330 125 250 210 8x18 100 220 180 8x18 630 315 25 180 -
SL 125-215 150 285 240 8x22 125 250 210 8x18 560 280 25 200 -
SL 125-265 150 285 240 8x22 125 250 210 8x18 630 315 25 200 -
SL 125-330 150 285 240 8x22 125 250 210 8x18 710 355 25 200 458
SL 125-415 150 285 240 8x22 125 250 210 8x18 800 400 25 200 -
SL 150-265 200 340 295 8x22 150 285 240 8x22 710 355 25 225 455
SL 150-330 200 340 295 8x22 150 285 240 8x22 800 400 25 225 572
SL 150-415 200 340 295 8x22 150 285 240 8x22 900 450 25 225 567
SL 200-265 250 395 350 12x22 200 340 295 8x22 800 400 25 250 576
SL 200-330 250 395 350 12x22 200 340 295 8x22 900 450 25 250 -
SL 200-415 250 395 350 12x22 200 340 295 8x22 1000 500 30 250 639
SL 250-330 300 445 400 12x22 250 395 350 12x22 1000 500 30 280 617
SL 250-415 300 445 400 12x22 250 395 350 12x22 1120 560 30 280 -
19
Type F G H J L M N P Q R S
SL-70-215 476 195 43 70 65 70 85 345 95 180 40
SL 70-265 480 195 45 70 65 60 85 355 95 200 35
SL 80-215 476 195 33 55 50 55 65 350 100 195 30
SL 80-265 536 225 43 65 60 60 85 370 100. 210 35
SL 80-330 606 260 43 75 70 70 80 405 100 235 40
SL 100-215 476 195 43 65 60 70 90 390 110 215 40
_SLlQ0_-265__ __.53.6_. 225 43 65 60 70 90 410 110 235 40
SL 100-330 606 260 43 65 60 70 90 445 110 260 45
SL 125-215 536 225 43 70 65 75 90 440 125 245 40
SL 125-265 606 260 43 75 75 75 90 460 125 260 45
SL 125-330 686 295 48 75 75 75 90 480 125 280 45
SL 125-415 776 340 48 75 75 75 90 510 125 310 45
SL 150-265 686 300 43 70 65 75 90 515 145 290 50
SL 150-330 776 340 48 70 65 65 90 510 145 295 40
SL 150-415 876 390 4.8 70 65 65 90 530 145 315 40
SL 200-265 772 340 46 75 65 65 90 560 170 325 35
SL 200-330 872 390 46 75 65 65 90 565 170 330 35
SL 200-415 972 440 46 .75 65 65 90 590 170 355 35
SL 250-330 972 440 46 75 65 65 90 635 200 370 35
SL 250-415 1092 500 46 75 65 65 90 655 200 390 35
20
SPARE PARTS LIST
To be filled in by the manufacturer DKK To be filled in by the user
Item No. Qty. each Unit Part No. Designation / Material Price each Qty. Required Remarks
0001 1 PCS. 516651 PUMPEHUS NSL80-215/-K RG5 -
0003 1 PCS. 506962 PLUG RG3/8" MS58PB 30,00
0004 1 PCS. 506715 WEAR RING 0110X100X20 ALBZF60 423,00
0005 1 PCS. 513071/v/ 0 ßllh* IMPELLER NSL80-215 ALBZ. 3527,00
0006 1 Pcs. 704036 NUT M20 SIS2343 DIN934 49,00
0007 1 PCS. 704020 SPR.WASHER BM20 SIS2343 DIN127 12,00
0008 1 Pcs. 506706 DISTANCE RING 021X040X4SIS2343 -
0009 1 Pcs. 704022 KEY B 10X8X56 SIS2343 DS.96 56,00
0010 1 PCS. 708667 SHAFT SEAL MG1S20/38-G50-APVGG 694,00
0011 1 Pcs. 704019 V-RING 40S R NITRIL 46,00
0012 1 PCS. 703111 WASHER UK 50X2.0 DIN 983 20,00
0013 1 Pcs. 706804 BEARING 6310-2RS SKF/FAG 674,00
0014 1 PCS. 702424 SUPPORTING RING 50x62x3 38,00
0015 1 PCS. 510750 BEAR.COVER 5M F. MONOBLOC GG20 -
0016 4 PCS. 707766 ALLEN SCREW M12 X 25 A4 DIN912 -
0017 1 Pcs. 110306 SHAFT 5M F.MONOBLOC SIS2324 -
0018 1 PCS. 512911 REAR COVER NSL-D.-215 D02 RG5 -
0019 1 PCS. 110562 MONOBLOC COUPLING 160 GG20 042 -
0020 1 PCS. 510800 MOTORKONSOL B4 F.MONOBL GGG40
0021 1 PCS. 507139 O-RING 0219.30X5.70 SA80NITRIL 28,00
0022 8 Pcs. 703335 CH-SCRÈW M8X30 SIS2343. -
0028 2 Pcs. 110554 GUARD A3-B3-A4-B4 ST37.2 -
J)058 . 0,3 PCS. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. -
0059 2 PCS. 709619 SECUREX 1/4"X8 -
0070 8 Pcs. 704016 ALLEN SCR. M8X20 ST.8.8 DIN912 2,00
0071 2 PCS. 704033 WASHER AM16 SIS2343 DIN125 10,00
0071 4 PCS. 704279 SET SCREW M16X35 ST.8.8 DIN558 -
0072 1 PCS. 110533 INTERMEDIATE PC.160/180 ST37.2 -
0073 1 PCS. 700416 POINTED SCREW M8X12 45H DIN916 2,00
0075 8 Pcs. 706717 BH-SCREW M5 X 8 M. FL. ST10.9 -
0076 1 PCS. 706809 KEY B 10X8X50 ST60.11 -
A/S De Smithske Assembly 25
Tagolm 1 Pump Identification Type and Size drawing No. DKK
DK-9400 Nørresundby 1020701 (PKMp
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 673185 NSL80-215/D02-K-P 410119 CAD R 673185
13-06-02 Pagei
SPARE PARTS LIST
To be filled in by the manufacturer DKK To be filled in by the user
0081 1 PCS. 704187 DOWTY SELON RG3/8 NYLON 6 7,00
0091 2 PCS. 709567 RED.MUFFE 1/4"X1/2" MESS. -
0093 4 PCS. 708070 SET SCREW M20X45 ST8.8 -
0094 1 PCS. 105078 BASE PLATE NSL, -265 GG20 -
009.5 4 PCS. 708069 NORD-LOCK LÅSESKIVE M20 -
0096 1 Pcs. 709621 MANOMETER -1 - +5 BAR 11T 860,00
0096 1 PCS. 709623 MANOMETER 0 - +10 BAR 1/2" -
0097 2 Pcs. 709570 NIPPEL STILBAR 08-1/4" MESS. -
0098 2 Pcs. 709571 VINKELNIP.STILBAR F.08R0R MESS -
0102 2 Pcs. 709619 SECUREX 1/4"X8 -
0103 2 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110.
0104 6 Pcs. 702521 PIPE HOLDER NAP 108 POLYAMID 6 18,00
0105 12 PCS. 705499 ALLEN SCREW M6X25 A4 DIN912 -
0106 2 PCS. 709569 REG.VENTIL F.08 RØR MESS. -
0107 1 PCS. 704391 PLUG BSP 1/2" SIS2343
0109 6 PCS. 702602 WASHER M5 SIS2343 1,00
0109 6 Pcs. 704378 CX ALLEN SCREW M5X16 SIS2343 -
0109 6 PCS. 704382 NUTM5 SIS2332 3,00
0109 6 PCS. 704388 LOCK WASHER M5 AKULON 2,00
0110 1 Pcs. 103961 MAN.PANEL D-30/IEC300 -
0999 1 PCS. 704047 STICKY ARROW LABEL. -
0999 1 Pcs. 704048 DESMI TRANSFERS LABELS. BLACK -
9999 1 Pcs. 103905 SUCTION-SKILT MS58 •
9999 1 PCS. 103906 DISCHÄRGE-SKILT MS58 -
9999 4 PCS. 702578 BLIND/POPNITTE 03,2X6 RUSTFRI 3,00

9999 1 Pcs. 709541 NAMEPLATE WITHOUT CE-MARK -
A/S De Smithske Assembly 25

Tagolm 1 Pump Identification Type and Size drawing No. DKK
DK-9400 Nørresundby 1020701 (DKMI)
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 673185 NSL80-215/D02-K-P 410119 CAD R 673185
13-06-02 Page 2
SPARE PARTS LIST
To be filled in by the manufacturer To be filled in by the user
0001 1 Pcs. 516631 PUMPEHUS NSL80-265/-K RG5 0,00
0003 1 Pcs. 506962 PLUG RG3/8" MS58PB 0,00
0004 1 Pcs. 506715 WEAR RING 0110X100X20 ALBZF60 0,00
0005 1 PCS. 513241 IMPELLER NSL80-265 ALBZ. 0,00
0006 1 PCS. 704036 NUT M20 SIS2343 DIN934 0,00
0007 1 Pcs. 704020 SPR.WASHER BM20 SIS2343 DIN127 0,00
0008 1 Pcs. 506706 DISTANCE RING 021X040X4SIS2343 0,00
0009 1 Pcs. 704022 KEY B 10X8X56 SIS2343 DS.96 0,00
0011 1 PCS. 704019 V-RING 40S R NITRIL 0,00
0012 1 Pcs. 703111 WASHER UK 50X2.0 DIN 983 0,00
0013 1 Pcs. 706804 BEARING 6310-2RS SKF/FAG 0,00
0014 1 PCS. 702424 SUPPORTING RING 50x62x3 0,00
0015 1 PCS. 510750 BEAR.COVER 5M F. MONOBLOC GG20 0,00
0016 4 Pcs. 707766 ALLEN SCREW M12 X 25 A4 DIN912 0,00
0017 1 Pcs. 110306 SHAFT 5M F.MONOBLOC SIS2324 0,00
0018 1 Pcs. 513121 REAR COVER NSL-D.-265 D02 RG5 0,00
0019 1 PCS. 110564 MONOBLOC COUPLING 200/225 GG20 0,00
0020 1 PCS. 510820 MOTORKONSOL B5 F.MONOBL. GGG40 0,00
0021 1 PCS. 706401 O-RING 0269.30X5.70 NITRIL 0,00
0022 8 PCS. 706761 ALLEN SCREW M12 X 40 A4 DIN912 0,00
0028 2 Pcs. 110557 GUARD F.B5 MONOBL.CONST.ST37.2 0,00
0058 0,3 PCS. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
0059 2 PCS. 709619 FORSKR.LIGE 1/4"X8 MESS. 0,00
0071 4 PCS. 700323 SET SCREW M16X30 ST.3.6 DIN558 0,00
0071 ' 2 PCS. 704033 WASHER AM16 SIS2343 DIN125 0,00
0072 1 Pcs. 110534 NTERMEDIATE PIECE 200 ST37.2 0,00
0073 1 Pcs. 703207 POINTED SCREW M 8X20 45H 0,00
0075 8 Pcs. 706717 BH-SCREW M5 X 8 M. FL ST10.9 0,00
0076 1 Pcs. 706809 KEY B 10X8X50 ST60.11 0,00
A/S De Smithske Assembly
Tagolm 1 Pump Identification Type and Size drawing No.
DK-9400 Nørresundby 0 (DÉSWJ)
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 673175 NSL80-265/D02-K-P 410119 CAD R673175
27-02-01 Page 1
SPARE PARTS LIST
0081 1 Pcs. 704187 DOWTY SELON RG3/8 NYLON 6 0,00
0091 2 Pcs. 709567 RED.MUFFE 1/4"X1/2" MESS. 0,00
0093 4 Pcs. 708070 SET SCREW M20X45 ST8.8 0,00
0094 1 Pcs. 105078 BASE PLATE NSL, -265 GG20 0,00
0095 4 Pcs. 708069 NORD-LOCK LÄSESKIVE M20 0,00
0096 1 Pcs. 709621 MANOMETER -1 - +5 BAR 1/2" 0,00
0096 1 Pcs. 709624 MANOMETER 0-+16 BAR 1/2" 0,00
0097 2 Pcs. 709570 NIPPEL STILBAR 08-1/4" MESS. 0,00
0098 2 Pcs. 709571 VINKELNIP.STILBAR F.08R0R MESS 0,00
0102 2 Pcs. 709619 FORSKR.LIGE 1/4"X8 MESS. 0,00
0103 2 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
0105 12 Pcs. 705499 ALLEN SCREW M6X25 A4 DIN912 0,00
0106 2 Pcs. 709569 REG.VENTIL F.08 RØR MESS. 0,00
0107 1 Pcs. 704391 PLUG BSP 1/2" SIS2343 0,00
0109 6 Pcs. 702602 WASHER M5 SIS2343 0,00
0109 6 Pcs. 704378 ALLEN SCREW M5X16 S1S2343 0,00
0109 6 Pcs. 704382 NUTM5 SIS2332 0,00
0109 6 Pcs. 704388 LOCK WASHER M5 AKULON 0,00
0110 1 Pcs. 103960 M AN. PAN EL B-30/IEC350 0,00
0999 1 Pcs. 704047 STICKY ARROW LABEL. 0,00
0999 1 Pcs. 704048 DESMI TRANSFERS LABELS BLACK 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 103905 SUCTION-SKILT MS58 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 103906 DISCHARGE-SKILT MS58 0,00
9999 4 Pcs. 702578 BLIND/POPNITTE 03,2X6 RUSTFRI 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 709541 NAMEPLATE WITHOUT CE-MARK 0,00

DK-9400 Nørresundby 0 (DRWÎ)
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 673175 NSL80-265/D02-K-P 410119 CAD R673175
27-02-01 Page 2
PLACERING AF KLEMKASSE MANOMETERPANELER ETC.
225 X
! 1
PIACERES UI1ES1 UULIG
PÀ lUDClEIER^
270-1 L
AK?it '
:<45-
|
~ r o-
Manometer Serv ice

Styk 1 i s t e Pumpe Item No. Klemkos se Panel Åbning
673175 NSL80-265 05,14.02.001 90- 0' 0V180*
673185 NSL80-215 05.23.04.001 180- 270' 0V180'
SAMLINGSTEGNING
NSL-D-215/265 -02
41 0 1 19c
A / S Os Smithske
SPARE PARTS LIST
A 1 PCS. 500750 PUMPEHUS SL 250-330 SPEC. RG5 0,00
B 1 PCS. 504571 REAR COVER SL RG5 0,00
C 1 Pcs. 502461 IMPELLER SL250-330 ALBZ F60 0,00
D 1 PCS. 105720 LEJEDÆKSEL SVÆR SL-MONO GG20 0,00
E 1 Pcs. 105721 AKSEL SVÆR F.SL-MONO SIS2343 0,00
J 1 Pcs. 507192 SEAL RING ALBZF60 0,00
K 1 Pcs. 506704 DISTANCE RING SL SIS2343 0,00
L 1 Pcs. 706779 O-RING 0335.00X6.00 NITRIL 0,00
M 1 Pcs. 105773 MONOBLOKKONSOL TIL SL-D-330 0,00
N 2 PCS. 105725 SKÆRM TIL SL-D-330 MONOBLOK 0,00
0 1 PCS. 702487 STØTTESKIVE SS 65X85X3,5 ST 0,00
P 1 Pcs. 506751 LABYRINTH RING 0,00
T 2 Pcs. 700952 BEARING 7313-BG. 0,00
U 1 Pcs. 704276 LOCK WASHER UK 65X2,5 HÆ.FJ.ST 0,00
V 1 PCS. 706785 SHAFT SEAL MG1S20/55-G50-APVGG 0,00
AD 1 PCS. 709619 FORSKR.LIGE 1/4"X8 MESS. 0,00
AD 1 Pcs. 709620 FORSKR.VINKEL 1/4"X8 MESS. 0,00
AE 1 PCS. 704268 HYDR.NIPPLE 1/8RG HZ1 0,00
AF 1 PCS. 704278 SUNK KEY14X9X105 SIS2332 DS.96 0,00
AG 1 PCS. 700416 POINTED SCREW M8X12 45H DIN916 0,00
AG 1 PCS. 708867 FEDERA 18X11X63 ST.61.11 0,00
AH 8 Pcs. 705750 SET SCREW M12X 40 A4 DIN933 0,00
AHOO 8 Pcs. 704067 WASHER AM12/DIN125-AISI316 0,00
AJ 8 PCS. 704037 NUT M16/DIN934-AISI316 0,00
AJ 8 Pcs. 708383 SET SCREW M16X35 SIS2343 0,00
AK 4 Pcs. 700317 SET SCREWM12X30 ST.3.6 DIN558 0,00
AM • 8 Pcs. 706717 BH-SCREW M5 X 8 M. FL ST10.9 0,00
AN 6 PCS. 704041 RIVET 02,3X4 ALU. 0,00
AN 4 Pcs. 704041 RIVET 02,3X4 ALU. 0,00
AO 2 PCS. 704036 NUT M20 SIS2343 DIN934 0,00
AP 1 Pcs. 704265 POINTED SCREW M5 X 12 SIS2332 0,00
DK-9400 Nørresundby 0 (DBWl)
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 654644 SL 250-330/D-G2-K-P 405250 CAD R 654644
27-02-01 Page 1
SPARE PARTS LIST
AQ 1 Pcs. 506962 PLUG RG3/8" MS58PB 0,00
AQ 1 Pcs. 704187 DOWTY SELON RG3/8 NYLON 6 0,00
AR 1 Pcs. 506963 PLUG RG1/2" MS58PB 0,00
AR 1 PCS. 704188 1/2" DOWTY SELON RG1/2 NYLON 6 0,00
AS . 0,5 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
AY 1 PCS. 101422 NAME PLATE NO. 19 SL ALU. 0,5 0,00
BE 1 PCS. 709565 TEE M. MUFFE 8-1/4-8 MESS. 0,00
BF 1 Pcs. 704390 PLUG WRC/DIN909-AISI316 0,00
CB 1 Pcs. 105772 PUMPE/MOTORNAV TIL 225-6 ST50 0,00
MO 2 Pcs.. 704033 WASHER AM16 SIS2343 DIN125 0,00
MO 8 Pcs. 704309 SET SCREWM16X40 ST.8.8 DIN558 0,00
0001 1 Pcs. 507425 FLANGE 0495/340X20 ST. 0,00
0002 1 Pcs. 105724 SVØB TIL SL-D-330 MONOBLOK 0,00
0003 2 Pcs. 506892 MANOMETERPLADE 8X40X80 ST.37 0,00
0004 1 Pcs. 506905 FLANGE 0495/395X20 ST. 0,00
0091 2 PCS. 709567 RED.MUFFE 1/4"X1/2" MESS. 0,00
0096 1 Pcs. 709622 MANOMETER 0 - +6 BAR 1/2" 0,00
0097 .2 PCS. 709570 NIPPEL STILBAR 08-1/4" MESS. 0,00
0098 2 PCS. 709571 VINKELNIP.STILBAR F.08R0R MESS 0,00
0103 2 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
0106 2 PCS. 709569 REG.VENTIL F.08 RØR MESS. 0,00
0109 6 Pcs. 702602 WASHER M5 SIS2343 . 0,00
0109 - 6 Pcs. 704378 ALLEN SCREW M5X16 SIS2343 0,00
0109 6 PCS. 704382 NUT M5 SIS2332 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 103905 SUCTION-SKI LT MS58 0,00
DK-9400 Nørresundby 0 (DBWJ)
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 654644 SL 250-330/D-G2-K-P 405250 CAD R 654644
27-02-01 Page 2
SPARE PARTS LIST
9999 1 PCS. 103962 MAN. PAN EL F-30/IEC400 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 654375 MONOBLOK SL-D-330 IEC400 D60 0,00

E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 654644 SL 250-330/D-G2-K-P 405250 CAD
0
R 709565
(DÉSWÎ)
27-02-01 Page 3
TEE for u d l u f ttnniin ng g, , a n b r i n g e s på h e j s t e s t e d
U D F Ø R E S K U N P,•k -•*-••
65J64
PLACERING AF KLEMKASSE. MANOMETERPANELER ETC

SPARE PARTS LIST
..11 1 Pcs. 704307 REDUCING SOCKET 3/8X1/4 BSP ME 0,00
..13 1 Pcs. 708104 ANGLEUNION 3/4 I/U. 0,00
PC 6 Pcs. 702602 WASHER M5 SIS2343 0,00
PC 2 Pcs. 704375 SCREW M10X20/DIN933-AISI316 0,00
0000 1 Pcs. 654113 SHAFT W. IMPELLER C ALBZ. 0,00
0001 1 Pcs. 508172 FLANGE 0665/445X30 0,00
0002 1 Pcs. 105032 SVØB FOR KONSOL DSL300-320 ST. 0,00
0004 1 PCS. 508173 FLANGE 0665/415X30 0,00
1021 1 PCS. 500540 PUMPEHUS DSL 300-320 RG5 E 0,00
1301 1 PCS. 503440 BAGDÆKSEL DSL 300-320 RG5 G 0,00
2101 1 PCS. 105046 SHAFT DSL300-320 SIS 2343 A 0,00
2341 1 Pcs. 503731 IMPELLER DSL300-320C ALBZ *• 0,00
3211 1 PCS. 700949 BEARING 6311-2RS. 0,00
3411 1 PCS. 100187 KONSOL-KOMPACT DSL300-320 0,00
3601 1 Pcs. 103858 BEARING COVER - TOP 0,00
3611 1 Pcs. 505782 ENDEDÆKSEL RG5 0,00
3821 1 PCS. 508331 BEARING HOUSING TOP DSL300 RG5 0,00
3822 1 PCS. 654671 LEJEKONSOL M. FORING DSL300 0,00
4001 1 PCS. 506696 GASKET UNILION 0160.5/218x0.4 0,00
4002 1 Pcs. 506697 GASKET UNILION 0355/418x0.4 0,00
4003 1 Pcs. 103899 GASKET UNILION 0100.5/148x0.4 0,00
4021 1 Pcs. 704189 SEALING WASHER BSP3/4 NYLON 6 0,00
4022 1 Pcs. 704186 DOWTY SELON RG1/4 NYLON 6 0,00
4121 2 Pcs. 705276 O-RING RM3393-57 NITRIL 0,00
4123 1 Pcs. 706775 O-RING 0154.5X3 NITRIL 0,00
4125 • 1 PCS. 707189 O-RING 0101.20X3.53 NITRIL 0,00
4331 1 PCS. 709711 SHAFTSEAL MG1S20/60-G50AVPGGE1 0,00
5021 2 Pcs. 507192 SEALRING ALBZF60 0,00
5051 2 PCS. 704267 SHOULDER RING SS55X68X3 0,00
5241 1 PCS. 105637 SHAFT LINING DSL300 SNBZ-5465A 0,00
DK-9400 Nørresundby 0 (DBMl)
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 654670 DSL 300-320/D-F-P IMP.C 405287 CAD R 654670
27-02-01 Pagei
SPARE PARTS LIST
5601 2 Pcs. 706975 PIN 05X12 DIN1481 S.S. 0,00
5981 1 Pcs. 105611 SKÆRM FOR DSL KOMPACT ST.37 0,00
6912 1 PCS. 709622 MANOMETER 0 - +6 BAR 1/2" 0,00
6991 1 PCS. 103963 MAN.PANEL B-30/IEC500 0,00
7001 0,24 PCS. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
7001 2 PCS. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
7002 2 Pcs. 706432 STAINL.STEEL PIPE 08.1X1.0 WEL 0,00
7302 1 Pcs. 704275 HEXAGON NIPPLE 90GR 1/4 BSP ME 0,00
7302 2 Pcs. 709571 VINKELNIP.STILBAR F.08R0R MESS . 0,00
7303 1 PCS. 706996 VINKELNIP.M/OML1"X22 MESS. 0,00
7303 3 PCS. 708438 COUPLING GER 8 1/4" AISI316 0,00
7303 1 PCS. 709634 FORSKR. TEE F. 8MM RØR MESS. 0,00
7304 1 Pcs. 701702 SECUREX 3/4" STR. 0,00
7304 1 PCS. 708437 ANGULSCREW.CONN.WER 8 1/4"316 0,00
7314 1 PCS. 708347 MUFFETE 1/4"RG AISI316 0,00
7315 1 Pcs. 704387 HEXAGON NIPPEL 1/4"RG SIS2343 0,00
7317 1 Pcs. 706962 NIPPLE PIPE 1/4" X 100 0,00
7318 1 Pcs. 705383 SOCKET 1/4" 0,00
7321 6 PCS. 702521 PIPE HOLDER NAP 108 POLYAMID 6 0,00
7322 1 Pcs. 708663 PIPE HOLDER RSGU 1.08/12-W5 0,00
8611 • 1 Pcs. 505072 COVPLING HUB SKB80 GG20/ST 0,00
8612 1 PCS. 102104 KOBLINGSNAV(KOMPAKT)DSL300-320 0,00
8671 6 Pcs. 105656 KOBLINGSB0SN. 030/12X40 MN60 0,00
9011 8 PCS. 704309 SET SCREWM16X40 ST.8.8 DIN558 0,00
DK-9400 Nørresundby 0 (DBWÎ)
27-02-01 Page 2
SPARE PARTS LIST
9012 6 Pcs. 704378 ALLEN SCREW M5X16 SIS2343 0,00
9021 8 Pcs. 700232 STUD M20X50 SIS2343 0,00
9022 8 Pcs. 700230 STUDM16X45SIS2343 0,00
9023 4 Pcs. 700218 STUD M10X25 SIS2343 0,00
9023 2 Pcs. 706913 NUTM10 0,00
9024 4 Pcs. 700224 STUDM12X30SIS2343 0,00
. 9031 1 Pcs. 506961 PLUG RG1/4" MS58PB 0,00
9041 2 PCS. 700371 POINTED SCREW M10X16 45H D916 0,00
9043 1 Pcs. 706559 POINTED SCREW M8X10 SIS2343 0,00
9043 1 Pcs. 706559 POINTED SCREW M8X10 SIS2343 0,00
9044 0,006 Pcs. 707443 PLUG 06 PA 6 0,00
9044 0,006 PCS. 707443 PLUG 0 6 PA 6 0,00
9121 1 Pcs. 506964 PLUG RG 3/4" MS58PB 0,00
9141 6 PCS. 703732 CH-SCREW M8X25 SIS2343 0,00
9145 6 PCS. 701075 BOLT M12X60 LOC-WEL ST.8.8 0,00
9146 4 Pcs. 701072 ALLEN SCREW LOC-WEL ST.8.8 0,00
9147 2 Pcs. 700352 ALLEN SCREW M6X25 ST8.8 D912 0,00
9149 2 PCS. 702351 ALLEN SCREW M10X35 ST.8.8 0,00
9149 1 Pcs. 703339 SCREW M6X16/DIN912-AISI316 0,00
9201 8 Pcs. 704036 NUT M20 SIS2343 DIN934 0,00
9202 4 PCS. 704012 NUTM10/DIN934-AISI316 0,00
9203 8 Pcs. 704037 NUTM16/DIN934-AISI316 0,00
9204 4 Pcs. 704063 NUT M12/DIN934-AISI316 0,00
9204 6 Pcs. 704382 NUT M5 SIS2332 0,00
9221 1 Pcs. 507070 NUT DGVAZ 300 C RG5 0,00
9222 ~ 1 Pcs. 103907 NUT F. SHAFTM40X1.5 ALBZ 0,00
9301 4 Pcs. 704067 WASHER AM12/DIN125-AISI316 0,00
9302 8 Pcs. 704033 WASHER AM16 SIS2343 DIN125 0,00
A/S De Smithske Assembly ®
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 654670 DSL 300-320/D-F-P IMP.C 405287 CAD
0
R 704286
(DKWI)
27-02-01 Page 3
SPARE PARTS LIST
9311 2 PCS. 701216 SPRING WASHER ST.5 DIN127 0,00
9311 6 PCS. 702602 WASHER M5 SIS2343 0,00
9321 1 PCS. 701127 CIRCLIP U55 DIN 471 0,00
9402 1 PCS. 700048 SUNK KEY A 14X9X80 ST.60.11 0,00
9403 2 Pcs. 705279 KEY A 16X10X63 1.4571 0,00
9404 1 PCS. 700012 SUNK KEY A 5X5X20 SIS2332 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 101423 DESMI NAME PLATE BLACK/ALU. 0,00
9999 2 PCS. 103869 PROP DSL 300-320 0,00
9999 1 PCS. 103870 STØBESPECIFIKATION 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 103870 STØBESPECIFIKATION 0,00
9999 1 PCS. 103905 SUCTION-SKILT MS58 0,00
9999 1 PCS. 103906 DISCHARGE-SKILT MS58 0,00
9999 1 PCS. 103971 LEJEFORING DSL300 CUPB10SN 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 503662 LEJEKONSOL BUND RG5 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 653859 MOTORKONSOL DSL300-320 IEC 500 0,00
9999 6 Pcs. 700135 COUPLING BUSH 030/12X40 1MN60 0,00

0
R 703732
(DBMÏ)
27-02-01 Page 4
PLACERING AF KUMKASSE. MANOMEIERPANEIEK E1C
OBS: KLEMKASSENS TERMINALER SKAL PEGE MOD SUGESIDE!

SPARE PARTS LIST
..12 1 Pcs. 707361 ANGLE 90 DEG. 3/4" RG 0,00
..13 1 Pcs. 708104 ANGLEUNION 3/4 I/U. 0,00
PC 6 PCS. 702602 WASHER M5 SIS2343 0,00
PC 2 PCS. 704375 SCREW M10X20/DIN933-AISI316 0,00
0000 1 PCS. 654113 SHAFT W. IMPELLER C ALBZ. 0,00
0001 1 PCS. 508172 FLANGE 0665/445X30 0,00
0002 1 PCS. 105032 SVØB FOR KONSOL DSL300-320 ST. 0,00
0004 1 •Pcs. 508173 FLANGE 0665/415X30 0,00
1021 1 PCS. 500540 PUMPEHUS DSL 300-320 RG5 E 0,00
1301 1 Pcs. 503440 BAGDÆKSEL DSL 300-320 RG5 G 0,00
2101 1 Pcs. 105046 SHAFT DSL300-320 SIS 2343 A 0,00
2341 1 Pcs. 503731 IMPELLER DSL300-320C ALBZ 0,00
3211 1 Pcs. 700949 BEARING 6311-2RS. 0,00
3411 1 Pcs. 100187 KONSOL-KOMPACT DSL300-320 0,00
3601 1 Pcs. 103858 BEARING COVER-TOP 0,00
3611 1 Pcs. 505782 ENDEDÆKSEL RG5 0,00
3821 1 Pcs. 508331 BEARING HOUSING TOP DSL300 RG5 0,00
3822 1 Pcs. 654671 LEJEKONSOL M. FORING DSL300 0,00
4001 1 Pcs. 506696 GASKET UNILION 0160.5/218x0.4 0,00
4002 1 Pcs. 506697 GASKET UNILION 0355/418x0.4 0,00
4003 1 PCS. 103899 GASKET UNILION 0100.5/148x0.4 0,00
4021 1 Pcs. 704189 SEALING WASHER BSP3/4 NYLON 6 0,00
4022 1 PCS. 704186 DOWTY SELON RG 1/4 NYLON 6 0,00
4121 2 PCS. 705276 O-RING RM3393-57 NITRIL 0,00
4123 1 PCS. 706775 O-RING 0154.5X3 NITRIL 0,00
4125 - 1 Pcs. 707189 O-RING 0101.20X3.53 NITRIL 0,00
4331 1 Pcs. 709711 SHAFTSEAL MG1S20/60-G50AVPGGE1 0,00
5021 2 PCS. 507192 SEAL.RING ALBZF60 0,00
5051 2 Pcs. 704267 SHOULDER RING SS55X68X3 0,00
5241 1 Pcs. 105637 SHAFT LINING DSL300 SNBZ-5465A 0,00
27-02-01 Page 1
SPARE PARTS LIST
5601 2 Pcs. 706975 PIN 05X12 DIN1481 S.S. 0,00
5981 1 Pcs. 105611 SKÆRM FOR DSL KOMPACT ST.37 0,00
6991 1 Pcs. 103963 MAN.PANEL B-30/IEC500 0,00
7001 2 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
7002 2 PCS. 706432 STAINLSTEEL PIPE 08.1X1.0 WEL 0,00
• 7303 3 Pcs. 708438 COUPLING GER 8 1/4" AISI316 0,00
7304 1 Pcs. 708437 ANGULSCREW.CONN.WER 8 1/4"316 0,00
7314 1 PCS. 708347 MUFFETE 1/4"RG AISI316 0,00
7315 1 Pcs. 704387 HEXAGON NIPPEL 1/4"RG SIS2343 0,00
7317 1 Pcs. 706962 NIPPLE PIPE 1/4" X 100 0,00
7318 1 Pcs. 705383 SOCKET 1/4" 0,00
7319 1 *Pcs. 707365 PIPE ADAPTER 3/4"X300 STAINL. 0,00
7322 1 Pcs. 708663 PIPE HOLDER RSGU 1.08/12-W5 0,00
7411 1 Pcs. 703668 BALL COCK 3/4" INT. THREAD 0,00
8611 1 Pcs. 505072 COVPLING HUB SKB80 GG20/ST 0,00
8612 1 Pcs. 102104 KOBLINGSNAV(KOMPAKT)DSL300-320 0,00
8671 6 Pcs. 105656 KOBLINGSB0SN. 030/12X40 MN60 0,00
9011 • 8 PCS. 704309 SET SCREWM16X40 ST.8.8 DIN558 0,00
9012 6 PCS. 704378 ALLEN SCREW M5X16 SIS2343 0,00
9021 8 PCS. 700232 STUD M20X50 SIS2343 0,00
9022 8 PCS. 700230 STUDM16X45SIS2343 0,00
9023 4 PCS. 700218 STUD M10X25 SIS2343 0,00
A/S De Smithske Assembly «•

DK-9400 Nørresundby 0 (DÉSWI)
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 654670 DSL 300-320/D-F-P IM P. C 405287 CAD R 654670
27-02-01 Page 2
SPARE PARTS LIST
9024 4 PCS. 700224 STUD M12X30 SIS2343 0,00
9031 1 PCS. 506961 PLUG RG1/4" MS58PB 0,00
9041 2 PCS. 700371 POINTED SCREW M10X16 45H D916 0,00
9043 1 PCS. 706559 POINTED SCREW M8X10 SIS2343 0,00
9043 1 PCS. 706559 POINTED SCREW M8X10 SIS2343 0,00
9044 0,006 Pcs. 707443 PLUG 0 6 PA 6 0,00
9044 0,006 PCS. 707443 PLUG 0 6 PA 6 0,00
9121 1 PCS. 506964 PLUG RG 3/4" MS58PB 0,00
9142 4 Pcs. 703732 CH-SCREW M8X25 SIS2343 0,00
9145 6 PCS. 701075 BOLT M12X60LOC-WELST.8.8 0,00
9146 4 PCS. 701072 ALLEN SCREW LOC-WEL ST.8.8 0,00
9147 12 PCS. 705499 ALLEN SCREW M6X25 A4 DIN912 0,00
9149 1 Pcs. 703339 SCREW M6X16/DIN912-AISI316 0,00
9201 8 PCS. 704036 NUT M20 SIS2343 DIN934 0,00
9202 4 PCS. 704012 NUTM10/DIN934-AISI316 0,00
9203 8 PCS. 704037 NUTM16/D1N934-AISI316 0,00
9204 4 Pcs. 704063 NUT M12/DIN934-AISI316 0,00
9204 6 Pcs. 704382 NUT M5 SIS2332 0,00
9221 1 Pcs. 507070 NUT DGVAZ 300 C RG5 0,00
9222 1 Pcs. 103907 NUT F. SHAFTM40X1.5 ALBZ 0,00
9311 6 PCS. 702602 WASHER M5 SIS2343 0,00
9311 ' 6 Pcs. 704388 LOCK WASHER M5 AKULON 0,00
9321 1 Pcs. 701127 CIRCLIP U55 DIN 471 0,00
9402 1 Pcs. 700048 SUNK KEY A 14X9X80 ST.60.11 0,00
9403 2 PCS. 705279 KEY A 16X10X63 1.4571 0,00
0
R 706432
(DBWÎ)
27-02-01 Page 3
SPARE PARTS LIST
9404 1 Pcs. 700012 SUNK KEY A 5X5X20 SIS2332 0,00
9999 1 PCS. 101423 DESMI NAME PLATE BLACK/ALU. 0,00
9999 2 Pcs. 103869 PROP DSL 300-320 0,00
9999 1 PCS. 103905 SUCTION-SKI LT MS58 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 103971 LEJEFORING DSL300 CUPB10SN 0,00
9999 1 PCS. 503662 LEJEKONSOL BUND RG5 0,00
9999 1 PCS. 653859 MOTORKONSOL DSL300-320 IEC 500 0,00
9999 6 Pcs. 700135 COUPLING BUSH 030/12X40 1MN60 0,00

0
R 703339
(DKWÎ)
27-02-01 Page 4
SPARE PARTS LIST
0000 0,1 Pcs. 704015 BALL BEARING GREASE 0,00
0001 1 Pcs. 511590 PUMPEHUS NSL250-330 RG5 0,00
0003 2 PCS. 506964 PLUG RG 3/4" MS58PB 0,00
0004 1 Pcs. 511641 TÆTNINGSRING NSL250-D ALBZ 0,00
0005 1 Pcs. 511631 LØBEHJUL NSL250-330 ALBZ 0,00
0006 1 Pcs. 703358 SET SCREW M20 X 45 A4 DIN933 0,00
0008 1 Pcs. 506704 DISTANCE RING SL SIS2343 0,00
0009 1 Pcs. 709603 KEY AB 14X9X90 SIS2343 0,00
0011 1 Pcs. 705173 V-RING 55SNITRIL 0,00
0012 1 PCS. 704276 LOCK WASHER UK 65X2,5 HÆ.FJ.ST 0,00
0013 2 Pcs. 700952 BEARING 7313-BG. 0,00
0014 1 PCS. 506841 GREASE VALVE RING 0,00
0015 1 PCS. 110198 BEARING COVER NSL GRP. 2 GG20 0,00
0016 4 PCS. 704371 CH-SCREWM12X30 SIS2343 0,00
0017 1 PCS. 110199 SHAFT NSL -02 GRP. 2 1.4460 0,00
0018 1 Pcs. 513981 REAR COVER NSL150-250-330 RG5 V 0,00
0019 1 PCS. 110850 KOBLING 250 NSL -02 GRP.2+3 0,00
0020 1 PCS. 513770 MOTORKONSOL NSL/330/-02 GGG40 0,00
0021 1 Pcs. 706779 O-RING 0335.00X6.00 NITRIL 0,00
0022 12 PCS. 705750 SET SCREW M12X 40 A4 DIN933 0,00
0026 1 PCS. 110841 COVER U.BEARING NSL GRP.2 GG20 0,00
0027 1 Pcs. 511641 TÆTNINGSRING NSL250-D ALBZ 0,00
0028 2 Pcs. 110557 GUARD F.B5 MONOBL.CONST.ST37.2 0,00
0058 •0.5 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
0059 1 PCS. 709620 FORSKR.VINKEL 1/4"X8 MESS. 0,00
0061 1 Pcs. 704275 HEXAGON NIPPLE 90GR 1/4 BSP ME 0,00
0064 4 Pcs. 704279 SET SCREW M16X35 ST.8.8 DIN558 0,00
A/S De Smithske Assembly ©

DK-9400 Nørresundby 0 (DRWÎ)
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 673805 NSL250-330/D02-P 419475 CAD R 673805
27-02-01 Pagei
SPARE PARTS LIST
Item No. Qty. each Unit Part No. Designation / Material Price each Qty, Required Remarks
0071 8 Pcs. 704309 SET SCREWM16X40 ST.8.8 DIN558 0,00
0072 1 PCS. 110536 MELLEMFLANGE 250/280 ST37.2 0,00
0073 1 PCS. 702001 POINTED SCREW M10X12 DIN 916 0,00
0075 8 PCS. 706717 BH-SCREW M5 X 8 M. FL ST10.9 0,00
0076 1 Pcs. 700923 FEDER A 16X1 OX 70 ST60.11 0,00
0081 2 PCS. 704189 SEALING WASHER BSP3/4 NYLON 6 0,00
0084 1 Pcs. 704268 HYDR.NIPPLE 1/8RG HZ1 0,00
0086 2 Pcs. 708178 POINTED SCREW M16X25 A4 DIN916 0,00
0093 4 PCS. 705160 SÆTSKRUE M24X 50 ST8.8 FZB 0,00
0094 1 Pcs. 110843 FODPLADE NSL-330/415 GG20 0,00
0095 4 Pcs. 709618 NORD-LOCK LÅSESKIVE M24 0,00
0096 1 PCS. 709621 MANOMETER-1 -+5 BAR 1/2" 0,00
0103 2 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
0105 12 PCS. 705499 ALLEN SCREW M6X25 A4 DIN912 0,00
0107 1 PCS. 704391 PLUG BSP 1/2" SIS2343 0,00
0109 6 Pcs. 702602 WASHER M5 SIS2343 0,00
0109 6 PCS. 704378 ALLEN SCREW M5X16 SIS2343 0,00
0109 6 PCS. 704382 NUT M5 SIS2332 0,00
0109 - 6 Pcs. 704388 LOCK WASHER M5 AKULON 0,00
0110 1 Pcs. 103963 MAN.PANEL B-30/IEC500 0,00
0999 1 PCS. 101422 NAME PLATE NO. 19 SL ALU. 0,5 0,00
0999 2 Pcs. 704041 RIVET 02,3X4 ALU. 0,00
DK-9400 Nørresundby 0 (DÉSWÎ)
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 673805 NSL250-330/D02-P 419475 CAD R 673805
27-02-01 Page 2
SPARE PARTS LIST
0999 1 PCS. 704048 DESMI TRANSFERS LABELS BLACK 0,00
9999 1 PCS. 103905 SUCTION-SKILT MS58 0,00
9999 1 PCS. 103906 DISCHARGE-SKILT MS58 0,00
9999 4 PCS. 704041 RIVET 02,3X4 ALU. 0,00
9999 1 PCS. 707161 TYPESKILT MED CE-MÆRKE 0,00

E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 673805 NSL250-330/D02-P 419475 CAD
0
R704189
(DBWJ)
27-02-01 Page 3
30-
0NIN931S9NI"MVS
^ ^ ^
y////////////////////////////////
SPARE PARTS LIST
0000 0,1 PCS. 704015 BALL BEARING GREASE 0,00
0001 1 PCS. 511800 PUMPEHUS NSL200-415 GG20 0,00
0003 2 Pcs. 506964 PLUG RG 3/4" MS58PB 0,00
0004 1 PCS. 515411 TÆTNINGSRING NSL200/250-D ALBZ 0,00
0005 1 Pcs. 511762 LØBEHJUL NSL200-415 RG5 0,00
0006 1 Pcs. 703358 SET SCREW M20 X 45 A4 DIN933 0,00
0008 1 PCS. 506703 DISTANCE RING SIS2343 0,00
0009 1 Pcs. 709627 FEDER AB 18X11X90 1.4571 0,00
0010 1 Pcs. 708668 SHAFT SEAL MG1S20/70-G50-APVGG 0,00
0011 1 Pcs. 705252 V-RING 70SNITRIL 0,00
0012 1 Pcs. 702103 SNAP RING UK 75X2,5 0,00
0013 2 PCS. 700953 BEARING 7315-BG 0,00
0014 1 Pcs. 506842 GREASE REGULATOR 0,00
0015 1 PCS. 110865 LEJEDÆKSEL NSL GRP.3 GG20 0,00
0016 4 Pcs. 704371 CH-SCREWM12X30 SIS2343 0,00
0017 1 Pcs. 110868 AKSEL NSL -02 GRP.3 1.4436 0,00
0018 1 Pcs. 515530 BAGDÆKSEL NSL200/300-415 GG20 0,00
0019 1 Pcs. 110852 KOBLING 315 NSL -02 GRP.2+3 0,00
0020 1 Pcs. 515570 MOTORKONS. NSL/415/-02 315/355 0,00
0021 1 Pcs. 706780 O-RING 0422.20X6.90 0,00
0022 16 PCS. 705750 SET SCREW M12X 40 A4 DIN933 0,00
0023 16 PCS. 704067 WASHER AM12/DIN125-AISI316 0,00
0026 1 PCS. 110867 DÆKSEL U. LEJE NSL GRP.3 GG20 0,00
0027 1 PCS. 511811 TÆTNINGSRING 2 NSL200-415 ALBZ 0,00
0028 2 PCS. 110869 SKÆRM NSL-D-415/-02 ST37.2 0,00
0058 - 0,5 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
0059 1 Pcs. 709620 FORSKR.VINKEL 1/4"X8 MESS. 0,00
0061 1 PCS. 704275 HEXAGON NIPPLE 90GR 1/4 BSP ME 0,00
0064 8 PCS. 704279 SET SCREW M16X35 ST.8.8 DIN558 0,00
0070 8 PCS. 705270 CH-SKRUE M16X 25 ST8.8 FZB 0,00
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 673800 NSL200-415/A02-P 419475 CAD R 673800
27-02-01 Page 1
SPARE PARTS LIST
0071 8 Pcs. 708070 SET SCREW M20X45 ST8.8 0,00
0072 1 Pcs. 110853 MELLEMFLANGE 315 ST37.2 0,00
0073 1 PCS. 705292 PINOLSKRUEM10X20 45H DIN916 0,00
0075 8 PCS. 706717 BH-SCREW M5 X 8 M. FL ST10.9 0,00
0076 1 PCS. 700923 FEDER A 16X10X70 ST60.11 0,00
0081 2 PCS. 704189 SEALING WASHER BSP3/4 NYLON 6 0,00
0084 1 PCS. 704268 HYDR.NIPPLE 1/8RG HZ1 0,00
0086 2 Pcs. 708178 POINTED SCREW M16X25 A4 DIN916 0,00
0093 4 Pcs. 705160 SÆTSKRUE M24X 50 ST8.8 FZB 0,00
0094 1 Pcs. 110843 FODPLADE NSL.-330/415 GG20 0,00
0095 4 Pcs. 709618 NORD-LOCK LÄSESKIVE M24 0,00
0096 1 Pcs. 709623 MANOMETER 0 - +10 BAR 1/2" 0,00
0103 2 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
0104 6 PCS. 702521 PIPE HOLDER NAP 108 POLYAMID 6 0,00
0106 2 PCS. 709569 REG.VENTIL F.08 RØR MESS. 0,00
0107 1 PCS. 704391 PLUG BSP 1/2" SIS2343 0,00
0109 6 PCS. 702602 WASHER M5 SIS2343 0,00
0109 6 Pcs. 704378 ALLEN SCREW M5X16 SIS2343 0,00
0109 6 PCS. 704382 NUT M5 SIS2332 0,00
0109 - 6 PCS. 704388 LOCK WASHER M5 AKULON 0,00
0110 1 Pcs. 110972 MAN.PANEL B30/IEC600 0,00
0999 1 PCS. 101422 NAME PLATE NO.19 SL ALU. 0,5 0,00
0999 2 Pcs. 704041 RIVET 02,3X4 ALU. 0,00
DK-9400 Nørresundby 0 (DÉSWÎ)
E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 673800 NSL200-415/A02-P 419475 CAD R 673800
27-02-01 Page 2
SPARE PARTS LIST
0999 1 Pcs. 704048 DESMI TRANSFERS LABELS BLACK 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 103905 SUCTION-SKILT MS58 0,00
9999 4 Pcs. 704041 RIVET 02,3X4 ALU. 0,00
9999 1 Pcs. 707161 TYPESKILT MED CE-MÆRKE 0,00
A/S De Smithske Assembly ®

E-mail: desmi@desmi.com SX 673800 NSL200-415/A02-P 419475 CAD
0
R704189
(DÉSWJ)
27-02-01 Page 3
SPARE PARTS LIST
é
o Joobg led in by the manufacturer To be filled in by the user M
3
£ (&§!> o. Qty. each Unit Part No. Designation / Material Price each Qty. Required RerS-ks
ark
1 Pcs. 500751 PUMPEHUS SL250-330 SPEC. GG20 0,00

§ S 3A
1 Pcs. 504570 REAR COVER SL250-330 GG20 0,00
;
•S. £ \ I—
1 Pcs. 502460 IMPELLER SL250-3.30 RG5 0,00

*i
Î c
1 D 1 Pcs. 105720 LEJEDÆKSEL SVÆR SL-MONO GG20 0,00
1 Pcs. 507192 SEAL.RING ALBZF60 OjOO
•fl
lex
let!)
ont
Çr
1 Pcs. 506704 DISTANCE RING SL SIS2343 0,00
D 1 Pcs. 706779
j-n » + +L
1 Pcs. 105723
O-RING 0335.00X6.00 NITRIL 0,00
fl
1' 2
MONOBLOKKONSOL TIL SL-D-330 0,00
fl
1 ? £N 1
Pcs. 105725 SKÆRM TIL SL-D-330 MONOBLOK 0,00
fl
Pcs. 702487
S =P 1 Pcs. 506751
STØTTESKIVE SS 65X 85X3,5 ST 0,00
fl
T 2
LABYRINTH RING 0,00
fl
1
Pcs. 700952
Pcs. 704276
BEARING 7313-BG. 0,00
fl
§ £ JU
1
LOCK WASHER UK 65X2,5 HÆ.FJ.ST 0,00
fl
? ? sV Pcs. 706785 SHAFT SEAL MG1S20/55-G50-APVGG 0,00
fl
des
1 Pcs. 709619
è ^ AD
1 Pcs. 709620
FORSKR.LIGE 1/4"X8 MESS. 0,00
fl
5 - AE 1
FORSKR.VINKEL 1/4"X8 MESS. 0,00
fl
3
AF
Pcs. 704268 HYDR.NIPPLE 1/8RG HZ1 0,00
fl
1 Pcs. 704278 SUNK KEY14X9X105 SIS2332 DS.96 0,00 fl
mo
AG 1 Pcs. 700416
1 Pcs. 708867
POINTED SCREW M8X12 45H DIN916
FEDER A 18X11X63 ST.61.11
0,00
0,00
fl
. ,„ AG fl
3| £ H 8 Pcs. 705750 SET SCREW M12X 40 A4 DIN933 0,00
fl
8 Pcs. 704067
*
1 s'AÖO
? g. &J 8 Pcs. 704037
WASHER AM12/DIN125-AISI316
NUT M16/DIN934-AISI316
0,00
0,00
fl
8 Pcs. 708383 0,00
fl
g ff |ü
^ | ÅK 4 Pcs. 700317
SET SCREW M16X35 SIS2343
SET SCREWM12X30 ST.3.6 DIN558 0,00
fl
fl
i |M ' 8 Pcs. 706717 BH-SCREW M5 X 8 M. FL. ST10.9 0,00
fl
3 AN 6 Pcs. 704041 RIVET 02,3X4 ALU. 0,00
? AN 4 Pcs. 704041 RIVET 02,3X4 ALU. 0,00
AO 2 Pcs. 704036 NUT M20 SIS2343 DIN934 0,00
/^p 1 Pcs. 704265 POINTED SCREW M5 X 12 SIS2332 0,00
/ MàD< i mithske Assembly
i
9 1n Pump Identification Type and Size drawing No.
S ?' " OC Nørresundby 0
\
\ esmi@desmi.com SX 654645 SL 250-330/A-G2-K-P 405250 CAD R 654645
27-02-01 Pagei
Ü2355
SPARE PARTS LIST

n -JOob^f lied in by the manufacturer To be filled in by the user M
3 o. Qty. each Unit Part No. Designation / Material Price each Qty. Required RerQrks
g
5- S x ÄC 1 Pcs. 506962 PLUG RG3/8" MS58PB 0,00 I?
? S ÄQ 1 Pcs. 704187 DOWTY SELON RG3/8 NYLON 6 0,00
5 AR 1
1
Pcs. 506963
Pcs. 704188
PLUG RG1/2" MS58PB
1/2" DOWTY SELON RG1/2 NYLON 6
0,00
0,00
I
|
*
AR
AS 0,5 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
Ë
S;
^ ^ AY 1
1
Pcs. 101422
Pcs. 103986
NAME PLATE NO.19 SL ALU. 0,5
KOBLING 250-4 SL/-G2 GG20
0,00
0,00
1
1
D 1 + Mo
5 SfSlO
2
8
Pcs. 704033
Pcs. 704309
WASHER AM16 SIS2343 DIN125
SET SCREWM16X40 ST.8.8 DIN558
0,00
0,00
1
1
D
1" Scûo
^ vîoôo:
1
1
Pcs. 506907
Pcs. 105724
FLANGE 0570/440X20 ST.
SVØB TIL SL-D-330 MONOBLOK
0,00
0,00
1
1
igoeo: 2 Pcs. 506892 MANOMETERPLADE 8X40X80 ST.37 0,00 1
<P s pQ99
000- 1
2
Pcs. 506905
Pcs. 709567
FLANGE 0495/395X20 ST.
RED.MUFFE 1/4"X1/2" MESS.
0,00
0,00
1
1
? ?0Q9(
8- *• ^C|p9f
1
1
Pcs. 709621
Pcs. 709622
MANOMETER -1 - +5 BAR 1/2"
MANOMETER 0 -+6 BAR 1/2"
0,00
0,00
1
1
3 2 £Ö§9'
5 Ü009I
2
2
Pcs. 709570
Pcs. 709571
NIPPEL STILBAR 08-1/4" MESS.
VINKELNIP.STILBAR F.08R0R MESS
0,00
0,00
1
1
3,
g'
oi o:
010;
2
2
Pcs. 709619
Pcs. 704286
FORSKR.LIGE 1/4"X8 MESS.
PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110.
0,00
0,00
1
1
3
3 loto;
010- 6
12
Pcs. 702521
Pcs. 705499
PIPE HOLDER NAP 108 POLYAMID 6
ALLEN SCREW M6X25 A4 DIN912
0,00
0,00
1
1
| QQàO( 2 Pcs. 709569 REG.VENTIL F.08 RØR MESS. 0,00 1
? jTOjaO!
« roSoi
6
6
Pcs. 702602
Pcs. 704378
WASHER M5 SIS2343
ALLEN SCREW M5X16 SIS2343
0,00
0,00
1
1
- go|o<
2 cfOi
6
• 6
Pcs. 704382
Pcs. 704388
NUT M5
LOCK WASHER M5
SIS2332
AKULON
0,00
0,00
1
1
S 999« 1 Pcs. 103905 SUCTION-SKILT MS58 0,00
* 999« 1 Pcs. 103906 DISCHARGE-SKI LT MS58 0,00
1 Pcs. 103963
I—1
999«
1
M AN. PAN EL B-30/IEC500 0,00 ^ ^
999! Pcs. 654139 MONOBLOK SL-D-330 IEC500 D75 0,00 | | |
j&Di mithske Assembly
a
/ ftgblr i
DC Nørresundby
Epna:1: esmi@desmi.com
Pump Identification
SX 654645
Type and Size
SL 250-330/A-G2-K-P
drawing No.
405250 CAD
0
R 654645
(nisi
•—s
mm
27-02-01 Page 2
Q2355
s» SPARE PARTS LIST 1

1 lied in by the manufacturer To be filled in by the user 0
; liera o. Qty. each Unit Part No. Designation / Material Price each Qty. Required Rerje ks
Ï ^999 4 Pcs. 702578 BLIND/POPNITTE 03,2X6 RUSTFRI 0,00
S 999 1 Pcs. 709541 NAMEPLATE WITHOUT CE-MARK 0,00
^
1
Cable
s 3
o
f ir o
* IT S 1
1
ki
^
-fc*. 4i
U) LT 1
•
•
IDK
ä. NI G
s= *. -*
—1—
e-mail:
III
f ??
^ 3 oi
| S ft s
III
§-
3
con
>^1 ••1
5 S- £
s- p <
II
II
O CL S-
v*J ?^- CO
>O 3
1
r>
A7SDeî mithske Assembly
i Fl
1
)lr i • Pump Identification Type and Size drawing No.
1 )4 )0 Nørresundby 0 m
ai : ( esmi@desmi.com SX 654645 SL 250-330/A-G2-K-P 405250 CAD R103986 m
V 7
27-02-01 Page 3
SPARE PARTS LIST
n rTObb^f led in by the manufacturer To be filled in by the user H
ri S ßefe o. Qty. each Unit Part No. Designation / Material Price each Qty. Required Rer&ks
CJ
1 1 §A 1 Pcs. 500761 PUMPEHUS SL150-330 SPEC. GG20 0,00
1 Pcs. 504570 REAR COVER SL250-330 GG20 0,00
1
3' c
1
Pcs. 502450 IMPELLER RG5 0,00 Ë
1 D Pcs. 105720 LEJEDÆKSEL SVÆR SL-MONO GG20 0,00 hi

F
n si ^ -^
1 Pcs. 506713 WEAR RING 0200X185X20 ALBZF60 0,00
I1
Me
1 Pcs. 506704 DISTANCE RING SL SIS2343 0,00

D
O\ U
•T. + +
?..
1 Pcs. 706779 O-RING 0335.00X6.00 NITRIL 0,00 1
S1 ? ? ^ 1 Pcs. 105773 MONOBLOKKONSOL TIL SL-D-330 0,00 1
2 Pcs. 105725 SKÆRM TIL SL-D-330 MONOBLOK 0,00 1
1 Pcs. 702487 STØTTESKIVE SS 65X85X3,5 ST 0,00 1
1 Pcs. 506751 LABYRINTH RING 0,00 1
T 2 Pcs. 700952 BEARING 7313-BG. 0,00 1
< S71 •'U 1 Pcs. 704276 LOCK WASHER UK 65X2,5 HÆ.FJ.ST 0,00 1
? ? "ty
s- ''•k - & D
1 Pcs. 706785 SHAFT SEAL MG1S20/55-G50-APVGG 0,00 1
•
1. S 3 ^D
S '2 AE
1
1
1
Pcs.
Pcs.
Pcs.
709619
709620
704268
FORSKR.LIGE 1/4"X8 MESS.
FORSKR.VINKEL 1/4"X8 MESS.
HYDR.NIPPLE 1/8RG HZ1
0,00
0,00
0,00
••
3. AF 1 Pcs. 704278 SUNK KEY14X9X105 SIS2332 DS.96 0,00 1
1
:om
AG 1 Pcs. 700416 POINTED SCREW M8X12 45H D1N916 0,00

AG 1 Pcs. 708867 FEDER A 18X11X63 ST.61.11 0,00 1
3 I- ÅH 8 Pcs. 705750 SET SCREW M12X 40 A4 DIN933 0,00 1
1 8AB0I 8 Pcs. 704067 WASHER AM12/DIN125-AISI316 0,00 1
? ? ÔJ 8 Pcs. 704037 NUTM16/DIN934-AISI316 0,00 1
" g" §J 8 Pcs. 708383 SET SCREW M16X35 SIS2343 0,00 1
r ^ KK 4 Pcs. 700317 SET SCREWM12X30 ST.3.6 DIN558 0,00 1
?
3 AN
^ 4M • 8
6
Pcs.
Pcs.
706717
704041
BH-SCREW M5 X 8 M. F L ST10.9
RIVET 02,3X4 ALU.
0,00
0,00
1
$ AN 4 Pcs. 704041 RIVET 02,3X4 ALU. 0,00
AO 2 Pcs. 704036 NUT M20 SIS2343 DIN934 0,00
AP
U&Dc î mithske
1 Pcs. 704265 POINTED SCREW M5 X 12 SIS2332
Assembly
0,00 rn
i • Pump Identification Type and Size drawing No.
)C Nørresundby 0
(
esmi@desmi.com SX 654650 SL150-330/A-G2-K-P 405250 CAD R 654650
•—' • H
27-02-01 Page 1
Q2355
SPARE PARTS LIST

Jataff lied in by the manufacturer To be filled in by the user __
re
Qty. each
lo. Unit Part No. Designation / Material Price each Qty. Required RerHrks
ÛJ
=! g iiQ 1 Pcs. 506962 PLUG RG3/8" MS58PB 0,00
i AR
1
1
Pcs.
Pcs.
704187
506963
DOWTY SELON RG3/8 NYLON 6
PLUG RG1/2" MS58PB
0,00
0,00
1
1. AR 1 Pcs. 704188 1/2" DOWTY SELON RG1/2 NYLON 6 0,00
AS 0,5 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00
O H -H AY 1 Pcs. 101422 NAME PLATE NO. 19 SL ALU. 0,5 0,00
1
1
able
5~ ft" F*F 1 Pcs. 105772 PUMPE/MOTORNAV TIL 225-6 ST50 0,00

o $ + tylO 2 Pcs. 704033 WASHER AM 16 S1S2343 DIN 125 0,00 1
S & MO 8 Pcs. 704309 SET SCREWM16X40 ST.8.8 DIN558 0,00 1
1
IDK
1 Pcs. 507425 FLANGE 0495/340X20 ST. 0,00

ï yîdOO 1 Pcs. 105724 SVØB TIL SL-D-330 MONOBLOK 0,00 1
S OSO 2 Pcs. 506892 MANOMETERPLADE 8X40X80 ST.37 0,00 1
000 1 Pcs. 506905 FLANGE 0495/395X20 ST. 0,00 1
9 S- ^ 0 | 9 2 Pcs. 709567 RED.MUFFE 1/4"X1/2" MESS. 0,00 1
3
£? ? 2699 1 Pcs. 709621 MANOMETER -1 - +5 BAR 1/2" 0,00 1
g- * -Cf§9 1 Pcs. 709622 MANOMETER 0 - +6 BAR 1/2" 0,00 1
3
2 Scfe9 2 Pcs. 709570 NIPPEL STILBAR 08-1/4" MESS. 0,00 1
S i^009i 2 Pcs. 709571 VINKELNIP.STILBAR F.08R0R MESS 0,00
1
3 " ~~oio: 2 Pcs. 709619 FORSKR.LIGE 1/4"X8 MESS. 0,00 1
1
com
010: 2 Pcs. 704286 PIPE 08X06X0,2 DS2110. 0,00

010' 6 Pcs. 702521 PIPE HOLDER NAP 108 POLYAMID 6 0,00 1
12 Pcs. 705499 ALLEN SCREW M6X25 A4 DIN912 0,00 1
1 goko( 2 Pcs. 709569 REG.VENTIL F.08 RØR MESS. 0,00
1
6 Pcs. 702602 WASHER M5 SIS2343 0,00 1
s15 Erofos 6 Pcs. 704378 ALLEN SCREW M5X16 SIS2343 0,00 1
fotos 6 Pcs. 704382 NUT M5 SIS2332 0,00 1
S 0|0ï
3 999i
• 6
1
Pcs.
Pcs.
704388
103905
LOCK WASHER M5
SUCTION-SKILT MS58
AKULON 0,00
0,00
1
g 9995 1 Pcs. 103906 DISCHARGE-SKILT MS58 0,00
1
1—I
9995
1
Pcs. 103964 MAN.PANEL B-30/IEC400 0,00 ^ ^
999< Pcs. 654375 MONOBLOK SL-D-330 IEC400 D60 0,00 III
mithske Assembly
ngW 1 Pump Identification Type and Size drawing No.
X Nørresundby 0
\
\ esmi@desmi.com SX 654650 SL150-330/A-G2-K-P 405250 CAD R 654650
• y
27-02-01 Page 2
S? SPARE PARTS LIST
i
nma
lied in by the manufacturer To be filled in by the user

2 liera ^ 0 . Qty. each Unit Part No. Designation / Material Price each Qty. Required Rer Srks
^ ^999 4 Pcs. 702578 BLIND/POPNITTE 03,2X6 RUSTFRI 0,00 5
a 999 1 Pcs. 709541 NAMEPLATE WITHOUT CE-MARK 0,00
§= •a
S
^ ^ 15
1=
Cable: D
S" £ §
Q
p- § S
Ul Ui •
D
" 4 NI &
;?*.' — -
•—
e-mail: des
®
è ? U
N—•=
1 V
—r~
—
—1 —
CO/TÏ
i•
> S? a
n 1 a
Ü ?• S"
O
g" P
ill.
W 7f Qj
•
Assembly
ii
A/S De Smithske
•»
ï
gtqolr \ Pump Identification Type and Size drawing No.
)0 Nørresundby 0
Øirriai : i esmi@desmi.com SX 654650 SL150-330/A-G2-K-P 405250 CAD R105772
•
(
•
27-02-01 Page 3
Drive17 Low Voltage Motors
Manual for M3000 and M2000 Ranges
Installation, operation and

maintenance manual GB 3
Installations-, Betriebs- und

Wartungshandbuch DE 12
Manual d'installation,
d'exploitation et de
maintenance FR 22
Manual de insialaciön, operaciön

y mantenimiento ES 32
Manual di installazione, uso

e manutenzione IT 42
Manual för Installation,

drift och underhall SE 52
Asennus-, käyttö- ja
kunnossapito-ohje Fl 61
Example of the Declaration of Conformity
given by ABB. C€
EC Declaration of Conformity
The Manufacturer :- (Name and address of the manufacturer)
hereby declares that
The Products :- (Productidentification)
are in conformity with provisions of the following Council Directives :
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC (amended by 93/68/EEC),
and, as components, with the essential requirements of the following :
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC), regarding the intrinsic
characteristics to emission and immunity levels,
and are in conformity with :
EN 60 034-1
Additional Information :-
By design, the machines, considered as components, comply with the essential requirements of
Machinery Directive 98/37/EEC provided that the installation be correctly realised by the manufacturer
of the machinery (for example : in compliance with our Installation Instructions and EN 60 204 "Electri-
cal Equipment of Industrial Machines").
Certificate of Incorporation (Directive 98/37/EEC, Art 4.2 and Annex II, Sub B) :
The machines above must not be put into service until the machinery into which they have
been incorporated have been declared in conformity with the Machinery Directive.
Year of CE marking : CE00.
Signed by
Title
Date
Translations into other languages are available from

ABB.
ABB / Low Voltage Motors / Manual 11 -2002

AUK
EC Declaration of Conformity
The Manufacturer: ABB Oy
Electrical Machines, LV Motors
P.O. Box 633
FIN-65101 Vaasa, Finland
hereby declares that
The Products: 3-phase induction motors
series M2B* with product code pos. 14 = A, D, E or U
center heights 160,180, 200, 225, 250, 280, 315, 355 and 400 mm,
Nema-sizes 32_, 36_, 40_, 44_, 50_, 58_
series M3B*with product code pos. 14 = G
center heights 160,180, 200, 225, 250, 280,315, 355 and 400 mm
series M2C*, M2F\ M2L* and M2R* with product code pos. 14 = A
center heights 200,225,250, 280, 315, 355 and 400 mm,
series M2C* with product code pos. 14 = A
Nema-sizes 40-, 44_, 50_, 58_
are in conformity with provisions of the following Council Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC (amended by 93/68/EEC),
and, as components, with the essential requirements of the following ;
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC), regarding the intrinsic characteristics to
emission and immunity levels,
and are in conformity with ; EN 60 034-1
Additional Information :-
By design, the machines, considered as components, comply with the essential requirements of
Machinery Directive 98/37/EEC provided that the installation be correctly realised by the manufacturer of the
machinery (for example: in compliance with our Installation Instructions and EN 60 204 "Electrical Equipment of
Industrial Machines").
Certificate of Incorporation (Directive 98/37/EEC, Art 4.2 and Annex II, Sub B) :
The machines above must not be put into service until the machinery into which they have been
incorporated have been declared in conformity with the Machinery Directive,
Year of CE marking : CE00.
Signed by
Jouni Ikäheimo
Title Product Development Director
Date May 09, 2003
ABBOy
Electrical Machines Visiting Address Telephone Internet Business Identity Code:
LV Motors Strömbergin Puistotie 5 A +35810 2211 www.abb.fi 0643134-6
Postal address FIN-65320 Vaasa Telefax e-mail: Domicile: Helsinki
P.O. Box 633 FINLAND +358 10 22 47372 first name.last name
FIN-65101 Vaasa @fi.abb.com
FINLAND
Installation, operation and
maintenance manual
List of Contents
1. General 4. Maintenance
2. Installation 5. Environmental Requirements
3. Operating 6. Motor trouble shooting chart
1. General Validity
The instructions are valid for the following ABB electrical
NOTE! machine types, in both motor and generator operation.
These instructions must be followed to ensure safe
and proper installation, operation and maintenance of series WIT*, MBT*, MXMA,
the motor. They should be brought to the attention of series M2A7M3A*, M2B7M3B*, M2C7M3C*, M2F7
anyone who installs, operates or maintains this M3F*, M2L7M3L*, M2M7M3M*, M2Q*, M2R7M3FT,
equipment. Ignoring the instruction may invalidate the M2V7M3V*
warranty.
in frame sizes 56 - 400.
Declaration of Conformity There is a separate manual for e.g. Ex motors 'Low
voltage motors for hazardous areas: Installation, opera-
Declarations of Conformity with respect to the Low tion and maintenance Manual' (Low Voltage Motors/
voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/ Manual for Ex-motors).
68 EEC are issued separately with individual machines.
Additional information is required forsorne machine
The Declaration of Conformity also satisfies the types due to special application and/or design
requirements of a Declaration of Incorporation with considerations. Additional information is available for the
respect to the Machinery Directive 98/37/EEC, Art 4.2 following motors:
Annex II, sub B - roller table motors
- water-cooled motors
- open drip proof motors
- smoke venting motors
- brake motors
- permanent magnet motors

2. Installation Direct-on-line or star/delta starting
The terminal box on standard single speed machines
normally contains 6 winding terminals and at least one
Putting into service (starting) earth terminal.
Reception check Earthing must be carried out according to local

Immediately upon receipt check the machine for external regulations before the machine is connected to the
damage and if found, inform the forwarding agent without supply voltage.
delay.
The voltage and connection are stamped on the rating
Check all rating plate data, especially voltage and plate.
winding connection (star or delta). The type of bearing is
specified on the rating plate of all motors except the Direct-on-line starting (DOL):
smallest frame sizes. Y or D winding connections may be used.
e.g. 660 VY, 380 VD indicates Y-connection for 660 V
Remove transport locking if employed.Turn shaft by and D-connection for 380 V.
hand to check free rotation.
Star/Delta starting (Y/D) :
Do not exceed permissible loading values of bearings The supply voltage must be equal to the rated voltage of
stated in the product catalogue. the machine in D-connection.
Remove all connection links from the terminal block.
Motors equipped with roller bearings: Running the
motor with no radial force applied to the shaft may For two-speed, single phase and special machines,
damage the roller bearing. supply connection must follow the instructions inside the
terminal box.
Motors equipped with angular contact bearing:
Running the motor with no axial force applied in the right If direct-on-line starting lasts for more than 10 seconds
direction to the shaft may damage the angular contact or Y/D starting more than 30 seconds, consult ABB
bearing. Sales Office or see the publication 'The Motor Guide
(also available on the internet on www.abb.com/
Motors equipped with regreasing nipples: motors&drives).
When starting the motor for the first time, or after long
storage of the motor, apply the specified quantity of Terminals and direction of rotation
grease until new grease is forced out of the grease Direction of rotation is clockwise when viewing the shaft
outlet. face at the machine drive end, when the line phase
For details see section "Manual lubrication" on page 8. sequence L1, L2, L3 is connected to the terminals as
shown in the figure 1.
Insulation resistance check
Measure insulation resistance before commissioning and To alter the direction of rotation, interchange the
when winding dampness is suspected. connection of any two line cables.
Resistance, measured at 25°C, shall exceed the If the machine has a uni-directional fan, ensure that the
reference value, i.e. 10 M ohm (measured with 500 V dc direction of rotation is according to the arrow marked on
Megger) the machine.
WARNING ;•; >
Windings should be discharged immediately after Handling
measurement to avoid risk of electric shock.
Insulation resistance reference value is halved for each Storage ™

20°C rise in ambient temperature. The machine should always be stored indoors, in dry,
vibration free and dust free conditions.
If the reference resistance value is not attained, the
winding is too damp and must be oven dried. Unprotected machined surfaces (shaft-ends and flanges)
Oven temperature should be 90°C for 12-16 hours should be protected with anti-corrosive treatment.
followed by 105°C for 6-8 hours.
It is recommended that shafts be rotated periodically by
Drain hole plugs, if fitted, must be removed and closing hand to prevent grease migration.
valve, if fitted, must be opened during heating.
Anti condensation heaters, if fitted, should preferably be
Windings drenched in seawater normally need to be energised.
rewound.
The characteristics of electrolytic capacitors, if fitted to
ABB / Low Voltage Motors / Manual 11-2002

single-phase motors, will require "reforming" following Installation
periods of storage exceeding 1-2 years.
Contact ABB Sales Office for details. Cooling
Normal ambient temperatures should not exceed 40°C
Transportation (marine standard +45 or +50°C) if standard performance
Machines fitted with cylindrical-roller and/or angular is to be achieved. Check that the motor has sufficient
contact bearings must be fitted with locking devices airflow. Ensure that no nearby equipment, surfaces or
during transport. direct sunshine, radiate additional heat to the motor. For
more information about higher ambient temperatures and
Lifting cooling, see "the Motor Guide" or contact ABB Sales
Lift the motor using the lifting lugs only, if not otherwise Office.
stated in the separate lifting instruction.
Foundation
The center of gravity of motors with the same frame The purchaser bears full responsibility for preparation of
may vary due to different outputs, mounting arrange- the foundation.
ments and auxiliary equipment.
Metal foundations should be painted to avoid corrosion.
Check that eyeboits or the lifting lugs integrated with the
motorframe are undamaged before lifting. Damaged Foundations must be even, and sufficiently rigid to
lifting lugs must not be used. withstand possible short circuit forces. They shall be
I dimensioned as to avoid the occurrence of vibration due
Lifting eyeboits must be tightened before lifting. If to resonance.
needed the position of the eyeboit must be adjusted with
Foundation studs
suitable washers.
Bolt the foundation studs to the feet of the motor and
Ensure that proper lifting equipment is used and that the place a 1 -to-2 mm shim between the stud and the feet.
sizes of the hooks are suitable for the lifting lugs.
Align the motor directly using appropriate means.
Care must be taken not to damage auxiliary equipment Grout the studs with concrete, check alignment and drill
and cables attached to the motor. holes for locating pins.
Machine weights Drain holes

Total machine weight can vary within the same frame Always check that open drain holes face downward.
size (center height) depending on different output,
mounting arrangements and added features. In extremely dusty environments, all drain holes should
be closed.
The following table shows estimated maximum weights
for machines in their basic versions as a function of Alignment
frame material. Correct alignment is essential to avoid bearing failures,
vibrations and possible fractured shaft extensions.
The actual weight of all our motors is stated on the
rating plate except the smallest frame sizes. Slide rails and belt drives
• Fasten the machine to the slide rails as shown in
Aluminium Cast iron Steel figure 2.
Frame Weight Add. Weight Weight • Place the slide rails horizontally on the same level.
size kg for brake kg kg • Check that the machine shaft is parallel with driven, or
- - driving, shaft.
(56 4.5
63 6 - - - • Any belt must be tensioned according to the supplier's
71 8 5 13 - instructions.
80 12 8 20 -
90 17 10 30 WARMING ;; ; ••>••••
100 25 16 40 - Excessive belt tension will damage bearings and
112 36 20 50 can cause shaft breakage.
132 63 30 90 -
160 110 55 175 -
180 160 65 250 Do not exceed the maximum belt forces (i.e. radial
200 220 - 310 bearing loading) stated in the relevant product
225 295 - 400 catalogues.
250 370 - 550 -
280 •405 800 600
315 - - 1300 * 1000
355 - 2300 2200
400 - - 3500 3000

This arrangement has no electrical safety function; the
Connection
purpose is to equalise the potentials. When the motor
Normal machine design has the terminal box on top with and the gearbox are mounted on a common steel
cable entry possible from both sides. fundament, no potential equalisation is required.
Some machines are available with top mounted terminal Potential equalisation
boxes rotatable 4 x 90°, and some with side mounted
terminal boxes. Plate/strip
Availability of these solutions is described in the product
catalogues.
Unused cable entries must be closed.
As well as main winding and earthing terminals, the

terminal box can also contain connections for To comply with EMC-requirements, use only cables and
thermistors, standstill heating elements, bimetallic, connectors approved for this purpose. (See instruction
switches, or PT100 resistance elements. for frequency converters.)
The highest permissible rotational speed of a cast iron

Volt|ge may be connected at standstill inside the motor used in variable speed drive (M2BA/M3BP) must
térrnjrøl box for floating elements or direct not exceed maximum permissible speeds as stated in
vvindjng heating. 3 ' the figure below or the speed stamped on the rating
plate. For information on the highest permissible rota-
Connection diagrams for auxiliary elements are found tional speed for other motor sizes and types, please
inside the terminal box cover. contact ABB. Bearing lubrication should follow the
directions mentioned later.
:
W A R N I N G •.?•••• •;;;;- S
Thé capacitor in single-phase motors can retain Frame Speed r/min
a charge that appears across the motor terminals, size 2 pole 4 pole
evert when the motor has reached standstill, fe 280 3600 2600
315 3600 2300
355 3600 2000
Connection for variable speed drive 400 3600 1800
If there is uncertainty concerning the suitability of the
Variable speed drives cause higher voltage stresses motor for the variable speed drive, please contact ABB.
than the sinusoidal supply on the winding of the motor
and may cause high frequency shaft voltages and WARNING ;f %r f
bearing currents.Therefore the winding and the bearing The maximum operating temperature of the*
insulation of the motor as well as the filter at the con- grease and bearings must not be exceeded.
verter output must be dimensioned according to "Selec-
tion rules for VSD applications/Insulation" (3GZF500930-
2), available on request from ABB. Balancing
In variable speed drives the motor (Pn > 30 kW) must The rotor of the machine is dynamically balanced.
be cabled by using shielded symmetrical cables and
As standard, balancing has been carried out using half
cable glands providing 360° bonding (also called EMC
key, and the shaft is marked with a RED tape, with the
glands). IVlore information can be found in ABB's manual
text "Balanced with half key". g
"Grounding and cabling of the drive system"
(3AFY61201998).
To avoid vibration the coupling-half or pulley must be
balanced with half key after the keyway has been
In frequency converter applications motor frame
machined.
external earthing must be used for equalising the
potential between the motor frame and the driven
In the event of balancing with full key the shaft is
machine, unless the two machines are mounted on the
marked with a YELLOW tape, with the text "Balanced
same metallic base.
with full key".
For motor frame sizes above IEC 280, use 0.75 x 70
In case balancing without key, the shaft is marked with
mm flat conductor or at least two 50 mm 2 round conduc-
a BLUE tape, with the text "Balanced without key".
tors. The distance of the round conductors must be at
least 150 mm from each other.

3. Operating 4. Maintenance
Use Maintenance and lubrication
Operating conditions General inspection

The machines are intended for use in industrial drive Inspect the machine at regular intervals.
applications. Keep the machine clean and ensure free
Normal ambient temperature limits are -20° to +40°C. ventilation airflow.
Maximum altitude 1000 m above sea level. Check the condition of shaft seals (e.g. V-ring) and
replace if necessary.
Safety considerations Check the condition of connections and mounting
and assembly bolts.
The machine is intended for installation and use by
Check the bearing condition by listening for
qualified personnel, familiar with relevant safety unusual noise, vibration measurement, bearing
requirements. temperature, inspection of spent grease or SPM
bearing monitoring.
Safety equipment necessary for the prevention of * When changes of condition occur,
accidents at the installation and operating site must be dismantle the machine, check the parts
provided in accordance with the local regulations. and replace if necessary.
WARNING Lubrication
Small motors with supply current directly
switched by thermally sensitive switches can WARNING
start automatically. Beware of all rotating parts!
Points to observe
1. Do not use the machine to step on. WARNING
2. The temperature of the outer casing of the Grease can cause skin irritation and eye
machine may be hot to the touch during normal inflammation. Follow all safety precautions
operation. specified; by the manufacturer.
3. Some special machine applications require
special instructions (e.g. using frequency Machines with permanently greased bearings
converter supplies). Bearings are usually permanently greased bearings of
4. Lifting lugs must only be used for lifting the motor.
either Z or 2Z types.
They must not be used to lift the motor when it is
attached to other equipment. Bearing types are specified in the respective product
catalogues and on the rating plate of all our motors
except smaller frame sizes.
Assembly and dismantling
As a guide, adequate lubrication for sizes up to 180 can
General be achieved for the following duration, according to L1
Dismantling and assembly of machines must be carried
(i.e. that 99 % of the motors are sure to make the
out by qualified personnel using only suitable tools and
interval time) at ambient temperature of 25°C. For duties
working methods. All repairs must be carried out
with ambient temperatures higher than 25°C, seethe
according to the standard IEC-60079-19.
respective product catalogue.
Bearings Frame size Poles Duty hours

Special care should be taken with the bearings. 56-80 2-8 for life
.These must be removed using pullers and fitted by 90-112 2-8 40000
f heating or using special tools for the purpose. How 132 2 31000
to replace bearings is described in detail in a separate 132 4-8 40000
instruction leaflet available from ABB Sales Office. 160 2 23000
160 4-8 40000
Fitting coupling halves and pulleys 180 2 19000
Coupling halves and pulleys must be fitted using suitable 180 4-8 40000
equipment and tools that do not damage the bearings.
Depending on application and load conditions, see
Never fit a coupling half or pulley by hammering into applicable product catalogue.
place or remove it using a lever pressed against the
body of the machine. Hours of operation for vertical motors are half of the
above values.
Mounting accuracy of coupling half :
check that the clearance b is less than 0.05 mm and
that the difference a1 to a2 is also less than 0.05 mm.
See figure 3.
ABB / Low Voltage Motors / Manual 11-2002

Motors with reareasina nipples Lubrication intervals and amounts
Frame Amount 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900
Lubrication information plate and general lubrication size ofgrease r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
advice gtoeamg
Ball bearings
If the machine is fitted with a lubrication information Lubrication intervals in duty hours
plate, follow the given values. 112 10 10000 13000 18000 21000 25000 28000
132 15. 9000 11000 17000 19000 23000 26500 .
On the lubrication information plate, regreasing intervals 160 25 7000 9500 14000 17000 21000 24000
180 30 6000 8000 13500 16000 20000 23000
with regard to mounting, ambient temperature and speed 200 40 4000 6000 11000 13000 17000 21000
of rotation can be defined. 225 50 3000 5000 10000 12500 16500 20000
250 60 2500 4000 9000 11500 15000 18000
ABB policy is to have reliability as a vital issue in 280 70 2000" 3500« 8000 10500 14000 17000
bearing lubrication intervals. Thatis why we follow the 315 90 i> 6500 8500 12500 16000
355 120 it ') 4200 6000 10000 13000
L1-principle. 400 120 » ') 4200 6000 10000 13000
400M3BP 130 H 1) 2800 4600 8400 12000
Manual lubrication Roller bearings
Regreasing while motor is running Lubrication intervals in duty hours
- Remove grease outlet plug or open closing valve if 160 25 3500 4500 7000 8500 10500 12000
fitted. 180 30 3000 4000 7000 8000 10000 11500
- Be sure that the lubrication channel is open 200 40 2000 3000 5500 6500 8500 10500
225 50 1500 2500 5000 6000 8000 10000
- Press the specified amount of grease into the bearing. 250 60 1300 2200 4500 5700 7500 9000
- Let the motor run 1 -2 hours to ensure that all 280 70 1000« 2000« 4000 5300 7000 8500
excess grease is forced out of the bearing. 315 90 * » 3300 4300 6000 8000
355 i) it 2000 6500
Close the grease outlet plug or closing valve if fitted. 120 3000 5000
400 120 i) " 2000 3000 5000 6500
400M3BP 130 i) <> 1400 2300 4200 6000
Regreasing while motor is at a standstill
» Values for EC sizes 280 to 400 in certain motortypes (3600 and 3000 r/min),
Regrease motors while running. If this is not possible,
please see Ihenextijage.
lubrication can be carried out while the machine is at a
standstill.
- In this case, use only half the quantity of grease, then Factors inf luencina the lubrication intervals
run the motor for a few minutes at full speed. Lubrication intervals for vertical machines are half of the
- When the motor has stopped, press the rest of the above values.
specified amount of grease into the bearing.
- After 1 -2 running hours close the grease outlet plug or The lubrication intervals are based on bearing operating
closing valve if fitted. temperature 80°C (ambient temperature of about + 25°).
Note! An increase in the ambient temperature raises the
Automatic lubrication temperature of the bearings correspondingly. The values
The grease outlet plug must be removed permanently should be halved for 15°C increase in bearing temper-
with automatic lubrication or open closing valve if fitted. ature and may be doubled for 15°C degrease in bearing
temperature.
Some motors may be equipped with a collector for old
grease. Follow the special instructions given for the
equipment. WARNING
The maximum operating temperature of the
grease and bearings must not be exceeded.
We recommend only the use of electromechanical
systems. Contact your local ABB Sales Office.
Lubricants
The amount of grease per each lubrication interval WARNING
stated in the table should be doubled if an automatic Do not mix different types of grease.
regreasing system is used. Incompatible lubricants may cause bearing
damage.
If 2-pole motors are being automatically regreased, the
note (NOTE!) concerning lubricant recommendations When regreasing, use only special ball bearing grease
given for 2-pole motors in the chapter Lubricants shall be with the following properties:
followed. - good quality grease with lithium complex soap and with
mineral- or PAO-oil
- base oil viscosity 100-160 cST at 40°C
- consistency NLGI grade 1.5 - 3 *)
- temperature range -30°C - +120°C, continuously.
*) For vertical mounted motors or in hot conditions a

stifter NLGI grade is recommended.

Grease with the correct properties is available from all The following grease can be used:
major lubricant manufacturers.
• FAG L69 (polyurea base)
Admixtures are recommended, but a written guarantee . Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (polyurea base)
must be obtained from the lubricant manufacturer • SKF LGHP2 (polyurea base)
especially concerning EP admixtures, that admixtures
do not damage bearings or the properties of lubricants at If other lubricants are used, check with the manufacturer
the operating temperature range. that the qualities correspond to those of the above
mentioned lubricants, or if the compatibility of the
WARNING lubricant is uncertain, contact your local ABB Sales
Lubricants containing EP admixtures are not Office.
recommended in high bearing temperatures in
frame sizes 280 to 400. Frequency converter drives
Higher speed operation, e.g. in frequency converter
applications, or lower speed with heavy load will require
If the ambient temperature is below -25°C or above shorter lubrication intervals. Consult your local ABB
+55°C, or bearing temperature is above 110°C, consult Sales Office in such cases.
ABB Sales Office regarding suitable grease.
Typically a doubling of speed will require a reduction of
The following high performance grease can be used lubrication intervals to approx. 40 % of values tabulated
above.
Esso Unirex I\I2, N3 or S2 (lithium complex base)
Mobil Mobilith SHC100 (lithium complex base)
Shell Albida EMS 2 (lithium complex base)
SKF LGHQ 3 (lithium complex base) The constructional maximum speed of the motor
Klüber KlüberplexBEM 41-132 (special lithium must not be exceeded.
base) Suitability of bearings for high speed operation must be
FAG Arcanol TEMP90 (calsium polyurea base)
FAG Arcanol TEMP110 (lithium complex base) checked.
Lubrication intervals for other grease fulfilling the Spare parts

required properties, contact your local ABB Sales When ordering spare parts, the full type designation and
Office. product code, as stated on the rating plate, must be
specified.
Lubrication intervals and amounts. 2-pole. If the machine is stamped with a serial manufacturing
number, this should also be given.
IEC frame sizes 280 and 400
Frame Amount 3600 3000 Rewinding
size of grease r/min r/min
g/bearing
Rewinding should always be carried out by qualified
Ball bearings
repair shops.
Lubrication intervals in duty hours
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500 Smoke venting and other special motors should not be
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000 rewound without first contacting ABB.
355 M3B* 35 1200 2000
400 M2B*,M2C* 45 1200 2000
400 M3B* 40 1000 1600
5. Environmental requirements
Roller bearings
Lubrication intervals in duty hours
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
Noise levels
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000 Most of our motors have a sound pressure level not
355 M3B* 35 600 1000 exceeding 82 dB(A) refer to 50 Hz sinusoidal supply
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000 conditions, tolerance ± 3 dB(A).
400 M3B* 40 500 800
Values for specific machines can be found in the -

NOTE! relevant product catalogues.
Always use high speed grease for high speed machines
and some other models, e.g. M2BA 355 and 400 2-pole For sound pressure levels for 60 Hz sinusoidal supply
machines, where the speed factor is higher than 400 000 and with non-sinusoidal supplies, contact ABB Sales
(calculated as Dm x n where Dm = average bearing Office.
diameter, mm; n = rotational speed, r/min).
Sound pressure levels for all machines having separate
cooling systems and for series M2F7M3F*, M2L7M3L*,
M2R7M3R*, and M2BJ/M2LJ are indicated in separate
Manuals.

These instructions do not cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every possible condition to be
met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should additional information required, please contact
the nearest ABB Sales Office. • - •
Motor trouble shooting chart

Your motor service and any trouble shooting must be handled by qualified persons with proper tools and equipment.
TROUBLE CAUSE WHAT TO DO

Motor fails to start Blown fuses Replace fuses with proper type and rating.
Overload trips Check and reset overload in starter.
Improper power supply Check to see that power supplied agrees with motor
rating plate and load factor.
Improper line connections Check connections with diagram supplied with
motor.
Open circuit in winding or control Indicated by humming sound when switch is
switch closed. Check for loose wiring connections. Also,
ensure that all control contacts are closed.
Mechanical failure Check to see if motor and drive turn freely. Check
bearings and lubrication.
Short circuited stator Indicated by blown fuses. Motor must be rewound. 1•
Poor stator coil connection Remove end bells, locate with test lamp.
Rotor defective Look for broken bars or end rings.
Motor may be overloaded Reduce load.
Motor stalls One phase may be open Check lines for open phase.
Wrong application Change type or size. Consult manufacturer.
Overload Reduce load.
Low voltage Ensure the rating plate voltage is maintained.
Check connection.
Open circuit Fuses blown, check overload relay, stator and push
buttons.
Motor runs and then Power failure Check for loose connections to line, fuses and
dies down control.
Motor does not come Not applied properly Consult supplier for proper type.
up to speed Voltage too low at motor terminals Use higher voltage or transformer terminals or
because of line drop reduce load. Check connections. Check conductors
for proper size.
Starting load too high Check load motor is supposes to carry at start.
Broken rotor bars or loose rotor Look for cracks near the rings. A new rotor may be
required, as repairs are usually temporary.
Open primary circuit Locate fault with testing device and repair.
Motor takes too long to Excessive load Reduce load.
accelerate and/or draws Low voltage during start Check for high resistance. Adequate wire size.
high amp Defective squirrel cage rotor Replace with new rotor.
Applied voltage too low Get power company to increase power tap.
Wrong rotation Wrong sequence of phases Reverse connections at motor or at switchboard.
Motor overheats while Overload Reduce load.
running underloaded Frame or bracket vents may be Open vent holes and check for a continuous stream
clogged with dirt and prevent proper of air from the motor.
ventilation of motor
Motor may have one phase open Check to make sure that all leads are well
connected.
Grounded coil Locate and repair.
Unbalanced terminal voltage Check for faulty leads, connections and
transformers.
10 ABB / Low Voltage Motors / Manual 11 -2002

TROUBLE CAUSE WHAT TO DO
Motor vibrates Motor misaligned Realign.
Weak support Strengthen base.
Coupling out of balance Balance coupling.
Driven equipment unbalanced Rebalance driven equipment.
Defective bearings Replace bearings.
Bearings not in line Line up properly.
Balancing weights shifted Rebalance motor.
Contradiction between balancing of Rebalance coupling or motor
rotor and coupling
(half key-full key)
Polyphase motor running single phase Check for open circuit.
Excessive end play Adjust bearing or add shim.
I Scraping noise Fan rubbing fan cover Remove interference.
Fan striking insulation Clearfan.
Motor loose on bedplate Tighten holding bolts.
^ H Noisy operation Airgap not uniform Check and correct bracket fits or bearing.
Rotor unbalance Rebalance.
1 Hot bearings general Bent or sprung shaft Straighten or replace shaft.
Excessive belt pull Decrease belt tension.
Pulleys too far away Move pulley closer to motor bearing.
Pulley diameter too small Use larger pulleys.
Misalignment Correct by realignment of drive.
Hot bearings ball Insufficient grease Maintain proper quality of grease in bearing.
Deterioration of grease or lubricant Remove old grease, wash bearings thoroughly in
contaminated kerosene and replace with new grease.
Excess lubricant Reduce quantity of grease, bearing should not be
more than 1/2 filled.
Overloaded bearing Check alignment, side and end thrust.
Broken ball or rough races Replace bearing, first clean housing thoroughly.
ABB / Low Voltage Motors / Manual 11-2002 11

Installations-, Betriebs- und
Wartungshandbuch
Inhaltsverzeichnis
1. Allgemein 4. Wartung
2. Installation 5. Umgebungsanforderungen
3. Betrieb 6. Motor - Übersicht zur Fehlersuche
1. Allgemein Gültigkeit
Die Betriebsanleitung bezieht sich auf die nachfolgend
WICHTIG! genannten Baureihen aus dem Produktionsprogramm
Die nachstehenden Anweisungen sind genau zu befolgen von ABB. Sie gilt sowohl für die Verwendung als Motor
um die Sicherheitbei der Installation, beim Betrieb und wie auch für den Betrieb als Generator.
bei der Wartung des Motors zu gewährleisten. Alle
Personen, die mit diesen Aufgaben befaßt sind, sind auf Baureihe MT*, MBT*, MXMA,
vorliegende Anleitung hinzuweisen. Die Nichtbefolgung Baureihe M2A7M3A*, M2B7M3B*, M2C7M3C*, M2F7
der hierin enthaltenen Anweisungen kann den Verlust der M3F*, M2L7M3L*, M2M7M3M*, M2Q*, M2R7M3R*,
Gewährleistung zur Folge haben. M2V7M3V*
in den Achshöhen 56 - 400.

Konformitätserklärung Es gibt separate Handbücher für z.B. Ex-Motoren 'Low
voltage motors for hazardous areas: Installation,
Konformitätserklärungen gemäß der Niederspannungs-
operation and maintenance manual' (Low Voltage
richtlinie 73/23/EWG, geändert durch die Richtlinie 93/68
Motors/Manual for Ex-Motors).
EWG, werden gesondert herausgegeben.
Für Sonderausführungen oder spezielle Anwendungen
Die Konformitätserklärung erfüllt überdies die werden gegebenenfalls zusätzliche Hinweise benötigt.
Anforderungen einer Herstellererklärung gemäß der Zusätzliche Informationen sind verfügbar für die
Maschinenrichtlinie 98/37/EWG, Art 4.2 Annex II, sub B. folgenden Motoren:
- Rollgangs-Motoren
-Wassergekühlte Motoren
- IP 23 Motoren
- Brandgas-Entlüftungsmotoren
- Bremsmotoren

2. Installation eine Ofentemperatur von 90°C eingehalten werden,
gefolgt von einer Schlusstrocknung mit 105°C für
Eingangsprüfung 6h ... 8h.
Unmittelbar nach dem Empfang ist der Motor auf
äußerliche Beschädigungen zu untersuchen, im Etwaig vorhandene Verschiussstopfen von
Schadensfall ist der Spediteur unverzüglich zu Entwässerungsöffnungen sind während der
verständigen. Wärmebehandlung zu entfernen und ggf. vorhandene
Schließventile sind zu öffnen.
Die auf dem Leistungsschild angegebenen Daten -
insbesondere Spannung und Schaltung (Y = Stern oder Wicklungen, die mit Salzwasser in Berührung gekommen
D = Dreieck) - sind zu überprüfen. Die Lagertyp- sind, müssen in der Regel erneuert werden.
bezeichnung ist bei allen Motoren auf dem Leistungs-
schild angegeben, mit Ausnahme der kleinsten Direkteinschaltung oder Stern-Dreieck-Anlauf
Baugrößen. Der Klemmenkasten von eintourigen Standardmotoren
enthält in der Regel sechs Anschlussklemmen und
Die Motorwelle muss von Hand frei drehbar sein, zumindest eine Erdungsklemme.
gegebenenfalls angebrachte Transportsicherungen sind
zu entfernen. Die Erdung sollte vor dem Anschließen der
Versorgungsspannung im Einklang mit den jeweils
.Halten Sie die zulässigen Lagerbelastungswerte, die im gültigen Vorschriften erfolgen.
^Produktkatalog angegeben sind strikt ein.
Spannung und Anschlussart sind auf dem
Motoren mit Rollenlagern: Der Betrieb der Motoren Leistungsschild angegeben.
ohne ausreichende Radialkraft auf die Welle kann zur
Beschädigung des Rollenlagers führen. Direkteinschaltung (DOL):
Wahlweise kann Stern- (Y) oder Dreieckschaltung D
Motoren mit Schrägkugellagern: Der Betrieb des verwendet werden.
Motors ohne ausreichende Axialkraft auf die Welle in Die Angabe 660 VY, 380 VD bezeichnet beispielsweise
der vorgesehenen Richtung kann zur Beschädigung des die Anschlussart „Stern" für 660 V und „Dreieck" für 380
Schrägkugellagers führen. V.
Motoren mit Nachschmiernippeln: Stern-Dreieck-Anlauf (Y/D):

Bei Inbetriebnahme der Motoren oder nach einer Die Versorgungsspannung muß gleich der für die
längeren Lagerzeit ist mindestens die angegebene Dreieckschaltung angegebenen Spannung sein. Alle
Fettmenge einzufüllen, bis an der Fettauslassöffnung Verbindungslaschen am Klemmenblock sind zu
neues Fett austritt. entfernen.
Genauere Angaben hierzu enthält der Abschnitt
"Motoren mit Nachschmiersystem" auf der Seite 17. Bei polumschaltbaren Typen und Wechselstrom-motoren
sowie bei Sonderausführungen sind die entsprechenden
Prüfung des Isolationswiderstandes Angaben im Klemmenkasten zu beachten.
Vor der Inbetriebnahme - sowie immer dann, wenn
Hinweise auf erhöhte Feuchtigkeit vorliegen - ist der Falls die Direkteinschaltung länger als 10 Sekunden oder
Isolationswiderstand zu prüfen. Stern-Dreieck-Anlauf länger als 30 Sekunden dauern,
wenden Sie sich an ABB oder lesen Sie im Motoren-
Der Widerstand - gemessen bei 25°C mit einem Handbuch nach. (Sie finden es auch im Internet auf
Isolationsprüfer (500 V DC) - soll den nachfolgenden Seite www.abb.com/motors&drives).
* Bezugswert nicht unterschreiten:
110 MOhm (gemessen mit Megger 500 V DC) Anschlussklemmen und Drehrichtung
Bei Blick auf das antriebsseitige Wellenende (AS) dreht
WARM die Welle im Uhrzeigersinn, wenn die Phasen L1, L2, L3
Um die Gefähr eines elektrischen Schlages der Versorgungsspannung entsprechend dem Bild 1
auszuschifeßen, sind die Wicklungen unmittelbar angeschlossen sind.
nach der Messung zu entladen, • .J
Die Drehrichtung ändert sich, wenn beliebige zwei
Für erhöhte Umgebungstemperaturen ist der Anschlussleitungen vertauscht werden.
angegebene Bezugswert des Isolationswiderstandes für
jeweils 20°C zu halbieren. . Wenn der Motor mit einem drehrichtungsäbhängigen
Lüfter ausgerüstet ist, muss die Übereinstimmung der
Wenn der Bezugswert nicht erreicht wird, ist die Drehrichtung mit dem auf dem Motor angebrachten
Feuchte innerhalb der Wicklung zu groß und eine Pfeilsymbol zu überprüft werden.
Trocknung wird erforderlich. Für 12h ... 16h sollte dabei

Handhabung Die nachfolgende Tabelle - bezogen auf die
Grundausführung - näherungsweise die
Lagerung Maximalgewichte für Motoren in Abhängigkeit von der
Die Motoren sind im Innern geschlossener Räume Baugröße und dem verwendeten Gehäusewerkstoff.
trocken sowie schwingungs- und staubfrei zu lagern.
Genauere Gewichtsangaben zu den einzelnen Motoren
Ungeschützte, bearbeitete Oberflächen (Wellenenden sind bei Motoren mit einem Gewicht über 25 kg auf dem
und Flansche) sind mit Korrosionsschutzmitteln "zu Leistungsschild enthalten.
behandeln.
Aluminium Grauguss Stahl
Es wird im Interesse einer gleichmäßigen Schmierung Gewicht Add. Gewicht Gewicht
Bau-
empfohlen, die Welle regelmäßig von Hand zu drehen. größe für Bremse
kg kg kg
Etwaig vorhandene Heizelemente sollten bestromt 56 4.5 _ _
werden. 63 6 - - -
71 8 5 13 -
Die für den Betrieb von Einphasenmotoren ggf. 80 12 8 20 -
verwendeten Elektrolytkondensatoren müssen nach 90 17 10 30 -
1 - bis 2 jähriger Lagerung „formiert" werden. Nähere 100 25 16 40
Informationen erhalten Sie von ABB. 112 36 20 50
132 63 30 90
160 110 55 175
Transport -
180 160 65 250
Motoren, die mit Rollenlagern oder Schrägkugellagern 200 220 - 310 -
ausgerüstet sind, sollten während des Transports mit 225 295 - 400 -
Feststellvorrichtungen (Transportsicherungen) versehen 250 370 - 550 -
sein. 280 405 - 800 600
315 - - 1300 1000
Anheben 355 - - 2300 2200
Der Motor darf nur an den hierfür vorgesehenen 400 - - 3500 3000
Hebeösen angehoben werden, sofern in den
Anweisungen nichts anderes angegeben ist. Installation
Die Lage des Schwerpunktes kann auch bei Motoren Kühlung

gleicher Baugröße aufgrund unterschiedlicher Gemäß den einschlägigen Motornormen gelten
Leistungen, Montagevarianten oder Hilfseinrichtungen Temperaturen bis maximal 40°C (bei
Marineanwendungen +45 oder 50°C) als normale
Umgebungstemperaturen. Daher ist zu überprüfen, ob
Vor dem Anheben die Ösenschrauben bzw. die im am Motor eine ausreichende Luftströmung vorhanden
Motorgehäuse integrierten Hebeösen auf ist. Außerdem muss sichergestellt werden, dass in der
ordnungsgemäßen Zustand überprüfen. Beschädigte Nähe befindliche Anlagen, Oberflächen oder direkte
Hebeösen dürfen nicht verwendet werden. Sonneneinstrahlung keine zusätzliche Wärme-belastung
für den Motor darstellen. Weitere Informationen zu
Ösenschrauben vor dem Anheben festziehen. Falls höheren Umgebungstemperaturen und zur Kühlung sind
erforderlich die Position der Ösenschraube mit Hilfe von dem "Motoren-Handbuch" zu entnehmen oder von ABB
Unterlegscheiben anpassen. erhältlich.
Es dürfen nur geeignete Hebeeinrichtungen und Haken Fundamentierung ,|

in für die jeweiligen Hebeösen geeigneter Größe Der Käufer trägt die volle Verantwortung für Vorbereitung
verwendet werden. des Maschinenfundaments.
Es ist darauf achten, dass Hilfseinrichtungen am Motor In Metall ausgeführte Fundamente sollten einen
sowie am Motor angeschlossene Kabel nicht beschädigt korrosionsschützenden Anstrich aufweisen.
werden.
Die Fundamente sind eben und hinreichend steif
Gewichte auszuführen, um den erhöhten Kräften im
Das Gesamtgewicht der Motoren kann innerhalb einer Kurzschlussfall standzuhalten. Darüber hinaus sind die
Baugröße (Achshöhe) entsprechend der Fundamente so zu dimensionieren, dass Schwingungen
Bemessungsleistung, den unterschiedlichen Bauformen aufgrund von Resonanzen ausgeschlossen sind.
und in Abhängigkeit von etwaig vorhandenen
Zusatzbaugruppen variieren.
14 ABB / Low Voltage Motors / Manual 11-2002

Fundamentanker Neben den Anschlüssen für die Hauptwicklung und den
Die Ankerschrauben sind mit den Füßen des Motors zu Erdungsklemmen kann der Klemmenkasten Weitere
verschrauben, wobei Ausgleichsscheiben (1 mm ... Anschlussmöglichkeiten z.B. für Thermistoren,
2 mm dick) zwischen die Füße des Motors und die Stillstandsbeheizung, Bimetallschalter oder PT100
Ankerschrauben einzufügen sind. Widerstandsfühier enthalten.
Anschließend ist der Motor mit geeigneten Hilfsmitteln WARNUNG

sorgfältig auszurichten. Auch bei Stillstand des Motors könnengefährliche
Spannungen für die Versorgung von
Die Ankerschrauben können nun mit Zement vergossen Heizelementen oder für eine direkte
werden. Nach Prüfung der Ausrichtung können Wicklungsbeheizung anliegen!
gegebenenfalls Bohrungen für Positionierstifte
hergestellt werden. Anschlussbilder für etwaige Zusatzkomponenten finden
Sie im Innern des Klemmenkastens.
Entwässerungsöffnungen WARNUNG
Immer darauf achten, dass offene Kondenswasser- Bei Einphasenmotoren kann die Restladung des
löcher nach unten gerichtet sind. Kondensators auch beim Stillstand des Motors
eine elektrische Spannung über den
In extrem staubreichen Umgebungen sollten alle Motorklëmmen zur Folge haben!
Entwässerungsöffnungen verschlossen sein.
tAusrichtung Anschlüsse bei Betrieb an

Die sorgfältige Ausrichtung ist von entscheidender Frequenzumrichtern
Bedeutung für das Vermeiden von Lagerschäden, Frequenzumrichter-Antriebe verursachen höhere
Schwingungen und möglichen Brüchen der Wellenenden. Spannungsbelastungen der Wicklungen und des Motors
als eine sinusförmige Einspeisung. Sie können
Spannschienen und Riementriebe hochfrequente Wellenspannungen und Lagerströme
• Die Befestigung des Motors auf den Spannschienen verursachen. Deshalb müssen die Isolation der
erfolgt wie auf dem Bild 2. Wicklungen und der Lager des Motors und die Filter am
• Die Spannschienen sind horizontal und auf gleicher Motorausgang des Frequenzumrichters entsprechend
Höhe zu montieren. den "Selection rules for VSD applications/Insulation"
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Motorwelle parallel zur (3GZF500930-2) ausgelegt werden (auf Anfrage von
angetriebenen bzw. antreibenden Welle ausgerichtet ABB erhältlich).
ist.
• Spannen Sie den Riemen entsprechend den In drehzahlveränderbaren Antrieben muss der Motor (Pn
Herstellerangaben. > 3 0 kW) mit geschirmten symmetrischen Kabeln und
Kabelverschraubungen mit 360° Erdung (auch EMV-
WARNUNG Verschraubungen genannt) angeschlossen werden.
Das übermäßige Spannen des Antriebsriemens
Weitere Informationen können Sie dem Handbuch von
führt zur Zerstörung der Lager und kann den
ABB "Grounding and cabling of the drive system"
Bruch der Welle zur Folge haben!
(3AFY61201998) entnehmen.
Beachten Sie die maximal zulässigen Riemenkräfte
(bzw. Radialkraftbelastungen der Lager), die Sie den Beim Betrieb an einem Frequenzumrichter muss über
entsprechenden Produktkatalogen entnehmen können. die außen am Motorgehäuse vorgesehenen
Erdungsvorrichtungen eine Potentialausgleichs-
verbindung zwischen dem Motorgehäuse und der
Anschluss getriebenen Maschine hergestellt werden, sofern die
| Der Klemmenkasten befindet sich für die beiden Maschinen nicht auf einem gemeinsamen
Standardausführung auf der Oberseite des Motors und metallischen Unterbau montiert sind.
erlaubt den Kabelzugang von beiden Seiten.
Hierzu bei Motorbaugrößen > IEC 280 einen Flachleiter
Einige Motoren können als Sonderausführung mit mit 0,75 x 70 mm oder mindestens 2 Rundleiter mit 50
Klemmenkästen geliefert werden, die um 4 x 90° mm2 verwenden. Der Abstand zwischen den Rundleitern
gedreht werden können. Daneben sind Motoren mit muss dabei mindestens 150 mm betragen.
seitlich angeordnetem Klemmenkasten erhältlich.
Die Lieferbarkeit dieser Ausführungen ist aus den Diese Verbindung dient nur dem Potentialausgleich. Sie
Produktkatalogen ersichtlich. hat keine elektrische Sicherheitsfunktion. Wenn Motor
und Getriebe auf einem gemeinsamen Stahlfundament
Nicht benötigte Öffnungen im Klemmenkasten sind zu montiert sind, wird kein Potentialausgleich benötigt.
verschließen.

Potentialausgleich 3. Betrieb
Verwendung
Kabel/Rundleiter
Betriebsbedingungen
Die Motoren sind für die Verwendung innerhalb
industrieller Antriebssysteme bestimmt.
Die standardmäßigen Grenzwerte der
Umgebungstemperatur betragen -20°C... +40°C.
Die maximale Aufstellhöhe beträgt standardmäßig 1000
m über dem Meeresspiegel (N.N. bzw. MSL).
Die EMV-Vorschriften werden bei Verwendung von für
diesen Zweck zugelassenen Kabeln und Anschluss- Sicherheitshinweise
teilen erfüllt. (Siehe Anleitung für Frequenzumrichter.) Installation und Betrieb des Motors muss durch
qualifiziertes Fachpersonal erfolgen, das die
Die höchste zulässige Drehzahl eines Graugussmotors einschlägigen sicherheitsrelevanten Anforderungen
bei einem drehzahlveränderbaren Antrieb (M2BA/M3BP) kennt.
darf nicht die maximal zulässige Drehzahl gemäß der
folgenden Tabelle oder die auf das Leistungsschild Die notwendigen Sicherheitseinrichtungen für die
gestempelte Drehzahl überschreiten. Informationen über Verhütung von Unfällen bei Aufstellung und Betrieb
die höchste zulässige Drehzahl anderer Motorgrößen müssen in Übereinstimmung mit den jeweils geltenden
und Typen erhalten Sie von ABB. Die Lagerschmierung Unfallverhütungsbestimmungen vorhanden sein.
muss entsprechend den Anweisungen erfolgen.
ÄBÜMS
Bau- Drehzahl U/min KleineMôtpferi, deren Versorgungsspannung
größe 2 polig 4 polig durch, temfteraturabhängige Schalter direkt
280 3600 2600 geschaltet wird, können gegebenenfalls
315 3600 2300 selbsttStigianlaufen!
355 3600 2000
400 3600 1800 WICHTIG!
1. Nicht auf den Motor treten oder steigen!
Wenn nicht sicher ist, ob ein Motor für Frequenzum- 2. Vorsicht: auch im normalen Betrieb können an der
richterbetrieb geeignet ist, wenden Sie sich bitte an Oberfläche des Motors hohe Temperaturen
ABB. auftreten!
3. Einige Anwendungen (z.B. bei Speisung des
WARNUNG v Motors mit Frequenzumrichtern) können spezielle
Die maximale Betriebstemperatur des Hinweise erfordern!
Schmierfetts und der Lager darf nicht 4. Mit den Aufhängeösen darf ausschließlich der
überschritten werden. Motor angehoben werden.
Auswuchten Montage und Demontage

Der Rotor des Motors ist dynamisch ausgewuchtet.
Allgemein
Die Montage und Demontage der Motoren darf
Standardmäßig wurde die Auswuchtung mit halber
ausschließlich von qualifiziertem Personal
Passfeder vorgenommen; das Wellenende trägt ein
unter Verwendung geeigneter Hilfsmittel und Methoden
ROTES Klebeband mit der Aufschrift "Mit halber
ausgeführt werden. Alle Reparaturen müssen unter
Passfeder ausgewuchtet - balanced with half key".
Einhaltung der Norm IEC-60079-19 ausgeführt werden. _...
Um Schwingungen zu vermeiden, muß die
Lager ™
Kupplungshälfte oder Riemenscheibe nach dem
Die Lager sind mit besonderer Sorgfalt zu behandeln.
Einfräsen der Paßfedernut mit halber Paßfeder
Die Lager dürfen nur mit Hilfe von Ausziehwerkzeugen
ausgewuchtet werden.
demontiert und in erwärmtem Zustand oder unter
Verwendung von SpezialWerkzeug eingebaut werden.
Falls der Rotor mit voller Paßfeder ausgewuchtet worden
Der Lageraustausch wird in einer von ABB getrennt
ist, trägt das Wellenende ein GELBES Klebeband mit
erhältlichen Hinweisschrift ausführlich beschrieben.
der Aufschrift "Mit voller Paßfeder ausgewuchtet -
balanced with full key".
Anbau von Kupplungshälften und
Bei Auswuchtung ohne Paßfeder ist das Wellenende Riemenscheiben
mit BLAUEM Klebeband gekennzeichnet (Aufschrift Kupplungshälften und Riemenscheiben dürfen nur mit
„Balanced without key/ohne Passfeder geeigneter Ausrüstung und mit Hilfe von solchem
ausgewuchtet")". Werkzeug montiert werden, das eine Beschädigung der
Lager ausschließt.

Montieren Sie niemals eine Kupplungshälfte oder Baugröße Polig Betriebsstunden
Riemenscheibe durch Schläge mit dem Hammer. Bei 56-80 2-8 lebenslänglich
der Demontage darf nie ein Hebel gegen das 90-112 2-8 40000
Motorgehäuse angesetzt werden! 132 2 31000
132 4-8 40000
Montagegenauigkeit von Kupplungshälften: 160 2 23000
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sowohl der Freiraum b als auch 160 4-8 40000
die Differenz zwischen a1 und a2 jeweils kleiner als 180 2 19000
0.05 mm sind. Beachten Sie hierzu auch die Angaben 180 4-8 40000
auf dem Bild 3.
Je nach Einsatz- und Lastbedingungen; siehe hierzu den
4. Wartung betreffenden Produktekatalog.
Allgemeine Kontrolle Bei vertikal aufgestellten Motoren sind die o.g. Werte
Untersuchen Sie den Motor in regelmäßigen jeweils zu halbieren.
Abständen
Halten Sie den Motor sauber und sorgen Sie für Motoren mit Nachschmiersvstem
einen freien Kühlluftstrom
Überprüfen Sie den Zustand der Nachschmierschild und allgemeine
Wellendichtungen (z.B. V-Ring) und erneuern Sie Schmieranweisung
diese gegebenenfalls
Überprüfen Sie den Zustand aller Verbindungen
Wenn der Motor mit einem Nachschmierschild versehen
und Verbindungselemente (z.B. Schrauben)
ist, folgen Sie bitte dessen Angaben. Im übrigen gelten
Überprüfen Sie den Zustand der Lager mit dem
die in derTabelle angebenen Werte.
Gehör (ungewöhnliche Geräusche), durch
Schwingungsmessung, durch Lagertemperatur-
messung, durch Untersuchung des verbrauchten Auf dem Nachschmierschild können Schmierintervalle
Fettes oder durch SPM-Lagerüberwachung unter Berücksichtigung der Montagerichtung,
*lm Falle von Zustandsveränderungen ist Umgebungstemperatur und Drehzahl angegeben sein/
der Motor zu zerlegen, die Bauteile sind zu werden.
untersuchen und ggf. zu erneuern.
Die Lagerschmierfristen werden von ABB in erster Linie
Schmierung nach dem Gesichtspunkt der Betriebssicherheit
festgelegt. Sie werden daher nach dem L1 -Prinzip
bestimmt (d. h., bei 99 % der Motoren sind diese
Auf ausreichenden Sicherheitsabstand zu allen Fristen ausreichend).
Manuelle Schmierung Manuelle Schmierung

WARNU Schmierung bei laufendem Motor
Schmierfett kann zu Hautreizungen und - Stopfen der Fettauslassöffnung entfernen, sofern
Entzündungen der Augen führen. Befolgen Sie vorhanden.
strikt alle Sicherheits-anweisungen des - Sicherstellen, dass der Schmierkanal frei ist
Herstellers. - Die spezifizierte Fettmenge in das Lager einpressen.
- Den Motor 1-2 Stunden laufen lassen, um
überschüssiges Fett aus dem Lager zu entfernen.
Fettauslassstopfen, sofern vorgesehen, wieder
Motoren mit daueraeschmierten Lagern einsetzen.
In der Regel sind Motoren mit dauergeschmierten
|Lagern der Typen Z oder 2Z ausgestattet. Schmierung bei Stillstand des Motors
iie Bezeichnung der Lager kann den jeweiligen Die Nachschmierung sollte grundsätzlich bei laufendem
Produktkatalogen entnommen werden und sie sind, mit Motor durchgeführt werden. Falls dies nicht möglich ist,
Ausnahme der kleineren Baugrößen, auf das kann sie jedoch auch bei Stillstand erfolgen.
Leistungschild gestempelt.
- In diesem Fall zunächst nur die halbe Fettmenge
einpressen und den Motor danach einige Minuten mit
Allgemein gilt, dass für Motorgrößen bis 180 eine Volldrehzahl laufen lassen.
ausreichende Schmierung mit einem Schmierintervall - Nachdem der Motor zum Stillstand gekommen ist,
entsprechend L1 (d.h., bei 99 % der Motoren arbeiten das restliche Fett gemäß Spezifikation in das Lager
mit diesen Intervallzeiten störungsfrei) bei einer einpressen.
Umgebungstemperatur von 25°C erreicht wird. Angaben - Nach 1-2 Betriebsstunden den Fettauslassstopfen/
zum Betrieb bei Umgebungstemperaturen höher als Auslassventil, sofern vorgesehen, wieder einsetzen.
25°C enthalten die jeweiligen Produktkataloge.

Automatische Schmierung WARNUNG
Bei automatischer Schmierung muss die Fettauslass- Die maximal zulässigen Höchsttemperaturen für
Öffnung oder das Auslassventil, sofern vorhanden, Schmierfett und Lager dürfen nicht überschritten
ständig offen sein. werden.
Einige ältere Motoren können mit einem Sammler für Schmierstoffe

altes Schmierfett ausgestattet sein. Befolgen Sie die
dafür gegebenen speziellen Anweisungen.
Verwenden Sie beim gleichen Motor keine
ABB empfiehlt nur den Einsatz elektromechanischer Unterschiedlichen Schmierfette.
Systeme, wenden Sie sich zur Klärung an ABB. Nichtkompatible Schmierstoffe können
• Lagerschäden verursachen.
Bei Einsatz eines automatischen Schmiersystems
sollte die in derTabelle angegebene Schmierfettmenge Für die Nachschmierung darf nur ein speziell auf die
pro Nachschmierintervall verdoppelt werden. Schmierung von Kugellagern abgestimmtes Fett mit den
folgenden Eigenschaften verwendet werden:
Bei automatischer Schmierung von 2-poligen Motoren - Hochwertiges Fett mit Lithiumkomplexseife und
muss der Hinweis (HINWEIS!) betreffend Mineral- oder PAO-ÖI
Schmierempfehlungen für 2-polige Motoren in Kapitel - Viskosität des Basisöls 100-160 cST bei 40°C
Schmierstoffe beachtet werden. Konsistenz NLGI Grad 1.5 bis Grad 3*)
- Dauergebrauchstemperatur -30°C-+120°C • A
Schmierintervalle und Fettmenqen *) Für vertikal montierte Motoren oder in heißen \
Bau- Fett- 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900 Umgebungen wird ein steiferer NLGI Grad empfohlen.
größe menge r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
g/Lager Geeignete Fette mit den geforderten Eigenschaften sind
Kugellager von allen größeren Schmiermittelherstellen erhältlich.
Nachschmierintervalle in Betriebsstunden
112 10 10000 13000 18000 21000 25000 28000 Zusatzstoffe können empfehlenswert sein, eine
132 15 9000 11000 17000 19000 23000 26500 schriftliche Garantie, speziell für EP-Zusätze, dass die
160 25 7000 9500 14000 17000 21000 24000
180 30 6000 8000 13500 16000 20000 23000
Lager nicht beschädigt werden oder die Temperatur-
200 40 4000 6000 11000 13000 17000 21000 festigkeit des Schmierfetts gewährleistet wird, kann nur
225 50 3000 5000 10000 12500 16500 20000 der Schmierstoffhersteller geben.
250 60 2500 4000 9000 11500 15000 18000
280 70 2000» 3500» 8000 10500 14000 17000 WARNUNG
315 90 ') i) 6500 8500 12500 16000
355 120 » Von Schmierstoffen mit EP-Zusätzen wird bei
4200 6000 10000 13000
400 120 » 4200 6000 10000 13000 höhen Lagertemperaturen in den Achshöhen 280-
400 M3BP 130 « 2800 4600 8400 12000 400 abgeraten.
Rollenlager
Nachsichmierintervalle in Betriebsstunden
160 25 3500 4500 7000 8500 10500 12000 Bei Umgebungstemperaturen unter -25°C oder über
180 30 3000 4000 7000 8000 10000 11500 +55°C oder Lagertemperaturen über 110°C sind die
200 40 2000 3000 5500 6500 8500 10500 Möglichkeiten bezüglich der Verwendung geeigneter
225 50 1500 2500 5000 6000 8000 10000 Fette mit ABB abzusprechen.
250 60 1300 2200 4500 5700 7500 9000
280 70 1000" 2000" 4000 5300 7000 8500
315 90 « » 3300 4300 6000 8000 Die folgenden Hochleistungsfette können verwendet
355 120 i) 2000 3000 5000 6500 werden
400 120 » 1 2000 3000 5000 6500
400 M3BP 130 1 1400 2300 4200 6000 Esso Unirex N2, N3 or S2 (lithium complex base)
» Werte für lEC-Größen 280 bis 400 bei bestimmten Motortypen Mobil Mobilith SHC100 (lithium complex base)
(3600 und 3000 r/min), siehe nächste Seite. Shell Albida EMS 2 (lithium complex base)
SKF LGHQ 3 (lithium complex base)
Einflussfaktoren für die Schmierintervalle Klüber Klüberplex BEM 41 -132 (special lithium base)
Für vertikal montierte Motoren sind die angegebenen FAG Arcanol TEMP90 (calsium polyurea base)
Nachschmierintervalle zu halbieren. FAG Arcanol TEMP110 (lithium complex base)
Schmierintervalle für andere Schmierfette, die die

Die Schmierintervalle basieren auf einer Betriebs-
temperatur der Lager von 80°C (Umgebungstemperatur Anforderungen an die Eigenschaften erfüllen, wenden
von etwa+25°C). Sie sich zur Klärung an ABB.
Hinweis! Bei einer höheren Umgebungstemperatur
steigt entsprechend auch die Lagertemperatur. Die
angegebenen Betriebszeiten sollten für je 15°C höhere
Lagertemperatur halbiert und können für je 15°C
niedrigere Lagertemperatur verdoppelt werden.

Schmierintervalle und Mengen. 2-polige Motoren. Ersatzteile
IEC Baugrößen 280 and 400 Bei der Bestellung von Ersatzteilen sollte die
Bau- Fett- 3600 3000 vollständige Typenbezeichnung des Motors (siehe
große metige r/min r/min Leistungsschild) angegeben werden. Wenn der IVlotor mit
g/Lager einer Seriennummer gekennzeichnet ist, so ist diese
Kugellager ebenfalls anzugeben.
Nachschmierintervalle in Betriebsstundeni
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500 Neuwicklung
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500
355 M2B*,M2C* 45 1200 2000
Eine Erneuerung der Ständerwicklung sollte nur von
355 M3B* 35 1200 2000 qualifizierten Reparaturbetrieben ausgeführt werden.
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000
400 M3B* 40 1000 1600 Bei Brandgas- oder anderen Sondermotoren ist zuvor
Rollenlager Kontakt mit ABB aufzunehmen.
Nachschmierintervalle in Betriebsstundeni
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
5. Umgebungsanforderungen
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000 Geräuschpegel
355 M3B* 35 600 1000
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000 Die meisten ABB-Motoren haben einen
400 M3B* 40 500 800 Schalldruckpegel unterhalb von 82 dB(A) bezogen auf
50 Hz sinusförmige Einspeisung, Toleranz ± 3 dB(A).
HINWEIS!
Bei schneilaufenden Motoren, wie z. B. 2-poligen Die Werte der einzelnen Maschinen finden Sie im
Maschinen vom Typ M2BA/M3-355 und 400, bei denen
entsprechenden Produktkatalog.
der Drehzahlfaktor (Dm x n, wobei Dm =
durchschnittlicher Lagerdurchmesser, mm; Die Schalldruckpegel für 60 Hz mit sinusförmiger
n = Drehzahl, min-1) höher ist als 400 000, sind Einspeisung und mit nicht-sinusförmiger Einspeisung
Hochdrehzahlfette einzusetzen. In diesen Fällen können erhalten Sie auf Anfrage von ABB.
die folgenden Fette oder andere Fette mit
vergleichbaren Eigenschaften verwendet werden: Die Schalldruckpegel für alle Maschinen mit
Fremdkühlsystem und für die Serien M2F7M3F*, M2L*/
• FAG L69 (polyurea base) M 3 L \ M2R7M3R*, und M2BJ/M2LJ sind in separaten
• Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (polyurea base) Handbücher angegeben.
• SKF LGHP2 (polyurea base)
Wenn bei einem Wechsel der Fettsorte Unsicherheit

bezüglich der Verträglichkeit besteht, prüfen Sie mit
dem Hersteller, ob die Qualität den oben angegebenen
Schmierfetten entspricht, oder wenden Sie sich zur
Klärung an ABB.
Betrieb an Frequenzumrichtern
Hochtouriger Betrieb, z.B. bei Applikationen mit
Frequenzumrichtern, oder niedrige Drehzahlen mit
schweren Lasten erfordern verkürzte Schmierintervaile.
Wenden Sie sich in diesen Fällen an ABB.
Bei doppelter Drehzahl ist ein verkürztes

Schmierintervall auf ca. 40 % derTabeiienwerte typisch.
Die zulässige Höchstdrehzahi des Motors darf

nicht überschritten werden.
Die Eignung der Lager für den Betrieb mit hohen

Drehzahlen muss geprüft werden.

In den folgenden Anleitungen kann nicht auf sämtliche technische Einzelheiten oder Unterschiede zwischen den
verschiedenen Motoren oder alle bei der Installation, beim Betrieb oder bei der Wartung möglicherweise auftretenden
Situationen eingegangen werden. Anfragen bezüglich weitergehender Informationen richten Sie bitte an die nächste
ABB-Vertriebsstelle.
Motor-Fehlersuchtabelle
Wartungs- und etwaige Fehlersuchmaßnahmen am Motor dürfen nur von hierfür qualifiziertem Personal und mit
geeigneten Werkzeugen und Hilfsmitteln durchgeführt werden.
FEHLER URSACHE MASSNAHMEN

Motor startet nicht Sicherungen durchgebrannt Neue Sicherungen des richtigen Typs und mit
entsprechenden Bemessungsdaten einsetzen.
Überlastauslösung Überlast in Anlasser prüfen und zurücksetzen.
Fehlerhafte Stromversorgung Überprüfen, ob die Stromversorgung den Angaben
auf dem Motorleistungsschild entspricht und für
den jeweiligen Lastfaktor geeignet ist.
Fehlerhafte Netzanschlüsse Anschlüsse anhand des mit dem Motor gelieferten
Schaltplans überprüfen.
Stromkreisunterbrechung in Wicklung Erkennbar an einem Summen beim Einschalten
oderSteuerschalter des Schalters. Verdrahtung auf lockere Anschlüsse
überprüfen. Kontrollieren, ob alle Kontakte
schließen.
Mechanischer Fehler Überprüfen, ob Motor und Antrieb frei drehen. Lager
und Schmierung kontrollieren.
Ständerkurzschluß Erkennbar an durchgebrannten Sicherungen. Der
Motor muß neu gewickelt werden.
Schlechter Anschluß an Ständer- Lagerschilde abnehmen; mit Prüflampe lokalisieren.
wicklung
Defekter Rotor Auf gebrochene Stäbe oder Endringe kontrollieren.
Motor überlastet Last reduzieren.
Motor läuft nicht Phasenausfall Leitungen auf offene Phase kontrollieren.
Falsche Anwendung Nach Rücksprache mit dem Hersteller geeigneten
Typ bzw. geeignete Baugröße verwenden.
Überlast Last reduzieren.
Unterspannung Kontrollieren, ob die auf dem Leistungsschild
angegebene Spannung eingehalten wird. Anschluß
überprüfen.
Offener Stromkreis Durchgebrannte Sicherungen; Uberlastrelais,
Ständer und Drucktasten kontrollieren.
Motor läuft zunächst Netzausfall Auf lose Anschlüsse zum Netz, zu den
und bleibt dann stehen Sicherungen und zur Steuerung überprüfen.
Motor läuft nicht hoch Falsche Anwendung Durch Rücksprache mit dem Lieferanten
geeigneten Typ bestimmen.
Unterspannung an Motorklemmen Höhere Spannung oder höhere Transformatorstufe
durch Netzspannungsabfall verwenden. Anschlüsse überprüfen. Leiter auf
angemessenen Querschnitt überprüfen.
Anlauf last zu hoch Auslegung des Motors bezüglich Anlauf last
überprüfen.
Gebrochene Läuferstäbe oder Kontrollieren, ob in der Nähe der Ringe Risse
lockerer Läufer vorhanden sind. Möglicherweise wird ein neuer
Läufer benötigt, da eine dauerhafte Reparatur in
diesem Fall meist nicht möglich ist.
Offener Primärkreis Fehler mit Prüfgerät lokalisieren und beheben.
Motor läuft zu langsam Last zu hoch Last reduzieren.
hoch und/oder zieht Spannung beim Anlauf zu niedrig Auf zu hohen Widerstand überprüfen.
einen zu hohen Strom Angemessenen Leiterquerschnitt verwenden.
Defekter Käfigläufer Neuen Läufer einbauen.
Netzspannung zu niedrig Spannungversorgung klären
20 ABB / Low Voltage Motors / Manual -11 -2002

FEHLER URSACHE MASSNAHMEN
Falsche Drehrichtung Falsche Phasenfolge Anschlüsse am Motor bzw. an der Schalttafel
vertauschen.
Motor überhitzt bei Überlast Last reduzieren.
Betrieb unter Last Belüftungsöffnungen Belüftungsöffnungen säubern und kontrollieren,
sind möglicherweise durch ob ein kontinuierlicher Luftstrom der Motor
Schmutz verstopft kühlt.
und verhindern eine ordnungs-
gemäße Kühlung des Motors
Eine Motorphase ist möglicherweise Kontrollieren, ob alle Anschlußleitungen richtig
ausgefallen angeschlossen sind.
Erdschluß Fehler lokalisieren und beheben.
Unsymmetrische Klemmenspannung Anschlußleitungen, Anschlüsse und
Transformatoren auf Fehler überprüfen.
Motorschwingungen Motor schlecht ausgerichtet Motor nachrichten.
Mangelnde Stabilität des Unterbaus Unterbau verstärken.
Unwucht in Kupplung Kupplung auswuchten.
Unwucht in getriebener Anlage Getriebene Anlage neu auswuchten.
Defekte Lager Lager austauschen.
Lager schlecht ausgerichtet Lager ausrichten.
Auswuchtgewichte verschoben Motor neu auswuchten.
Wuchtung von Läufer und Kupplung Kupplung oder Motor neu auswuchten.
nicht aufeinander abgestimmt
(Halbkeil-bzw. Vollkeilwuchtung)
Mehrphasenmotor läuft einphasig Auf offenen Stromkreis überprüfen.
Axialspiel zu groß Lager nachstellen oder Feder-Ausgleichsscheibe
einlegen.
Geräusche Lüfter reibt an Lüfterkappe Ausreichenden Abstand herstellen.
Lüfter reibt an Isolierung Lüfterweg frei machen.
Lockerer Sitz auf Grundplatte Fußschrauben anziehen.
Betriebsgeräusch zu laut Luftspalt nicht gleichmäßig Lagerschildbefestigung bzw. Lager überprüfen und
entsprechend korrigieren.
Unwucht im Läufer Neu auswuchten.
Lagertemperatur zu hoch Welle verbogen oder beschädigt Welle richten oder austauschen.
Riemenzug zu stark Riemenspannung reduzieren.
Riemenscheiben zu weit entfernt Riemenscheibe näher am Motorlager anordnen.
Durchmesser der Riemenscheiben Größere Riemenscheiben verwenden.
zu klein
Schlechte Ausrichtung Durch Nachrichten des Antriebs korrigieren.
Unzureichendes Schmierfett Angemessene Qualität des im Lager vorhandenen
Schmierfetts sicherstellen.
Qualität des Schmierfetts Altes Schmierfett entfernen, Lager gründlich in
beeinträchtigt oder Schmiermittel Kerosin waschen und mit neuem Fett schmieren.
verschmutzt
Überschüssiges Schmiermittel Schmiermittelmenge verringern; das Lager sollte
maximal zur Hälfte gefüllt sein.
Lager überlastet Ausrichtung, Radial- und Axialschub überprüfen.
Defekte Kugel oder rauhe Laufbahnen Lager austauschen; vor dem Einbau des neuen
Lagers das Lagergehäuse gründlich reinigen.
ABB / Low Voltage Motors / Manual 11 -2002 21

Manuel d'installation, d'exploitation
et de maintenance
Sommaire
1. Généralités 4. Maintenance
2. Installation 5. Contraintes d'environnement
3. Exploitation 6. Localisation des défauts
1. Généralités Domaine d'application

Cette notice technique s'applique aux machines
NOTA! électriques ABB de types suivants, utilisés en modes
Le respect des consignes de cette notice garantit une moteur et générateur.
installation, une exploitation et une maintenance sûres
et appropriées du moteur. Le personnel chargé de Séries MT*, MBT*, MXMA,
l'installation, l'exploitation ou la maintenance du moteur Séries M2A7M3A*, M2B7M3B*, M2C7M3C*. M2F7
devra en être instruit. Le non respect de ces consignes M3F*, M2L7M3L*, M2M7M3M*, M2Q*, M2R7M3R*,
peut entraîner l'annulation de la garantie. M2V7M3V*
Déclaration de conformité En hauteurs d'axe 56 - 400.
Une notice technique séparée existe pour les autres

Les déclarations de conformité au titre de la directive types de moteurs, comme par exemple les moteurs de
Basse Tension 73/23/CEE modifiée par la directive 93/ sécurité Ex: « Moteurs basse tension pour atmosphères
68 CEE sont fournies séparément avec chaque explosives: Manuel d'installation, d'exploitation et de
machine. maintenance » (réf. Low Voltage Motors/Manual for Ex-
motors).
La déclaration de conformité satisfait également les
exigences du certification d'incorporation au titre de la Des consignes supplémentaires sont nécessaires pour
directive Machine 98/37/CEE, Art 4.2 Annex II, sub B. certains types de machine en raison de spécificités
d'application et/ou de considérations de conception. Des
consignes supplémentaires sont disponibles pour les
moteurs suivants:
- moteurs pour table à rouleaux
- moteurs refroidis à l'eau
- moteurs de protection IP 23
- moteurs de désenfumage
- moteurs freins

2. Installation de 90°C pendant 12 à 16 heures et ensuite à 105°C
pendant 6 à 8 heures.
Mise en service (premier démarrage) Pendant le séchage, vous devez ouvrir la boîte à
bornes et retirez les éventuels obturateurs des trous de
Contrôles de réception purge et autres orifices.
A la réception, vérifiez l'état de la machine ; tout
dommage doit être signalé immédiatement au Les enroulements imprégnés d'eau de mer doivent
transporteur par réserves d'usage. normalement être rebobinés.
Vérifiez toutes les données de la plaque signalétique, Démarrage direct ou démarrage étoile/triangle
plus particulièrement la tension et le mode de couplage La boîte à bornes des machines monovitesse standard
des enroulements (étoile ou triangle). Le type de renferme normalement 6 bornes pour les câbles venant
roulement est spécifié sur la plaque signalétique des du bobinage et au moins une borne de terre.
moteurs, à l'exception de ceux de faible hauteur d'axe.
La mise à la terre doit être réalisée conformément à la
Démontez l'éventuel dispositif d'immobilisation du rotor réglementation en vigueur avant le branchement de la
(protection pendant le transport) et tournez l'arbre à la machine sur l'alimentation réseau.
main pour vérifier que sa rotation s'effectue sans
entrave.
La tension et le mode de couplage sont gravés sur la
plaque signalétique du moteur.
Ne pas dépasser les valeurs de charge admissibles des
roulements spécifiées dans le catalogue produit. Démarrage direct sur le réseau:
Possibilité de couplage Y ou D.
Moteurs dotés de roulements à rouleaux: la rotation Ex., 660 VY, 380 VD désigne un couplage Y pour 660 V
du moteur sans charge radiale appliquée à l'arbre est et un couplage D pour 380 V.
susceptible d'endommager le roulement à rouleaux.
Démarrage étoile/triangle (Y/D):
Moteurs dotés de roulements à contact oblique: la En couplage D, la tension d'alimentation doit être égale
rotation du moteur sans charge axiale de direction à la tension nominale de ia machine.
adéquate appliquée à l'arbre est susceptible Retirez tous les contacts de pontage du bornier.
d'endommager le roulement à contact oblique.
Pour les machines deux vitesses, monophasées et
Moteurs dotés de graisseurs: spéciales, les raccordements électriques doivent
Lors du premier démarrage du moteur, ou après un respecter les instructions figurant à l'intérieur de la boîte
stockage prolongé du moteur, vous devez injecter une à bornes.
quantité suffisante de la graisse spécifiée jusqu'à ce
que de la graisse neuve s'écoule par le trou
Si le démarrage direct sur le réseau dure plus de 10
d'évacuation.
secondes ou le démarrage Y/D plus de 30 secondes,
contactez ABB ou consultez le document « Le guide
Pour des détails, cf. section < Lubrification manuelle » moteur » (également disponible sur le site Internet
page 27. www.abb.com/motors&drives).
Mesure de la résistance d'isolement Ordre des phases et sens de rotation

La résistance d'isolement du moteur doit être mesurée Le sens de rotation de l'arbre est le sens horaire vu
avant sa mise en service et en particulier si les côté accouplement du moteur, pour un ordre de phases
enroulements sont susceptibles d'être humides. L1, L2, L3 aux bornes tel qu'illustré à la figure 1.
La résistance, mesurée à 25°C, doit être supérieure à la
valeur de référence, à savoir 10 Mohm (mesurée avec Pour inverser le sens de rotation, permutez le
un ohmmètre de 500 Vcc.) raccordement de deux conducteurs, au choix.
ATTENTION Si la machine est dotée d'un ventilateur unidirectionnel,

Déchargez les enroulements dès la mesure vérifiez que celui-ci tourne effectivement dans le sens
terminée pour prévenir tout risque de choc indiqué par la flèche figurant sur le moteur.
électrique.
Manutention
La valeur de référence de la résistance d'isolement est
réduite de moitié chaque fois que la température
Stockage
ambiante augmente de 20°C.
La machine doit toujours être stockée dans un local
fermé, à l'abri de l'humidité et de la poussière, et
Si vous n'obtenez pas la valeur de résistance de
exempt de vibrations.
référence, les enroulements sont trop humides. Ils
doivent alors être séchés en étuve, à une température

Les surfaces usinées non protégées (bouts d'arbre et
brides) doivent être recouvertes d'une protection Aluminium Fonte Acier
anticorrosion. Hauteur Masse Ajouter Masse Masse
d'axe kg pourfrein kg kg
Nous préconisons de tourner l'arbre à la main à -
56 4.5
intervalles réguliers pour prévenir tout écoulement de
63 6 - - -
graisse. 71 -
8 5 13
80 12 8 20 -
Si le moteur est doté de résistances de réchauffage, il 90 17 10 30 -
est préférable de les mettre sous tension. 100 25 16 40
112 36 20 50 -
Les condensateurs électrolytiques, éventuellement 132 63 30 90 -
intégrés aux moteurs monophasés, doivent être 160 110 55 175 -
« réactivés » après une période de stockage prolongée 180 160 65 250 -
(1 à 2 ans). 200 220 - 310 -
Pour en savoir plus, contactez ABB. 225 295 - 400 -
250 370 - 550 -
280 405 - 800 600
Transport 315 - - 1300 1000
Pendant le transport ou tout déplacement, le rotor des 355 - - 2300 2200
moteurs dotés de roulements à rouleaux cylindriques 400 - - 3500 3000
et/ou à contact oblique doit être immobilisé par un
dispositif spécial.
Installation
Levage
Le moteur doit être soulevé uniquement par ses
anneaux de levage, sauf spécification particulière autre Refroidissement
complémentaire dans notice à part. La température ambiante normale ne doit pas dépasser
40°C (moteurs pour application marine +45 ou +50°C) •
Le centre de gravité des moteurs de taille identique pour respecter les valeurs normalisées. Vérifiez que la
peut varier en fonction de leur puissance, de leur circulation d'air est suffisante. Assurez vous qu'aucun
disposition de montage et des auxiliaires montés. équipement à proximité, qu'aucune surface ou qu'aucun
rayonnement direct du soleil ne chauffent le moteur.
Pour en savoir plus sur les températures ambiantes
Vérifiez l'état des boulons ou des anneaux de levage
supérieures ou le refroidissement, cf. « Le guide
intégrés à la carcasse du moteur. Les anneaux de
moteur » ou contactez ABB.
levage endommagés ne doivent pas être utilisés.
Les boulons des anneaux doivent être serrés avant de Fondations

procéder au levage. Au besoin, la position de chaque La préparation du support de fixation (fondations) du
boulon sera ajustée au moyen de rondelles appropriées. moteur incombe entièrement à l'acheteur.
Vérifiez la compatibilité de l'engin de levage et de la Les supports métalliques doivent être traités
taille des crochets pour les anneaux de levage. anticorrosion.
Veillez à ne pas endommager les auxiliaires et les Les fondations doivent être de niveau et suffisamment
câbles fixés au moteur. rigides pour encaisser les effets des courts-circuits.
Elles doivent être conçues pour prévenir les vibrations
résultant des phénomènes de résonance.
Masse des machines
La masse totale des machines de même hauteur d'axe Visserie (éléments de fixation)
peut varier selon leur puissance, leur disposition de
Boulonnez les éléments de fixation aux pattes du
montage et les auxiliaires montés. moteur et insérez une cale de 1 à 2 mm d'épaisseur
entre chaque élément et les pattes.
Le tableau suivant donne la masse maxi approximative
des machines en exécution de base et en fonction du
Procédez à l'alignement du moteur selon les méthodes
matériau de la carcasse.
appropriées. Scellez les supports de fixation avec du
béton, vérifiez l'alignement et percez les trous pour les
La masse de chaque moteur figure sur sa plaque goupilles de positionnement.
signalétique, à l'exception des faibles hauteurs d'axe.

Trous de purge ATTENTION . ' • ' « •; r- \ ' y -
Vous devez toujours vous assurer que les trous de La charge,du çondensafeurdesmoteurs ;
purge ouverts sont dirigés vers le bas. monophasés peut entretenir une tension sur les
bornes' d'âlimëntâtioh, rriêrrie sï le moteur a atteint
l'arrêt, v •:.•• ?j - <• •••.. > ••• • g -' •
Dans les ambiances extrêmement poussiéreuses, tous
les trous de purge doivent être fermés.
Raccordement d'un variateur de vitesse
Alignement Les variateurs de vitesse peuvent imposer aux
enroulements du moteur des niveaux de tension
L'alignement doit être parfait pour éviter toute
supérieurs à ceux délivrés parun réseau d'alimentation
détérioration des roulements, les vibrations et les
sinusoïdal et induire des tensions dans l'arbre et des -
ruptures éventuelles des bouts d'arbre.
courants de palier haute fréquence. Par conséquent, le
bobinage et l'isolation des roulements du moteur ainsi
Glissières et entraînements à courroie
que le filtre disposé à la sortie du convertisseur doivent
• Fixez le moteur sur les glissières comme illustré à la
figure 2. être dimensionnés conformément aux spécifications du
• Disposez les glissières horizontalement à la même document "Selection rules for VSD applications/
hauteur. Insulation" (3GZF500930-2), disponible sur demande
• Assurez-vous que l'arbre moteur est parallèle à l'arbre auprès d'ABB.
entraîné ou entraînant.
• La tension des courroies doit correspondre aux Dans les entraînements à vitesse variable, le moteur
valeurs prescrites par le fabricant. (Pn > 30 kW) doit être raccordé en utilisant un câble
symétrique blindé et des presse-étoupes assurant une
continuité de masse sur 360° (également appelés
ATTENTION presse-étoupes CEM). Pour en savoir plus, cf. document
Une courroie trop tendue peut endommager les ABB "Grounding and cabling of the drive system"
roulements et provoquer la rupture de l'arbre. (3AFY61201998).
Ne pas dépasser les valeurs de tension maxi des
Dans les applications à vitesse variable avec
courroies et vérifiez que ces valeurs sont compatibles
convertisseur de fréquence, la mise à la terre externe
avec les efforts radiaux admissibles par les paliers
de la carcasse du moteur est nécessaire pour assurer
figurant dans les catalogues produits correspondants.
l'équipotentialité entre la carcasse du moteur et la
machine entraînée, sauf si les deux machines sont
Raccordements montées sur le même support métallique.
Les machines de conception standard sont fournies
avec la boîte à bornes montée sur le dessus et les Pour les moteurs de hauteur d'axe > CEI 280, utilisez
entrées de câbles sur les deux côtés. un conducteur plat de 0.75 x 70 mm ou au moins deux
conducteurs ronds de 50 mm2. Les conducteurs ronds
Certaines machines sont disponibles avec la boîte à doivent être placés au moins à 150 mm l'un de l'autre.
bornes montée sur le dessus et réorientable 4 x 90°, et
d'autres machines avec la boîte à bornes montée sur le Cette mise à la terre n'assure aucune fonction de
côté. sécurité électrique; elle sert.à réaliser l'équipotentialité
La disponibilité de ces solutions est décrite dans les des masses. Lorsque.le moteur et le réducteur sont tous
catalogues produits. les deux montés sur un même support en acier, cette
équipotentialité n'est pas nécessaire.
Les entrées de câbles non utilisées doivent être
obturées. Equipotentiatlité
En plus des bornes principales pour les câbles venant
du bobinage et la borne de terre, la boîte à bornes peut
contenir des raccordements pour des thermistances,
des résistances de réchauffage, des contacts
bimétalliques ou des sondes à résistance PT100.
ATTENTION
Même avec le moteur à l'arrêt, la boîte à bornes
peut être soùs tension pour leè résistances de La conformité CEM sera réalisée en utilisant des câbles
réchauffage ou le réchauffage direct des et une connectique de type homologué (cf. manuels des
enroulements. • • ; convertisseurs de fréquence.)
Les schémas de raccordement des auxiliaires se

trouvent dans le couvercle de la boîte à bornes.

La vitesse de rotation maxi admissible d'un moteur Les dispositifs de sécurité obligatoires pour la
fonte commandé en vitesse variable (M2BA/M3BP) ne prévention des accidents sur les sites d'installation et
doit pas dépasser les vitesses maxi admissibles du d'exploitation doivent être mis à disposition,
tableau suivant ou la vitesse gravée sur la plaque conformément à la réglementation en vigueur.
signalétique. Pour en savoir plus sur la vitesse de
rotation maxi admissible pour d'autres tailles et types ATTENTION • , ; ; , > -,
;
de moteurs, contactez ABB. La lubrification des Les petits moteurs dont le courant d'alimentation
roulements doit se faire selon la procédure décrite plus I estdirectement établi par des interrupteurs (
loin. thermosensibles peuvent démarrer ] ,
âutomatiquement.' " '' ' • î " *
Hauteur Vitesse tr/min
d'axe 2 pôles 4 pôles Règles à respecter
280 3600 2600 1. Ne pas prendre appui ni monter sur la machine.
315 3600 2300 2. Au toucher, la température de l'enveloppe extérieure
355 3600 2000 de la machine peut sembler très élevée, alors que
celui-ci fonctionne correctement.
400 3600 1800
3. Certains modes de fonctionnement spéciaux des
En cas de doute sur la compatibilité du moteur et du machines exigent la mise en œuvre de consignes
variateur de vitesse, contactez ABB. particulières (ex., alimentation par convertisseur de
fréquence).
ATTENTION :\ ' \ ): ; ; > i 4. Les anneaux de levage ne doivent servir qu'à
Ne p^s dépasser la température maxi de •:'. '••' soulever le moteur seul. Ils ne doivent en aucun cas (
fonctionnement de là graissé etdes roulements. servir à soulever le moteur lorsqu'il est fixé à un
autre équipement.
Equilibrage Montage et démontage
Le rotor de la machine est équilibré dynamiquement. Généralités

Le montage et le démontage des machines doivent être
En standard, l'équilibrage a été réalisé avec une demi-
réalisés par un personnel qualifié en utilisant les outils
clavette et l'arbre porte une étiquette de couleur
et les méthodes de travail appropriés. Toutes les
ROUGE avec la mention "Balanced with half key".
réparations doivent être effectuées conformément à la
normeCEl-60079-19.
Pour prévenir les vibrations, la poulie ou le demi-
accouplement doit être équilibré avec une demi-clavette
Roulements
après usinage de la rainure de clavette.
Les roulements doivent faire l'objet d'une attention
particulière. Ils doivent être démontés avec un
En cas d'équilibrage avec une clavette entière, l'arbre
extracteur et remontés à chaud ou avec des outils
porte une étiquette de couleur JAUNE, avec la
spéciaux prévus à cet effet. La procédure de
mention "Balanced with full key".
remplacement des roulements fait l'objet d'une notice à
part disponible auprès d'ABB.
En cas d'équilibrage sans clavette, l'arbre porte une
étiquette de couleur BLEUE avec la mention
Mise en place des demi-accouplements et
"Balanced without key".
poulies
Les demi-accouplements et les poulies seront montés à
3. Exploitation l'aide de dispositifs et outils adaptés pour ne pas
Utilisation endommager les roulements.
Conditions d'exploitation • Ne jamais utiliser un marteau pour mettre un demi- '

Les machines sont destinées à des applications accouplement ou une poulie en place et ne jamais les
industrielles. retirer en utilisant un levier prenant appui sur la
Plage normale de températures ambiantes: -20° à carcasse du moteur.
+40°C.
Altitude maxi : 1000 m au-dessus du niveau de la mer. Précision de montage du demi-accouplement:
Vérifiez que le jeu b est inférieur à 0.05 mm et que
Sécurité l'écart entre ai et a2 est également inférieur à 0.05 mm.
La machine doit être installée et exploitée par un Cf. figure 3.
personnel qualifié instruit des règles de sécurité
applicables.

4. Maintenance Moteurs équipés de graisseurs
Maintenance et lubrification Plaque de lubrification et procédure générale de

lubrification
Entretien
Vérifiez l'état de la machine à intervalles Si la machine comprend une plaque de lubrification,
réguliers. respectez les valeurs indiquées.
La machine doit toujours être propre et
correctement ventilée. Sur la plaque de lubrification, les intervalles de
Vérifiez l'état des joints de l'arbre (ex., joints Væ- lubrification en fonction du montage, de la température
ring), au besoin, remplacez-les. ambiante et de la vitesse de rotation peuvent être
Vérifiez l'état des raccordements et du montage, définis.
ainsi que les vis de fixation.
Vérifiez l'état des roulements: bruit anormal, Pour ABB, le respect des intervalles de lubrification des
vibrations, température, aspect de la graisse
roulements est un gage de fiabilité. C'est pour cette
souillée (utilisation éventuelle d'un dispositif de
type SPM de surveillance en continu de l'état des raison que nous appliquons le principe L1.
roulements et du comportement vibratoire des
machines). Lubrification manuelle
* En cas d'évolution anormale, démontez la Lubrification avec le moteur en marche
machine, vérifiez l'état des pièces et - Ouvrez les orifices d'évacuation de la graisse si le
remplacez les pièces défectueuses. moteur en est doté.
- Assurez-vous que le conduit de lubrification est
Lubrification ouvert
- Injectez la quantité spécifiée de graisse dans le
ATTENTION roulement.
Attention à toutes les pièces en rotation ! - Faites tourner le moteur pendant 1 à 2 heures pour
évacuer le trop-plein de graisse. Refermez les orifices
ATTENTION d'évacuation de la graisse si le moteur en est doté.
La graisse est susceptible de provoquer une
irritation de la peau et une inflammation des yeux. Lubrification avec le moteur à l'arrêt
Respectez les précautions d'utilisation ;du : • La lubrification se fait normalement moteur en marche.
fabricant. Si cela n'est pas possible, le moteur peut être arrêté.
- Dans ce cas, commencez par injecter la moitié de
quantité de graisse et faites tourner le moteur à
Machines avec roulements graissés à vie vitesse maxi pendant quelques minutes.
Les roulements sont généralement des roulements - Après avoir arrêté le moteur, injectez le reste de
graissés à vie de types Z ou 2Z. graisse dans le roulement.
Les types de roulements sont spécifiés dans les - Après avoir fait tourner le moteur pendant 1 à 2
catalogues produits correspondants et sur la plaque heures, refermez les orifices d'évacuation de la
signalétique des moteurs, à l'exception de ceux de graisse si le moteur en est doté.
faibles hauteurs d'axe.
Lubrification automatique
A titre indicatif, intervalles moyens de lubrification En cas de lubrification automatique, les orifices
(selon le principe L1 : 99 % des moteurs satisfont cette d'évacuation de la graisse s'ils sont prévus doivent être
périodicité) à température ambiante de 25°C pour définitivement ouverts.
moteurs de tailles inférieures ou égales à 180. Pour des
applications avec température ambiante supérieure à
Certains moteurs peuvent être équipés d'un collecteur
25°C, se repporter aux catalogues produits respectifs.
de graisse usagée. Consultez les consignes spéciales
fournies avec l'équipement.
Hauteur d'axe Pôles Heures de fonctionnement
56-80 2-8 pour la vie Nous conseillons exclusivement l'utilisation de
90-112 2-8 40000 systèmes électromécaniques, contactez ABB.
132 2 31000
132 4-8 40000
Les quantités de graisse du tableau par intervalle de
160 2 23000 lubrification doivent être multipliées par deux si un
160 4-8 40000 système de lubrification automatique est utilisé.
.180 2 19000
180 . 4-8 40000
Pour les moteurs 2 pôles avec lubrification
automatique, les conseils (NOTA I) de lubrification pour
En fonction de l'application et des caractéristiques de
les moteurs 2 pôles au paragraphe « Lubrifiants »
charge, cf. catalogue produit correspondant.
doivent être suivis.
Ces intervalles de lubrification sont réduits de moitié
pour les machines à arbre vertical.
Intervalles de lubrification et quantités de lubrifiant Pour une relubrification, seules les graisses spéciales
Hauteur Qtéde 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900 pour roulements à billes présentant les propriétés
d'axe graisse tr/min tr/min tr/min tr/min tr/min tr/min suivantes doivent être utilisées :
g/roulem. - graisse de qualité supérieure à base de savon lithium
Roulements à billes complexe et d'huile minérale ou huile synthétique PAO
Intervalles de lubrification en heures de - viscosité de l'huile de base entre 100 et 160 cST à
fonctionnement
40°C
112 10 10000 13000 18000 21000 25000 28000
132 15 9000 11000 17000 19000 23000 26500 - consistance (échelle NLG11.5 - 3 *)
160 25 7000 9500 14000 17000 21000 24000 - Températures d'utilisation : -30°C - +120°C, en continu.
180 30 6000 8000 13500 16000 20000 23000
200 40 4000 6000 11000 13000 17000 21000 *) Pour les moteurs à arbre vertical ou exploité en
225 50 3000 5000 10000 12500 16500 20000 ambiance chaude, une consistance NLGI supérieure
250 60 2500 4000 9000 11500 15000 18000
280 70 2000" 3500» 8000 10500 14000 17000
est préconisée.
315 90 » i) 6500 8500 12500 16000
355 120 i) i) 4200 6000 10000 13000 Des graisses aux propriétés énoncées sont proposées
400 120 i) 1) 4200 6000 10000 13000 par les principaux fabricants de lubrifiants.
400 M3BP 130 'I i) 2800 4600 8400 12000
Roulements ài rouleaux Des additifs sont recommandés, mais une garantie
Intervalles de lubrification en heures de - écrite doit être obtenue auprès du fabricant de
fonctionnement
lubrifiants, tout particulièrement pour ce qui concerne .
160 25 3500 4500 7000 8500 10500 12000
180
les additifs EP, stipulant que les additifs (
30 3000 4000 7000 8000 10000 11500
200 40 2000 3000 5500 6500 8500 10500 n'endommagent pas les roulements ou les propriétés
225 50 1500 2500 5000 6000 8000 10000 des lubrifiants à la températures de fonctionnement.
250 60 1300 2200 4500 5700 7500 9000
280 70 1000» 2000'! 4000 5300 7000 8500
315 90 y i) 3300 4300 6000 8000 ;
ATTENTION ':• i :
355 120 » i) 2000 3000 5000 6500 l e s lubrifiants contenant des additifs ËP sont
400 120 i) '1 2000 3000 5000 6500
y
déconseillés'pourlès terffpératufes déroulements
400 M3BP 130 1) 1400 2300 4200 6000
élevées, en hauteurs d'axe 280-400. ; -.
') Valeurs pour tailles normalisées cei 280 a 400 et certain types de
moteurs (3600 et 3000 tr/min), voir tableau suivant.
Si la température ambiante est inférieure à -25°C ou
Facteurs influençant les intervalles de lubrification supérieure à +55°C, ou si la température des
Les intervalles de lubrification du tableau seront réduits roulements est supérieure à 110°C, consultez ABB pour
de moitié pour des machines à arbre vertical. le choix du type de graisse approprié.
Les intervalles de lubrification s'entendent pour une Les graisses hautes performances suivantes peuvent
température de fonctionnement-des roulements de 80°C être utilisées
(température ambiante d'environ +25°).
Nota ! : Toute augmentation de la température ambiante Esso Unirex N2, N3 or S2 (savon lithium complexe)
Mobil Mobilith SHC100 (savon lithium complexe)
augmente d'autant la température des roulements. Les
Shell Albida EMS 2 (savon lithium complexe)
intervalles seront réduits de moitié pour chaque SKF LGHQ 3 (savon lithium complexe)
augmentation de 15°C de la température des Klüber Klüberplex BEM 41-132 (savon lithium spécial)
roulements et peuvent être doublés pour chaque FAG Arcanol TEMP90 (savon calcium
réduction de 15°C de la température des roulements. polycarbamide)
• FAG Arcanol TEMP110 (savon lithium complexe)
ATTENTION ?: Les intervalles de lubrification pour d'autres graisses |

Ne jamais dépasser la température maxi.de .-.•• : aux propriétés requises, contactez ABB.
fonctionnement de la graisse et des roulements.
Lubrifiants
ATTENTION
Ne pas mélanger différents types de graisse.
Des lubrifiants non miscibles peuvent
endommager les roulements.

Intervalles de lubrification et quantités de lubrifiant- Pièces de rechange
moteurs 2 pôles, hauteurs d'axe (CEI) 280 et 400 Lors de toute commande de pièces de rechange, vous
Hauteur Qléde 3600 3000 devez fournir la référence complète et toutes les
d'axe tr/min tr/min spécifications de la machine figurant sur sa plaque
g/roulem. signalétique.
Roulements à billes Si un numéro de série est indiqué, il doit également être
Intervalles de lubrification en heures de fourni.
fonctionnement
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500 Rebobinage
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000
355 M3B* 35 1200 2000 Le rebobinage doit toujours être réalisé dans un atelier
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000 spécialisé.
400 M3B* 40 1000 1600
Roulements à rouleaux Les moteurs de désenfumage et autres moteurs
Intervalles de lubrification en heures de
spéciaux ne doivent pas être rebobinés sans avoir au
fonctionnement
préalable contacté ABB.
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000 5. Contraintes d'environnement
355 M3B* 35 600 1000
400 M2B', M2C* 45 600 1000 Niveaux sonores
400 M3B* 40 500 800
La plupart de nos moteurs ont un niveau de pression
acoustique qui ne dépasse pas 82 dB(A) pour une
NOTA!
alimentation sinusoïdale à 50 Hz. Tolérance: ± 3 dB(A).
Pour les moteurs tournant à grande vitesse et certains
modèles, ex., machines 2 pôles M2—BA 355 et 400
pour lesquelles le facteur de vitesse est supérieur à 400 Les valeurs figurent dans les catalogues produits
000 mm (calcul du facteur de vitesse: Dm x n, où Dm correspondants.
est le diamètre moyen du roulement en mm et n la
vitesse de rotation en tr/min), vous devez toujours Pour les niveaux de pression acoustique avec
utiliser des graisses grande vitesse. Les types de alimentation sinusoïdale 60 Hz et alimentations non
graisse suivants conviennent : sinusoïdales, contactez ABB.
• FAG L69 (savon polycarbamide) Le niveau de pression acoustique des machines

• Kliiber Kliiber quiet BH 72-102 (savon polycarbamide) équipées de systèmes de refroidissement séparés et
• SKF LGHP2 (savon polycarbamide) des machines de séries M2F7M3F*, M2L7M3L*, M2R7
M3R*, M2BJ/M2LJ, figurent dans des notices
Si d'autres lubrifiants sont utilisés, vérifiez auprès du techniques particulières.
fabricant que leurs propriétés correspondent à celles
des lubrifiants précités, ou en cas de doute sur la
miscibilité du lubrifiant, contactez ABB.
Moteurs alimentés par convertisseurs de fréquence

Le fonctionnement à grande vitesse (ex., commande par
convertisseur de fréquence) ou à petite vitesse sous
charge élevée impose des intervalles de lubrification
plus rapprochés. Dans ce cas, consultez ABB.
! En règle générale, un doublement de la vitesse impose

une réduction d'environ 40 % des intervalles de
lubrification spécifiés dans les tableaux.
ATTENTION
La vitesse maxi assignée du moteur ne doit pas
être dépassée.
L'adéquation des roulements au fonctionnement à

grande vitesse doit être vérifiée.

Ces instructions ne couvrent pas toutes les variantes ou exécutions des machines et ne permettent pas de résoudre
tous les problèmes d'installation, d'exploitation ou de maintenance. Pour toute information complémentaire, nous
vous invitons à contacter votre correspondant ABB.
Tableau de maintenance du moteur
L'entretien et la maintenance du moteur doivent être réalisés par un personnel qualifié disposant des outils et des
instruments adéquats.
PROBLEME ORIGINE INTERVENTION
Le moteur ne démarre pas Fusibles fondus Remplacez par des fusibles de type et de calibre
adéquats.
Moteur déclenché sur défaut de Vérifiez et réarmez la protection contre les
surcharge surcharges dans le démarreur.
Alimentation inadéquate Comparer les caractéristiques de l'alimentation
réseau aux valeurs de la plaque signalétique du
moteur et le facteur de charge.
Erreur raccordement réseau Vérifiez le schéma de raccordement joint au moteur.
Circuit ouvert dans bobinage ou Signalé par un bruit de ronflement lorsque
contacteur de commande l'interrupteur est fermé. Vérifiez le raccordement des
fils. Vérifiez également la fermeture de tous les
contacts de commande.
Problème mécanique Vérifiez que le moteur et la machine entraînée
tournent librement. Vérifiez les paliers et la
lubrification.
Stator court-circuité Signalé par des fusibles fondus. Le moteur doit être
rebobiné.
Bobine stator mal raccordée Retirez la protection du bobinage et, repérez avec
une lampe témoin.
Rotor défectueux Barres ou anneaux d'extrémité cassés.
Moteur éventuellement surchargé Réduisez la charge.
Le moteur se bloque Une phase manquante Vérifiez le raccordement de chacune des phases.
Moteur inadapté à l'applicatio Changez de type ou de taille de moteur. Consultez
le constructeur.
Surcharge Réduisez la charge.
Tension trop faible Cf. valeur de tension sur la plaque signalétique du
moteur. Vérifiez le raccordement.
Circuit ouvert Fusibles fondus, Vérifiez le relais de surcharge, le
stator et les boutons de commande.
Le moteur démarre pour Défaut d'alimentation Vérifiez le raccordement au réseau, les fusibles et
ensuite s'arrêter le câble de commande.
Le moteur n'atteint pas la Moteur inadapté à l'application Consultez le fournisseur pour le choix du moteur.
vitesse désirée Tension trop faible aux bornes du Utilisez une tension plus élevée ou un
moteur du fait de perturbations transformateur, ou réduisez la charge. Vérifiez les
réseau raccordements. Vérifiez la section des conducteurs.
Charge de démarrage trop élevée Vérifiez la charge que le moteur peut accepter au
démarrage.
Barres rotor cassées ou rotor Présence de fissures à proximité des anneaux. Un
déréglé rotor neuf peut s'avérer nécessaire car les
réparations ne durent en général qu'un temps.
Circuit primaire ouvert Localisez le défaut avec un instrument de contrôle
et réparez.
Le moteur est trop long à Charge excessive Réduisez la charge.
accélérer et/ou absorbe Tension faible au démarrage Vérifiez la résistance. Section des conducteurs.
trop de courant Rotor à cage d'écureuil défectueux Remplacez par un rotor neuf.
Tension appliquée trop faible Demandez à votre fournisseur d'électricité
d'augmenter le niveau de puissance autorisé.
Le moteur tourne dans Erreur d'ordre des phases Permutez le raccordement des fils au niveau du
le mauvais sens moteur ou du tableau de distribution.

Intervalles de lubrification et quantités de lubrifiant- Pièces de rechange
moteurs 2 pôles, hauteurs d'axe (CEI) 280 et 400 Lors de toute commande de pièces de rechange, vous
Hauteur Qtéde 3600 3000 devez fournir la référence complète et toutes les
d'axe graisse tr/min tr/min spécifications de la machine figurant sur sa plaque
g/roulem. signalétique.
Roulements à billes Si un numéro de série est indiqué, il doit également être
Intervalles de lubrification en heures de fourni.
fonctionnement
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500 Rebobinage
315 M2B*. M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000
355 M3B* 35 1200 2000 Le rebobinage doit toujours être réalisé dans un atelier
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000 spécialisé.
400 M3B* 40 1000 1600
Roulements à rouleaux Les moteurs de désenfumage et autres moteurs
Intervalles de lubrification en heures de
spéciaux ne doivent pas être rebobinés sans avoir au
fonctionnement
préalable contacté ABB.
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000 5. Contraintes d'environnement
355 M3B* 35 600 1000
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000 Niveaux sonores
400 M3B* 40 500 800
La plupart de nos moteurs ont un niveau de pression
NOTA! acoustique qui ne dépasse pas 82 dB(A) pour une
alimentation sinusoïdale à 50 Hz. Tolérance: ± 3 dB(A).
Pour les moteurs tournant à grande vitesse et certains
modèles, ex., machines 2 pôles M2—BA 355 et 400
pour lesquelles le facteur de vitesse est supérieur à 400 Les valeurs figurent dans les catalogues produits
000 mm (calcul du facteur de vitesse: Dm x n, où Dm correspondants.
est le diamètre moyen du roulement en mm et n la
vitesse de rotation en tr/min), vous devez toujours Pour les niveaux de pression acoustique avec
utiliser des graisses grande vitesse. Les types de alimentation sinusoïdale 60 Hz et alimentations non
graisse suivants conviennent : sinusoïdales, contactez ABB.
• FAG L69 (savon polycarbamide) Le niveau de pression acoustique des machines

• Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (savon polycarbamide) équipées de systèmes de refroidissement séparés et
• SKF LGHP2 (savon polycarbamide) des machines de séries M2FVM3F*, M2L7M3L*, M2R7
M3R*, M2BJ/M2LJ, figurent dans des notices
Si d'autres lubrifiants sont utilisés, vérifiez auprès du techniques particulières.
fabricant que leurs propriétés correspondent à celles
des lubrifiants précités, ou en cas de doute sur la
miscibilité du lubrifiant, contactez ABB.
Moteurs alimentés par convertisseurs de fréquence

Le fonctionnement à grande vitesse (ex., commande par
convertisseur de fréquence) ou à petite vitesse sous
charge élevée impose des intervalles de lubrification
plus rapprochés. Dans ce cas, consultez ABB.
• En règle générale, un doublement de la vitesse impose

une réduction d'environ 40 % des intervalles de
lubrification spécifiés dans les tableaux.
ATTENTION
La vitesse maxi assignée du moteur ne doit pas
être dépassée. :
Ladéquation des roulements au fonctionnement à

grande vitesse doit être vérifiée.

Ces instructions ne couvrent pas toutes les variantes ou exécutions des machines et ne permettent pas de résoudre
tous les problèmes d'installation, d'exploitation ou de maintenance. Pour toute information complémentaire, nous
vous invitons à contacter votre correspondant ABB.
Tableau de maintenance du moteur
L'entretien et la maintenance du moteur doivent être réalisés par un personnel qualifié disposant des outils et des
instruments adéquats.
Le moteur ne démarre pas Fusibles fondus Remplacez par des fusibles de type et de calibre
adéquats.
Moteur déclenché sur défaut de Vérifiez et réarmez la protection contre les
surcharge surcharges dans le démarreur.
Alimentation inadéquate Comparer les caractéristiques de l'alimentation
réseau aux valeurs de la plaque signalétique du
moteur et le facteur de charge.
Erreur raccordement réseau Vérifiez le schéma de raccordement joint au moteur.
Circuit ouvert dans bobinage ou Signalé par un bruit de ronflement lorsque
contacteur de commande l'interrupteur est fermé. Vérifiez le raccordement des
fils. Vérifiez également la fermeture de tous les
contacts de commande.
Problème mécanique Vérifiez que le moteur et la machine entraînée
tournent librement. Vérifiez les paliers et la
lubrification.
Stator court-circuité Signalé par des fusibles fondus. Le moteur doit être
rebobiné.
Bobine stator mal raccordée Retirez la protection du bobinage et, repérez avec
une lampe témoin.
Rotor défectueux Barres ou anneaux d'extrémité cassés.
Moteur éventuellement surchargé Réduisez la charge.
Le moteur se bloque Une phase manquante Vérifiez le raccordement de chacune des phases.
Moteur inadapté à l'applicatio Changez de type ou de taille de moteur. Consultez
le constructeur.
Surcharge Réduisez la charge.
Tension trop faible Cf. valeur de tension sur la plaque signalétique du
moteur. Vérifiez le raccordement.
Circuit ouvert Fusibles fondus, Vérifiez le relais de surcharge, le
stator et les boutons de commande.
Le moteur démarre pour Défaut d'alimentation Vérifiez le raccordement au réseau, les fusibles et
ensuite s'arrêter le câble de commande.
Le moteur n'atteint pas la Moteur inadapté à l'application Consultez le fournisseur pour le choix du moteur.
vitesse désirée Tension trop faible aux bornes du Utilisez une tension plus élevée ou un
moteur du fait de perturbations transformateur, ou réduisez la charge. Vérifiez les
réseau raccordements. Vérifiez la section des conducteurs.
Charge de démarrage trop élevée Vérifiez la charge que le moteur peut accepter au
démarrage.
3arres rotor cassées ou rotor Présence de fissures à proximité des anneaux. Un
déréglé rotor neuf peut s'avérer nécessaire car les
réparations ne durent en général qu'un temps.
Circuit primaire ouvert Localisez le défaut avec un instrument de contrôle
et réparez.
Le moteur est trop long à Charge excessive Réduisez la charge.
accélérer et/ou absorbe Tension faible au démarrage Vérifiez la résistance. Section des conducteurs.
trop de courant ôtor à cage d'écureuil défectueux Remplacez par un rotor neuf.
Tension appliquée trop faible Demandez à votre fournisseur d'électricité
d'augmenter le niveau de puissance autorisé.
Le moteur tourne dans Erreur d'ordre des phases Permutez le raccordement des fils au niveau du
le mauvais sens moteur ou du tableau de distribution.

Le moteur s'échauffe Surcharge Réduisez la charge.
lorsqu'il est Ouvertures de ventilation dans la Ouvrez les ouvertures de ventilation et vérifiez que
en sous-charge carcasse ou le support encrassées, l'air de refroidissement circule librement.
empêchant le refroidissement du
moteur
Une phase manquante du moteur Vérifiez le raccordement de tous les conducteurs.
Bobine mise à la terre Localisez et réparez.
Tension aux bornes déséquilibrée Vérifiez les conducteurs, les raccordements et les
transformateurs
Le moteur vibre Défaut d'alignement du moteur Ré-alignez.
Support de montage insuffisamment Renforcez.
rigide
Accouplement déséquilibré Equilibrez.
Machine entraînée déséquilibrée Ré-équilibrez.
Roulements défectueux Remplacez.
Paliers désaxés Ré-alignez.
Poids d'équilibre déplacés Ré-équilibrez le moteur.
Incompatibilité entre équilibrage du Ré-équilibrez l'accouplement ou le moteur
rotor et de l'accouplement
(demi-clavette - clavette entière)
Moteur polyphasé fonctionne Vérifiez si circuit ouvert sur une phase
en monophasé
Jeu axial excessif Ajustez le palier ou insérez des cales.
Bruit de frottement Le ventilateur frotte contre Supprimez le problème.
le déflecteur d'air
Le ventilateur tape contre la protectior Dégagez le ventilateur.
Jeu du support de montage Resserrez les boulons de fixation.
Moteur bruyant Entrefer non homogène Vérifiez et corrigez le montage des flasques ou le
palier.
Rotor déséquilibré Ré-équilibrez.
Roulements chauds Arbre tordu ou faussé Redressez ou remplacez l'arbre.
Courroie trop tendue Réduisez la tension.
Poulies trop éloignées Rapprochez la poulie du palier du moteur.
Diamètre des poulies trop petit Utilisez des poulies plus grandes.
Défaut d'alignement Corrigez l'alignement de l'entraînement.
Insuffisance de graisse Respectez la quantité de graisse spécifiée pour le
roulement.
Dégradation de la graisse Enlevez la graisse souillée, nettoyez à fond le roule
ou contamination du lubrifiant ment dans du kérosène et lubrifiez à la graisse
neuve.
Excès de lubrifiant Réduisez la quantité de graisse, le roulement ne
doit être rempli qu'à moitié.
Surcharge palier Vérifiez l'alignement, la pression latérale et axiale.
Bille cassée ou chemins Remplacez le roulement, nettoyez d'abord à fond le
de roulement déformés corps de palier.

Manual de instalaciön, operaciön y
mantenimiento
Indice de Contenidos
1. General 4. Mantenimiento
2. Instalaciön 5. Requisitos Medioambientales
3. Operaciön 6. Tabla de Resoluciön de Problemas
1. General Validez
Estas instrucciones son validas para los siguientes
iNOTA! tipos de motores eléctricos de ABB, para
Hay que seguir estas instrucciones para ofrecer una funcionamiento como motor o como generador.
instalaciön, un funcionamiento y un mantenimiento
correotos y seguros del motor. Cualquiera que instale, series MT*, MBT*, MXMA,
opère o realice el mantenimiento de este equipo debe series M2A7M3A*, M2B7M3B*, M2C7M3C*, M2F7
tenerlas en cuenta. Ignorar estas instrucciones puede M3F*, M2L7M3L*, M2M7M3M*, M2Q*, M2R7M3FT,
invalidar la garantia. M2V7M3V*
Declaration de Conformidad en tamanos de carcasa 56 - 400.
Existen unas instrucciones de motor independientes

Las declaraciones de conformidad relativas a la
para los motores Ex 'Low voltage motors for hazardous
Directiva de Baja Tension 73/23CEE, modificada por la
areas: Installation, operation and maintenance manual'
directiva 93/68/CEE se editan separadamente junto con
(Low Voltage Motors/Manual for Ex-motors).
cada motor.
Para algunos tipos de motores se requière informaciôn
La declaraciôn de conformidad cumple también los
adicional debido a lo especial de su aplicaciôn y/o
requisitos de una declaraciôn de incorporaciôn en
consideraciones de diseno. Se dispone de informaciôn
relaciôn a la Directiva sobre mâquinas 98/37/CEE, Art
adicional para los siguientes tipos de motores:
4.2 Annex II, Sub B.
motores para caminos de rodillos
motores refrigerados por agua
motores abiertos
motores smoke venting
motores con freno

2. Instalaciön En caso de existir, deben quitarse los tapones de
drenaje y abrirse las vâlvulas de cierre antes del
secado al homo.
Puesta en servicio (arranque)
Normalmente, si la humedad es causada por agua
Comprobaciön de recepciön marina, deberâ bobinarse de nuevo el devanado.
A su recepciön, verifiquen inmediatamente si el motor
présenta danos externos y, en tal caso, informen sin Arranque directo o estrella/triângulo
demora al transportista correspondiente. Normalmente, la caja de bornes en los motores
estândar de una sola velocidad tiene seis terminales y,
Comprueben los datos de la plaça de caracteristicas, como mfnimo, un terminal de conexiön a tierra.
especialmente la tension eléctrica, la conexiân del
devanado (estrella o triângulo). El tipo de rodamientos La toma a tierra debe Ilevarse a cabo segün las normas
en los motores desde tamano 90 y superiores estàn nacionales antes de conectar el motor a la tension de la
indicados en la plaça de caracteristicas. red.
Giren el eje con la mano para comprobar que gira sin La tension eléetrioa y la conexiön se indican en la plaça
dificultad; quiten el bloqueo para transporte, si existe. de caracteristicas.
No deben sobrepasarse los valores mâximos de carga Arranque directo (D.O.L):
de los rodamientos indicados en el catâlogo de Pueden utilizarse las conexiones Y o D. Pueden
producto. utilizarse las conexiones Y o D.
Ej.: 660 VY, 380 VD indica conexiön Y para 660— V y
Motores con rodamientos de rodillos: Si se hace conexiön D para 380 V.
funcionar el motor sin fuerza radial aplicada al eje se
pueden danar los rodamientos de rodillos. Arranque estrella/triângulo (Y/D):
La tension de la red debe ser igual a la tension nominal
Motores con rodamientos de contacto angular: Si del motor en conexiön D. Quite todos los puentes de de
se hace funcionar el motor sin fuerza axial aplicada en las plaça de bornes.
la direcciôn correcta al eje se pueden danar |,os
rodamientos de contacto angular. En motores monofâsicos de dos velocidades y
motores especiales, la conexiön a la red debe seguir
Motores con elementos de engrase: las instrucciones indicadas en el interior de la caja de
Al arrancar el motor por primera vez, o tras un largo bornes.
periodo de almacenamiento, hay que aplicar como
mfnimo la cantidad de grasa indicada hasta que saïga Siel arranque directo dura mâs de 10 segundos o el
la nueva grasa por la vålvula de salida. arranque Y/D mâs de 30 segundos, consulte a la oficina
Para mås detalles, ver la secciôn "Motores con sistema de ventas de ABB o la publicaeiön 'La Guia del Motor'
de relubrificaciôn" en la pagina 37. (disponible en Intenet en www.abb.com/motors&drives).
Comprobaciön de la resistencia de aislamiento Terminales y sentido de rotaciôn

Mida la resistencia de aislamiento antes de poner el
El sentido de rotaciôn es segûn las agujas del reloj,
motor en servicio o cuando se créa que existe humedad
visto desde el lado acople, y la secuencia de fase de
en el devanado.
linea L1, L2, L3 esta conectada a las terminales, segün
se muestra en la figura 1.
La resistencia, medida a 25°C, sera .superior al valor de
referenda, por ejemplo: 10 M ohm (medidos con 500V
Para modificar el sentido de rotaciôn, intercambiar la
de Megger)
conexiön de dos Ifneas de cable cualquiera.
Los devanados deben descargarse Si el ventilador del motor es de una sola direeeiön,
inmediatamente después de la mediciôn para asegürese de que el sentido de rotaciôn es el mismo
evitar riesgos de descarga eléctrica. que el de la flécha dibujada en el motor.
El valor de referencia de la resistencia de aislamiento Manipulaciön

es de la mitad por cada aumento de 20°C de la
temperatura ambiente. Almacenamiento
El motor debe almacenarse siempre en el interior, en
Si no se alcanza el valor de resistencia indicado, el ambientes secos, sin vibraciones y sin polvo.
devanado esta demasiado hurnedo y debe secarse al
homo. Las superficies mecanizadas sin protecciôn (salidas de
La temperatura del homo debe ser de 90°C durante 12- eje y bridas) deben ser protegidas con un tratemiento
16 horas, seguida de 105°C durante 6-8 horas. anticorrosivo.
ABB / Low Voilage Motors / Manual 11-2002 33

Se recomienda hacer girar los ejes periödicamente con Aluminic Fundiciôn Acero
la mano para evitar migraciones de grasa. Tamano Peso Anadir Peso Peso
carcasa kg parafreno kg kg
Es preferible que las resistencias calefactoras, si
existen, estén conectadas. 56 4.5 - - -
63 6 . -
Las caracteristicas de los condensadores electrolfticos, 71 8 5 13
caso de existir en los motores monofâsicos, 80 12 8 20
necesitarén una "revision" después de estar 90 17 10 30 • - • -
almacenados durante mås de 1-2 afïos. Contacte con
100 25 16 40
112 36 20 50 -
ABB para mâs detalles. 132 90 -
63 30
160 110 55 175 -
Transporte 180 160 65 250 -
Los motores equipados con rodamientos de rodillos y/o 200 220 310 -
de bolas de contacto angular deben Ilevar un bloqueo 225 295 - 400
durante el transporte. 250 370 - 550 -
280 405 - 800 600
Elevaciön 315 1300 1000
Levanten el motor solo con câncamos de elevation, si 355 - 2300 2200
no se indica lo contrario en una instruccion separada de
400 - - 3500 3000
elevaciön.
El centra de gravedad de motores con la misma

Instalaciön
carcasa puede variar segün la potencia, la disposition
de montaje y los elementos auxiliares. Refrigeration
La temperatura ambiente normal no debe excéder los
Comprobar que los câncamos acoplados a la carcasa 40°C (el estândar marino es de +459C ö +50°C), si se
del motor no estén danados antes de elevarlo. No deben desea conseguir un desempeno estândar. Comprueben
utilizarse câncamos de elevaciön defectuosos. que el motor tiene suficiente flujo de aire. Asegürese de
que no existen otros equipos o superficies cerca del
Hay que apretar los câncamos antes de uasarlos. Si es motor o luz solar directa, que puedan radiar calor
necesario, ajustar la posiciân del câncamo con adicional. Para mayor information sobre temperaturas
arandelas adecuadas. ambiente elevadas y refrigeration, consulten la "Guia
del Motor" o contacten con ABB.
Asegürese de que utiliza el equipo de elevaciön
adecuado y que el tamano de los ganchos es el Anclajes
apropiado para los câncamos de elevaciön. El comprador es responsable de preparar el anclaje para
los motores.
Hay que prestar mucho cuidado en no danar el equipo
auxiliar y los cables unidos al hnotor. Los anclajes de metal deben pintarse para evitar la
corrosion.
Pesos de los motores
El anclaje debe ser liso y lo suficientemente firme para
El peso total de los motores con el mismo tamano de
soportar las fuerzas que puedan aparecer en caso de un
carcasa (altura del centra) puede variar segün la
cortocircuito trifâsico.También debe poder evitar las
potencia, la disposition de montaje y los elementos
vibraciones producidas por la resonancia.
especiales anadidos.
Pernos de anclaje
La tabla siguiente muestra los pesos estimados para
Sujete los pernos a las patas del motor y coloque una
los motores en su version bâsica, en funciôn del
galga de 1-2 mm entre el perno y la pata.
material de la carcasa.
Alinee el motor directamente utilizando los medios
El peso total se indica en la plaça de caracterfsticas de
adecuados. Sujete los pernos con cémenta, compruebe
todos nuestros motores excepta los mâs pequenos.
el alineamiento y haga agujeros para colocar los
tornillos.
Agujeros de drenaje
Compruebe siempre que los agujeros de drenaje estân
hacia abajo.
En ambientes muy polvorientos deben cerrarse todos

los agujeros de drenaje.

Alineaciön Conexiôn con accionamiento de velocidad
Una alineaciön correcta es esencial para evitar danos variable
en los rodamientos, vibraciones y posibles fracturas de Los accionamientos de velocidad variable producen
las salidas de eje. mayores tensiones que la alimentaciön sinusoidal en el
bobinado del motor y pueden dar lugar a voltajes de alta
Railes tensores y accionamiento por correas frecuencia en el eje y corrientes en los rodamientos. Por
' Ajuste los motores a los railes tensores segün lo tanto el aislamiento de bobinado y rodamientos asi
muestralafigura2. como el filtra a la salida del convertidor se deben
• Coloque los railes tensores horizontalmente en el dimensionar de acuerdo con el documenta "Selection
mismo nivel. rules for VSD applications / Insulation" (3GZF500930-2),
• Compruebe que el eje del motor esta en posiciön disponible bajo peticiôn a ABB.
paralela con el eje del accionamiento.
• Tense todas las correas segün las instrucciones del
proveedor. En accionamientos de velocidad variable, el motor
(Pn > 30 kW) se debe cablear con cables simétricos
ATENCIÖN blindados y prensaestopas con giro de 360° (también
Una tension excesiva de las correas puede danati Ilamados prensaestopas EMC). Se puede encontrar mas
los rodamientos y causar röturas del eje. informaciôn en el manual de ABB "Grounding and
cabling of the drive system" (3AFY61201998).
No sobrepase las fuerzas de correa måximas (es decir,
las cargas de rodamientos radiales) indicadas en los En aplicaciones con convertidor de frecuencia, es
catâlogos del producto. necesario utilizar una toma a tierra exterior para igualar
el potencial entre la carcasa y la måquina accionada, a
Conexiön menos que ambas mâquinas estén montadas sobre la
misma base metälica.
El diseno normal del motor es con la caja de bornes en
la parte superior, con la posibilidad de entrada de En motores con carcasas superiores a IEC 280, utilice
cables porambos lados. un conductor piano de 0.75 x 70 mm o, como minimo,
dos conductores cilindricos de 50 mm2. La distancia
Algunos motores estån disponibles con una caja de entre los conductores cilindricos debe ser como minimo
bornes en la parte superior orientable 4 x 90°, y algunos de 150 mm.
con la caja de bornes montada al lado.
La disponibilidad de estas opciones se describe en el Esta disposiciön no tiene una funciön de seguridad
catâlogo de producto. eléctrica; el objetivo es igualar los potenciales. Cuando
se montan el motor y el reductor en una misma bancada
Las entradas de cable que no se utilicen deben de acero comün, no es necesario realizar conexiones
cerrarse. equipotenciales.
Asf como el devanado principal y las terminales de Conexiones equipotenciales

toma a tierra, la caja de bornes también puede tener
conexiones para termistores, resistencias calefactoras,
conectores bimetâlicos o resistencias PT100.
ATENCION
Las terminales pueden estar activas aurïque el
motor esté parado, dado que las resistencias
calefactoras o el calentamiento directe del
devanado pueden tener tension eléetrica.
Para satisfacer los requisitos de compatibilidad
electromagnética (EMC) utilicen solo cables y
Los diagramas de conexiôn para elementos auxiliares y conectores aprobados para tal propösito (véase
partes de conexiön se encuentran en el interior de la instrucciones para convertidores de frecuencia).
tapa de la caja de bornes.
La velocidad de rotaciön maxima para un motor de
fundiciön de hierro con accionamiento de velocidad
ATENC1ÔN variable (M2BA/M3BP) no debe excéder las velocidades
En los rriotpres monofåsicos, el condensador mäximas admisibles que se especifican en la tabla
puede retener una carga que aparece en los inferior o la indicada en la plaça de caracteristicas.
terminales del motor, incluso cuando el motor se
Contacte con ABB para obtener informaciôn acerca de
ha parado.
la velocidad maxima admisible para otros tamanos y
tipos de motores. La lubricaciön de los rodamientos
debe seguir las indicaciones que se dan mâs adelante.
ABB / Low Voltaqe Motors / Manual 11-2002 35

Tamafïo Velocidad r/min Puntos a tener en cuenta
carcasa 2 polos 4 polos 1. No suba sobre el motor.
2. La temperatura de la cubierta externa del motor
280 3600 2600 puede Ilegar a ser demasiado caliente al tacto
315 3600 2300 durante su funcionamiento normal.
355 3600 2000 3. Algunas aplicaciones especiales del motor
400 3600 1800 requieren instrucciones especi'ficas (ej.: al utilizar
Si existen dudas acerca de la adecuaciôn del motor convertidores de frecuencia).
para uso con convertidor de frecuencia, por favor 4. Los câncamos de elevation deben utilizarse solo
contacte con ABB. para levantar el motor, no para levantar el motor
cuando este esta unido a otro equipo.
ATENCIÖN
Latempejatura maxima de operaciön de grasa y Montaje y desmontaje
rodamieftosrio debe ser sobrepasada.
General
Equilibrado El montaje y desmontaje de los motores debe ser
Ilevado a cabo por personas cualificadas y con los
El rotor del motor esta dinåmicamente equilibrado. utensilios y métodos de trabajo adecuados. Todas las
reparaciones se deben Ilevar a cabo de acuerdo con la
Como estàndar, el equilibrado se Ileva a cabo con normalEC-60079-19.
media chaveta y el eje Ileva una cinta ROJA con la
indication "Equilibrado con media chaveta". Rodamientos
Siempre hay que prestar especial atenciôn a los
Para evitar vibraciones, hay que equilibrar la mitad del rodamientos. Hay que quitarlos con extractores y
acoplamiento o la polea con media chaveta, una vez montarlos por calentamiento, utilizando herramientas
mecanizado el chavetero. especiales para tal propôsito. La forma de cambiar los
rodamientos se describe con detalle en un librito de
Cuando se équilibra con chaveta entera, el eje Ileva una instrucciones separado disponible en ABB.
cinta AMARILLA con la indication "Equilibrado con
chaveta entera". Montaje de cubos de acoplamiento y poleas
Los cubos de acoplamiento y las poleas deben
En caso de equilibrado sin chaveta, el eje Ileva una montarse utilizando equipos y herramientas adecuados
cinta AZUL con la indication "Equilibrado sin que no danen los rodamientos.
chaveta".
Nunca se debe montar un cubo de acoplamiento o una
polea golpeândola con un martillo.Tampoco debe
3. Operaciön quitarse con una palanca haciendo presiôn sobre el
cuerpo del motor.
Uso
Exactitud del montaje de una mitad de acoplamiento:
Condiciones de operaciön
compruebe que la distancia b sea inferior a 0.05 mm y
Los motores estân disenados para funcionar en
que la diferencïa de ai a a2 también sea inferior a 0.05
aplicaciones de accionamiento industrial.
mm. Véase figura 3.
Los Kmites normales de temperatura ambiente son de
-20°C a +40°C. Altitud maxima es de 1000 m por
encima del nivel del mar. 4. Mantenimiento
Consideraciones de seguridad Mantenimiento y lubricaciön

El motor .debe ser instalado y utilizado por personal
cualificado y famiiiarizado con las normas de seguridad
Inspecciôn general
Inspeccione el motor a intervalos reguläres.
correspondientes.
Mantenga el motor limpio y asegürese de que
tiene una buena ventilation.
Hay que proporcionar los equipos de seguridad Compruebe el estado de los retenes (por ejemplo,
necesarios para la prévention de accidentes en el lugar obturador V) y câmbielos si es necesario.
de la instalaciön y del funcionamiento, segün las Compruebe el estado de las conexiones y de los
normativas locales. pernos de montaje y del motor.
Compruebe el estado de los rodamientos,
ATENCIÖN escuchando si hay ruidos extrafios, midiendo la
Los motores pequenos conectados directamente vibration, la temperatura del rodamiento,
a interruptores térmicos pueden arrancar inspeccionando la grasa utilizada o con
automåticamente. monitorizaciön SPM del rodamiento.
* En caso de ocurrir cambios en las
condiciones del motor, desmöntelo,
verifique las partes y cåmbielas si es
necesario.
Lubricacion La politica de ABB es la de considerar la fiabilidad
como un elemento vital en los intervalos de lubricacion
de los rodamientos. Por ello, seguimos el principio L1
(es decir, que çon seguridad el 99% de los motores
jCuidado con todas las partes giratorias! cumplen el intervalo de tiempo).
Lubricacion manual
ATENC Engrase mientras el motor esta f uncionando
La grasa puede causar initaciôn de la piel e - Quitar el tapôn de engrase o abrir la vâlvula de salida
inflamacion de los ojos. Siga todas las ' de engrase, si existe.
indicaciorres de seguridad espeeificadas por el
- Comprobar que el conducto de lubricacion esta
fabricante. . . . . . .
abierto.
- Introducir la cantidad de grasa especificada en el
Motores con rodamientos lubricados de por vida rodamiento.
Los rodamientos son normalmente lubricados de por - Dejarfuncionarel motor 1 6 2 horas para asegurar que
vida de los tipos Z 6 2Z. todo el exceso de grasa ha salido del rodamiento.
El tipo de rodamientos se especifica en los catålogos Cerrar el tapôn de engrase o la vâlvula de salida, si
de producto respectivos y en la plaça de existe.
caracteristicas de todos nuestros motores, excepta los
tamanos mas pequenos. Engrase cuando el motor esta parado
Hay que reengrasar los motores mientras estân en
Como guia, se puede conseguir una lubricacion funcionamiento. Si esto no es posible, se puede Ilevar a
adecuada en tamanos hasta 180 para el siguiente cabo el engrase mientras el motor esta parado.
funcionamiento, segün L1 (es decir* que el 99% de los - En tal caso, utilice solo la mitad de la cantidad de
motores superan este intervalo) a unatemperatura grasa, a continuaeiôn haga funcionar el motor unos
ambiente de 25°C. Par funcionamiento a temperatura minutas a toda velocidad.
ambiente mayor de 25°C consulte el correspondiente - Cuando el motor se pare, introducir la cantidad
catâlogo de producto. restante de grasa especificada en el rodamiento.
- Después de 1 ô 2 horas de funcionamiento, cierre el
Tamano carcasa Polos Horas de servicio tapôn de engrase o vâlvula de salida, si existe.
56-80 2-8 vitalicio
90-112 2-8 40000 Lubricacion automâtica
132 2 31000 Con lubricacion automâtica, el tapôn de engrase debe
132 4-8 40000 quitarse de forma permanente o la vâlvula de salida
160 2 23000 estar abierta, si existe.
160 4-8 40000
180 2 19000 Algunos motores pueden estar equipados con un
180 4-8 40000 . colector para la grasa usada. Sigan las instrucciones
especfficas para este equipo.
Segûn la aplicaciön y las condiciones de carga, véase
el catâlogo del producto correspondiente. ABB reçomienda exclusivamente sistemas
electromecànicos, contacten con ABB. .;
Las horas de funcionamiento para motores en
disposiciön vertical son la mitad de los valores dados La cantidad de grasa para cada intervalo de lubricacion
anteriormente. '• especificada en la tabla debe ser el doble si se utiliza
un sistema de lubricacion automâtico.
Motores con sistema de relubricaciôn
Si los motores de 2 polos se lubrican automâticamente,
Plaça de information sobre lubricacion y consejos se debe seguir la nota (j NOTA!) referente a
generales sobre lubricacion recomendaciones de lubricantes para motores de 2
polos que aparece en el capitulo Lubricantes.
Si el motor tienè una plaça de informaciôn sobre

lubricacion, siga los valores indicados.
En la plaça de informaciôn sobre lubricacion, los

intervalos de relubricaciôn pueden estar definidos
atendiendo a la disposiciön de montaje, temperatura
ambiente y velocidad de giro.

Intervalos de lubricaciôn y cantidades - gama de temperatura -30°C - +120°C, de forma
Tamano Cantidad 3600 3000 18ÖÖ Ï5ÔÔ" ÎÔÔÔ" 500-900 continua.
carcasa g/roda- r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
mienlo *) Para motores montados en vertical o en condiciones
Rodamiento de bolas altas de temperatura se recomienda un mayor grado
Intervalos de lubricaciôn en horas de servicio
NLGI
112 10 10000 13000 18000 21000 25000 28000
132 15 9000 11000 17000 19000 23000 26500
160 25 7000 9500 14000 17000 21000 24000 Los principales fabricantes de lubricantes ponen a su
.180 30 6000 8000 13500 16000 20000 23000 disposition grasa con las propiedades adecuadas.
200 40 4000 6000 11000 13000 17000 21000
226 50 3000 5000 10000 12500 16500 20000 Los aditivos estân recomendados, pero se debe obtener
250 60 2500 4000 9000 11500 15000 18000
280 garantia escrita del fabricante del lubricante,
70 2000« 3500» 8000 10500 14000 17000
315 90 6500 8500 12500 16000 especialmente en lo que se refiere a aditivos EP, de
355 120 4200 6000 10000 13000 que los aditivos no danan los rodamientos o altéra las
400 120 4200 6000 10000 13000 propiedades de los lubricantes a la temperatura de
400M3BP 130 2800 4600 8400 12000 trabajo.
Rodamientos de rodillos
Inlervalos de lubricaciôn en horas de servicio
ATENCION
160 25 3500 4500 7000 8500 10500 12000
180 30 3000 4000 7000 8000 10000 11500 No se recomiendan lubricantes que contienen
200 40 2000 3000 5500 6500 8500 10500 aditivos EP para temperaturas altas del
225 50 1500 2500 5000 6000 8000 10000 rodamiento en tamafios de carcasa 280-400.
250 60 1300 2200 4500 5700 7500 9000
280 70 1000» 2000« 4000 5300 7000 8500 Si la temperatura ambiente es inferior a -25°C o
315 90 '> 1 3300 4300 6000 8000 superior a +55°C, o la temperatura del rodamiento
355 120 « » 2000 3000 5000 6500 supera los 110°C, consulte con ABB acerca de la grasa
400 120 " » 2000 3000 5000 6500
400 M3BP 130 " " 1400 2300 4200 6000 apropiada.
'I valores para tamafios IEC 280 a 400 en algunos tipos de
motores (3600 y 3000 r/min), por favor consulte la prôxima tabla. Pueden utilizarse los siguientes tipos (o similares) de
grasa de alto rendimiento:
Factores que inciden en los intervalos de
lubricaciôn • Esso Unirex N2, N3 or S2 (base compleja de litio)
Los intervalos de lubrioaciön para motores en posiciôn • Mobil Mobilith SHC100 (base compleja de litio)
vertical son la mitad de los valores anteriores. • Shell Albida EMS 2 (base compleja de litio)
• SKF LGHQ 3 (base compleja de litio)
Los valores de la tabla se basan en una temperatura de • Klüber Klüberplex BEM 41 -132 (base de litio
especial)
de operacion de rodamientos de 80 °C (temperatura
• FAG ArcanolTEWIPgoâsepolyureadecalcio)
ambiente de unos +25 °C). i Nota! Un aumento de la • FAG ArcanolTEMPHO (base compleja de litio)
temperatura ambiente incrementa la temperatura de los
rodamientos proporcionalmente. Estos valores deben Si se usa otra grasa con las propiedades requeridas los
dividirse por la mitad para cada 15°C de aumento de intervalos de lubricaciôn, contacten con ABB.
temperatura de los rodamientos y ser el doble para
cada 15°C de descenso de la temperatura ambiente. Intervalos de lubricaciôn y cantidades. 2-polos.
Tamafios de carcasa IEC 280 a 400
ATENCIÔN .:; ; j ; i - i ;i] :»
No dèpe sobrepasaraè la temperatura rriaxiijia de lamano Cantidad 3600 300Ü
carcasa de grasa r/min r/min
: funciorørriienjo de lasgraisa y de los rodamientos.
g/rodamiento
Rodamientos de bolas
Intervalos de lubricaciôn en horas de operacion
Lubricantes 280 M2B*,M2C*,M3B* 35 2000 3500
315 M2B*, M2C, M3B* 35 2000 3500
ATENCION .;. ; .; i. ,-.. s. >. , . ,> ;• 355 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000
No mezcle distintos tipos de grasa. 355 M3B* 35 1200 2000
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000
Lubricantes incompatibles puedën causârdànos
400 M3B* 40 1000 1600-
: en los rodamientos. > .; ;. v - = > •.
Rodamientos de rodillos
Intervalos de lubricaciôn en horas de operacion
Al engrasar, utilicen solo grasa especial para
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
rodamientos de bolas, que présente las siguientes
315 M2B*,M2C*,M3B* 35 1000 1800
propiedades: 355 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000
- grasa de buena calidad con jabön complejo de litio y 355 M3B* 35 600 1000
aceite minerai o poli-afa olecinas (PAO). 400 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000
- viscosidad del aceite base 100-160 cST a 40°C 400 M3B* 40 500 800
- consistencia NLGI grado 1.5 - 3 *)

iNOTA! Para nivelés de presiôn sonora con alimentation
Utilice siempre grasa de alta velocidad para motores de sinusoidal a 60 Hz o no sinusoidal, contacten con ABB.
alta velocidad y para algün otro tipo, por ejemplo,
motores de 2 polos M2BA 355 y 400, en los que el Los nivelés de presiôn sonora para motores con
factor de velocidad es superior a 400 000 (calculado sistemas de refrigeration independientes y para las
como Dm x n, dönde Dm = diåmetro medio del series M2F7M3F*, M2L7M3L*, M2R7M3R*, y M2BJ/
rodamiento, mm; n = velocidad de rotaciön, r/min). Se M2LJ, estân indicados en los correspondientes Manuals
puede utilizar la siguientes grasas: de Motor.
• FAG L69 (base de polyurea)

• Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (base de polyurea)
• SKF LGHP2 (base de polyurea)
Si se utilizan otros lubricantes, pregunte al fabricante si

las calidades corresponden con las de los lubricantes
antes mencionados, o contacte con ABB si no esté
seguro de la compatibilidad del lubricante.
Accionamientos por convertidor de frecuencia

El funcionamiento a velocidades mayores, por ejemplo
en aplicaciones con convertidor de frecuencia, o a
menor velocidad con altas cargas requerirâ intervalos
de lubricacion menores. En estas casos consulte a
ABB.
Normalmente al duplicar la velocidad se requerirâ una

reduccion de los intervalos de lubricacion de un 40% de
los valores indicados en la tabla anterior.
No se debe sobrepasar la velocidad maxima para

la que se ha disenado el motor.
Se debe comprobar la adecuaciôn de los rodamientos

para funcionamiento a alta velocidad.
Recambios
Al solicitar recambios, debe especificarse toda la
designation del tipo y el côdigo del producto, segûn se
indica en la plaça de caracterfeticas.
Si el motor présenta un numéro de fabrication de serie,
este debe indicarse también.
Rebobinado
El rebobinado debe Ilevarse siempre a cabo en talleres
cualificados.
Los motores para ventiladores contra incendios y otros

motores especiales no deben rebobinarse sin contactar
primero con ABB.
5. Requisites medioambientales
Nivelés de ruido
La mayoria de nuestros motores tienen un nivel de
presiôn sonora que no sobrepasa los 82 dB(A) referidos
a una alimentation sinusoidal de 50 Hz, con tolerancia
de ± 3 dB(A).
Los catâlogos de producto correspondientes muestran

los valores para los motores especificos.

Estas instrucciones no cubren todos los detalles o las variaciones de los equipos, ni tienen en cuenta todos los
casos posibles que puedan suceder en relaciön con la instalaciön, el funcionamiento o el mantenimiento. En caso de
necesitar informaciön adicional, rogamos se pongan en contacta çon la oficina de ventas de ABB mäs pröxima.
Tabla para resolver problemas de los motores
El servicio del motor y cualquier problema que surja debe estar en manos de personas cualificadas, que tengan las
herramientas y los equipos necesarios.
PROBLEMA CAUSA QUE HACER

El motor no puede Fusibles fundidos Cambiar los fusibles por otros del tipo y
arrancar caracterîsticas adecuados.
Disparos de sobrecarga Verificar y ajustar la sobrecarga en el arranque.
Suministro de potencia inadecuado Comprobar que la potencia suministrada se
corresponde con la de la plaça de caracten'sticas
del motor y con el factor de carga.
Conexiones a red inadecuadas Verificar las conexiones con el diagrama
suministrado junto con el motor.
Circuito abierto en el devanado o Indicado mediante un zumbido cuando el contactor
en el circuito de maniobra esta cerrado. Comprobar si existen conexiones de
cable sueltas. Asimismo, verificar que todos los
contactas estén cerrados.
Fallo mecânico Comprobar que el motor y el accionamiento giran
sin dificultad. Verificar los rodamientos y la
lubrificaciön.
Estâtor en corto circuito Indicado mediante fusibles fundidos. Hay que
rebobinarel motor.
Defecto en la conexiôn de Desconectar terminales y verificar con låmpara de
las bobinas prueba.
Rotor defectuoso Localizar varas o anillos de cortocircuito rotos.
Posible sobrecarga del motor Reducir la carga.
El motor pierde velocidad Es posible que una fase esté Comprobar las lineas y busqué la fase abierta.
abierta
Aplicacion incorrecta Cambiar el tipo o el tamafio. Consultar con el
fabricante.
Sobrecarga Reducir la carga.
Baja tension Comprobar que se mantiene la tension de la plaça
de caracterîsticas. Verificar la conexiôn.
Circuito abierto Fusibles fundidos, comprobar relé de sobrecarga,
eståtory pulsadores.
El motor funciona y luego Fallo de potencia Comprobar si existen conexiones sueltas a la red,
se para a los fusibles y al armario de control.
El motor no alcanza la No se aplica adecuadamente Consultar con el fabricante para el tipo correcto.
velocidad adecuada La tension es demasiado baja Utilizar mayor tension o reducir la carga. Verificar
en los terminales del motor conexiones. Comprobar que los cables estén
debido a una caida de tension correctamente dimensionados.
en la red
La carga de arranque es Comprobar la carga que el motor debe soportar el
demasiado elevada arranque.
Varillas del rotor rotas o rotor Comprobar si hay fisuras cerca de los anillos de
suelto cortocircuito. Quizås sera necesario un nuevo rotor,
dado que las reparaciones son por lo general
temporales.
Circuito primario abierto Localizar el defecto con un instrumenta de prueba
yæparar, , •,
El motor tarda demasiado Carga excesiva Reducir la carga. -•.••-.
tiempo en acelerar y/o Baja tension durante el arranque Comprobar si hay alta resistencia. Adecuar el
Absorbe intensidad tamafio de cables.
Rotor de jaula de ardilla defectuoso Cambiar por un rotor nuevo.
La tension aplicada es demasiado Pedir a la-empresa eléctrica que aumente la
baja potencia. .. .»

PROBLEMA CAUSA QUE HACER
Rotaciön errönea Secuencia de fases errönea Cambiar las conexiones al motor o al panel de
interruptores.
El motor se sobrecalienta Sobrecarga Reducir la carga.
mientras funciona con La carcasa o las rejiilas Limpiar los agujeros de la rejilla y verificar que hay
baja carga de ventilaciön estän llenos de una corriente de aire continua en el motor.
suciedad y obstaculizan una
adecuada ventilaciön del motor
Posiblemente el motor tiene una Verificar que todos los cables estén bien
fase abierta conectados.
Bobinado a masa Localizar y reparar.
Tension eléctrica en terminal Comprobar si hay cables, conexiones y
es desequilibrada transformadores defectuosos.
El motor vibra Motor mal alineado Realinear.
Soporte inestable Reforzar la base.
Acoplamiento desequilibrado Equilibrar acoplamiento.
Equipo accionado desequilibrado Reequilibrarel equipo accionado.
Rodamientos defectuosos Sustituir los rodamientos.
Rodamientos desalineados Alinear adecuadamente.
Cambio de posiciön de los Reequilibrarel motor.
pesos de equilibrado
Contradicciön entre el equilibrado Reequilibrar el acoplamiento o el motor.
del rotor y el del acoplamiento
(media chaveta - chaveta entera)
Motor trifåsico funcionando Comprobar si existe circuito abierto.
como monofåsico
Juego axial excesivo Ajustar el rodamiento o anadir galga.
Chirridos El ventilador roza el escudo Eliminar interferencia.
El ventilador golpea el protector Verificar ventilador.
Plaça base suelta Ajustar tornillos de sujeciön.
Funcionamiento ruidoso Entrehierro no uniforme Verificar y corregir montaje escudos o rodamientos.
Desequilibrio del rotor . Reequilibrado.
Calentamiento excesivo Eje doblado o torcido Ajustar o sustituir eje.
Rodamientos Tension excesiva de la correa Disminuir la tension de la correa.
Las poleas estân demasiado lejos Acercar la polea al rodamiento del motor.
del resalte del eje
Diåmetro de polea demasiado Utilizar poleas mâs grandes.
pequeno
Mala alineaciön Corregir realineando el motor con la måquina
accionada.
Calentamiento excesivo Grasa insuficiente Mantener la calidad adecuada de la grasa en el
rodamientos de bolas rodamiento.
Deterioraciön de la grasa Quitar la grasa vieja, limpiar cuidadosamente los
o lubricante contaminado rodamientos con queroseno y sustituirla por grasa
nueva.
Exceso de lubricante Reducir la cantidad de grasa. No llenar el
rodamiento mås de la mitad de su capacidad.
Rodamiento sobrecargado Comprobar alineaciön, magnitud y direcciôn
empuje.
Bola rota o caminos de rodadura Sustituir rodamiento, primero limpiar el alojamiento
danados cuidadosamente.

Manuale di installazione, uso e
manutenzione
Indice
1. Informazioni generali 4. Manutenzione
2. Installazione 5. Requisiti ambientali
3. Uso 6. Risoluzione dei guasti
1. Informazioni generali Validité
NOTE! Queste istruzioni sono valide per i seguenti tipi di

Seguire attentamente le seguenti istruzioni, atte ad maochine elettriche ABB, in entrambi le funzioni di
assicurare un'appropriata e sicura installazione, motore e generatore:
f unzionamento e manutenzione del motore. Tutto il
personale addetto al funzionamento ed alla
- serie MT*, MBT*, MXMA
manutenzione del motore deve essere a conoscenza di
tali istruzioni. La loro inosservanza poterebbe rendere la - serie M2A7M3A*, M2B7M3B*, M2C7M3C*, M2F7
garanzia nulla. M3F*, M2L7M3L*,M2M7M3M*,M2Q* ,M2R7M3R*,
M2V7M3V*
Dichiarazione di conformité
nelle grandezze 56 - 400.
Dichiarazioni di Conformité nel rispetto della Direttiva
BassaTensione 73/23/EEC emendata dalla Direttiva 93/ E' disponibile una guida separata per e.g. Ex motors
68/EEC devono essere emesse separatamente per ogni "Low voltage motors for hazardous area: Installation,
macchina. operation and maintenance manual" (Low Voltage
Motors/Manual for Ex-motors).
La Dichiarazione di Conformité soddisfa anche i requisiti
del Certificato di Inoorporazione nel rispetto della Informazioni aggiuntive possono essere necessarie per
Direttiva Macchine 98/37/EEC, Art 4.2 Annex II, sub B. alcuni tipi di motori nel caso di speciali applicazioni e/o
progettazioni,
informazioni aggiuntive sono disponibili per i seguenti
motori:
-roller table motors
- water cooled motors
- open drip proof motors
- smoke venting motors
- brake motors

2. Installazione Se taie valore non puô essere ottenuto, l'awolgimento
è troppo umido e deve essere essicato in forno. La
Messa in servizio (avviamento) temperatura del forno deve essere di 90°C per 12-16 ore
e successivamente di 105°C per 6-8 ore.
Controllo al ricevimento
Ispezionare immediatamente il motore al ricevimento I tappi dei fori di scarico condensa devono essere
per verificare ehe non abbia subito danni durante il rimossi e le valvole chiuse se montate devono essere
trasporto. Se si dovessero riscontrare danneggiamenti aperte durante l'essicamento.
contestarli subito allô spedizioniere.
Awolgimenti ehe siano rimasti immersi in acqua di
Controllare tutte le caratteristiche elencate sulla mare normalmente devono essere rifatti.
targhetta del motore e specialmente la tensione ed il
tipo di collegamento (stella o triangolo). I tipi di Avviamento diretto oppure stella/triangolo
cuscinetto sono indicati sulla targhetta motore, ad La scatola morsetti su motori standard a vélocité
eccezione delle piccole taglie. singola contiene normalmente 6 terminali e almeno un
morsetto di terra.
Far girare a mano l'albero per verificare ehe giri
liberamente e rimuovere eventuali bioccaggi usati per il La messa a terra deve essere effettuata in accordo aile
trasporto. legislazioni locali prima del collegamento del motore
alla rete.
Non superare il limite di carico ammesso sui cuscinetti
indicate nel catalogo del prodotto. La tensione ed il collegamento sono stampigliati sulla
targhetta del motore.
Motori equipaggiati con cuscinetti a rullo: II
funzionamento del motore in assenza di spinte radiali Avviamento diretto da rete (DOL)
applicate all'albero, potrebbe danneggiare il cuscinetto a Nell'awiamento diretto il motore puô essere utilizzato
rulli. sia con collegamento a Stella ehe a triangolo
(naturalmente con tensioni diverse).
Motori dotati di cuscinetto a contatto angolare: II Per esempio 660 VY, 380 VD indica ehe il motore puô
funzionamento del motore in assenza di spinte assiali essere collegato a stella per 660 V ed a triangolo per
applicate all'albero nella giusta direzione, potrebbe 380 V.
danneggiare il cuscinetto a contatto angolare.
I tipi di cuscinetto sono indicati sulla targhetta del Avviamento stella/triangolo (Y/D)
motore. La tensione di linea deve essere uguale alla tensione
nominale del motore in collegamento a triangolo.
Motori dotati di ingrassatori: Togliere tutte le piastrine di collegamento dai terminali.
Alla prima messa in marcia del motore o dopo lunghi
periodi di inattivita'applicare almeno la quantité di Per collegamento di motori a doppia velocità, monofase
grasso minima indicata o sulla targhetta o su questo e motori speciali, seguire le istruzioni riportate
manuale sino a quando fuoriesce dai fori di scarico del all'interno délia scatola morsetti.
grasso.
Per i dettagli vedere la sezione" Lubrificazione manuale" Se l'awiamento diretto da rete impiega piu' di 10
alla pag. 47. secondi oppure l'awiamento Y/D impiega piu' di 30
secondi consultare l'ufficio vendite o la pubblicazione
Controllo délia resistenza d'isolamento "The Motor Guide"(disponibile al sito internet
Controllare la resistenza d'isolamento prima délia www.abb.com/motors&drives).
messa in sen/izio e quando si sospetti una formazione
di umidità negli awolgimenti. Terminali e senso di rotazione
II senso di rotazione è orario visto dal lato comando
La resistenza, misurata in ambiente con temperatura di quando la sequenza di fase L1, L2, L3 è collegata ai
+ 25 °C, deve eccedere il valore di riferimento, e cioè terminali come indicate nella figura 1.
10 Mohm (misurati con Megger da 500 V ce.)
Per invertira la direzione di rotazione, scambiare tra loro
AWERTENZA: i collegamenti di due terminali qualsiasi.
(3li awolgimenti devono essere scaricati
immediatamente dopo la misura per evitare Se il motore ha una ventola unidirezionale, controllare
rischi di shock efettrïci. ehe la direzione di rotazione sia in accordo alla freccia
posta sul motore.
Il valore di riferimento délia resistenza d'isolamento
viene dimezzato ogni 20°C di aumento di temperatura
ambiente.

Gestione Lega Leggara Ghisa Acciaio
Gran- Peso Peso agg. Peso Peso
Immagazzinaggio dezza kg perev. kg kg
Tutti i motori devono essere immagazzinati in luogo freno
coperto, aseiutto, privo di vibrazioni e di polvere. _ _ _
56 4.5
63 6 - - -
Le superfici non protette del motore (estremità d'albero
71 8 5 13 -
e flange) devono essere protette con trattamento 80 12 8 20 -
anticorrosivo. 90 17 10 30 -
100 25 16 40 -
Si raocomanda di ruotare a mano periodicamente 112 36 20 50 -
l'albero per prevenire migrazioni di lubrificante. 132 63 30 90 -
160 110 55 175 -
Le scaldiglie anticondensa, se esistenti, devono essere 180 160 65 250 -
preferibilmente tenute sotto tensione. 200 220 - 310 -
225 295 - 400 -
Le caratteristiche di condensatori elettrolitici, se montati 250 370 - 550 -
su motori monofase, devono essere ripristinate dopo
280 405 - 800 600
315 - 1300 1000
periodi di immagazzinaggio superiosi a 1 -2 anni. Per
355 - - 2300 2200
maggiori dettagli contattare ABB Motors. 400 - - 3500 3000
Trasporto
Motori equipaggiati con cuscinetti a rulli cilindrici e/o Installazione
con contatto angolare devono essere bloccati durante il
trasporto. Raffreddamento
Le prestazioni standard dei motori sono riferite ad una
Sollevamento temperatura massima di 40°C (+45°C o +50°C per
Per sollevare il motore utilizzare esclusivamente i golfari marina). Controllare ehe il motore sia investito dal
di sollevamento, se non specificato diversamente nelle flusso d'aria prodotto dalla ventola. Assicurarsi ehe non
istruzioni separate di sollevamento. ci siano apparecchiature nelle vicinanze o superfici
esposte ad irraggiamento solare diretto ehe forniscano
Il centra di gravita dei motori con la stessa altezza calore aggiuntivo al motore. Per ulteriori dettagli su
d'asse puô variare in funzione della diversa potenza, elevate temperature ambiente e sul raffreddamento
délia forma costruttiva e delle apparecchiature ausiliarie. contattare ABB Motors.
Prima di sollevare il motore assicurarsi ehe i golfari di Fondazione

sollevamento non siano danneggiati. I golfari L'acquirente ha la piena responsabilité per la
danneggiati non devono essere utilizzati. preparazione delle fondazioni.
I golfari di sollevamento devono essere stretti prima Le fondazioni rhetalliche devono essere verniciate per
dell'utilizzo. Se necessario la posizione degli anelli puo evitare la corrosione.
essere adattata eon rondelle specifiche.
Le fondazioni devono essere in piano e
Assicurarsi ehe vengano utilizzate apparecchiature di sufficientemente rigide persopportare eventuali
sollevamento appropriate e ehe le dimensioni dei ganci sollecitazioni da corto circuito. Devono essere
di sollevamento siano adatte ai golfari. dimensionate in modo da evitare l'insorgenza di
vibrazioni dovute a risonanza.
Fare attenzione a non danneggiare le apparecchiature
ausiliarie e i cavi collegati al motore. Bulloni di fondazione
Inserire i bulloni di fondazione nei piedi del motore e
Pesi dei motori collooare uno spessore di 1-2 mm. tra il bullone ed il
I pesi totali dei motori variano anche per motori della piede.
stessa grandezza (altezza d'asse) in base alle diverse
potenze, diverse forme costruttive ed eventuale Allineare il motore con l'uso di strumenti adatti.
aggiunta di aocessori. Fare una gettata di calcestruzzo, controllare
rallineamento e praticare i fori necessari per le spine di
La tabella seguente indica pesi massimi presunti per centraggio.
motori nella loro versione standard in base al materiale
della carcassa. Fori di scarico condensa
Controllare ehe i fori di scarico condensa siano aperti e
II peso esatto di un motore è indicato sulla sua rivolti verso il basso se Pinstallazione è diversa da
targhetta. quella standard.

In ambienti molto polverosi tutti i fori di soarico Applicazioni con convertitori di frequenza
condensa devono essere tenuti chiusi. I convertitori di frequenza causano un affaticamento per
la presenza di picchi di alta tensione rispetto alla
Allineamento normale onda sinusoidale applicata ai capi
Un corretto allineamento è indispensabile per prevenire dell'awolgimento del motore, e possono inoltre essere
guasti ai cuscinetti, vibrazioni e possibili rotture delle causa della presenza di tensione indotta sull'albero
estremitàd'albero. dall'alta frequenza di lavoro e correnti nei cuscinetti. Per
tale ragione l'awolgimento e l'isolamento dei cuscinetti
Slitte tendicinghia e pulegge del motore corne il filtra di uscita del convertitore
• Assicurare il motore alle slitte tendicinghia come devono essere dimensionati in accordo con "Selection
indicato in figura 2. rules for VSD application/insulation" (3GZF500930-2),
• Collocare le slitte tendicinghia orizzontalmente sullo disponibili a richiesta presso ABB.
stesso piano.
• Controllare ehe l'albero motore sia parallelo all'albero
condotto. Nelle applicazioni con convertitore di frequenza il
• Mettere in tensione le cinghie secondo istruzioni del motore (Pn > 30 kW) deve essere cablato utilizzando
fornitore. cavi simmetrici schermati e passacavo forniti di ghiera
metallica a 360° (chiamati anche passacavi EMC).
AWERTENZA: Ulteriori informazioni possono essere reperite sul
Un'eccessiva tensione delle cinghie danneggerà i manuale ABB "grounding and cabling of the drive
cuscinetti e puô anche causare una rottura system" (3AFY61201998).
dell'albero.
La vite di messa a terra esterna della carcassa motore
Non superare le tensioni di cinghia massime deve essere utilizzata per equilibrare la differenza di
(owerossia i carichi radiali sui cuscinetti) indicati nei Potenziale tra la carcassa del motore e della macchina
relativi cataloghi di prodotto. accoppiata, salvo ehe le due macchine non siano
montate sulla stessa base metallica.
Collegamento
I motori in versione standard hanno la scatola morsetti Per le grandezze maggiori alla IEC 280, utilizzare un
situata sulla sommité del motore, con ingresso cavi su cavo piatto da 0.75 x 70 mm o almeno due cavi
entrambi i lati. circolari di 50 mm2. La distanza tra i cavi circolari dovrà
essere di almeno 150 mm I'uno dall'altro.
Alcuni motori possono essere forniti, in alternativa, con
la scatola morsetti montata sulla sommita del motore Questa disposizione non ha funziqne di sicurezza
orientabile di 90 in 90 gradi oppure con la scatola elettrica; I'unico scopo è quello di equilibrare i potenziali.
morsetti montata lateralmente. Se il motore e il riduttore sôno montati sulla stessa
La disponibilita di queste versioni alternative è iiiustrata base di acciaio non è necessario equilibrare i potenziali.
sul catalogo di prodotto.
Gli ingressi cavi non utilizzati devono essere chiusi.

Equipotenziamento
Oltre ai terminali dell'awolgimento e di terra, la scatola

morsetti puô contenere le connessioni per termistori,
scaldiglie, bimetalli o termoresistenze PT100.
AWERTENZA: Macchina acccppiala

Durante le fermate, alPintemo della scatola
morsetti puô essere présente tensione utilizzata
per alimentare le scaldigiie o direttamente
rawoigimento pertenerlo in temperatura. Per essere conformi ai requisiti delle EMC, è
necessario usare cavi e collegamenti conformi allo
Gli schemi di collegamento per cireuiti ausiliari si scopo (vedere le istruzioni per i convertitori di
trovano all'interno del coperchio della scatola morsetti frequenza).
o su etichette esterne
AWERTENZA:
II condensatore in motori monofase puô rïmanere
caricato tenendo in tensione i morsetti, anche
quando il motore è ormai fermo.

La massima velocita' di rotazione per motori cast iron Le attrezzature antinfortunistiche necessarie alla
(M2BA/M3BP) usati con convertitore di frequenza non prevenzione di incidenti durante il montaggio e
deve superare la massima velocita' consentita corne funzionamento del motore sull'impianto devono essere
indicato nella figura sotto o la velocita' indicata sulla in accordo alle regole antinfortunistiche vigenti nel
targhetta motore. Per informazioni sulla massima paese.
velocita' di rotazione per altri tipi di motori o altre
grandezze prego contattare ABB. La lubrificazione dei AVVERTENZA
cuscinetti deve seguire le istruzione gia' menzionate. Piccoli motori collegati direttamente alia rete
tramite interruttori termici possono awiarsi
automaticamente.
Grandezza Velocita' r/min
motore 2 poli 4 poli
280 3600 2600 Osservazioni:
315 3600 2300 1. II motore non deve essere utilizzato per
355 3600 2000 funzionamento ad impulsi.
400 3600 1800 2. La temperatura della carcassa del motore puô
risultare estremamente calda al contatto della
Se esiste un' incertezza a riguardo délia corretta mano durante il normale funzionamento.
applicazione del motore per applicazione con 3. Alcune applicazioni speciali richiedono istruzioni
convertitore di frequenza prego contattare ABB. speciali (ad esempio alimentazione a mezzo
inverter).
4. I golfari di sollevamento dovranno essere
AVVEBTENZA: utilizzati per solievare il solo motore.
La massima temperatura di lavoro del grasso e I golfari non possono essere uilizzati per il
dei cuscinetti non deve essere superafa. sollevamento se il motore e' collegato con un
altro equipaggiamento.
Bilanciatura Assemblaggio e smontaggio
II rotore del motore è bilanciato dinamicamente. Generalità

Lassemblaggio e lo smontaggio dei motori deve essere
Nei motori standard la bilanciatura è effettuata con effettuato da personale qualificato utilizzando strumenti
mezza chiavetta e sull'albero viene applicato un nastro e metodi di lavoro adatti. Tutte le operazioni devono
ROSSO con la dicitura "bilanciato con mezza chiavetta" essere eseguite in accordo allo standard IEC-60079-19.
(Balanced with half key).
Cuscinetti
Per evitare vibrazioni, il giunto o la puleggia devono I cuscinetti abbisognano di cure speciali. Devono
essere bilanciati con mezza chiavetta dopo aver essere smontati con I'uso di estrattori e montati a caldo
ricavato la sede per la stessa. o con I'uso di strumenti adatti. La sostituzione dei
cuscinetti è descritta in dettaglio su istruzioni separate
In caso di bilanciatura con chiavetta intera, sull'albero da richiedere ad ABB Motors.
verra applicato un nastro GIALLO con la dicitura
"bilanciato con chiavetta intera" (Balanced with full key). Montaggio di semigiunti e pulegge
Semigiunti e pulegge devono essere montati solo con
In caso di bilanciatura senza chiavetta, sull'albero I'utilizzo di strumenti adatti, ehe non danneggino i
verra applicato un nastro BLU con la dicitura cuscinetti.
"Bilanciato senza chiavetta" (Balanced without key).
Non usare mai un martello per montare un semigiunto o
3. Uso un cuscinetto e non usare mai una leva infulcrata contra
il corpo del motore per rimuoverli.
Condizioni di funzionamento
I motori sono previsti per utilizzo in applicazioni Per montare accuratamente il semigiunto:
industriali. controllare ehe il gioco b sia inferiore a 0.05 mm e ehe
I limiti di temperatura ambiente sono -20°C +40°C. la differenza tra a1 e a2 sia anch'essa inferiore a 0.05
L'altitudine massima è 1000 metri slm. mm.
Vedere figura 3.
Considerazioni riguardanti la sicurezza
II motore deve essere installato ed utilizzato da perso-
nale qualificato ehe sia a conoscenza dei requisiti di
sicurezza.

4. Manutenzione Motoriforniti con inarassatori
Targhetta informazioni sulla lubrificazione e

Manutenzione e Iubrificazione indicazioni generali
Ispezione generate Se il motore è prowisto di targhetta riportante le
Ispezionare il motore a intervalli regolari istruzioni per la lubrificazione, seguire i valori indicati,
Mantenere il motore pulito e assicurare una altrimenti attenersi ai valori dati. '
buona ventilazione.
Controllare le condizioni di anelli di tenuta
sull'albero (es.V-ring) e sostituirli se necessario. Sdulla targhetta gli intervalli di ingrassaggio rispetto al
Controllare le condizioni delle connessioni e dei tipo di montaggio, temperatura ambiente e velocita' di
bulloni di fissaggio e fondazione. rotazione possono essere riportati in alcuni casi.
Controllare le condizioni dei cuscinetti prestando
attenzione ad eventuali rumori anomali, alle Uno degli obiettivi di ABB è di garantire l'affidabilità dei
vibrazioni, alla temperatura, analizzando il grasso cuscinetti attraverso corretti intervalli di lubrificazione.
consumato ed effettuando monitoraggi con Questo è il motivo per cui ABB segue le regole del
rilevatori SPM dove esistenti. principio L1.
•Quando si rilevino condizioni anomale,
smontare il motore, controllarne le parti ed Lubrificazione manuale
effettuare le sostituzioni necessarie.
Ingrassaggio mentre il motore e' in servizio
- Togliere il tappo di scarico grasso, se présente o
Lubrificazione
aprire le valvole di ingrassaggio se presenti.
- Assicurarsi ehe il canale di ingrassaggio sia aperto.
AWERTENZA - Premere la giusta quantita' di grasso nel cuscinetto.
Prestare attenzione alle parti in movimento
- Fare funzionare il motore per 1-2 ore per assicurarsi
ehe tutto il grasso in eccesso venga spinto fuori dai
cuscinetti. Rimettere il tappo di scarico grasso e
AWERTENZA ;;
chiudere le valvole di ingrassaggio, se esistenti.
II grassö püo'causare irritaziöni defap'elle e
infiammazlôni agli occhi. Seguire tutte le
necessarie precauzioni indicate dal fabbricante. Ingrassaggio quando il motore non e' servizio
Procedere alla rilubrificazione dei motori durante il
funzionamento. Se non è possibile, la lubrificazione puö
Motori con cuscinetti ad inqrassaqqio permanente essere eseguita a motore fermo.
I cuscinetti sono normalmente forniti come cuscinetti - In questo caso usare solo la meta délia quantité di
ad ingrassaggio permanente dei tipi "Z" o "2Z'. grasso richiesto, poi mettere in funzione il motore per
I tipi di cuscinetti montati sono specificati nel rispettivi qualche minuto alla vélocité nominale.
cataioghi di prodotto esuila targhetta motore eccetto per - Dopo aver fermato il motore, immettere la quantité
le piccole taglie. rimanente di grasso nel cuscinetto.
- Dopo 1 -2 ore di funzionamento rimettere il tappo di
Si elencano gli intervalli indicativi per una adeguata scarico grasso o chiudere le valvole di ingrassaggio
lubrificazione per taglie maggiori di 180 in accordo a L1 (se presenti).
(ciô significa ehe il 99 % dei cuscinetti avrà una
lubrificazione più ehe adeguata) riferiti ad una Lubrificazione automatica
temperatura ambiente di 25°C. In caso di lubrificazione automatica rimuovere
Vedere il rispettivo catalogo di prodotto. permanentemente il tappo di scarico grasso o aprire le
valvole di ingrassaggio se montate.
Grandezza Poli Ore
56-80 2-8 a vita Alcuni motori possono essere equipaggiati con un
90-112 2-8 40000 raccoglitore per il grasso usato. Seguire le speciali
132 2 31000 istruzioni per questo dispositivo.
132 4-8 40000
160 2 23000 Noi raccomandiamo di utilizzare soltanto sistemj
160 4-8 40000 elettromeccanici. Contattare ABB.
180 2 19 000
180 4-8 40000 La quantita' di grasso per ogni intervailo di lubrificazione
indicata nelle tavole deve essere raddoppiata nel caso
di lubrificazione automatica.
Dipende dall'applicazione e dalle condizioni di carico.
Nel caso di motore a 2 poli con ingrassaggio automatico
Le ore di servizio per i motori verticali sono la meta di
le note (NOTE!) a proposito delle indicazioni sulla
quelle indicate.
lubrificazione date per i motori a 2 polio nel paragrafo
Lubrificazione devono essere rispettate.

Intervalli di Lubrificazione e quantita' Lubrificanti con le corrette proprieta sono disponibili
Gran- Quantita 3600 3000 ÎI05 Ï5Ô5 ÎÔÔÔ" 500-900 presso i maggiori produttori.
dezza di grasso r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
g/cuscinetto Le Miscele sono permesse, ma una garanzia scritta
Cuscinetti a sfere deve essere rilasciata dal produttore del lubrificante
Intervalli di lubrificazione in ore di funzionamento specialmente per miscele EP, dove si evidenzia ehe la
112 10 10000 13000 18000 21000 25000 28000 miscela non danneggia il cuscinetto e le proprieta' del
132 15 9000 11000 17000 19000 23000 26500
-160 25 7000 9500 14000 17000 21000 24000 lubrificante alla temperatura di lavoro.
180 30 6000 8000 13500 16000 20000 23000
200 40 4000 6000 11000 13000 17000 21000 AVVERTENZA:
225 50 3000 5000 10000 12500 16500 20000 Lubrificanti contenenti miscele EP non sono
250 60 2500 4000 9000 11500 15000 18000 consigliati per cuscinetti ad alte temperature nelle
280 70 2000« 3500« 8000 10500 14000 17000
315 taglie 280 fino 400.
90 « 6500 8500 12500 16000
355 120 •" 4200 6000 10000 13000
400 120 fl 4200 6000 10000 13000 Se la temperatura ambiente è inferiore a -25°C o
400 M3BP 130 fl 2800 4600 8400 12000 superiore a 110°C consultare ABB Motors per verif icare
Cuscinetti a rulli la possibilité di utilizzare grasso per basse temperature.
Intervalli di lubrificazione in ore di funzionamento
160 25 3500 4500 7000 8500 10500 12000 Possono essere utilizzati i seguenti tipi di lubrificante
180 30 3000 4000 7000 8000 10000 11500 ad alto rendimento:
200 40 2000 3000 5500 6500 8500 10500
225 50 1500 2500 5000 6000 8000 10000
250 60 1300 2200 4500 5700 7500 9000 Esso Unirex N2, N3 or S2 (lithium complex base)
280 70 1000« 2000« 4000 5300 7000 8500 Mobil Mobilith SHC100 (lithium complex base)
315 90 » fl 3300 4300 6000 8000 Shell Albida EMS 2 (lithium complex base)
355 120 » » 2000 3000 5000 6500 SKF LGHQ 3 (lithium complex base)
400 120 <> « 2000 3000 5000 6500 Klüber Klüberplex BEM 41 -132 (special lithium
400 M3BP 130 fl 1 1400 2300 4200 6000
« Valori per grandezze motori speoifici IEC 280 fino 400 (3600 e FAG Arcanol TEMP90 (calsium polyurea base)
3000 r/min), vedere la tabella seguente. FAG Arcanol TEMP110 (lithium complex base)
Fattori ehe influenzano i valori dell'intervallo di Intervalli di lubrificazione per altri tipi di grasso ehe
lubrificazione rispettano le specifiche e proprieta' richieste, contattare
Gli intervalli di lubrificazione per motori montati ABB.
verticalmente sono la meta dei valori in tabella.
Intervalli di Lubrificazione e quantita'. 2-poli.
I valori degli intervalli di lubrificazione si riferiscono ad Grandezze IEC 280 fino a 400
una temperatura dei cuscinetti di 80°C (temperatura Gran- Quantita 3600 3000
ambiente circa +25°C). Nota! Un incremento della dezza di grasso r/min r/min
temperatura ambiente causa un corrispondente g/cuscinetto
aumento della temperatura dei cuscinetti. Tali valori Cuscinetti a sfere
Intervalli di lubrificazione in ore di funzionamento
devono essere dimezzati ogni 15°C di aumento nella
temperatura dei cuscinetti. 280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000
AWERTENZA: 355 M3B* 35 1200 2000
La temperatura massima di esercizio del grasso 400 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000
e dei cuscinetti non deve essèrë superata. 400 M3B* 40 1000 1600
Cuscinetti a rulli
Lubrificanti Intervalli di lubrificazione in ore di funzionamento
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
AVVERTENZA: 355 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000
Non mescolare differenti tipi di grasso. 355 M3B* 35 600 1000
L'incornpatibilita' tra diversi lubrificanti puo' 400 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000
causare danni al cuscinetto. 400 M3B* 40 500 800
Per il reingrassaggio, utilizzare solo lubrificanti specifici NOTA!

per cuscinetti a sfere, con le seguenti proprieta:
Utilizzare sempre lubrificante per alte velocità se si
- grasso di buona qualità con composto al sapone di
usano motori ad alta velocità ed alcuni modelli tipo
litio e con minérale o olio di PAO
M2BA/M3—_ 355 e 400 2-poli, quando il fattore di
- viscosità dell'olio di base 100-160 cSt a 40°C velocità è superiore a 400 000 (calcolato corne Dm x n
- consistenza NLGI grado 1.5 o 3 *) dove Dm = diametro medio del cuscinetto, mm; n =
- gamma di temperature -30°C +120°C continuativa. velocità di rotazione, r/min).
*) Per motori a montaggio verticale o in condizioni di
funzionamento ad alta temperatura e' raccomandato
NLGI grade.

Utilizzare il seguente, o similare, tipo di lubrificante: I livelli di rumorosità relativi ai motori in tutte le
grandezze con ventilazione separata e relativi ai motori
• FAG L69 (polyurea base) serie M2F7M3F*, M2L7M3R*, M2R7M3R* e M2BJ/
• Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (polyurea base) M2LJ sono indicati in manuali di istruzioni separati.
Se si cambia la marca del lubrificante controllare la

compatibilita' in accordo con il produttore del
lubrificante. Se la compatibilita non è certa, contattare
ABB.
Applicazioni con convertitori di frequenza

Funzionamento a velocità superiori (per esempio nel
caso di aiimentazione tramite inverter) od a velocità
inferiori (per carichi pesanti) necessitano di intervalli di
lubrificazione rawicinati. In tali casi consultare ABB
Motors.
Indicativamente, un raddoppio délia velocità richiede

L una riduzione degli intervalli di lubrificazione di circa il
140 % del valori riportati in tabella.
AWERTENZA:
La massima velocità' di progetto relativa alla
struttura del motore non deve essere superata.
Si deve inoltre sempre verificare ehe i cuscinetti siano

adatti alla rotazione ad alte velocità.
Parti di ricambio
Nell'ordinare parti di ricambio per un motore indicare il
tipo di motore con codice di prodotto come stampigliato
sulla targhetta del motore stesso.
Se sulla targhetta compare un numéro di matricola del
motore è necessario comunicare anche quest'ultimo.
Riawolgimento
II riawolgimento dovrà sempre essere eseguito da
officine qualificate.
Motori speciali e motori per estrazione fumi potranno

essere riawolti solo previo contatto con ABB Motori.
5. Requisiti ambientali
^Livello di rumorosità
La maggior parte dei nostri motori hanno un livello di
rumorosità (pressione sonora) inferiore ai 82 dB(A)
riferita alla condizione di aiimentazione sinusoidale,
tolleranza ± 3dB(A). •
I valori esatti per ogni tipo di motore possono essere

rilevati dai relativi cataloghi di prodotto.
Con aiimentazione sinusoidale e frequenza 60 Hz e per

livelli di rumorosità con aiimentazione non sinusoidale,
consultare ABB Motors.

Le seguenti informazioni non comprendono tutte le possibili varianti ne tutte le oondizioni di instaiiazione, f unziona-
mento o manutenzione. Nel caso siano necessari informazioni aggiuntive, contattare l'ufficio vendite ABB più vicino.
Tabella per la risoluzione dei problemi
Tutte le riparazioni dovranno essere eseguite da personale qualificato ehe abbia gli strumenti e le apparecchiature
necessarie ad effettuare gli interventi sui motori
PROBLEMA CAUSA COSA FARE

II motore non si awia Fusibili danneggiati Sostituire i fusibili con altri simili e correttamente
dimensionati.
Sovraccarico Controllare e risettare gli interruttori.
Potenza disponibile insufficiente. Controllare se la potenza disponibile è in accordo
a quella riportata sulla targa del motore.
Connessioni non corrette Controllare ehe le connessioni siano in accordo allô
schema di collegamento del motore.
Collegamenti interrotti E' segnalato da un rumore anomalo.Controllare ehe
ci sia continuité tra i collegamenti.
Guasto meccanico Controllare ehe il motore e la macehina accoppiata
girino liberamente. Controllare i cuscinetti e il
lubrificante.
Corto circuito nello statore Segnalato da un guasto dei fusibili. Il motore deve
essere riawolto.
Rotore difettoso Verificare se ci sono le sbarre o gli anelli rotti
Motore sovraccaricato Ridurre il carico
II motore stalla Una fase potrebbe essere aperta Controllare i cavi di collegamento.
Applicazione sbagliata Verificare il dimensionamento con il costruttore.
Sovraccarico Ridurre il carico.
Tensione troppo bassa Assicurarsi ehe il motore venga alimentato con la
corretta tensione di targa.Controllare i collegamenti.
Circuito aperto Fusibili danneggiati, controllare i vari interruttori e
relè.
II motore funziona e Mancanza di potenza Controllare i collegamenti alla linea, ai fusibili e ai
poi si ferma o décèlera. vari interruttori.
Il Motore non raggiunge Caduta di tensione in linea. Controllare i collegamenti. Controllare ehe i cavi
la velocità nominale. siano correttamente dimensionati.
Cambiare le prese sul trasformatore per avere la
tensione corretta ai morsetti.
Inerzia troppo elevata Verificare il dimensionamento del motore.
Sbarre di rotore interrotte. Cercare crêpe vicino agli anelli di corto circuito.
Potrebbe essere necessario un nuovo rotore poiché
le riparazioni sono temporanee.
Tempi di accelerazione Carico eccessivo Ridurre il carico.
troppo lunghi e/o Bassa tensione durante l'awiamento Verificare ehe i cavi siano correttamente
assorbimenti troppo dimensionati.
elevati. Rotore difettoso Sostituire con un nuovo rotore.
Tensione troppo bassa Rendere disponibile maggior potenza alla linea. \
•
Rotazione sbagliata Sequenza fasi sbagliata Invertire due fasi.
II Motore si surriscalda Sovraccarico Ridurre il carico.
durante il funzionamento Alette di raffreddamento Liberare i fori di ventilazione e garantire un flusso
a carico otturati da sporeizia. d'aria continuo al motore.
Il Motore potrebbe avère una Controllare ehe tutti i eavi siano collegati
fase aperta. saldamente ed in modo corretto.
Una fase deH'awolgimento a terra Trovarlaeripararla.
tensioni di fase asimmetriehe. (Jomrollare i van collegamenti dal trastormatoreal
motore.

PROBLEMA CAUSA COSA FARE
II Motore vibra Motore non allineato Allinearlo
Basamento debole Rinforzare il basamento.
Giunto non bilanciato Bilanciare il giunto
Macchina accoppiata sbilanciata Bilanciare la macchina accoppiata.
Cuscinetti difettosi Sostituire i cuscinetti.
Pesi di bilanciatura allentati Bilanciare il rotore.
Motore bilanciato diversamente Bilanciare il giunto o il motore
dal giunto (mezza chiavetta -
chiavetta intera)
Motore trifase ehe funzione Controllare le fasi.
a fase singola
Gioco eccessivo Aggiustare il cuscinetto o mettere uno spessore.
Rumore anomalo La ventola raschia il copriventola Eliminare il contatto.
Basetta allentata Stringere le viti relative.
Rumorosità durante Traferro non uniforme Controllare e correggere rallineamento dei cuscinetti.
il funzionamento Rotore non bilanciato Bilanciarlo.
Cuscinetti troppo caldi Albero piegato o incrinato Raddrizzare o sostituire l'albero.
Trazione eccessiva delle cinghie Diminuire la tensione delle cinghie.
Pulegge troppo lontane dalla Awicinare la puleggia alla battuta del motore.
battuta dell'albero
Diametro puleggia troppo piccolo Usare pulegge più grandi.
Allineamento non corretto Correggere rallineamento del motore e délia
macchina accoppiata.
Grasso insufficiente Mantere la giusta quantità di lubrificante nei
cuscinetti.
Lubrificante deteriorate o Rimuovere il grasso vecchio, lavare i cuscinetti
contaminate accuratamente con kerosene e reingrassare con del
nuovo lubrificante.
Eccesso di lubrificante Ridurre la quantità di lubrificante, il cuscinetto non
dovrà essere riempito a più di meta.
Sovraccarico del cuscinetto Controllare rallineamento, e le eventuali spinte
radiali e/o assiali.
Sfere o pista del cuscinetto rovinata. Pulire accuratamente l'alloggiamento e sostituire il
cuscinetto.

Manual för installation, drift och
underhall
Innehållsforteckning
LAIImänt 4. Underhall
2. Installation 5. Miljökrav
3. Drift 6. Felsökningsschema för motorer
LAIImänt Giltighet
OBS! Dessa instruktioner gäller för följande ABB elektriska

Dessa regier mäste följas för att garantera säker och motorer såval i motor som generatordrift.
korrekt installation, funktion och underhall. Alla personer
involverade i dessa arbetsskeden ska uppmärksammas serierna MT*, MBT*, MXMA,
på instruktionema. Om instruktionerna inte följs kan serierna M2A7M3A*, M2B7M3B*, M2C7M3C*. M2F7
garantin upphöra att gälla. M3F*, M2L7M3L*, M2M7M3M*, M2Q\ M2R7M3FT,
M2V7M3V*
EU-deklaration
i storleksområdet 56 - 400.
EU-deklaration om överenstämmelse enligt
lågspanningsdirektivet73/23/EEC kompletterat med Det f inns särskilda motorinstuktioner för t.ex.
direktiv 93/68/EEC utfärdas separat med enskilda explosionsskyddade motorer: 'Lågspanningsmotorer får
motorer. explosionsfarliga omraden: Manual får installation, drift
och underhall' (Low Voltage Motors/Manual for Ex-
EU-deklarationen täcker också kraven för en motors).
inbyggnadsdeklaration med avseende på
maskindirektivet 98/37/EEC, Art 4.2 Annex II, sub B. Ytterligare information kan behövas för vissa motortyper
på grund av speciell användning och/eller utformning.
Ytterligare information finns får följande motorer:
- rullbordsmotorer
- vattenkylda motorer
- öppna droppsäkra motorer
- motorer för rökgasventilation
- bromsmotorer

2. Installation Direktstart eller Y/D start
Uttagslådan till en standard enhastighetsmotor innehåller
Igangkörning normalt 6 lindningsuttag och minst ett jorduttag.
Ankomstkontroll Motorn skall anslutas till jord enligt gällande

Kontrollera omedelbart vid ankomsten att motorn inte bestämmelser innan den ansluts till nätet.
skadats under transporten. Om den skadats skall
. transportören underrättas om detta så snart som möjligt. Spanning och koppling framgår av märkskylten.
Kontrollera alla märkdata, speciellt spanning och Direktstart

koppling (Y eller D). Lagertypen finns angiven på Y eller D koppling kan nyttjas. T.ex 660 VY, 380 VD
märkskylten på alla motorer utom på de minsta angerY-koppling för 660 V och D-koppling för 380 V,
storlekama.
Y/D-start
Vrid axeln for hand får att kontrollera att rotorn går runt. Nätspänningen maste vara lika med motorns
Avlägsna eventuell transportlåsning. märkspänning i D-koppling. Alla.kopplingsbleck skall tas
bort från plinten.
Overskrid inte de tillåtna lagerbelastningarna, som finns
angivna i produktkatalogen. Förtvahastighetsmotorer, enfas- och andra
specialmotorer maste anslutningen till nätet följa
f Motorer utrustade med rullager: Om motorn körs utan anvisningarna i uttagslådan.
radiell belastning på axeln kan rullagret skadas.
Om en direktstart (DOL) varar längre an 10 sek eller en
Motorer utrustade med vinkelkontaktlager: Om motorn Y/D-start längre an 30 sek, konsultera ABB:s
körs utan axiell kraft applicerad på axeln i rätt riktning försäljningskontor eller "Motorhandledningen" (finns även
kan vinkelkontaktlagret skadas. tillgånglig på internet på www.abb.com/motors&drives).
Motorer utrustade med smörjnipplar: Uttag och rotationsriktning

När motorn startas forstå gangen, eller efter lang tids Rotationsriktningen är medurs sett mot axeländan på
forvaring av motorn, pressa in minst angiven mängd fett, drivsidan om nätfaserna L1, L2 och L3 ligger anslutna till
till dess att färskt fett börjar tränga ut genom uttagen som visas i figur 1.
fettutloppsöppningarna.
För detaljer se avsnittet "Manuell smörjning" på sid 57. För att ändra rotationsriktning växla plats på två av
nätanslutningskablarna.
Kontroll av isolationsresistansen
Om motorn har en riktningsberoende flakt skall
Mät isolationsresistansen före idrifttagning och då man
rotationsriktningen överensstämma med pilen på motorn.
kan misstänka att lindningarna blivit fuktiga.
Resistansen, matt vid 25°C, skall överstiga Hantering

referensvärdet:
10 M ohm (matt med en 500 V de Megger) Forvaring
All lagring av motorer skall göras inomhus under torra,
VARNING *Ä; vibrations- och dammfria forhållanden.
Efter mätningen skall iindningärna omedelbart
urläddas för att undvika riskërï for elektrisk chock. Oskyddade bearbetade ytor (axeltappar och f länsar)
skall behandlas med rostskyddsmedel.
klsolationsresistansens referensvärde halverasförvar
F20°C höjning av omgivningstemperaturen. Axeln bör roteras med jämna mellanrum för att förhindra
att fettfilmen i lagren trangs igenom.
Om referensresistansen inte kan uppnås är lindningen
för fuktig och maste torkas i ugn. Ugnstemperaturen Anslut gärna stilleståndsuppvarmningen om sådan finns
skall vara 90°C i 12-16 timmar följda av 105°C i 6-8 installerad i motorn.
timmar.
Karaktäristiken för elektrolytkondensatorer i
Om det finns pluggar i dräneringshalen maste de tas ur enfasmotorer, om sådana används, erfordrar formering
och stängningsventiler, om sådana finns, maste vara efter lagring i 1-2 år. Kontakta ABB:s försäljningskontor
öppna under värmningen. för detaljanvisningar.
Lindningar dränkta i havsvatten maste normalt omlindas.

Transport Uppställning
Motorer utrustade med rullager och/eller vinkelkontakt-
lager skall vara försedda med transportlåsning av rotorn Kylning
under transport. Normal omgivningstemperatur bör inte överskrida 40°C
(marin standard +40 eller +50°C) för att
Lyftning standardprestanda ska kunna uppnås. Kontrollera att
Använd endast lyftöglorna för lyftning av motorn, om motorn får tillräckligt kylluftflöde. Se till att inga ytor eller
inte annat anges i den speciella lyftinstruktionen. angränsande utrustning strålarytterligare värme mot
motorn. Förytterligare information om högre
Motorns tyngdpunkt kan, trots samma storlek, variera omgivningstemperaturer och kylning, se
beroende på uteffekt, monteringssätt och sidoutrustning. "Motorhandledningen" eller kontakta ABB:s
försäljningskontor.
Kontrollera att öglebultarna eller lyftöglorna på
motorstativet är oskadade före lyftning. Skadade Fundament
lyftöglor får inte användas. Beställaren ansvarar för utförandet av fundamentet.
Lyftöglorna maste vara väl åtdragna före lyftning. Vid Fundament av metall skall vara målade för att förhindra
behov kan lyftöglornas lägen justeras med hjalp av korrosion.
brickor.
Fundamenten skall vara plana och tillräckligt stabila för
Kontrollera att korrekt lyftutrustning används och att att motstå kortslutningskrafterna. De skall vara så I
krokarnas storlek är anpassad till lyftöglorna. dimensionerade så att vibrationer inte uppstår på grund
av egenfrekvens.
Varnoga med attinte skada hjälputrustning och kablar
som är anslutna till motorn. Fästklotsar
Skruva fast fästklotsarna vid motorns fötter och placera
Vikter en 1-2 mm mellanläggsplat mellan klotsen och foten.
Motoremas totala vikt varierar inom samma storlek
(axelhöjd) beroende på motoreffekt, monteringssätt och Rikta upp motorn med hjälp av en lämplig metod.
olikatilläggsdetaljer. Gjut fast klotsama med betong, kontrollera uppriktningen
och borra hål för och fast styrpinnar.
Följande tabell visar uppskattade maximala vikter för
motorer i standardutförande som en funktion av Dräneringshai
materialet i statorhuset. Kontrollera att öppna dräneringshal mynnar neråt då
monteringssättet awiker från standard.
För motorer som vager mer an 25 kg är de faktiska
vikten instämplad på märkskylt. I extremt dammiga miljöer skall alla dräneringshal vara
stängda.
Aluminium Gjutjärn Stål Uppriktning

Stor- Vikt Lägg till. Vikt Vikt Korrekt uppriktning är nödvändigt för att undvika
lek kg för broms. kg kg lagerproblem, vibrationer och eventuellt axeltappsbrott.
1
56 4.5 _ _
Spännlinjaler och remdrift
63 6 -
• Fast motorn vid spännlinjalerna såsom visas i
71 8 5 13 -
figur 2.
80 12 8 20 -
• Placera spännlinjalerna horisontalt på samma •
90 17 10 30 - nivå. '
100 25 16 40 -
• Kontrollera att motorns axel ärparallell med den
112 36 20 50 -
drivna axeln.
132 63 30 90 -
• Spann remmarna i enlighet med leverantörens
160 110 55 175 -
anvisningar.
180 160 65 250 -
200 220 - 310 VARNING *
225 295 - 400 -
- - För hög remspänning skadar lagren och kan
250 370 550
- fôrorsakàaxelbrott.
280 •405 - 800 600
315 - •1300 1000
355 - 2300 2200
400 - - 3500 3000 Overskrid inte maximum remkraft (tiliåten radiell kraft på
lagret) angiven i tillämplig produktkatalog.

Anslutning
U-k-L Potentiaiutjamning
Normalt är motorn konstruerad med uttagslådan ovanpå
r vi «\ Staia Kablar/ledare
motorn och med kabelanslutningsmojligheterfrån båda
U1 W*
sidorna. PE
3-M ] / / ' //' '//
0.76 mm »f 1/ A/>150mm//
Vissa motorer kan levereras, som special, med roterbar, [< >l V (J
4 x 90°, uttagslåda ovanpå motorn, och andra med Driven maskin min SO mm a
sidomonterad uttagslåda.
Produktkatalogen anger om dessa optioner är möjliga.
För att uppfylla gällande EMC-krav, använd kablar och
Oanvända hål för kabelanslutning skall vara täckta.
anslutningsdon som är godkända för ändamalet. (Se
instruktionema för f rekvensomriktare.)
Förutom anslutningar för huvudlindning och jord kan
uttagslådan också innehålla anslutningar för termistorer,
Den högsta tillåtna rotationshastigheten för en
element för stilleståndsuppvarmning, temperaturvakter
gjutjärnsmotor i frekvensomriktardrift (M2BA/M3BP) får
av bimetalltyp eller PT100 motståndselement.
inte överstiga de maximalt tillåtna varvtalen i tabellen
nedan eller det varvtal, som stämplat på märkskylten.
VARNlNG
Kontakta ABB för information om högsta tillåtna
Ansiutrringar kan vara spänningsförande även när
rnotörn står stilla, eftersom varmeelement eller hastighet för andra motorstorlekar och motortyper.
direkt iindningsvärmning kan vara aktiverade. Smörjning av lager skall ske enligt instruktioner längre
fram i texten.
Uttagsdiagram för temperaturvakter och varmeelement
finns inuti uttagslådan. Axelhöjd Varvtal r/m
2-polig 4-polig
VARNlNG
Kondensatorn i enfasmotorer kan vara 280 3600 2600
uppladdade, och ge en spanning på motorns 315 3600 2300
uttag, trots att motorn står still. 355 3600 2000
400 3600 1800
Anslutning för frekvensomriktardrift Om det råder osäkerhet om motorns lämpiighet för

Frekvensomriktardrift orsakar högre spänningspakänning frekvensomriktardrift, kontakta ABB.
på motorlindningen an vad sinusmatningen gör. Motorns
lindning och lagerns isolering, liksom även VARNlNG
frekvensomriktarens utgångsfilter, bör därför vara Maximal arbetstemperatur för fett och lager får ej
dimensionerade enligt "Selection rules for VSD applica- överskridas. • . :
tions/Insulation" (3GZF500930-2), som kan beställas
från ABB.
Vid frekvensomriktardrift med motorer Pn > 30 kW skall Balansering

kablingen ske med skärmade, symmetriska kablar och
med kabelförskruvningar, som ger360° vidhäftning (även Motorns rotor är dynamiskt bälanserad.
kallade EMC-förskruvningar). Mer information finns i
ABB:s handbok "Grounding and cabling of the drive Baianseringen har som standard blivit utförd med halv
system" (3AFY61201998). kil, och axeln är markt med en ROD tejp med texten
"Balanced with half key".
När motorn används tillsammans med frekvens-
omriktare, så maste motorstativets yttre jordanslutning För att undvika vibrationer skall således kopplingshalvor
användas för att utjämna Potentialen mellan motor- och drivskivor balanseras med halv kil efter det att
stativet och det drivna systemet, om inte båda är monte- kilspåret har dragits.
rade på ett gemensamt metallfundament.
Om balanseringen är utförd med hel kil är axeln markt
För motorer med storlek over IEC 280, använd 0.75 x 70 med GUL tejp med texten "Balanced with full key".
mm flatledare eller minst 2 x 50 mm2 rundledare. Det
inbördes avståndet mellan rundledarna maste vara minst Om balanseringen är utförd utan kil är axeln markt med
150 mm. BLÅ tejp med texten "Balanced without key".
Detta arrangemang fyller ingen specifik elsäkerhets-

funktion. Syftet är endast potentiaiutjamning. Om motorn
och den drivna utrustningen är monterade på ett gemen-
samt metallfundament behovs ingen potentiaiutjamning.
. ABB / Low Voltage Motors / Manual 11 -2002 55

3. Drift 4. Underhall
Användning Allmänt underhall

Inspektera motorn regelbundet.
Driftmiljö Hall motorn ren och säkerställ fri tillgång till
Motorn är avsedd att användas för drifter i industrimiljö. ventilationsluft.
Kontrollera axeltätningarnas tillstånd (t.ex V-ringar)
Gränserna för normal omgivningstemperatur är -20°C till
och ersätt dem om det är nödvändigt.
+40°C. Maximal höjd över havet 1000 m. Kontrollera nätanslutningarnas tiilstånd och alla
skruvarför uppställning och montage.
Säkerhetsaspekter Kontrollera lagrenas tillstånd genom att lyssna
Motorn är avsedd att installeras och användas av erfaren efter främmande ljud, vibrationsmätning, mäta
personal som har kunskaper och erforderliga lagrenas temperatur, inspektera det använda fettet
säkerhetskrav. eller utnyttja SPM lagerövervakning.
*Om det uppträder ändringar i tillstandet så
Den säkerhetsutrustning, som är nödvändig för att démontera motorn, kontrollera ingående
förhindraolyckorvid montering och användning, ska delar och ersätt de delar som behöver
ersättas.
användas i enlighet med lokalt gällande föreskrifter.
Smörjning
VARNING
Små motorer med nätanslutning direkt kopplad VARNING
med termiskt känsliga brytare kan starta Se upp f ör roterande delar.
automatiskt.
Var vanlig observera VARNING

1. Motorn skall inte användas att klättra på Fett kan förorsaka hudirritation och
2. Temperaturen på motorns hölje kan kännas ögoninflamation. Följ alla säkerhetsföreskrifter
mycket hög vid beröring även under normal drift som angivits av fettleverantören. •
3. Vissa speciella drifter för motorer kräver speciella
instruktioner (t.ex frekvensomriktardrifter) Motorer med permanentsmorda lager
4. Lyftöglan skall endast användas för lyflning av Lagren är permanentsmorda och vanligtvis av typ Z eller
själva motor. 2Z. Lagertyper framgår av respektive produktkatalog och
på mårkskylten på alla motorer utom på de minsta
storlekarna.
Montering och demontering
Som riktvärde gäller att tillräcklig smörjning kan uppnås
Allmänt under följande tid, enligt L1 (d.v.s, att 99 % av motorerna
Demontering och montering av motorer maste utföras av ska fungera störningsfritt under heia smörjintervallet) vid
kunnig personal som använder andamålsenliga verktyg omgivningstemperaturen 25°C. För drifter i högre
och arbetsmetoder. Alla reparationer skall ske enligt omgivningstemperaturer an 25°C, se respektive produkt-
standard IEC-60079-19. katalog.
Lager Storlek Poliga Drifttimmar

Lager kraver speciell omsorg. Lager skall dras av med 56-80 2-8 på livstid
avdragare och sättas på med hjälp av uppvärmning eller 90-112 2-8 40000
med användning av specialverktyg. Lagerbyte beskrivs i 132 2 31000
detalj i en sårskild instruktionsbroschyr som kan 132 4-8 40000
rekvireras frän ABB:s försäljningskontor.
160 2 23000
160 4-8 40000
Montering av kopplingshalvor och drivskivor
180 2 19000
Kopplingshalvor och drivskivor skall monteras med hjälp
180 4-8 40000
av andamålsenlig utrustning och verktyg som inte
skadar lagren.
Beroende påtillampning och belastningsforhållanden. Se
tillämplig produktkatalog.
Montera aldrig en kopplingshalva eller en drivskiva
genom att banka dénpå plats eller démontera dem
genom att banda mot statorn. Antalet drifttimmar för vertikalt installerade motorer är
hälften av ovan angivna varden.
Krav på kopplingshaivans monteringsnoggrannhet:
Kontrollefa att frigången b är mindre an 0.05 mm och att
skillnaden mellan a1 och a2 också är mindre an 0.05
mm. Se figur 3.

Motorer med smörjnipplar Smöriintervall i drifttimmar och fettmänader
Storlek Mângdt 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900
Smörjskyltsinformation och allmänna fett r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
smörjningsrad g/lager
Kullager
Om motorn är försedd med smörjskylt så skall denna Smörjintervall i drifttimmar
följas. 112 10 10000 13000 18000 21000 25000 28000
132 15 9000 11000 17000 19000 23000 26500
160 25 7000 9500 14000 17000 21O00 24000
På smörjskylten kan anges smörjintervall med hänsyn 180 30 6000 8000 13500 16000 20000 23000
taget till monteringssätt, omgivningstemperatur och 200 40 4000 6000 11000 13000 17000 21000
varvtal. 225 50 3000 5000 10000 12500 16500 20000
250 60 2500 4000 9000 11500 15000 18000
280 70 2000" 3500« 8000 10500 14000 17000
ABB har som policy att sätta tillförlitligheten i forstå 315 6500 8500 12500 16000
90 i) i)
rummet vid val av lagersmörjningsintervall. Därför 355 120 i) » 4200 6000 10000 13000
tillämpas L1-principen. 400 120 i) i) 4200 6000 10000 13000
400 M3BP 130 i) 1) 2800 4600 8400 12000
Manuell smörjning Bull;ager
Motoren ska smörjas medan de arbetar Smörjintervall i drifttimmar
- Ta bort fettutloppspluggen eller öppna 160 25 3500 4500 7000 8500 10500 12000
stängningsventilen, om sådan finns. 180 30 3000 4000 7000 8000 10000 11500
| - Se till att smörjkanalen är öppen 200 40 2000 3000 5500 6500 8500 10500
225 50 1500 2500 5000 6000 8000 10000
- Pressa in angiven mängd färskt fett i lagret.
250 60 1300 2200 4500 5700 7500 9000
- Låt motorn arbeta i 1-2 timmar så att allt 280 70 1000" 2000« 4000 5300 7000 8500
överskottsfett garanterat harträngt ut ur lagret. Satt 315 90 i ) 1) 3300 4300 6000 8000
tillbaka eventuell fettutloppsplugg. 355 120 1) i) 2000 3000 5000 6500
400 120 i) 1) 2000 3000 5000 6500
400 M3BP 130 i) i) 1400 2300 4200 6000
Smörjning under stillestand
Motorer ska smörjas medan de arbetar. Om detta inte är "Varden för IEC storlekar 280 to 400 vid vissa motortyper (3600 och
3000 r/min) - se nâsta sida.
möjligt kan de i stallet smörjas under stillestand.
- Använd i så fall endast halva fettmängden och låt Faktorer som påverkar smöriintervallen
därefter motorn arbeta några minuter vid max varvtal. Smörjintervallen för vertikalt monterade motorer är
- När motorn har stannat, pressa in resten av angiven hälften av ovanstående värden.
mängd fett i lagret.
- Efter 1-2 timmars drift, satt tillbaka fettutloppspluggen Smörjintervallerna är baserade på en arbetstemperatur i
eller stang ventilen, om sådan finns. lagret av 80°C (omgivningstemperatur cirka +25°C).
OBS! Enhöjning av omgivningstemperaturen medför en
Automatisk smörjninq motsvarande höjning av temperaturen i lagret.
Vid automatisk smörjning ska fettutloppspluggen Intervallvärdena i tabellen bör halveras för 15°C ökning
avlägsnas permanent och ev. stängningsventil vara av lagertemperaturen och bör fördubblas för 15°C
öppen. minskning av lagertemperaturen.
En del motorer kan vara försedda med uppsamlare för VARNING

gammalt fett. Följ i så fall de särskilda instruktionerna Maximal arbetstemperatur för fett och lager får
för denna utrustning. ! inte överskridas.
Vi rekommenderar endast användning av elektro-

. mekaniska system, kontakta ABB:s försäljningskontor. Lagerfett
I tabellen angivna fettmängder per smörjintervall ska VARNING
fördubblas om automatiska smörjsystem används. Blanda inte olika typer av fett. Bristande
•inkompatibilitet kan orsaka lagerskador.
Om 2-poliga motorer smörjs via automatiska system
skall anmärkningen (OBS!) beträffande Då motorerna eftersmörjs ska endast fett med nedanstå-
fettrekommendationer och 2-poliga motorer i kapitlet ende egenskaper användas:
Lagerfett följas. - högkvalitetsfett baserat på litiumkomplextvål och med
mineral- eller PAO-olja
- Basoljeviskositet 100-160 cSt vid 40°C.
- Konsistens enligt NLG11.5 - 3 *)
- Temperaturområde -30°C...+120°C kontinuerligt.
*) För vertikalt monterade motorer eller vid varm

omgivning rekommenderas det högre NLGl värdet.(3)

Alla större smörjmedelstillverkare erbjuder fetter med Vid användning av andra fettfabrikat, kontrollera med
ovan angivna egenskaper. tillverkaren att egenskaperna överensstämmer med de
ovan nämnda fetterna. Vid osäkerhet om
Tillsatser rekommenderas, men fetttillverkaren bör avge kompatibiliteten, kontakta ABB:s försäljningskontor.
en skriftlig garanti, sårskilt vad galler EP-tillsatser, att
tillsatserna inte skadar lagren eller förändrar Frekvensomriktardrlft
smörjmedlens egenskaper avseende arbetstemperatur. Högvarvsdrifter (t.ex frekvensomriktardrifter) eller lägre
varvtal vid stor last kräver kortade smörjintervall.
VARNING Kontakta ABB:s försäljningskontor i sådana fall.
Smörjmedel som innehåller EP-tillsatser
rekommenderas ej vid höga lagertemperaturer i En fördubbling av varvtalet t.ex kräver en minskning av
storleksområdet 280 - 400.
smörjintervallen till omkring 40 % av ovanstående
tabells värden.
Om omgivningstemperaturen är under - 25°C eller over
+55°C, eller lagertemperaturen är over 110°C, kontakta VARNING
Det maximala varvtal, för vilket motorn är
ABB for att få råd om lämpligt fett.
konstruerad, får ej överskridas.
Följande typer av högkvalitetsfett kan användas
Lagrens lämplighet för högvarvsdrift maste kontrolleras.
Esso Unirex N2, N3 or S2 (lithium complex base)
Mobil Mobilith SHC100 (lithium complex base)
Shell Albida EMS 2 (lithium complex base)
Reservdelar \
SKF LGHQ 3 (lithium complex base) Vid beställning av reservdelar skall motorns fullständiga
Klüber Klüberplex BEM 41 -132 (special lithium base) typbeteckning och beställningsnummer anges enligt
FAG Arcanol TEMP90 (calsium polyurea base) märkskyltens uppgifter.
FAG Arcanol TEMP110 (lithium complex base) Om motorn är försedd med ett tillverkningsnummer skall
detta också uppges.
Smörjintervallen for andra fetter, som innehåller de
önskade egenskaperna, kontakta ABB:s Omlindning
Omlindningen skall alltid utföras av kvalificerade
Smörjintervall och fettmänader. 2-poliaa. reparationsverkstäder.
lECstorlek 280-400
Storlek Mängdt 3600 3000 Omlindningen av smoke venting och specialmotorer
fett r/min r/min skall inte utföras utan att först kontakta ABB:s
g/lager försäljningskontor.
Kullager
Smörjintervall i drifttimmar
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500 5. Miljökrav
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500
355 M2B*,M2C* 45 1200 2000
355 M3B* 35 1200 2000
Ljudnivå
400 M2B*,M2C* 45 1200 2000
400 M3B* 40 1000 1600 De fiesta av våra motorer har en Ijudtrycksnivå som
Rullager understiger 82 dB(A) vid 50 Hz och sinusmatning, med
Smörjintervall i drifttimmar tolerans ± 3 dB(A).
280 M2B*,M2C*,M3B* 35 1000 1800
315 M2B*,M2C*,M3B* 35 1000 1800 Värden för specifika motorer kan hittas i motsvarande
355 M2B*,M2C* 45 600 1000
355 M3B* 35 600 1000
produktkataloger.
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000
400 M3B* 40 500 800 För Ijudtrycksnivåer vid 60 Hz sinusmatning och vid
annat an sinusmatning, kontakta ABB:s
OBS! Använd alltid höghastighetsfett för högvarvs-
tillämpningar och för vissa motortyper som t.ex.
2-poliga motorer M2BA 355 och 400 dar varvtalsfaktorn Ljudtryoksnivåer för alla motorer med separata
overstiger 400 000 (beräknat som Dm x n dar Dm = kylsystem och förserierna M2F7M3F*, M2L7M3L*,
lagrets medeldiameter (mm); n = varvtal, r/min). Följande M2R7M3R*, och M2BJ/M2LJ, finns angivna i särskilda
typer av fett kan användas: motorinstruktionerna.

• Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (polyurea base)

Föreliggande instruktioner täcker inte alla detaljer och varianter av utrustningen och beskriver inte heller alla situatio-
ner som kan tänkas uppstå i samband med installation, drift och underhall. För ytterligare information, kontakta
närmaste ABB-försäljningskontor.
Felsökningsschema för motorer
Motorservice och feisökning ska skötas av kvaiificerad personal med ändamalsenlig utrustning.
PROBLEM ORSAK ÅTGARD

Motorn startar inte Säkringarna har löst ut Byt till säkringar av korrekt typ och utlösnings-
värde.
Overbelastningsutlösning Kontrollera och aterställ överbelastningsskyddet i
Startapparaten.
Felaktig matning Kontrollera att matningen överensstämmer med
uppgifterna på motorns märkskylt och med drift
forhållandet.
Felaktig matningsanslutning Kontrollera anslutningarna mot det schema som
medföljer motorn.
Lindningsbrott eller öppen brytare Indikeras av surrande Ijud då brytaren sluts. Kon
trollera att alla anslutningar är väl åtdragna.
Kontrollera att alla hjälpkontakter sluts korrekt.
Mekaniskt fei Kontrollera att motorn och den drivna utrustningen
roterar fritt. Kontrollera lager och smörjning.
Kortslutning i stator Visas av att säkringarna har löst ut. Motorn maste
lindas om.
Bristande anslutning av statorspole Ta bort ändlocken, hitta feiet med en provning
slampa.
Rotorfei Leta efter avbrutna stavar och gavelringar.
Motorn kan vara överbelastad Minska belastningen.
Motor fastlåst En fas öppen Kontrollera spänningen i alla faser.
Fei tillämpning Andra typ eller storlek. Kontakta tillverkaren.
Overbelastning Minska belastningen.
För låg spanning Se till att matningsspänningen uppfyller kraven
enligt märkskylten. Kontrollera anslutningen.
Oppen krets Säkringar utlösta, kontrollera överbelastningsrelä,
stator och tryckknappar.
Motorn startar, men Matningsfel Kontrollera om matningsanslutningarna behöver
retarderar och stannar drasåt. Kontrollera säkringar och manöverorgan.
Motorn varvar inte upp Felaktig användning Kontakta tillverkaren för anvisning om rätt typ.
till rätt varvtal För låg spanning vid Använd högre spanning eller
motoranslutningarna på grund av transformatoranslutningar för att minska belast
spänningsfall i matningsnät ningen. Kontrollera anslutningarna. Kontrollera att
ledarna har rätt dimension.
För hög startbelastning Kontrollera tillåten startbelastning för motorn.
Avbrutna rotorstavar eller lös rotor Kontrollera om detfinns sprickor nära ringarna
Vanligen är endast en temporär reparation möjlig.
Rotorn maste oftast bytas.
Oppen primärkrets Hitta felet med matinstrument och reparera.
Motorn behöver för Overbelastning Minska belastningen.
lang tid för att Låg spanning vid start Kontrollera om resistansen ärför hög. Korrekt
accelereraoch/eller drar ledardimension
för mycket ström. Fei på kortsluten rotor Byt till ny rotor.
För låg matningsspänning Kontakta elleverantören för att öka uttagbar effekt.
Fei rotationsriktning Fei fasföljd Låt två fasledare byta plats vid gruppcentralen eller
motorn.
Motorn bliröverhettad Overbelastning Minska belastningen.
trots att den är Ventilationsöppningarna i statorn Oppna ventilationsöppningarna och se till att
lägt belastad eller lagerbockarna kan vara kylluften kan strömma fritt.
igensatta så att motorn inte får
tillräcklig kylning
En fas kan vara öppen Kontrollera att samtliga ledare är korrekt anslutna.
Jordsluten spole Hitta och åtgarda felet.
Obalanserad uttagsspänning Kontrollera om det finns felaktiga ledare,
anslutningar och transformatorer.
PROBLEM ORSAK ATGÄRD
Motorn vibrerar Motorn felaktigt uppriktad Rikta upp motorn.
Svagt fundament Förstärk fundamentet.
Obalanserad koppling Balansera kopplingen.
Driven utrustning obalanserad Balansera den drivna utrustningen.
Lagerfei Byt lager.
Lager ejuppriktade Rikta upp lagren.
Balanseringsvikterna har förskjutits Balansera om motorn.
Bristande kompatibilitet mellan rotor- Balansera om kopplingen eller motorn
och kopplingsbalansering
(halv kil - hel kil)
Flerfasmotor drivs med enfasmatning Kontrollera om någon krets är öppen.
För stort axeländspel Justera lager eller satt in shims
Skrapljud Fläkten i kontakt med kåpan Atgärda feiet.
Fläkten i kontakt med Atgärda fläkten.
isolationsmaterialet
Motorn lös påfundamentplattan Dra ätfästskruvarna.
Onormalt driftbuller Ojämt luftgap Kontrollera och korrigera lagerbockarna eller lagren.
Rotor obalanserad Balansera om. •
Lagren för varma Böjd eller sned axel Rikta upp eller byt axeln.
För hög remspänning Minska remspänningen.
Remskivorna får langt bort För remskivan närmare motorlagret.
För liten remskivediameter Använd större remskivor.
Bristande uppriktning Korrigera genom att rikta upp drivsystemet.
Bristande smörjning Se till att lagerfett av rätt kvalitet används.
Fettet eller smörjmedlet förbrukat Aviägsna gammalt fett, tvätta lagret grundligt med
eller förorenat fotogen och pressa in nytt fett.
För mycket smörjmedel Minska fettmängden. Lagret ska inte vara fyllt mer
an till hälften.
Overhettat lager Kontrollera uppriktningen samt den radiella och
axiella belastningen.
Skadade kulor eller löpbanor Byt lager och rengör samtidigt lagerhuset noggrant.

Asennus-, käyttö- ja kunnossapito-
ohje
Sisältö
LYIeistä 4. Kunnossapito
2. Asennus 5. Ympäristövaatimukset
3. Käyttö 6. Moottorin vianetsintä taulukko
LYIeistä Voimassaolo
Ohje on voimassa seuraaville ABB:n sähkökoneille;
HUOM! sekä moottori- että generaattorikäytöissä:
Näitä ohjeita on noudatettava varmistaaksemme moot-
torin turvallisen ja oikean asennuksen, käytön ja huol- Tyyppi MT*, MBT*, MXMA
lon. Henkilöiden, jotka asentavat, käyttävät tai huoltavat Tyyppi M2A7M3A*, M2B7M3B*, M2C7M3C*, M2F*/
koneitamme on tunnettava hoito- ja asennusohjeet. M3F*, M2L7M3L*. M2M7M3M*, M2Q\ M2R7M3R*.
Ohjeiden laiminlyönti saattaa aiheuttaa takuun M2V7M3V*
raukeamisen.
runkokokoluokissa 56 - 400.
Vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus
Ex-moottoreille on olemassa oma manuaalinsa
Jokaiselle koneelle annetaan erikseen 'Oikosulkumoottori räjähdysvaarallisiin tiloihin, asennus-,
vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus pienjännitedirektiivin käyttö ja kunnossapito-ohje1 (Low Voltage Motors/Manual
73/23/EEC ja direktiivin muutoksen 93/68/EEC mukaan. for Ex-motors).
Vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus täyttää myös Lisäohjeita voidaan tarvita joissain konetyypeissä, jotka

yhdenmukaisuusvakuutukselle asetetut vaatimukset, on tarkoitettu erikoiskäyttöihin ja/tai ovat erikois-
konedirektiivin 98/37/EEC mukaan, Art. 4.2 Annex II, rakenteisia. Lisäohjeita on mm. seuraavista
SubB. moottoreista;
- rullaratamoottorit
- vesijäähdytteiset moottorit
- tippuvesisuojatut (IP 23) moottorit
-jarrumoottorit
- savukaasun poistoon tarkoitetut moottorit
- kestomagneettimoottorit

2. Asennus Meriveden kastelemat käämitykset on useimmiten
käämittävä uudestaan.
Käyttöönotto (käynnistys)
Suora tai tähtikolmiokäynnistys:
Vastaanottotarkastus Vakioyksinopeusmoottorin liitäntäkotelossa on yleensä
kuusi staattoriliitintä ja ainakin yksi maadoitusliitin.
Tarkista heti vastaanoton jälkeen, ettei moottori ole
vahingoittunut ulkoisesti ja tarvittaessa ota välittömästi
Maadoitus on hoidettava paikallisten määräysten mu-
yhteytlä kuljetusliikkeeseen.
kaan ennen moottorin kytkemistä verkkojännitteelle.
Tarkista kaikki arvokilven tiedot, etenkin jännite ja
kytkentä (tähti tai kolmio). Kaikissa moottoreissa lukuun- Jännite ja kytkentä on leimattu arvokilpeen.
ottamatta muutamaa pienintä runkokokoa on myös
laakerityyppi mainittu arvokilvessä. Suora käynnistys:
Y- tai A-kytkentää voidaan käyttää. Esimerkiksi 660 VY,
Pyöritä akselia käsin varmistuaksesi, että se pyörii 380 VA tarkoittaa Y-kytkentää 660 V ja A-kytkentää
380 V.
vapaasti, poista mahdollinen kuljetuslukitus.
Älä ylitä laakereiden sallittuja kuormitusarvoja, jotka on Tähtikolmiokäynnistys:

Verkkojännitteen on oltava sama kuin koneen jännite
ilmoitettu tuote-esitteissä.
D-kytkennässä.
Moottorit, joissa on rullalaakerit: Poista kaikki kytkentäliuskat liitäntäalustasta. (
Moottorin käyttö ilman säteittäistä kuormitusta akselille
saattaa vahingoittaa rullalaakereita. Kaksinopeus-, yksivaihe- ja erikoismoottoreilla kytkentä
on suoritettava liitäntäkotelon sisällä olevien ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
Moottorit, joissa on viistokuulalaakerit :
Moottorin käyttö ilman oikean suuntaista aksiaalivoiman
kuormitusta akselille saattaa vahingoittaa viistokuula- Jos suorakäynnistys kestää yli 10 sekuntia tai Y/D-
laakeria. käynnistys yli 30 sekuntia, ota yhteys ABB:n tuote-
myyntiin.
Moottorit, joissa on jälkivoitelu:
Lisätietoja käynnistyksestä on painatteessa 'The Motor
Moottoria käynnistettäessä ensimmäistä kertaa sekä
Guide', julkaisu on myös internet osoitteessa
moottorin pitkän varastoinnin jälkeen lisätään vähintään
www.abb.com/motor&drives.
taulukossa annettu voiteluainemäärä tai kunnes uutta
voiteluainetta tulee poistoaukosta.
Tarkemmat ohjeet katso kohdasta "Voitelunipoilla varus- Liitännätja pyörimissuunta
tetut moottorif sivulla 66. Pyörimissuunta on myötäpäivään akselin päästä kat-
soen, kun vaihejärjestys L1, L2, L3 on kytketty liittimiin
Eristysvastuksen tarkistaminen kuvan 1 mukaan.
Mittaa eristysvastus ennen käyttöönottoa ja epäillessäsi
Pyörimissuunta muutetaan vaihtamalla kahden
käämityksen olevan kostea.
vaihejohtimen päät keskenään.
Eristysvastuksen täytyy ylittää seuraava ohjearvo,
Mikäli moottorissa on vain yhteen suuntaan pyörivä
mitattuna +25°C lämpötilassa:
tuuletin, tarkista, että pyörimissuunta on moottoriin
10 M ohm (mitattu 500 V de Megger)
merkityn nuolen mukainen.
VAROITUS [ * ; ; . ; : ' • ; U : ^ ; ; i - '
Käämityksen sähkpyaraus on pürettaVa ;.' Käsittely |
, yalittörnästi mittauksen jälkeen sähköiskun
välttämiseksi; " ;. . ; • -.. ; ; ' ' : .; Varastointi
Kaikki moottorit tulee varastoida sisätiloissa, kuivissa,
Eristysvastuksen ohjearvo tulee puolittaa jokaista 20°C tärinättömissä ja pölyttömissä olosuhteissa.
ympäristön lämpötilan nousua kohti.
Moottorin suojaamattomat kohdat (akselin päät ja laipat)
Ellei eristysvastusmittauksessa saavuteta ohjearvoa, tulee suojata korroosionestoaineella.
käämitys on liian kostea ja se on kuivattava uunissa.
Uunin lämpötilan on oltava 90°C 12-16 tunnin ajan, ja Akselia suositellaan pyöritettävän säännöllisin väliajoin
sen jälkeen 105°C 6-8 tunnin ajan. käsin rasvan muuttumisen estämiseksi.
Lämmityksen ajaksi on mahdolliset vesireikien tulpat Mahdollisten seisontalämmitysvastusten pitäisi olla

poistettava ja mahdollinen sulkuventtiili avattava. kytkettynä.

Mikäli yksivaihemoottoreihin on asennettu elektro- Asennus
lyyttiset kondensaattorit, on ne 'herätettävä' uudelleen
varastointiajan ylittäessä 1-2 vuotta. Ota yhteyttä ABB:n Jäähdytys
tuotemyyntiin saadaksesi lisäohjeita.
Moottoristandardien mukaan ympäristön lämpötila ei saa
ylittää +40°C (laivamoottori standardissa +45 tai 50°C).
Kuljetus Tarkista, että moottorin ympärillä on tarpeeksi jäähdytyk-
Moottorit, joissa on rullalaakerit tai viistokuulalaakerit, sen vaatimaa etäisyyttä. Varmista, että lähellä olevat
tulee varustaa lukituksella kuljetuksen ajaksi. laitteet, pinnattai suora auringonpaiste eivät kuumenna
moottoria liikaa.
Nostaminen
Käytä aina nostosilmukkaa konetta nostettaessa, ellei Lisätietoja korkeammista ympäristön lämpötiloista ja
erillisessä ohjeessa sanota toisin. jäähdytyksestä saat ottamalla yhteyden ABB tuote-
myyntiin.
Saman runkokoon moottorien painopiste saattaa vaih-
della johtuen eri tehoista, asennusasennoistaja lisä- Alusta
varusteista. Ostajaila on täysi vastuu alustan valmistamisesta.
Tarkista ennen nostamista, että moottorin nostosilmukat Metalliset alustat on maalattava ruostumisen estämisek-
ovat kunnossa. Vahingoittuneita nostosilmukoita ei saa si.
käyttää.
Alustan on oltava tasainen ja riittävän tukeva, jotta se
"«ierteellä kiinnitetyt nostosilmukat täytyy kiristää ennen kestää mahdolliset oikosulkuvoimat. Alustan pitää olla
nostamista. Tarvittaessa nostosilmukka on säädettävä nun mitoitettu, että vältetään resonanssien aiheuttamat
oikeaan asentoon sopivia aluslaattoja käyttäen. värähtelyt.
Varmista että nostovälineet ovat oikean kokoisia ja

Jalkalaatat
nostokoukut sopivat nostosilmukkoihin.
Kiinnitä jalkalaatat moottorin jalkoihin ja asenna väliin
1-2 mm levy.
Nostettaessa on varottava vahingoittamasta moottoriin
kiinnitettyjä lisälaitteita ja kaapeleita.
Kohdista moottori käyttäen sopivia työvälineitä.
Vala laatta betoniin, tarkista kohdistus ja poraa reiät
Moottorin paino ohjaustapeille.
Moottorin kokonaispaino vaihtelee samassa runko-
koossa, johtuen eri nimellistehosta, erilaisesta
Vesireiät
asennusasennosta ja erilaisista lisävarusteista.
Varmista aina, että avoimet vesireiät ovat alaspäin, kun
asennusasento poikkeaa normaalista.
Seuraavassa taulukossa on ilmoitettu arvioidut maksi-
mipainot vakiomaliin moottoreille eri runkomateriaaleilla.
Erittäin pölyisissä oloissa kaikki vesireiät tulee sulkea.
Tarkka paino on ilmoitettu arvokilvessä lähes kaikille
Linjaus
moottoreille lukuunottamatta pienimpiä runkokokoja.
Oikea linjaus on erittäin tärkeää laakerivaurioiden,
tärinän ja akselitapin murtumisen estämiseksi.
Alumiini Valurauta Teräs
Runko- Paino Lisäys Paino Paino
koko kg jarrusta kg kg Kiristyskiskot ja hihnakäytöt
• Kiinnitä moottori kiristyskiskoihin kuvan 2 mukaan.
56 4.5 _ _ _ • Asenna kiristyskiskot vaakasuoraan samaan tasoon.
(63 6 • Tarkista, että moottorin akseli on samassa suunnassa
71 8 5 13 _ käyttöakselin kanssa.
80 12 8 20 - • Hihnat tulee kiristää toimittajan ohjeiden mukaan.
90 17 10 30 -
100 25 16 40 -
112 36 20 50 -
132 63 30 90 - Liiallinen hihnojen kiristys väuriolttaa läakereita ja
160 110 55 175 - voi aiheuttaa akselin katkéamisen.
180 160 65 250 -
200 220 -- 310 -
225 295 - 400 - Älä ylitä maksimihihnavoimia (laakerin radiaalikuormi-
250 370 - 550 - tuksia), jotka on ilmoitettu tuote-esitteissä.
280 405 - '800 600
315 - - 1300 1000
355 - - 2300 2200
400 - - 3500 3000

Kytkentä Potentiaalitasauksella ei ole merkitystä sähköturvallisuu-
den kannalta. Sen tarkoituksena on pitää moottorin ja
Vakiomallin moottoreissa liitäntäkotelo on moottorin työkoneen runko samassa suurtaajuuspotentiaalissa.
päällä, kaapeliaukot molempiin suuntiin. Mikäli moottori ja työkone ovat galvaanisesti yhteen-
kytkettyjä, potentiaalitasausta ei tarvita.
Erikoisratkaisuna tietyt moottorit voidaan varustaa
4 x 90° käännettävällä moottorin päällä olevalla
Potentiaalitasaus
liitäntäkotelolla tai sivulle asennettavalla liitäntäkotelolla.
Nämä vaihtoehdot on kuvattu tuote-esitteissä.
Käyttämättömät kaapeliaukot täytyy sulkea.

0.75 min t
Moottorin pääliittimien ja maadoitusliittimien lisäksi
liitäntäkotelossa voi olla kytkennät termistoreille,
seisontalämmitysvastuksille, bimetallikytkimille, tai
PT100 vastuselementeille. EMC-vaatimukset täyttyvät käyttämäila tarkoitukseen
määriteltyjä kaapeleita ja liitäntäosia. (Katso taajuus-
VAROITUS muuttajaohjeistot).
Jännite voi plia kytkettynä moottorin seispessa
liitäntäkotelon sisällä lämmitysvastuksille tai suo-
Taajuusmuuttajakäyttöisen valurautarunkoisen (M2BA/
raan käämityksen lämmitykseile.
M3BP) moottorin suurin pyörimisnopeus ei saa ylittää i
Lisävarusteiden kytkentäkaaviot ovat joko liitäntäkotelon allaolevassa taulukossa mainittuja arvoja tai arvokilpeen"
sisällä tai kylteissä. leimattua suurinta pyörimisnopeutta. Muiden kuin taulu-
kossa mainittujen moottorikokojen ja -tyyppien suurim-
mat sallitut pyörimisajat kysyttäessä. Laakereiden
voitelussa tulee noudattaa jäljempänä annettuja ohjeita.
[ sähköya'raüsrnoottorin lijttirnissäfvaikka moottori
* on. pysähdyksissä* ; ï ^ ~ * t ' * ' ' 1 1 s * Runkokoko Pyörimisnopeus r/min
2-napaiset 4-napaiset
63-132 4000 3600
Taajuusmuuttajakäytöt 160-250 3600 3600
Taajuusmuuttajakäyttö aiheuttaa suurtaajuisia akseli- 280 3600 2600
jännitteitä ja laakerivirtoja sekä verkkokäyttöä suurem- 315 3600 2300
piajänniterasituksia moottorin käämitykselle.Tämän 355 3600 2000
johdosta tulee moottorin käämien ja laakereiden 400 3600 1800
eristyksen sekä taajuusmuuttajan lähtösuotimien olla Mikäli moottorin sopivuus taajuusmuuttajakäyttöön on
valittu Selection rules for VSD applications/Insulation
epäselvä, ota yhteys ABB:n tuotemyyntiin.
(3GZF500930-2) -ohjeen mukaan, pyydä ohjeita ABB:n
tuotemyynnistä.
Voiteluajneen jalaakerin maksimikäyttölämpötilaa
Taajuusmuuttajakäytöissä tulee moottori (Pn > 30 kW) ;ei s a a yiittää. : " : " : • • ' ' \ ; • " ' : ,. ;
kaapeloida käyttäen suojattuja symmetrisiä kaapeleitaja
360 asteen maadoitusliittimiä.Tarkemmat ohjeet löytyvät
ABB:n Grounding and cabling of the drive system (3AFY Tasapainotus
61201998) -manuaalista.
Moottorin roottori on dynaamisesti tasapainotettu.
Taajuusmuuttajakäytöissä tulee käyttää moottorin
ulkoista maadoitusta moottorin ja työkoneen väliseen Akselit tasapainotetaan normaalisti puolella kiilalla, '
potentiaalintasaukseen, mikäli moottori ja työkone eivät akselissa punainen teippi tekstillä "tasapainotettu
oie asennettu samalle teräspedille. puolella kiilalla (Balanced with half key)".
Potentiaalitasausta käytetään runkokooltaan I EC 280 ja Tärinän välttämiseksi kytkinpuolikas tai hihnapyörä

suuremmissa moottoreissa. Tasaukseen käytettävän tasapainotetaan puolella kiilalla kiilauran jyrsimisen
johtimen tulee olla vähintään 0.75 x 70 mm laatta- jälkeen.
kaapelia tai vähintään 2 x 50 mm2 pyöreää kaapelia.
Pyöreiden kaapeleiden välinen etäisyys pitää olla Täydellä kiilalla tasapainotettaessa akseli on merkitty
vähintään 150mm. ~~ ' keltaisella teipillä, jossa on teksti "tasapainotettu
täydellä kiilalla" (Balanced with full key).
llman kiilaa tasapainotettaessa akseli on merkitty

sinisellä teipillä, jossa on teksti "tasapainotettu ilman
kiilaa" (Balanced without key).

3.Käyttö 4. Kunnossapito
Käyttöolosuhteet Huolto ja voitelu

Moottorit on tarkoitettu teollisuuskäyttöihin, normaali
ympäristön lämpötilan ollessa-20°C... +40°C, Yleinen tarkistus
asennuskorkeus enintään 1000 m meren pinnasta. Pidä moottori puhtaana ja huolehdi jäähdytysilman
vapaasta kulusta.
Turvallisuusnäkökohtia Seuraa tiivisteiden (esim. V-rengas) kuntoa ja uusi
Pätevän, voimassaolevat turvallisuusvaatimukset ne tarvittaessa.
tuntevan henkilökunnan tulee asentaa ja käyttää mootto- Seuraa kytkentöjen ja kiinnitysruuvien kuntoa.
reita. Tarkkaile laakerien kuntoa laakeriääntä kuuntele-
malla, laakerien tärinää tai lämpötilaa mittaamalla,
poistuvaa voiteluainetta tarkkailemalla tai SPM-
Turvavälineitä, jotka ovattarpeen onnettomuuksien valvontalaitteilla.
estämiseksi asennuksen ja käytön yhteydessä, on * Kun muuttumista alkaa tapahtua, avaa
käytettävä asianomaisen maan määräysten mukaan. moottori ja tarkista osat ja uusi ne tarvitta-
WROITUS
Pienet moottorit, jotka on suojattu päävirtapiirissä Voitelu
olevilla lärnpökytkimillä, voivat käynnistyä auto-
maattisesti. :'/ >: ï VAR
Varo pyöriviä osial
Huomioitavia seikkoja
1. Moottorin päälle ei saa astua.
2. Moottorin pinta voi olla kuuma normaalikäytössä.
3. Jotkut erikoiskäytöt vaativat erikoisohjeita (esim. Monét voiteluainëèt saattavat ärsyttää ihöa tai
taajuusmuuttajakäytöt). aiheuttaa silmätulehduksia. Seuraa valmistajan
4. Nostosilmukka on tarkoitettu vain moottorin antarrtia turvaohjeita.
nostamiseen. Moottorin nostosilmukkaa ei saa
käyttää nostettaessa moottoria ja siihen kytkettyä
muuta laitteistoa. Kestovoidelluilla laakereilla varustetut moottorit
Moottorit ovat yleensä vakiona varustettu kestovoidel-
Kokoonpano ja purku luilla laakereilla, tyypit Z tai 2Z. Laakerityypit on lueteltu
tuote-esitteissä ja lukuunottamatta muutamaa pienintä
Yleistä runkokokoa laakerityyppi on mainittu myös arvokilvessä.
Pätevän henkilökunnan on suoritettava moottorin purku
ja kokoonpano käyttäen tarkoituksenmukaisia työ- Runkokokoon 180 asti ohjeellinen käyttötuntien määrä,
välineitä ja työtapoja. Kaikki korjaukset on suoritettava jolloin moottorit ovat edelleen hyvin voideltuja, L, -
standardin IEC-60079-19 mukaisesti. periaatteen mukaisesti ympäristön lämpötilan ollessa
+25°C (tarkoittaa, että 99 % moottoreista toimii
Laakerit häiriöttömästi voiteluvälin ajan). Ohjeet käyttöihin, joissa
Laakereista on pidettävä erityistä huolta. ympäristön lämpötila on yli +25°C, ovat tuote-esitteissä.
Laakerit on poistettava käyttäen ulosvetäjää,
asennettava lämmitettyinä tai käyttäen erikoisia, tarkoi- Runkokoko Napaluku Käyttötunnit
tukseen sopivia, työkaluja. 56-80 2-8 elinikäinen
Laakereiden vaihto on kuvattu erillisessä ABB:ltä 90-112 2-8 40000
saatavassa ohjeessa. 132 2 31000
132 4-8 40000
^ßcytkinpuolikkaiden ja hihnapyörien 160 2 23000
asentaminen 160 4-8 40000
Kytkinpuolikkaät ja hihnapyörät on asennettava sopivia 180 2 19000
työkaluja käyttäen nun, etteivät laakerit vahingoitu. 180 4-8 40000
Älä koskaan asenna kytkinpuolikasta tai hihnapyörää Riippuen sovelluksestaja kuormitusolosuhteista, katso
lyömällä se paikoilleen tai poista sitä vipuamalla runkoa kyseisen moottorin tuote-esitteestä.
vasten.
-Pystyasentoon asennettujen moottoreiden voiteluvälit
- Kytkimen asennustarkkuus: ovat puolet yllämainituista arvoista.
Tarkista, että poikkeama b on alle 0.05 mm, ja että ero
a1 - a2 on myös alle 0.05 mm, katso kuva 3.

Voiteluniooilla varustetut moottorit Voiteluainevälit ja -määrät
Runko- Voiteluai- 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900
Voiteluohjekilpi ja yleistä voitelusta koko nemäätä r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
g/laakeri
Jos moottorissa on voiteiuohjekilpi, noudata siinä olevia Kuulalaakerit
arvoja. Voiteluväli käyttötunteina
112 10 10000 13000 18000 21000 25000 28000
Voiteluohjekilvestä voidaan määrittää jälkivoiteluväli 132 15 9000 11000 17000 19000 23000 26500
asennusasennon, lämpötilan ja kierrosluvun suhteen. 160 25 7000 9500 14000 17000 21000 24000
180 30 6000 8000 13500 16000 20000 23000
200 40 4000 6000 11000 13000 17000 21000
ABB:n lähtökohtana voiteluvälejä määriteltäessa on 225 50 3000 5000 10000 12500 16500 20000
käyttövarmuus. Siksi noudatamme L,-periaatetta. 250 60 2500 4000 9000 11500 15000 18000
280 70 2000" 3500« 8000 10500 14000 17000
315 90 » y 6500 8500 12500 16000
Käsivoitelu
Voitelu moottorin pyöriessä 355 120 i) i) 4200 6000 10000 13000
400 120 il i) 4200 6000 10000 13000
- Jos voiteluaineen poistoaukot on varustettu 400 M3BP130 ') i) 2800 4600 8400 12000
tiivistystulpilla tai sulkuventtiilillä, poista ne voitelun
Rullalaakerit
ajaksi. Voiteluväli käyttötunteina
- Varmista, että voitelukanava on auki.
160 25 3500 4500 7000 8500 10500 12000
- Purista uutta voiteluainetta laakereihin, kunnes vanha 180 30 3000 4000 7000 8000 10000 11500 à
voiteluaine on täysin vaihtunut ja uutta voiteluainetta 200 40 2000 3000 5500 6500 8500 10500 1
tuiee poistoaukosta. 225 50 1500 2500 .5000 6000 8000 10000
- Anna moottorin pyöriä 1 -2 tuntia varmistaaksesi, 250 60 1300 2200 4500 5700 7500 9000
280 70 1000» 2000" 4000 5300 7000 8500
että ylimääräinen voiteluaine on poistunut. Sulje
315 90 i) i) 3300 4300 6000 8000
tiivistystulpilla varustetut poistoaukot tai sulkuventtiili. 355 120 i) i) 2000 3000 5000 6500
400 120 i) i) 2000 3000 5000 6500
Voitelu moottorin ollessa pysähtyneenä 400 M3BP130 1) i) 1400 2300 4200 6000
Moottorin voitelu suoritetaan yleensä moottorin pyö- » Arvot tietyille moottorityypeille, IEC runkokoot 280-400 (3600 ja
riessä, mutta voitelu voidaan suorittaa myös moottorin 3000 r/min), on lueteltu seuraavaüa sivulla.
ollessa pysähtyneenä.
- Tällöin lisätään ensin vain puolet suositellusta voitelu- Voiteluaineväleihin vaikuttavat tekijät
ainemäärästäjaannetaan koneen käydätäydellä Taulukko koskee vaakasuoraan asennettuja moottoreita.
nopeudella noin viisi minuttia. Pystysuoraan asennettujen moottorien voiteluvälit ovat
- Kun moottori on pysähtynyt lisätään voiteluainetta, puolet taulukon arvoista.
kunnes vanha voiteluaine on täysin vaihtunut ja uutta Voiteluväli perustuu laakerin käyntilämpötilaan 80°C
voiteluainetta tulee poistoaukoista. (ympäristön lämpötila noin +25°). On huomattava, että
- Anna moottorin pyöriä 1-2 tuntia varmistaaksesi, että ympäristön lämpötilan nousu nostaa vastaavasti laake-
ylimääräinen voiteluaine on poistunut. Sulje tiivistys- rin lämpötilaa. Laakerilämpötilan nousu 15°C johtaa
tulpilla varustetut poistoaukot tai sulkuventtiili. voiteluvälin puolittamiseen. Laakerilämpötilan alenemi-
nen 15°C pidentää voiteluvälin kaksinkertaiseksi.
Automaattivoitelu
Mikäli voitelu tapahtuu automaattisesti, poista tiivistys- VAROITUS
tulpat poistoaukoista pysyvästi tai avaa sulkuläppä. Voiteluainçen ja. laakerin rriaksirriikäyttölärnpötilaa
v
ei s a a y l i t f ä ä , V " * :, * .-'
Joissain moottoreissa voi olla lisävarusteena poistuvan
voiteluaineen kerääjä. Nöudata laitteen mukana toimi- Voiteluaineet
tettavaa erillisohjetta.
Suosittelemme vain Sähkömekaanisten järjestelmien

käyttöä, lisätietoja ABB:n tuotemyynnistä.
Taulukossa mainitut voiteluainemäärät täytyy kaksinker-

taistaa, mikäli käytetään automaattivoitelua.
VARÙITUS
Älä sekoita eri voiteluainetta keskenään.
Yhteensopimattomat voiteluaineet voivat aiheut-
taalaakerivauriqn. ; ;;
Voideltaessa on käytettävä vain erityisesti kuula-

laakereille tarkoitettuja, seuraavat ominaisuudet
T
Jos automaattivoitelun piirissä on 2-napaisia moottoreita täyttäviä, voiteluaineita:
noudattakaa kappaleessa 'Voiteluainevälit ja -määrät, 2- - korkealaatuinen litium-kompleksisaippua ja
napaiset, IEC-runkokoot280ja400'annettua mineraali- tai PAO-öljy
huomautusta (HUOM!) voiteluainesuosituksista 2- - perusöljyn viskositeetti 100-160 cSt 40°C:ssa
napaisille moottoreille. kovuusluokka NLGI aste 1.5 - 3 *)
- lämpötila-alue-30°C...+120°C
*) Pystysuoraan tai kuumiin olosuhteisiin asennetuille

koneille suositellaan korkeampaa NLGI astetta.

Oikealaatuisia voiteluaineita on saatavissa kaikilta Huom! Ylläolevat voiteluaineet eivät ole keskenään
tärkeimmiltävoiteluainevalmistajilta. yhteensopivia.
Mikäli käytetään muita voiteluaineita on varmistettava
Lisäaineistus on suotava, mutta voiteluaineen valmista- valmistajalta, että ominaisuudet vastaavat yllämainittuja
jalta on saatava kirjallinen takuu erityisesti EP-lisä- voiteluaineita tai voiteluaineen yhteensopivuuden ollessa
aineista, että ne eivät toimintalämpötila-alueella vahin- epävarmaa, ottakaa yhteyttä ABB:n tuotemyyntiin.
goita laakerin tai rasvan ominaisuuksia.
Taaiuusmuuttaiakävtöt
VAROITUS Korkeat nopeudet, esim. taajuusmuuttajakäytössä, tai
EP-lisâaineisia voiteluaineita ei suositelia korkeis- hitaat käytöt raskaasti kuormitettaessa, lyhentävät
saiaakerilämpötiloissa runkokokoluokissa280-,
voiteluvälejä. Pyydä ohjeita ABB:n tuotemyynnistä
400. ' : '
näissä tapauksissa.
Jos ympäristön lämpötila on alle -25°C tai yli +55°C, tai
laakerilämpötila on yli 110°C, ota yhteyttä ABB:n tuote- Nopeuden kaksinkertaistaminen lyhentää voiteluvälejä n.
myyntiin sopivan voiteluaineen valitsemiseksi. 40 %:iin taulukon arvoista.
VAROITUS Î
Seuraavia korkealaatuisia voiteluaineita voidaan käyttää: Älä ylitä moottorin rakenteellista maksimi-
nopeutta! .. ,
• Esso UnirexN2, N3 or S2 (lithium complex base)
^ Mobil Mobilith SHC100 (lithium complex base)
Laakereiden soveltuvuus suuriin nopeuksiin on myös
• Shell Albida EMS 2 (lithium complex base)
tarkistettava.
• SKF LGHQ 3 (lithium complex base)
• Klüber KlüberplexBEM41-132 (special lithium
base) Varaosat
• FAG ArcanolTEMP90(calsium polyurea base) Tilatessasi varaosia ilmoita moottorin arvokilpeen
• FAG Arcanol TEMP110 (lithium complex base) leimattu täydellinen lajimerkki ja tuotekoodi.
Ilmoita myös moottorin valmistusnumero, mikäli se on
üsäohjeita voiteluväleistä muille, vaaditut ominaisuudet leimattu arvokilpeen.
täyttäville voiteluaineille, saat ABB:n tuotemyynnistä. /
Uudelleenkäämintä
Voiteluainevälit ia-määrät. 2-napaiset.
IEC-runkokoot 280 ja 400 Uudelleenkäämintään tulee käyttää vain luotettavia
Runko- Voiteluai- 3600 3000 moottorikorjaamoita.
koko nemääiä r/min r/min
g/laakeri Ota aina yhteys ABB:n tuotemyyntiin ennen savukaasun
Kuulalaakerit poistoon tarkoitettujen moottoreiden ja muiden erikois-
Voiteluväli käyttötunteina moottoreiden uudelleenkäämintää.
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500 5. Ympäristövaatimukset
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000
355 M3B* 35 1200 2000 Äänitaso
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000
400 M3B* 40 1000 1600 Moottoreidestamme suurimman osan äänitaso ei ylitä 82
Rullalaakerit dB(A), arvot perustuvat 50 Hz sinimuotoiseen käyttöön,
Voiteluväli käyttötunteina hyväksyttävä toleranssi ± 3 dB(A).
280 M2B*, M2C, M3B* 35 1000 1800
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800 Yksittäisten moottorien arvot on annettu vastaavissa
Û55 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000 tuote-esitteissä.
|S5 M3B* 35 600 1000
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 600. 1000
Sinimuotoisessa käytössä 60 Hz sekä ei-sinimuotoi-
400 M3B* 40 500 800
sessa käytössä, ota yhteyttä ABB:n tuotemyyntiin.
HUOM! Äänenpainetasot kaikille moottoreille, joilla on erillinen
Suumopeusmoottoreissa ja esim. M2BA/M3_ 355 ja 400 tuuletin tai jotka kuuluvat sarjaan M2F7M3F*, M2L7
2-napaisissa moottoreissa, kun kierroslukutekijä (Dm x M3L*. M2R7M3R* ja M2BJ/M2LJ, on ilmoitettu
n, missä Dm = keskimääräinen laakerien halkaisija erillisessä hoito-ohjeessa.
mm:nä, ja n = pyörimisnopeus, rpm) on korkeampi kuin
400000, käytäsuurnopeusvoiteluaineita. Seuraavia
voiteluaineita voidaan käyttää:
• Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (polyurea base)

6. Moottorin vianetsintä taulukko
Nämä ohjget eivät kata kaikkia yksityiskohtia ja vaihtoehtoja eivätkä myöskään tilanteita asennuksen, käytön tai
huollon aikana. Lisäohjeiden saamiseksi pyydämme ostajaa ottamaan yhteyttä lähimpään ABB:n myyntikonttoriin.
Moottorin huoltoa ja korjaustoimenpiteitä suorittavan henkilön on oitava pätevä ja turvallisuusmääräyksettunteva

ammattilainen, jolla on asianmukaiset työkalut ja -välineet.
Ongelma Aiheuttaja Suositeltava toimenpide

Moottori ei käynnisty Sulake palanut Vaihda oikean tyyppinen ja nimellisarvoinen sulake.
Ylikuormalaukaisu Tarkista ja nollaa ylikuormalaukaisu käynnistimeltä
Väärä syöttöjännite Tarkista että syöttöjännite on arvokilven mukainen
Kytkentä väärä Tarkista kytkennät moottorin mukana toimitet-
tavasta kytkentäkaavioista ja arvokilvestä
Katkos käämissä tai ohjauspiirissä Kytkimen ollessä suljettuna tunnistetaan se surise-
vasta äänestä. Tarkista löysät johtokytkimet.
Tarkista myös, että ohjauskytkimet sulkeutuvat.
Mekaaninen vika Tarkista, että moottori ja käyttö pyörii vapaasti.
Tarkista laakerointi ja voitelu.
Käämin oikosulku Tunnistetaan palaneesta sulakkeesta ja mittaamal- J
la. Moottori täytyy käämiä uudelleen. %
Käämin heikot kytkennät Avaa moottori, paikallista vika mittaamalla. 1
Viallinen roottori Tarkista roottoritankojen ja oikosulkurenkaiden
kunto.
Moottori saattaa olla ylikuormitettu Vähennä kuormitusta
Moottori pysähtynyt Jännitekatkos Sulakkeet palaneet, tarkista ylikuormitusrele,
staattori ja painonapit
Vääränlainen moottori sovellukseen Vaihda moottorityyppi ja -koko. Ota yhteys
valmistajaan.
Ylikuormitus Vähennä kuormitusta.
Alhainenjännite Katso, että arvokilven jännitettä on noudatettu.
Tarkista kytkennät.
Moottori käynnistyy, Syöttöjännitevika Tarkista löysät kytkennät, sulakkeet ja ohjauspiiri.
Sitten pysähtyy
Moottori ei saavuta Vääränlainen moottori Ota yhteyttä toimittajaan oikean moottorin
nimellisnopeuttaan valinnasta.
Jännite moottorinliittimillä liian Käytä korkeampaa jännitettä tai käynnistys-
alhainen johtuen jännitehäviöistä muuntajaa. Pienennä kuormaa.Tarkista kytkennät.
Tarkista kaapelien oikea koko.
Käynnistettäessä kuorma liian suuri. Tarkista moottorin maksimikuormitus
käynnistettäessä.
Roottori rikkoutunut Katso mahdolliset murtumat oikosulkurenkaassa.
Yleensätarvitaan uusi roottori.
Moottorin kiihdytysaika Ylikuormitus Vähennä kuormitusta
liian pitkä ja/tai moottori Hitausmomentti liian suuri Tarkista käytönmitoitus
ottaa liikaa virtaa Käynnistyksen aikana liian Tarkista johtimien koko jännitehäviöiden perusteella
alhainen käynnistysjännite
Viallinen roottori Vaihda uusi roottori.
Syöttöjännite liian alhainen Tarkista syöttöjännite.
Väärä pyörimissuunta Väärä vaihejärjestys Vaihda kytkentä moottorin liittimillä tai
kytkintaulussa.
Moottori ylikuumenee Ylikuormitus Vähennä kuormitusta
Runko tai jäähdytysaukot saattavat Puhdista moottori ja varmista esteetön ilmankierto.
olla likaiset tai tukossa ja haittaavat
moottorin asianmukaistä tuületusta
Moottorissa voi olla yksi vaihe poikki Tarkista kytkentä.
Maasulku Paikallista ja korjaa
Epäsymmetrinen syöttöjännite Tarkista johtimet, kytkennät ja muuntajat.
moottoriliittimillle

Ongelma Aiheuttaja Suositeltava toimenpide
Moottori tärisee Linjaus väärä. Linjaa moottori oikein
Moottorin alusta heikko. Vahvista alusta.
Kytkin epätasapainossa. Tasapainota kytkin.
Käytettävä laite epätasapainossa Tasapainota laite uudelleen.
Vialliset laakerit Vaihda laakerit
Roottorin tasapainotus muuttunut Tasapainota roottori uudelleen.
Roottorin ja kytkimen tasapainotus Tasapainota kytkin uudelleen.
eroaa (puoli kiila-täysi kiila)
Kolmivaiheinen moottori käy yksi- Tarkista kytkennät.
vaiheisena
Liian suuri aksiaalivälys Tarkista laakerointi.
Hankaavaääni Tuuletin hankaa suojukseen Korjaa tuuletin/suojus.
Tuuletin koskejtaa eristykseen Estä kosketus.
Moottori irronnut alustastaan Kiristä kiinnityspultit ja tarkista linjaus
Meluinen käyntiääni llmaväli ei ole keskeinen Tarkista ohjaussorvaus ja laakerit.
Roottori epätasapainossa Tasapainota uudelleen.
[Laakereiden Puutteellinenvoitelu Voitele laakerit
1 Kuumeneminen
|
Väärä voiteluaine
Voiteluainetta liikaa
Valitse oikea voiteluaine.
Vähennä voiteluaineen määrää.
Laakerit likaantuneet tai voiteluaine Poista vanha voiteluaine, puhdista laakerit ja vaihda
vanhentunut uusi voiteluaine.
Ylikuormitetut laakerit Tarkista linjaus, säteis- ja aksiaalivoimat.
Laakeri vioittunut Vaihda laakerit ja puhdista laakeripesä huolellisesti
Taipunut tai rikkoutunut akseli Vaihda roottori.
Liiallinen hihnan kireys Tarkista kireys.
Hihnapyörät liian leveä. Tarkista leveys.
Hihnapyörän halkaisija liian pieni Käytä halkaisijaltaan suurempaa hihnapyörää.
Moottori ei ole linjassa. Linjaa moottori uudelleen.

Figure 1. Connection diagram
Bild 1 . Anschlußdiagram
Figure 1. Connection
Figurai. Conexiön
Figura 1. Collegamento
Figur 1. Anslutningdiagramm
Figure 2. Belt drive

Bild 2. Riementrieb
Figure 2. Glissières et entraînements à courroie
Figure 2. Carriles tensores y correas
Figura 2. Siitte tendicinghia e puiegge
Figur 2. Remdrift
Kuva 2. Hihnakäyttö
70 ABB / Low Voltags Motors / Manual 11-2002

al
Figure 3. Mounting of half-coupling or pulley

Bild 3. Anbau von Kupplungshälften und
Riemenscheiben
Figure 3. Montage des demi-accouplements et des
poulies
Figura 3. Montaje de mitades de acoplamiento y
poleas
Figura 3. Montaggio di semigiunti e pulegge
Figur 3. Montering av kopplinshalvor och drivskivor
Kuva 3. Kytkinpuolikkaan ja hihnapyörän asennus

Drive17 Low Voltage Motors
Manufacturing sites (*) and some of the biggest sales companies.
Australia Finland* Japan Sweden*

ABB Indusliy Pty Ltd ABBOy ABB K.K. ABB Automation Technology
2 Douglas Street LV Motors 26-1 Cerulean Tower Products AB
Port Melbourne, P.O.Box 633 Sakuragaoka-cho, Shibuya-ku Motors & Machines
Victoria, 3207 FIN-65101 Vaasa Tokyo 150-8512 LV Motors
Tel: +61 (0) 3 9644 4100 Tel:+358(0) 10 22 11 Tel: +81 (0) 3 578 46251 S-721 70 Vasterås
Fax: +61 (0) 3 9646 9362 Fax: +358 (0) 10 22 47372 Fax: +81 (0) 3 578 46260 Tel: +46 (0) 21 329 000
Fax: +46 (0) 21 124 103
Austria France Korea
ABBAG ABB Automation ABB Korea Ltd. Switzerland
Wienerbergstrasse 11 B Rue du Général de Gaulle 7-9fl, Oksan Bldg., 157-33 ABB Switzerland Ltd
A-1810 Wien Champagne-sur-Seine Sungsung-dong, Kangnam-ku Normelec/CMC Components
Tel: +43 (0) 1 601 090 F-77811 Moret-sur-Loing Cedex Seoul. Motors&Drives
Fax: +43 (0) 1 601 09 8305 Tel: +33 (0) 1 60 746 500 Tel: +82 2 528 2329 Badenerstrasse 790
Fax: +33 (0) 1 60 746 565 Fax: +82 2 528 2338 Postfach
Belgium CH-8048 Zürich
Asea Brown Boveri S.A.-N.V. Germany Mexico Tel: +41 (0) 58 586 0666
Hoge Wei 27 ABB Automation Products GmbH ABB Mexico, S.A. de C.V. Fax: +41 (0) 58 586 0603
B-1930 Zaventem P.O.Box 10 02 61 Apartado Postal 111
Tel:+32 (0)2 718 6311 D-68002 Mannheim CP 54000 Tlalnepantla Taiwan
Fax: +32 (0) 2 718 6657 Tel: +49 (0) 621 3810 Edo. de Mexico, Mexico Asea Brown Boveri Ltd
Fax: +49 (0) 621 381 6820 Tel: +52 5 328 1400 P.O.Box 81-54
Brazil Fax: +52 5 390 3720 Taipei A
Asea Brown Boveri Ltda - Hong Kong Tel: +886 (0) 2 579 9340 •
P.O.Box 00975 ABB Automation Limited The Netherlands Fax; +886 (0) 2 577 9434 ^
06020-902 Osasco -SP 3 Dai Hei Street ABB B.V.
Tel: +55 (0) 11 7088 9526 Tai Po Industrial Estate Dept. LV motors (APP2R) Thailand
Fax:+55 (0) 11 7088 4523 • Tai Po New Territories P.O.Box 301 ABB Limited
Hong Kong NL-3000 AH Rotterdam 5th Building, 322 Moo 4
Canada Tel: +852 292 938 38 Tel: +31 (0) 10 4078 879 Bangpoo Industrial Estate Soi 6
ABB Inc., BAEIectrical Machines Fax: +852 292 938 87 Fax: +31 (0) 10 4078 345 Sukhumvit Road, Prekasa,
10300 Henri-Bourassa Blvd. Muang, Samutprakarn 10280
West, Saint-Laurent, Quebec India* New Zealand Tel: +662 (0) 709 3346
Canada H4S 1N6 Asea Brown Boveri Ltd ABB Automation Fax: +662 (0) 709 3765
Tel: +1 514 832-6583 P.O.Box 16 ;
Motor Sales
Fax: +1 514 332-0609 Faridabad 121 001 P.O.Box 22167 The United Kingdom
Tel: +91 (0) 882 3001 Otahuhu, Auckland ABB Automation Ltd
China* Fax: +91 (0) 882 3006 Tel: +64 (0) 9 276 6016 9 The Towers, Wilmslow Road
ABB Yuejin Motors (Shanghai) Fax: +64 (0) 9 276 1303 Didsbury
Company Limited Indonesia Manchester, M20 2AB
8 Guang Xing Rd.,Rong Bei P.T. Abdibangun Buana Norway Tel: +44 (0) 161 445 5555
Town, Songjiang County, P.O.Box 3781 ABBAS Fax: +44 (0) 161 448 1016
Shanghai 201613 Jakarta 10002 Automation Technology Products
Tel: +86 21 5778 0988 Tel:+62 (0) 21 314 9115 Division USA
Fax; +86 21 5778 1364 Fax: +62 (0) 21 315 3963 P.O.Box 6540 Rodeloekka ABB Inc.
N-0501 Oslo 5 Electrical Machines
Chile Ireland Tel: +47 22 872 000 P.O.Box 372
Asea Brown Boveri S.A. Asea Brown Boveri Ltd Fax: +47 22 872 541 Milwaukee
P.O.Box 581-3 Components Division Wl 53201-0372
Santiago Belgard Road Singapore Tel: +1 262 785 3200
Tel:+56 (0)2 5447 100 Tallaght, Dublin 24 ABB Industry Pte Ltd Fax: +1 262 785 8628
Fax: +56 (0) 2 5447 405 Tel: +353 (0) 1 405 7300 P.O.Box 95
Fax: +353 (0) 1 405 7327 Pasir Panjang Post Office Venezuela
Denmark Singapore 9111 Asea Brown Boveri S.A.
ABB A/S Italy* Tel: +65 775 3777 P.O.Box 6649
Automation Technology Electrical ABB Industria SpA Fax: +65 778 0222 Carmelitas,
Machines BAU LV Motors • Caracas 1010A
Petersmindevej 1 Via Delia Meccanica, 22- ' Spain* Tel: +58 (0) 2 238 2422
DK-5000 Odense C I-20040 Caponago - Ml ABB Automation Products S.A. Fax: +58 (0) 2 239 6383
Tel: 445 65 477 070 Tel: +39 02 959 6671 Division Motores
Fax: +45 65 477 713 Fax: +39 02 959 667216 P.O.Box 81
E-08200 Sabadell
Tel: +34 93 728 8500
Fax: +34 93 728 8741
II II
http://www.abb.com/motors&drives
htlp://online.abb.com/motors&drives
IRON Pump A/S
MOUNTING AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

FOR PUMPS
YOUR R E F .
PURPOSE : Heeling - SW
ORDER NO.: P063941-00-4
PROJECT : Lindø nyb 171
IRON REF.
PUMP NO. : QT0377
ORDER N O . : 3562164
PUMP TYPE: QT 2 - 2 5 0
IMPORTANT: Read this manual before mounting and starting the pumps
Pagel
IRONPUMP A/S
Technical data 4
Notice: Please remember to mount the SNR Lubricator 5
Mounting and operating instructions for pumps 7
1.0 Before start 7

1.1 General instructions 7
1.2 Mounting instructions 7
1.3 For pumps delivered without motor - mounting of coupling parts 7
1.4 Alignment of couplings 7
1.5 Installation of the pump 8
1.6 Motor wiring 8
1.7 Starting of the pump 8
Lubrication - Maintenance . 9
2.0 3 Months'check 10
2.1 12 Months'check 10
Maintenance (storage instructions) - General instructions 11
3.0 Preservation of bearings 11

3.1 Preservation of interior parts of the pumps 11
3.2 Preservation procedure 11
3.3 Restarting of the pumps 11
Dismounting and mounting instructions 12
4.0 Dismounting 12
4.1 Mounting 12
Installation and maintenance instructions for EFLEX-R coupling type RN 14
5.0 Safety precautions 14

5.1 Mounting 14
5.2 Alignment 14
5.3 Possible misalignments 14
5.4 Operation 14
5.5 Maintenance 15
5.6 Replacing of flexibles 15
5.7 Table 15
5.8 Instructions drawing for EFLEX-R coupling type RN 16
Mechanical shaft seal 17
Page 2
ÇZ dmnd JOJ JSIJ
fZ duind joj SuiMüjp uoipiujsuj
£Z d r a n d J O J SuiAVtJjp s u o i p n j j s u j
OZ Suipugioxia o'i
QZ SUOI;Bjado jo uopdnjjajui
61 [Bas -ipam JOJ suoipnj(;sui
uo s;ran guipas SUI^JOI guiîg T9

SJB9S ynqs ôraBqosui JOJ suoiptujsin Sinîd; 0"9
IRON Pump A/S
e.data
Technical data
Pump:
Type : QT 2-250 - Reve
Pcs :1
Capacity : 400 m3/h
Head :-
Total head : 16,00 m.w.c.
Suction head :-
Mech. seal :Yes
Gland packing :No
Coupling size :EFLEX-R/RN7
Weight /kg. :380
Material:
Pump casing : Bronze RG10
Impeller : Ni.Al.Bronze
Wear ring : Bronze JM-1
Shaft : AISI-329
Motor:
Type : ABB M2BA 225 SMC 4
KW : 65,00
Power consumption kW : 45,00 - Max. 63,00
RpM : 1750
Weight/kg :355
Page 4
Maskinfabriken IRON A/S
Notice: Please remember to mount the SNR Lubricator
Grease lubricator
2BZ2L
Installation:
• Check the indications mentioned on the label: Especially the type of grease.
• Mark down the date of commissioning in the place provided for that purpose on the label.
• Pre-lubricateboth the unit to be greased and the grease inlet circuit into the unit. Use a grease that can
be mixed with the grease contained in the SNR dispenser.
• Remove the waterproof plastic cap then the round plug to gain access to the switch panel.
• Engage the switch (or switches) to correspond to the duration chosen (1,2,3 months..) and turn on the
warning light switch. Replace the round plug and the waterproof plastic cap.
• Withdraw the plastic plug from the grease outlet.
Screw the dispenser onto the greasing point (1/4 inch thread) by hand (do not overtighten), Use a cou-
pling (min inner dia 6 mm) or a tubing (max length 1 m), if the dispenser cannot be installed directly on
the greasing point.
Page 5
Remarks:
• The SNR dispenser is operational whatever the position (vertical, horizontal, at an angle, or even head
down) and can be submerged.
• After closing the electrical circuit, the chemical reaction starts with controlled production of propel-
lant gas - the gas must reach a given pressure before the grease begins to be ejected. This delay varies
according to the setting:
• 1. Day approx. for setting over 1 months

• 2. Days approx. for setting over 2 months
• 6. Days approx for setting over 6 months
If you wish to start straight away, engage all switches at once for 12 hours, then return to the chosen set-
ting.
• Warning: Never use one single grease dispenser for several greasing points.
No special care:
Just replace the dispenser when it is empty or when the set running time is over. If the grease level does
not go down while the warning light is flashing, it means that the unit is full of pressurized grease. Inthis
case, the dispenser ensures continuos greasing of the unit to be lubricated by maintaining the grease
under pressure.
Temporary shutdown of greasing:
Move all switches to "OFF" then start again when yuo wish. It is also possible to alter the setting during
operation.
Page 6
Maskinfabrikcn IRON A/S
e0103
Mounting and operating instructions for pumps
1.0 Before start
• Check direction of rotation (marked with an arrow).

• Check that there is liquid in the pump (might have been emptied by standstill).
• Check that the pump is turnable by hand.
• Check that the pump has been lubricated with grease.
• Check the pump for noises and vibrations immediately after starting.
• Check that the roller bearings has been lubricated with grease, and the lubricator dispenser, item
630, is mounted and the rate is set to 12 mounth.
1.1 General instructions
Check the pump immediately after receipt. In case of damages or defects - complain immediately.
All pumps are marked with indication of type and number, stamped into the plate as well as into the
pump itself- as for centrifugal pumps, usually in the suction flange - as for other pumps, at an easily
visible place.
If the pump is not mounted immediately after receipt it should be protected during storage (see storage
instructions).
1.2 Mounting instructions
When calculating the piping system, special regard should be paid to minimizing pressure losses in the
suction line (short pipe lengths, large diameter, few bendings, no valves). If valves are necessary, then
use valves with min. pressure losses, e.g. slide valves, butterfly valves, flap non-return valves etc.
Static suction lift + total pressure losses in suction line + NPSH value of the pump + steam pressure of
the liquid must not exceed 10 mWC at sea level (and 760 mm Hg.).
1.3 For pumps delivered without motor - mounting of coupling parts
Before mounting, shaft and coupling parts must be carefully cleaned. Grease shaft ends and check that
key fits. Heat coupling parts to 80°C. and push them on to the shaft ends by hand or by a light pressure.
By dismounting a puller will have to be applied.
1.4 Alignment of couplings
Flexible couplings will absorb small deviations in the relative positions of the shaft ends to be connected,
however, a careful and accurate alignment will prolong the life of the coupling flexibles - see instructions
for coupling.
Page 7
1.5 Installation of the pump
The entire piping must be pressure and leakage tested and flushed clean before it is connected to the suc-
tion and discharge side of the pump. If the pressure test takes place with the pump installed the testing
pressure must not exceed the testing pressure of the pump, which is stamped into the pump, usually in the
suction flange. Otherwise, the pump packings or flanges for the mechanical shaft seal might be dama-
ged. Connection of the pipes to the pump must take place without using force as this might interfere with
the alignment of the pump.
Precautions must be taken to ensure that the pipe connections to the pump are supported in a way that
prevents tensions from being transmitted to the pump, e.g. owing to thermal expansion. Check that all
other connections to the pump are in working order, such as lubrication, priming, heating, cooling med-
ium outlet, etc., and that the various measuring equipment has been correctly connected. Take care that
no parts obstruct the easy access to the pump for inspection or replacement of important parts. If the
pump is equipped with venting device (item 672), then this must be placed upwards.
1.6 Motor wiring
Electric motors should be connected by means of sufficiently long cables to permit the motor to be
moved a little without dismantling the connections. A control unit (emergency stop) should be installed
close to the pump. The motor and the valve must be electrical connected so the valve starts opening,
when the motor is started and the valve starts closing, when the motor is stopped.
The pump must not be reversed without stopping first.
1.7 Starting of the pump
When the preceding preparations and installations have been completed incl. the lubricator dispenser and|
it has been controlled that the pump shaft can be turned by hand, the pump can be started. The pump can
be started against closed discharge valve, but the valve must be opened immediately after start, not to
damage the motor. The pump will use a lot of power when it is running against closed valve, and the
motor is normally not big enough to run constant at that power. Pumps with mechanical shaft seal must
be protected against impurities and dry running. Please note that clogged filters will cause considerable
friction losses, which may decisively affect the suction capacity and output of the pump, check also when
starting the pump that the direction of rotation is correct (shown with an arrow on the pump), and open
slowly the valve on the discharge side of the pump. At normal discharge head the pump should run
smoothly without abnormal noises and vibrations after abt. 1 minute of operation.
It is an absolute requirement that pumps are not operating unnecessarily long without liquid, nor-
mally max. 1 min. During the first hours of operation bearings, packings and mechanical shaft seal
should be checked for heating and leakage. Normal bearing temperature is 40-75 hr.C. max temperature
for normal ball and roller bearings is up to 105 gr.c.
Page 8
IRON Pump A/S
eO432
Lubrication - Maintenance
Lubricate the thrust roller bearings with normal ball bearings grease - Mobiltemp SHC 100.
The bearings are lubricated with 25 gram grease for every 2000 hours. Check that not too much grease is
pressed into the bearings as this will cause generation of heat. All bearings are provided with sealing
rings in order to prevent humidity and impurities from entering. The grease must no be pressed through
these sealing rings. For bearings which are exposed to higher pressure or humidity a heat resisting and
water-repelling grease will apply (Molypan LT-1 or similar quality).
Lubricants
Grease lubricated
bearings
Pump type All types
Nato code /DIN G 395

BP ENERGREASE LS-EP2
CASTROL SPHEEROLAP2/3
CHEVRON DURA LITH GREASE EP2
ESSO BEACON EP2
MOBIL MOBILTEMP SHC 100
Q8 REMBRANDT EP2
SHELL ALVANIA GREASE EP2
TEXACO MULTIFAK ALL

PURPOSE EP2
The bearing bushes are lubricated with grease from the lubricator dispenser item.
630 (SNR 1/4" EP).
Set the lubricator dispenser rate to 12 months.

See the "Fitting and setting instructions" for the SNR lubricator.
A new lubricator dispenser must be mounted when the old is emty (after apr.12 month)
IRON Pump A/S
2.0 3 Months' check
Check the pump for false noises, vibrations and leakage, pumps with mechanical shaft seal must not
leak, neither during standstill with inlet pressure on the pump, nor during operation. The bypass pipe to
the mechanical shaft seal must be intact and permit free flow. In case of defects they must be corrected
immediately as they may greatly influence the operation and life of the pump.
2.1 12 Months' check
Disassemble the pump (see instructions). Check the components of the rotary element and perform all
necessary replacement.
Page 10
IRON Pump A/S
e0409
Maintenance (storage instructions) - General instructions
All pumps which are taken out of operation for some time should be protected against corrosion and frost
and kept in a dry place. The following directions should be observed:
3.0 Preservation of bearings
Both ball / roller bearings and slide bearings should be lubricated all over with their normal lubricant.
3.1 Preservation of interior parts of the pumps
The interior parts of the pumps should be protected against aggressive pumping media, for instance by
using a water-repelling solvent containing at the same time corrosion inhibiting nitrides. We recommend
"Mobil oil - Arma 245" or similar quality.
3.2 Preservation procedure
Flush the pump with pure hot water (does not apply to be screw pumps and gear pumps) and let it airdry.
Close the valves on both sides of the pump and flush the pump with "Mobil Arma 25" or similar quality.
Flushing can take place through the manometer connections.
3.3 Restarting of the pumps
When restarting pumps it is advisable to fill the pump with hot water through the manometer connections
(does not apply to screw pumps and gear wheel pumps) and to turn the pump shaft by hand before
starting the pump. Watch the operation of the pump for abt. 10 minutes and open the valve in the normal
way. Bearings, gearboxes etc. should be lubricated with normal oil or grease if a change of oil has taken
place.
Page 11
eO619
Dismounting and mounting instructions
4.0 Dismounting
• Remove the motor.

• Remove the pump from the pipe system.
• Unscrew the seal cover item 471 - Watch out for the shaft seal.
• Unscrew and remove the suction elbow item 139 and pull out the wear ring item 512.
• Remove the impeller hub cap item 260.
• Pull the impeller item 230.1 of the shaft.
• Unscrew and remove the pump bowl item 112.
• Remove the retaining ring for the impeller item 506 and pull the impeller item 230.2 of the shaft.
• Unscrew the bearing housing item 350.
• The shaft and bearing housing can now be pulled out of the pump - Watch out for the shaft seal.
• Dismantle the bearing housing when the coupling has been removed.
4.1 Mounting
Clean the pump casing inside and if necessary paint it (for instance with Apexior No.3 or with a more
resistant product as Hempadur No.1513 "Hempel marine paints").
Control all pump parts and replace damaged parts.
• Produce new 1 mm packings for the pump casing item 400.2 + 3.

• Press the bearing bush item 545 and the shaft seal ring item 420.3 into the bearing carrier item 382
and mount it in the pump bowl item 112, and lock them whit the lockring disc item 552.
• Press the wear rings item 512 into position.
• Push the spacer ring item 504, shaft seal item 433, seal cover item 471 with mounted seal ring, bear-
ing housing item 350 with shaft seal ring and 1 loose collar item 505 into the shaft in the order men-
tioned - Watch out for the shaft seal and the seal ring.
• Preheat the bearings to 80 gr.C. and place them on the shaft, place the other 2 loose collar item 505,
the lockwasher item 931 and the bearing nut item 923 on the shaft. Tighten and lock.
• Push the bearing housing over the bearings and place the bearing cover item 360 with shaft seal ring -
• Tighten the screws for the bearing cover with a torque of 30 Nm. - There will be a gap between the
bearing cover and the bearing housing.
• Push the shaft with shaft seal, seal cover and the complete bearing housing into the pump and fasten
the bearing housing with screws.
• Push the impeller item 230.2 into the shaft and secure it with the retaining ring item 506 - Remember
the key in the shaft
• Mount and fasten the pump bowl item 112.
• Mount the other impeller item 230.1 on the shaft, mount the impeller hub cap item 260, fasten and
secure the screws.
• Mount the suction elbow item 139.
• Mount the bypass pipe. Mount the venting device item 672, if any.
• Mount the pump in the pipe system - if the pump is equipped with venting device item 672, then this
must be placed upwards.
Page 12
Preheat the coupling half and mount it on the shaft.

Mount the motor.
Before mounting the lubricator dispenser item 630, inject grease into the pump bowl item 112, to fill
all the free space.
Lubricate the bearing, and check that the shaft can be turned by hand, before starting the pump.
Page 13
IRON Pump A/S
e0704
Installation and maintenance instructions for EFLEX-R coupling type RN
5.0 Safety precautions
• Rotating parts should be guarded by the buyer to prevent accidents, considering applicable local
safety precautions.
5.1 Mounting
• Before mounting the hubs, carefully clean the shaft ends and the coupling parts.
• Inside hubs to be flushed with the shaft ends. Tighten the set screw to secure hubs axially.
• Tighten the set screw only with hexagon socket wrench according to DIN 911 without extension
piece.
• Heating the coupling parts at approx. 80°C. will facilitate mounting, however at first the flexible ele-
ments must be removed from the female part.
• Assure that the flexible elements are turned correctly when they are remounted - se instructions draw-
ing.
• Bring the coupling hubs together, observing the dimension Sj according to the table.
• Check all screw connections with screw tightening torques of the table.
5.2 Alignment
• EFLEX-R couplings will absorb deviations in the relative position of shafts to be connected (Please
see below: possible misalignments).
• Aligning the coupling halves , the angular and parallel offset misalignments of interrelative shafts
should be reduced most possible. Alignment to be carried out in two planes as shown in. fig. 1 with a
straight edge (offset misalignment) and spacer bar (angular misalignment). For better accuracy use a
dial indicator.
• The gap dimension Sj should be within the limits listed in the table.
5.3 Possible misalignments
• The axial distance Ka (fig.2) must be within the limits for Sj (see the table).
• Angular misalignment Kw (fig.3) is measured as the difference between S max and Smjn possible val-
ues are calculated with values from the table.
• Parallel offset misalignment Kr (fig. 4) see the table.
• Angular and parallel offset misalignment might occur at the same time. The total of both alignments
should not exceed the values Kr respectively Kw.
• Kw and Kr apply in a shock free operation at ambient temperature - 30°C to 80°C.
5.4 Operation
• Before starting initial operatings check alignment and gap dimension Sjand make corrections, if
Page 14
IRON Pump A/S
required. Further check the screw connections.
5.5 Maintenance
• EFLEX-R couplings do not require any regular maintenance except for an occasional check on the
torsional play or backlash between the driving and driven halves. When EFLEX-R couplings are used
in drives which do not require a minimum of torsional play or backlash in the coupling, the coupling
flexibles can be allowed to wear down 2/3 of their original thickness before replacement is required.
5.6 Replacing of flexibles
• Continuous torque transmission and reliability of operation cannot be guaranteed unless original
EFLEX-R flexibles are used.
• After fitting new flexibles, assure that they are turned correctly.
• Before starting up control the mounting.
5.7 Table
Table
Si Angular Offset
Coupling size
Misalignment Misagnment
RN/RA/ Kw Kr
outside diam. o c
'-'max. - "min
mm
mm
mm mm.
1800 RPM 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM
2/80 2...4 1,4 0,28 0,26 0,05
3/94 2...4 1,6 0,32 0,30 0,06
4/110 2...S 1,9 0,38 0,36 0,07
5/125 2...5 2,2 0,44 0,42 0,08
6/140 2...6 2,4 0,48 0,50 0,10
7/165 2...6 2,9 0,58 0,60 0,12
8/180 2...6 3,1 0,62 0,70 0,14
9/210 2...6 3,7 0,76
10 / 240 2...6 4,2 0,84
11/260 3...7 4,5 0,95
12 / 300 3...8 5,2 1,00
13 / 325 3...8 5,7 1,15
, 14/360 . 5...10 6,3 1,30
Page 15
IRON Pump A/S
5.8 Instructions drawing for EFLEX-R coupling type RN

Female ,- Male
Part 1
Straight edge
Fig. 1
Spacer bar
Ka Kw
Smax Srnax
1'
J,
—
Smin Srnin
Axial movement Angular misalignment Offset misalignment

Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4
28118E
Page 16
IRON Pump A/S
e0800
Mechanical shaft seal
6.0 Fitting instructions for mechanical shaft seals
A mechanical shaft seal is a very highly precision made product and should be treated with the utmost
care before and during fitting. Do not unpack until ready for use. The rotating wear ring and the seat have
been lapped to a great degree of accuracy, care should be taken when unpacking especially when remov-
ing the plastic protection not to scratch the surfaces.
• Fitting the seat into the housing
• The machined place where the seat fits must be cleaned very carefully.
• Edges that are passed by rubber components should be rounded so they do not act sharp or penetrat-
ing.
• The bore in the housing and the seat must be lubricated, with ethylen-propylen rubber only liquid
soap, soapy water or glycerin should be used as this type of rubber cannot withstand mineral oil or
other connections to it. One must never use thinner or the like when cleaning the seal.
• Seals that are furnished with rubber components made of synthetic rubber such as nitrile can tolerate
mineral oil. To avoid any mistakes one should use soap products only.
• Lubrications containing silicone must never be used.
• Press the seat into position with your fingers. If the space is scarce one can use a bush when pressing
the seat into position care being taken not to scratch the surface of the seat. As an example, one can
use a piece of plastic for protection between the bush and seat. After pressing the seat in its position,
make sure that it is fully in its place by measuring the depth with a depth calliper, care should be taken
when fitting seat types that are held in position with the help of a pin. If the pin does not engage in the
hole in the seat it will not be at right angles to the shaft.
6.1 Fitting rotating sealing units on shaft
• Check that the shaft diameter corresponds with the dimension of the seal within a tolerance of ± 0,05
mm.
• The compressed length after fitting must answer to the working length of the size of seal in question
given in the table of measurements.
• Be aware of changes that can take place when bearing arrangements and gaskets etc. are replaced.
• The surface of the shaft must be free from dirt and burrs before fitting a new seal. All sharp edges that
the seal is to pass over must be rounded and not just chamfered.
• The shaft must be lubricated as mentioned above. Furthermore the elastomer is to be lubricated on the
inside where it slides on the shaft. Now the complete and clean unit can be pressed onto the shaft
while its components are sitting in their positions and while the elastomer still slides easily along the
shaft the pump can be assembled.
Page 17
IRON Pump A/S
NOTE:
Before the pump is started it must be filled with liquid and the air allowed to escape. Air escape should
be repeated frequently during the first period of tune after starting.
Safety precautions.
When fitting shaft seals the instructions should be read carefully especially when the media is dangerous
(poisonous, hot, ignitable etc.).
The fitter should ensure that the material combination supplied is suitable for the job and also see if
screens are needed for the seal arrangement.
If you are in doubt, please contact the supplier.
To obtain the longest lifetime for mechanical shaft seals, they are constructed to maintain a film of liquid
between the 2 surfaces that rotate against each other. The function of the film of liquid is to reduce the
friction and thereby wear and tear under working conditions, this causes some of the liquid to escape into
the atmosphere, but as it is a very small amount that is in question, one will not normally notice this
minor leakage as it will evaporate into the atmosphere.
Page 18
IRON Pump A/S
Fitting instructions for mech. seal
BURGMANN/IRON
25(ø10-ø25)
335(ø30-40)
41(Ø42-Ø60)~
FITTING INSTRUCTIONS
Check the pump is ready
1. Shaft is clean and free from burrs etc.,and is not bent.
2. The bearings are in good condition.
3. AU sharp corners, where rubber components must be fitted over,
are removed.
4. You have a suitable lubricant available.
NEVER use lubricants containing SILICONE.
Use ONLY liquid soap, soapy wafer or Glycerine with
Ethylene Propylene elastomer.
5. The gland plate is also clean and free from burrs.
6. Do not unpack the seal until you are ready to proceed with fitting.
07.47.01 E
Page 19
IRON Pump A/S
e0500
Interruption of operations
7.0 Error finding
This list below shows possible trouble sources if the pump does not function correctly.
If you are unable to find the source of interruption or if you cannot repair the fault, Please contact our
service section.
Faults Possible causes
A. Pump and motor cannot be actuated:

A. 1 Impeller or shaft blocked.
A.2 Motor fault.
B. Motor running but no pumping effect:

B.I Motor rotation is not transmitted through coup-
ling.
B.2 Discharge valve closed.
B.3 Non-return valve or other valves are closed.
B.4 Suction line closed.
B.5 Air in pump casing.
B.6 Suction line leaking.
B.7 Shaft seal leaking.
B.8 Bottom valve defective.
B.9 Suction lift too high.
B.10 Priming pump defective.
C. Insufficient capacity:
C.I Wrong direction of rotation.
C.2 Number of revolutions too low.
C.3 Counter-pressure too high.
C.4 Suction line or impeller partly clogged.
C.5 Air in pump casing.
C.6 Air in pumping medium.
C.7 Suction lift too high (inlet pressure too low).
C.8 Cavitation.
C.9 Suction line leaking.
CIO Shaft seal leaking.
C.ll Pump worm out.
Page 20
IRON Pump A/S
D. Pump pressure too high:

D. 1 Number of revolutions too high.
D.2 Impeller oversized.
D.3 Too many pressure stages.
D.4 Specific gravity of pumping medium too high.
D.5 Viscosity of pumping medium too low.
D.6 Inlet pressure too high.
D.7 Manometer defective.
E. Capacity too large:

E. 1 Number of revolutions too high.
E.2 Impeller diameter too big.
E.3 Counter-pressure too low.
F. Discharge head too low:

F. 1 Number of revolutions too low.
F.2 Impeller diameter too small.
F.3 Too few pressure stages.
F.4 Specific gravity of pumping medium too low.
F.5 Viscosity of pumping medium to high.
F.6 Manometer defective.
G Power consumption too large:

G.1 Motor too small.
G.2 Motor fault.
G.3 Capacity too large.
G.4 Counter-pressure too low.
G.5 Stuffing-box tightened too much.
G.6 Shaft ends out of alignment.
G.7 Electricity supply incorrect.-Volt-amp-frequency
H. Pump output decreases or stops:

H.I Suction line leaking.
H.2 Shaft seal leaking.
H.3 Increasing suction lift.
H.4 Filter clogged.
H.5 Cavitation.
I. Irregular running:
1.1 Bearings defective.
1.2 Motor fault.
Page 21
IRON Pump A/S
J. Increasing noise level:

J.I Beginning cavitation.
J.2 Air in pumping medium.
J.3 Capacity too large.
J.4 Clamping to base loosened.
J.5 Base bolts loosened.
J.6 Influences from pipe connections or base.
K. Leaks:
K. 1 Cracks in pump casing.
K.2 Faulty assembly of pump.
K.3 Pipe connections leaking.
K.4 Shaft seal leaking (in case of soft stuffing-box)
packing minor leaks are necessary).
L. Bearing temperature too high:

L.I Faulty lubrication or wrong lubricant.
L.2 Deficient pump alignment.
L.3 Influences from pipe line.
L.4 Coupling distance wrong.
L.5 Shaft bent.
L.6 Foreign bodies or impurities in bearings.
M. Pump wears out quickly:

M. 1 Wrong materials in relation to pumping medium
M.2 Cavitation.
M.3 Stufïîng-box tightened too much.
M.4 Shaft bent.
M.5 Deficient alignment.
M.6 Influences through pipe line.
N. Strong vibrations:
N. 1 Impurities in pump.
N.2 Motor not properly balanced.
N.3 Influence from other factors.
Page 22
Instructions drawing for pump

2799704
420.1 QT-250
QT-300
Mek. akselfætn.
Fedfsmurt
Page 23
IRONPUMP A/S
Instruction drawing for pump
2799624 .
QT-250
QT-300
Mek. akselt.
Fedtsmurt
341
Page 24
2799624-2e
Parts list for pump

Pump type: QT 2-250 + QT 2-300 - Drawing No.: 2799624
Pos No Description Productions No. Pcs Material
112 Pump bowl 1 Bronze RG10

115 Delivery casing 1 Bronze RG10
139 Suction elbow 1 Bronze RG10
210 Shaft 1 AISI329
230.1 Impeller 1 NiAl-bronze
230.2 Impeller 1 NiAl-bronze
260 Impeller hub cap 1 Bronze
324 Thrust roller bearing lset
350 Bearing housing 1 Cast iron
341 Motor stool 1 Cast iron
360 Bearing cover 1 Cast iron
382 Bearing carier 2 Bronze
400.1 Gasket 2 Klingerit
420.1 Shaft seal ring 1 Nitril/Steel
420.2 Shaft seal ring 1 Nitril/Steel
420.3 Shaft seal ring 2 Nitril/Stainless steel
433 Mech.seal 1 Carbon/Ceramics
471 Seal cover 1 Bronze
504 Spacer ring 1 NiAl-bronze
505 Loose collar 3 Steel
506 Retaining ring 1 NiAl-bronze
512 Wear ring 2 Bronze RG10
545 Bearing bush 2 Thordon
552 Locking disc 2 Bronze
630 Lubricator dispenser 1
636 Grease nipple 1 Steel
672 Venting device (Option) 1 Cast iron
Page 25
Parts list for pump

Pump type: QT 2-250 + QT 2-300 - Drawing No.: 2799624
Pos No Description Productions No. Pcs Material
743 Cock (Option) 1 Bronze

861.1 Coupling half- Motor 1 Nod. cast iron GGG40
861.2 Coupling half- Pump 1 Nod. cast iron GGG40
867 Flexibles lset Polyurethan
900 Screw 3 Stainless steel
923 Bearing nut 1 Steel |
931 Lockwasher 1 Steel
1
Page 26
SNR, automatic lubricator.
When quality is a must

&
The SNR automatic lubricator gt

The assurance of constant
and regular lubrication
An electrochemical cell generates gas production whose constant and regular outout
guarantees a controlled flow of lubricant Capacity of 125 cm3.
• _J
Excessive lubricant leads to environmental pollution and heating of the bearings ;
Sure and efficient operation

A resistance selected by means of one of the
six selector switches rates the current gene- OPERATION DIAGRAM
rated by 2 alkaline batteries. This current,
in passing through an electrochemical cell, 2 1
assures the production of an inert gas in the"
expandable membrane. By expanding, this
membrane pushes the piston which injects
the lubricant into the bearing. Every
20 seconds, an indicator light blips to show
that the system is in operation. The unit is
switched on by activating the selector switch
chosen depending on the lubrication time
required (from 1 to 12 months).
Then, by switching the last switch on the
right to the ON position, the indicator light
wül be activated.
An inert gas 1. Selector switches.

for active security 2. Indicator light (blip).
3. Electrochemical celt.
Harmless for the environment as it is for the 4. Expandable membrane.
5. Inert gas.
individual, the gas generated in the auto- 6. Piston.
matic lubricator ensures absolute security. 7. Lubricant
Non-explosive and non-flammable, this gas 8.1/4* threading for gas NPT.
9. Protection cap.
enables the SNR lubricator to meet indus- 10. Outlet plug.
trial safety standards : (Certified INERIS
EExianCT5n°91C5048).
long-life to your equipment
Simplicity of installation
and versatility of use
Screwed onto the lubrication point, the SNR lubricator operates in every position and
adapts to its environment
An exact response
to every requirement
At low or high altitudes, in an environment
until + 55 °C.(+130 °F), the SNR lubrica-
tor offers great performance, weatherproof
and corrosion resistant. Waterproof, the
uniteven operates underwater.
It can be switched off for machine mainte-
nance purposes or during holiday periods
and then restarted.
Once empty, it is replaced.
The visible lubricant level : -

apemanent safety check
Thanks to the graded transparent label, the
operator can easily keep a check on the
lubricant level.
A space is reserved for marking the date
when the unit is switched on. The standard
unit is delivered with SNR-LUB EP grease
and following types of lubricants are avai-
lable:
Selection and colour codes of

the SNR-LUB lubricants
Extreme pressure
Other lubricants : consult us.

(For lubricant specifications refer to
SNR-LUB documentation - TF02GB).
eal savings
with the SNR lubricator, production breakdowns and incidents decrease.
Maintenance costs are reduced by from 20-50 % depending on the case and frequency of lubrication.
Use of the SNR lubricator permits the automation of lubrication without modifying installations.
L
An efficient solution adaptable
to many industrial sectors
These high-performance features are perfectly- and automobile industries, steel works, mines and.
suited to a great many industrial sectors. At collieries, paper mills, harbour facilities... and
present, the SNR lubricator is an integral part of in every sector operating with bearings and
the maintenance of equipment in the mechanical friction.
The main features of the SNR lubricator

Lubricant capacity 125 cm3 Maximumpressure. • 3bars(45PSI)
Dimensions Maximum ambient temperature

Diameter 80 ram continuous +55°C(+130°F)
Height . 130 mm peak +65°C(+150°F)
Threading 1/4" NPT
Weight 400g Lubrication periods 1,2,3,6,12 months
NADEUAUK SNR BEARINGS USA •

COVENTRY Progress close Tel.1203233233 4600JC Highlands Pkwy Tel.(770) 435-281S
Leofric Business Park F3X1203233 300 SMYRNA, &A. 30082 (800)232-1717
Binley- COVENTRY CV32TF Fax(800) 742-5215
Veo site: vrewsntbearings.com
SNR INTERMONDIAL (OVERSEAS)
ANNECY IS, rue du Val-Vert Tel Ö3M5O 65 9SOMH/O2
74600SEYNOD Fax 63) 4 50 65 9615
FRANCE Tflex309445
TF03GB/USAa
SM, automatic lubricator.
-• •»
When quality is a must

- ét - -
The SNR automatic lubricator gi\

The assurance of constant
and regulär lubrication
An electrochemical ceE generates gas production whose constant and regular output
guarantees a controlled flow of lubricant Capacity of 125 cm3.
Output
GNRUufcaM'
Excessive lubricant leads, to environmental pollution and heating of the bearings •

, lack of lubricant results in premature wean With a constant and regular output the
SNR lubricator gives maximum operating efficiency to the lubricated rscohanism.
Sure and efficient operation

A resistance selected by means of one of the
six selector switches rates the current gene- OPERATION DIAGRAM
rated by 2 alkaline batteries. This current,
in passing through an electrochemical cell,
assures the production of an inert gas in the
expandable membrane. By expanding, this
membrane pushes the piston which injects
the lubricant into the bearing. Every
20 seconds, an inåcator light blips to show
that the system is in operation. The unit is
switched on by activating the selector switch
chosen depending on the lubrication time
required (from 1 to 12 months).
Then, by switching tiie last switch on the
right to the ON position, the indicator light
will be activated.
An inert gas 1. Selector switches.

2. Indicator light (blip).
for active security 3. Electrochemical cell.
4. Expandable membrane.
Harmless for the environment as it is for the 5. Inert gas.
individual, the gas generated in the auto- 6. Piston.
matic lubricator ensures absolute security. 7. Lubricant
8.1/4" threadingforgas NPT.
Non-explosive and non-flammable, this gas 9. Protection cap.
enables the SNR lubricator to meet indus- 10. Outlet plug.
trial safety standards : (Certified INERIS
EExianCT5n°91C5048). I Lubricant dtscfiarga I
peslong-life to your equipment
Simplicity of installation
and versatility of use
Screwed onto the lubricaöon point, the SNR lubricator operates in every position and
adapts to its environment
An exact response
to every requirement
At low or high altitudes, in an environment
until + 55 °C (+130 °F), the SNR lubrica-
tor offers great performance, weatherproof
and corrosion resistant. Waterproof, the
uniteven operates under water.
It can be switched off for machine mainte-
nance purposes or during holiday periods
and then restarted.
Onceempty, itisreplaced»
The visibklubricant level:

a permanent safety check
Thanks to the graded transparent label, the
operator can easily keep a check on the
lubricant level.
A space is reserved for marking the date
when the unit is switched on. The standard
unit is delivered with SNR-LUB EP grease
and following types of lubricants are avai-
lable:
Selection and colour codes of

the SNR-LUB lubricants
Extrems pressure
Other lubricants : consult us.

(For lubricant specifications refer to
SNR-LUB documentation - TF02GB).
eal savings
With the SNR lubricator, production breakdowns and incidents decrease.
Maintenance costs are reduced by from 20-50 % depending on the case and frequency of lubrication.
Use of the SNR lubricator permits the automation of lubrication without modifying installations.
An efficient solution adaptable
to many industrial sectors
These high-performance features are perfectly- and automobile industries, steel works, mines and.
suited to a great many industrial sectors. At collieries, paper mills, harbour facilities... and
present, the SNR lubricator is an integral part of in every sector operating with bearings and
the maintenance of equipment in the mechanical friction.
The main features of the SNR lubricator

Lubricant capacity 125 cm' Maximumpressure. 3bars(45PSI)
Dimensions Maximum ambient temperature

Diameter 80 mm continuous +55°C(+130°P)
Height . 130 mm peak +65°C(+150°P)
Threading 1/4" NPT
Weight 400g Lubrication periods 1,2,3,6,12 months
NADELLA UK SNR BEARINGS USA

COVENTRY Progress dose Tel.1203233 233 4600 K Highlands Pkwy Tel.(770) 435-2818
Leofric Business Park .Faxl203 233 300 SMYRNA, C A 30082 (SOO) 232-1717
Binley- COVENTRY CÏ32TF Fax(800) 742-5215
Web site : wwwsnrbeirings.com
v
SNR INTERMONDIAL (OVERSEAS)
ANNECY 18, rue du Val-Vert Ta 63H5O65960O/OI/O2
74600SEYNOD Fax 63) 4 50 65 9615
FRANCE 44
TF03GB/USAa
CRN 4
Flertrins in-line pumpe
Multistage in-line pump
Mehrstufige Inline-Pumpe 50/60 Hz 1/3'
Pompe multicellulaire in-line
Bomba multicelular en linea
Delliste
Parts list
Teilliste
Liste de pièces
Lista de. piezas
40 12 41 011 03 89
Repl. 401241 01005 88
GRUNDFOS
Indholdsfortegnelse
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table des matières
Tabla de materias
Indholdsfortegnelse Side
Table of contents Page
Inhaltsverzeichnis Seite
Table des matières Page
Tabla de materias Pagina
Typenøgle Model / Variant

Pump key Model / Variant
Typenschlüssel Modell / Variant
Identification Modèle/Variante
Clave de tipos Modelo / Variante
Pumpe uden motor
Pump without motor
Pumpe ohne Motor
Pompe sans moteur
Bomba sin motor
Sammenbygning af pumpe / motor
Assembly of pump / motor
Montage von Pumpe / Motor
Montage de pompe / moteur
Montaje de bomba / motor
Dellister 6
Parts lists
Teillisten 1
Listes de pièces 10
Listas de piezas
Servicesæt
Service kits
Servicesätze 11
Jeux de service
Juegos de servicio
Service værktøj
Service tools
Servicewerkzeuge 12
Outils de service
Herramientas de servicio
Tegning til serviceværktøj Tilspændingsmomenter
Drawing for service tools Torques
Zeichnung für Servicewerkzeuge Anzugsmomente 13
Dessin pour outils de service Couples de serrage
Dibujo para herramientas de servicio Pares de apriete
Monteringsrækkefølge for mellemkamre og løbere 14
Order of assembly for intermediate chambers and impellers
Montagereihenfolge für Zwischenkammern und Laufräder I
Ordre de montage pour les chambres interm. et les roues mob. 15
Orden de montaje para las càmaras intermedias y los rodetes
Snittegning, model C
16
Sectional drawing, model C
Schnittzeichnung, Modell C ï
Dessin coupe, modèle C 17
Piano seccionado, modelo C
Tegning til delliste, model C, og servicesæt
Drawing for parts list, model C, and service kits
Zeichnung für Teilliste, Modell C, und Servicesätze 18
Dessin pour liste de pièces, modèle C, et jeux de service
Dibujo para lista de piezas, modelo C, y juegos de servicio
Mâlskitser
Dimensional sketches
Maßskizzen 19
Croquis d'encombrement
Croquises de dimensiones
DK Typenøgle
GB
D
F
E
Pump key
Typenschlüssel
Identification
Clave de tipos
CRN 4
TYPENØGLE Variantkode
PUMP KEY Variant code
TYPENSCHLÜSSEL Varianiencode
IDENTIFICATION Code de variante
CLAVE DE TIPOS Côdigo de variante
(1) (2) (3)

CRN 4 - 8 0 / 7 X A - A - A
Typerække
Pump range
Baureihe
Série
Serie
Nominel ydelse i m3/h
Nominal flow rate in m3/h
Nennförderstrom in m3/h
Débit nominal en m3/h
Caudal nominal en m3/h
Trinantal ( = løberantal) x 10
Number of stages ( = number of impellers) x 10
Anzahl der Stufen ( = Anzahl der Laufräder) x 10
Nombre d'étages ( = nombre de roues mobiles) x 10
I
Numero de etapas ( = numéro de rodetes) x 10
Antal løbere - anvendes kun, hvis der er færre løbere end kamre
Number of impellers - is only used if the pump has fewer impellers than chambers
Anzahl der Laufräder - wird nur angewendet, wenn die Pumpe weniger Laufräder als
Kammern hat
Nombre de roues mobiles - est seulement utilisé si la pompe a moins de roues mobiles que
chambres
Numéro de rodetes - se utiliza solamente si la bomba tiene menos rodetes que câmaras
Kode for specialprodukt
Code for special product
Code für Spezialprodukt
Code pour produit spécial
Côdigo para producto especial
Kode for fysiske dimensioner
Code for physical dimensions
Code für physische Abmessungen
Code pour dimensions physiques
Côdigo para dimensiones fisicas
Kode for materialer
Code for materials
Code für Werkstoffe
Code pour matériaux
Côdigo para materiales
Kode for akseltætning
Code for mechanical shaft seal
Code für Wellenabdichtung
Code pour garniture mécanique
I
Cödiqo para cierre mecånico
Model / Variant
Model / Variant
Modell / Varianten
Modèle / Variante
Modeio / Variante
Dellisten er gældende for pumper mærket model B eller C med variantkoder:

This parts list applies to pumps marked model B or C with the variant codes: A-A-A *
Diese Teilliste gilt für Pumpen markiert Modell B oder C mit den Variantencodes:
Cette liste de pièces s'applique aux pompes marquées modèle B ou C avec les codes de variante: A-V-A
Esta lista de piezas se apiica a las bombas marcadas modeio B o C con los codigos de variante:
Standardpumpe
Standard pump
Standardpumpe
Pompe standard
Bomba standard
Hvis der i dellisten ikke er angivet noget bogstav i kolonnerne "model" og "variantkode", indgår delen i ovennævnte pumper.
If no letter is stated in the columns "model" and "variant code" of the parts list, the part is used in the above pumps. ' -
Falls kein Buchstabe in den Kolonnen "Modell" und "Variantencode" der Teilliste angegeben ist, wird das Teil in den obigen Pumpen verwendet.
S'il n'est pas indiqué une lettre dans les colonnes "modèle" et "code de variante" de la liste de pièces, la pièce est utilisée pour les pompes
susmentionnées. .
I
Si no esta indicada una letra en las columnas "modeio" y "cödigo de variante" de la lista de piezas, la pieza se utiliza para las bombas arriba
mencionadas. • .
DK Pumpe uden motor
GB Pump without motor
D Pumpe ohne Motor
F Pompe sans moteur
E Bomba sin motor
Pi
pyrTïïM [fl mi n ii
i •
mr
| | L
Pump type Standard motor Pump without motor
Pumpentyp Normmotor Pumpe ohne Motor
Type de pompe Moteur normalisé Pompe sans moteur
Tipo de bomba Motor normalizado Bomba sin motor
-N-
m- -M-
Hz/Fase Type og flange Variantkode/Delnummer

Hz/Phase HK Type and flange Variant code/Part number
Hz/Phase HP Typ und Flansch Variantencode/Teilnummer
CRN4- Hz/Phase kW PS Type et bride Code de variante/No, de réf.
Hz/Fase CV Tipo y brida Cödigo de variante/No, de ped.
50 Hz 60 Hz HP
1 3 1 3
M N A-A-A A-V-A
X 0,37 0,5 71
on/1 X 0,37 0,5 71 V 18 F 85 0 70 0 14 41 63 00 01 41 64 00 01
X 0,37 0,5 71 A
X 0,75 1,0 80 B V 18 F 100 0 80 0 19 41 63 00 61 41 64 00 61
X 0,37 0,5 71
V 18 F 85 0 70 0 14 41 63 00 02 41 64 00 02
on X 0,37 0,5 71
X 0,75 1,0 80 A V 18 F 100 0 80 0 19 41 63 00 62 41 64 00 62
X 0,75 1,0 80 B
X 0,55 0,75 71 V 18 F 85 0 70 0 14 41 63 00 03 41 64 00 03
30
X 0,55 0,75 80
V 18 F 100 0 80 0 19 41 63 00 63 41 64 00 63
X 1,1 1,5 80 B
X 1,5 2,0 90 LA V 18 F 115 0 95 0 24 41 63 01 63 41 64 01 63
X 0,75 1,0 80
F 100 0 80 0 19
V 18 41 63 00 04 41 64 00 04
X 0,75 1,0 80
X 1,5 2,0 90 SA F 115 0 95 0 24
V 18 41 63 00 64 41 64 00 64
X 1,5 2,0 90 LA
X 1,1 1,5 80 V 18 F 100 0 80 0 19 41 63 00 05 41 64 00 05
en X 1,1 1,5 90 L
X 2,2 3,0 90 LA V 18 F 115 0 95 0 24 41 63 00 65 41 64 00 65
X 2,2 3,0 90 LC
X 1,1 1,5 80 V 18 F 100 0 80 0 19 41 63 00 06 41 64 00 06
AH
X 1,1 1,5 90 L
X 2,2 3,0 90 LA V 18 F 115 0 95 0 24 41 63 00 66 41 64 00 66
X 2,2 3,0 90 LC
X 1,5 2,0 90S
V 18 F 115 0 95 0 24 41 63 00 07 41 64 00 07
80/7 X 1,5 2,0 90 L
X 3,0 4,0 100 LA V 18 F 130 0 110 0 28 41 63 00 67 41 64 00 67
X 1,5 2,0 90S
V 18 F 115 0 95 0 24 41 63 00 08 41 64 00 08
80 X 1,5 2,0 90 L
X 3,0 4,0 100 LA V 18 F 130 0 110 0 28 41 63 00 68 41 64 00 68
X 2,2 3,0 90 L
V 18 F 115 0 95 0 24 41 63 00 10 41 64 00 10
100 X 2,2 3,0 90 L
X 4,0 5,5 100 LB V 18 F 130 0 110 0 28 41 63 00 70 41 64 00 70
X 2,2 3,0 90 L V 18 F 115 0 95 0 24 41 63 00 12 41 64 00 12
120 X 2,2 3,0 90 L
X 4,0 5,5 100 LB V 18 F 130 0 110 0 28 41 63 00 72 41 64 00 72
1 fin/id X 3,0 4,0 100 L V 18 F 130 0 110 0 28 41 63 00 14 41 64 00 14
X 5,5 7,5 132 SA V1 F 265 0 230 0 38 41 63 00 74 41 64 00 74
i en X 3,0 4,0 100 L V 18 F 130 0 110 0 28 41 63 00 16 41 64 00 16
X 5,5 7,5 132 SA V 1 F 265 0 230 0 38 41 63 00 76 41 64 00 76
190 X • 4,0 5.5 100 LB V 18 F 130 0 110 0 28 41 63 00 19 41 64 00 19
220 X 4,0 5.5 100 LB V 18 F 130 0 110 0 28 41 63 00 22 41 64 00 22
DK Sammenbygning af pumpe/motor
GB
D
F
E
A
Assembly of pump/motor
Montage von Pumpe/Motor
Montage de pompe/moteur
Montaje de bomba/motor
CRN 4
ê Pumpetype
Pump type
Normmotor
Standard motor
Positionsnummer / Delnummer
Position number / Part number
Pumpentyp
Type de pompe
Tipo de bomba
Normmotor
Moteur normalisé
Motor normalizado
Positionsnummer / Teilnummer
Numéro de position / Numéro de référence
Numéro de posiciôn / Numéro de pedido
>
Hz/Fase
Hz/Phase HK
Hz/Phase HP
CRN 4 - Hz/Phase kW PS 1) Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos.
Hz/Fase CV
50 Hz 60 Hz HP
J_j 3X 1 3 0,37 0,5 71
1 2a 7 8 9 10a 28 28a
X 0,37 0,5 71 41 50 31 48 00 24 41 50 60 ID 13 81 M6X20 41 00 41 ID 05 59 M6x20

X 0,37 0,5 71 A
X 0,75 ±0 80 B 41 50 32 48 00 28 41 50 61 ID 13 81 M6x20 41 00 43 ID 07 44 M6x25
X 0,37 0,5 71
41 50 31 48 00 24 41 50 60 ID 13 81 M6X20 41 00 41 ID 05 59 M6x20
X 0,37 0,5 71
X 0,75 1,0 80 A 41 50 32 48 00 24 41 50 61 ID 13 81 M6x20 41 00 43 ID 07 44 M6x25
X 0,75 1,0 80 B
X 0,55 0,75 71 41 50 31 48 00 24 41 50 60 ID 13 81 M6x20 41 00 41 ID 05 59 M6x20
30
X 0,55 0,75 80
41 50 32 48 00 24 41 50 61 ID 13 81 M6X20 41 00 43 ID 07 44 M6x25
X 1,1 1,5 80 B
X 1,5 2,0 90 LA 41 50 33 33 00 92 41 50 62 ID 22 01 M8x25 41 00 45 ID 01 56 M8x20
X 0,75 1,0 80
41 50 32 48 00 24 41 50 61 ID 13 81 M6x20 41 00 43 ID 07 44 M6x25
X 0,75 1,0 80
X 1,5 2,0 90 SA 41 50 33 33 00 92 41 50 62 ID 22 01 M8X25 41 00 45 ID 01 56 M8x20
X 1,5 2,0 90 LA
X 1,1 1,5 80 41 50 32 48 00 24 41 50 61 ID 13 81 M6x20 41 00 43 ID 07 44 M6x25
X 1,1 1,5 90 L
X 2,2 3,0 90 LA 41 50 33 33 00 92 41 50 62 ID 22 01 M8X25 41 00 45 ID 01 56 M8x20
X 2,2 3,0 90 LC
X 1,1 1,5 80 41 50 32 48 00 24 41 50 61 ID 13 81 M6x20 41 00 43 ID 07 44 M6x25
en X 1,1 1,5 90 L
X 2,2 3,0 90 LA 41 50 33 33 00 92 41 50 62 ID 22 01 M8x25 41 00 45 ID 01 56 M8x20
X 2,2 3,0 90 LC
X 1,5 2,0 90S
41 50 33 33 00 92 41 50 62 ID 22 01 M8X25 41 00 45 ID 01 56 M8x20
80/7 X 1,5 2,0 90 L
X 3,0 4,0 100 LA 41 50 34 33 00 92 41 50 63 ID 22 01 M8X25 41 00 47 ID 05 60 M8x25
X 1,5 2,0 90S
41 50 33 33 00 92 41 50 62 ID 22 01 M8X25 41 00 45 ID 01 56 M8x20
80 X 1,5 2,0 90 L
X 3,0 4,0 100 LA 41 50 34 33 00 92 41 50 63 ID 22 01 M8X25 41 00 47 ID 05 60 M8x25
X 2,2 3,0 90 L 41 50 33 33 00 92 41 50 62 ID 22 01 M8X25 41 00 45 ID 01 56 M8x20
100 X 2,2 3,0 90 L
X 4,0 5,5 100 LB 41 50 34 33 00 92 41 50 63 ID 22 01 M8x25 41 00 47 ID 05 60 M8X25
X 2,2 3,0 90 L 41 50 33 33 00 92 41 50 62 ID 22 01 M8x25 41 00 45 ID 01 56 M8x20
120 X 2,2 3,0 90 L
X 4,0 5,5 100 LB 41 50 34 33 00 92 41 50 63 ID 22 01 M8X25 41 00 47 ID 05 60 M8x25
X 3,0 4,0 100 L 41 50 34 33 00 92 41 50 63 ID 22 01 M8X25 41 00 47 ID 05 60 M8x25
X 5,5 7,5 132 SA 32 01 96 41 50 52 33 00 92 41 50 65 ID 13 70 M10X25 41 01 15 ID 20 49 M10x30 ID 01 60 M12X45
X 3,0 4,0 100 L 41 50 34 33 00 92 41 50 63 ID 22 01 M8X25 41 00 47 ID 05 60 M8x25
X 5,5 7,5 132 SA 32 01 96 41 50 52 33 00 92 41 50 65 ID 13 70 M10X25 41 01 15 ID 20 49 M10x30 ID 01 60 M12x45
190 X 4,0 5,5 100 LB 41 50 34 33 00 92 41 50 63 ID 22 01 M8x25 41 00 47 ID 05 60 M8x25
220 __, X 4,0 5,5 100 LB 41 50 34 33 00 92 41 50 63 ID 22 01 M8X25 41 00 47 ID 05 60 M8x25
1)
Byggestørrelse
Frame size
Baugröße
Dimension
Grandeza
Delliste
Parts list
Teilliste
Liste de pièces
Lista de piezas
Model Variantkode Løberantal

Mode! Variant code Number of impellers
Model! "j Variantencode _ O . Laufradanzahl Q
Modèle Code de variante Nombre de roues mobiles
Modeio Côdigo de variante Numéro de rodetes
Antal stk. pr. pumpe (A = Løberantal) Suppl. oplysninger Delnummer
Number per pump (A = Number of impellers) Suppl. information Part number
Anzahl pro Pumpe (A = Anzahl der Laufräder) Æ Zusâtzl. Informationen K Teilnummer ß
Nombre par pompe (A = Nombre de roues mobiles) Informations suppl. No. de réf. **
Numéro por bomba (A = Numéro de rodetes) Informaciones supl. No. de oed.
Benævnelse
Pos.
Description
Benennung
1 2 J
â
4 5
6
Dénomination
Descripciôn (2) (3) 60 Hz 50 Hz
Mellemflange Se tabel A
Adapter flange See table A
1 Zwischenflansch i Siehe Tabelle A
Bride intermédiaire Voir le tableau A
Brida intermedia Ver la tabla A
Topstykke
Pump head
2 Kopfstück i 1)
Tête de pompe
Cabezal de bomba
Mellemkammer uden leder
Intermediate chamber without guide vane
3 Zwischenkammer ohne Leitapparat 14 14 i 41 00 77
Chambre intermédiaire sans aube de guidage
Càmara intermedia sin elementos de guia
Mellemkammer komplet
3-7 3-7 A-2
Intermediate chamber complete
4 Zwischenkammer komplett 8-14 8-14 A-3 41 52 02
Chambre intermédiaire complète 16 16 A-4
Càmara intermedia compléta 19-22 A-5
Mellemkammer med leje 1-6 1-6 1
Intermediate chamber with bearing
7-12 7-12 2
4a Zwischenkammer mit Lager 41 52 03
Chambre intermédiaire avec palier 14-16 14-16 3
19-22 4
Càmara intermedia con coiinete
Mellemkammer nederste
Bottom intermediate chamber
5a Unterste Zwischenkammer 1-16 1-22 1 41 52 01
Chambre intermédiaire inférieure
Càmara intermedia inferior
Fodstykke
Base
6 Fußstück 1-16 1-22 1 41 50 30
Socle
Base
Skærm Se tabel A
Coupling guard See table A
7 Schutzschirm 2 Siehe Tabelle A
Ecran de protection Voir le tableau A
Rejilla protectora del acoplamiento Ver la tabla A
Kobling komplet Se tabel A
Coupling complete See table A
8 Kupplung komplett Siehe Tabelle A
Accouplement complet Voir le tableau A
AcoDlamiento complete Ver la tabla A
Unbrakoskrue Se tabel A
Allen screw See table A
9 Inbusschraube 4 Siehe Tabelle A
Vis de fixation Voir le tableau A
Tornillo Allen Ver la tabla A
Cylinderstift
Shaft pin
10 Zylinderstift 1-16 1-22 1 ø5x26 31 01 92
Goupille cylindrique
Pasador cillndrico
Koblingshalvpart Se tabel A
Coupling half See table A
10a Kupplungshälfte 2 Siehe Tabelle A
Demi-accouplement Voir le tableau A
Mitad de acoplamiento Ver la tabla A
Kobling komplet PJE
Coupling complete PJE EPDM A 1-16 1-22 2 1 1/4" ID 17 81
12a l/n»nliiiii*i L*nmnlnt1 D If?
Accouplement complet PJE Viton V 1-16 1-22 2 1 1/4" 41 99 03

AcoDlamiento compléta PJE
Rørprop
Pipe plug
18 Stopfen 1-16 1-22 1 R3/4 33 00 74
Bouchon de tuyau
Taoôn roscado
DK Delliste
GB
D
F
E
Parts list
Teilliste
Liste de pièces
Lista de piezas
CRN 4
i Model
Model
Modeli
Modèle
Modelo
1
Variantkode
Variant code
Variantencode
Code de variante
Côdigo de variante
0
Løberantal
Number of impellers
Laufradanzahl
Nombre de roues mobiles
Numéro de rodetes
3

Anzahl pro Pumpe (A = Anzahl der Laufräder) Æ Zusätzl. Informationen 5 Teilnummer R
w
Nombre par pompe (A = Nombre de roues mobiles) Informations suppl. No. de réf.
Numéro por bomba (A = Numéro de rodetes) Informaciones supl. No. de ped.
Benævnelse t
Pos.
Description
Benennung
1 2 \ 4 5 6
Dénomination
Descripciôn (1) (2) (3) 60 Hz
1
50 Hz
1 4 M12x151 mm = L 41 42 02
2 2 4 M12x151 mm = L 41 42 02
3 3 4 M12 x 178 mm = L 41 42 03
4 4 4 M12 x 205 mm = L 41 42 04
5 5 4 M12 x 232 mm = L 41 42 05
Støttebolt 4
6 6 M12 x 259 mm = L 41 42 06
îàtaybolt 4
7 7 M12x313mm = L 41 42 08
26 £stehbolzen
8 8 4 M12x313mm = L 41 42 08
<àoujon de fixation 10 4
10 M12 x 367 mm = L 41 42 10
E:spârrago de fijaciôn 4
12 12 M12 x 421 mm = L 41 42 12
14 14 4 M12x529mm = L . 41 42 16
y 16 16 4 M12 x 529 mm = L 41 42 16
19 4 M12x610mm = L 41 42 19
22 4 M12x691 mm = L 41 42 22
Sætskrue Se tabel A
Set screw See table A
28 Sechskantschraube 4 Siehe Tabelle A
Vis de blocage Voir le tableau A
Tornillo de fijaciôn Ver la tabla A
Sætskrue Se tabel A
Setscrew Sée table A
28a Sechskantschraube 4 Siehe Tabelle A
Vis de blocage Voir le tableau A
Tornillo de fijaciôn Ver la tabla A
Møtrik
Nut
36 Mutter 1-16 1-22 4 M12 ID 01 22
Ecrou
Tuerca
Møtrik
Nut
2) Mutter 14-16 4 M12 ID 01 22
36a Ecrou
Tuerca
Pakning
Gasket
37 Dichtung 1-16 1-22 2 0 138/0 130x0,5 41 00 34
Joint
Empaquetadura
Pakning
Gasket A 1-16 1-22 2 1 1/4" ID 23 64
39 Dichtung
Joint V 1-16 1-22 2 1 1/4" ID 23 65
Empaquetadura
Tætningsring
Neck ring
45 Spaltring 1-16 1-22 A 0 50,6/0 40,3 x 0,7 41 00 38
Bague d'étanchéité
Anillo de junta
Lejering 1-6 1-6 1
Bearing ring 7-12 7-12 2
47a Lagerring 0 15,95/0 10,9x11 41 01 21
14-16 14-16 3
Bague de palier 19-22 4
Anillo de coiinete
Løber komplet
Impeller complete B 1-16 1-22 3)
49 Laufrad komplett
Roue mobile complète C 1-16 1-22 A 4152 53
Rodete completo
Ledeapparat øverste
Top guide vane 2-6 2-6 1
50a Oberster Leitapparat 8-12 8-12 1 0 128/0 103x21 41 52 04
Aube de guidage supérieure 16 16-22 1
Elementes de auia superiores
Overplade for øverste kammer
Plate for top chamber 1 1 1
50b Platte für oberste Kammer 7 7 1 0 128/0 103 x 15,4 41 00 49
Plaque pour chambre supérieure 14 14 1
Plaça para câmara superior
DK Deiliste
GB Parts list
D Teiiliste
F Liste de pièces
E Lista de piezas

Model Variant code Number of impellers
Modell "1 Variantencode O Laufradanzahl Q
Modele Code de variante Nombre de roues mobiles
Modelo Côdiqo de variante Numéro de rodetes
Anzahl pro Pumpe (A = Anzahl der Laufräder) Æ Zusätzl. Informationen R Teilnummer Rv
Numero por bomba (A = Numéro de rodetes) Informaciones supl. No. de ped.
Benævnelse
Pos.
Description
Benennung
1 2 â
4 5 6
DënomTnatidn
Descripciôn (1) (2) (3) 60 Hz 50 Hz
1 1 i 0 12 x 139 mm = L 41 60 02
2 2 i 0 12 x 139 mm = L 41 60 02
3 3 i 0 12 x 166 mm = L 41 60 03
4 4 i 0 12 x 193 mm = L 41 60 04
5 5 i 0 12 x 220 mm = L 41 60 05
Aksel med spline 6 6 i 0 12 x 247 mm = L 41 60 06
Spline shaft L 7 7 i 0 12 x 301 mm = L 41 60 08
51 Vielnutwelle 8 8 i 0 12x301 mm = L 41 60 08
Arbre cannelé 10 10 i 0 12 x 355 mm = L 41 60 10
Eje ranurado 12 12 i 0 12 x 409 mm = L 41 60 12
14 14 i 0 12x517 mm = L 41 60 16
| 16 16 i 0 12x517 mm = L 41 60 16
19 i 0 12 x 598 mm = L 41 60 19
22 i 0 12 x 679 mm = L 41 60 22
1 1 0 138x40 mm = L 4146 02
2 2 0 138 x 40 mm = L 41 46 02
3 3 0 138 x 67 mm = L 41 46 03
4 4 0 138 x 94 mm = L 41 46 04
r—4 »1. 5 5 0 138 x 121 mm = L 41 46 05
Svøb 6 6 0 138 x 148 mm - L 41 46 06
C) uter sleeve 7 7 i 0 138 x 202 mm = L 41 46 08
55 N/lantel L 8 8 i 0 138 x 202 mm = L 41 46 08
Chemise 10 10 i 0 138 x 256 mm = L 41 46 10
Euje exterior 12 12 i 0 138x310 mm = L 41 46 12
—i 14 14 i 0 138-x 418 mm - L 414616
16 16 i . 0 138x418 mm = L 41 46 16
19 i 0 138 x 499 mm = L 41 46 19
22 i 0 138 x 580 mm = L 41 46 22
Fodplade - Base plate
56 Grundplatte 1-16 1-22 i 41 50 38
Plaque de fond - Plaça de base
Bølgefjeder
Corrugated spring
60 Gewellte Feder 1-16 1-22 i 0 128 x 3,2 41 00 48
Ressort ondulé
Muelle ondulado
Afstandsstykke for akseltætning
Spacer for shaft seal B 1-16 1-22 i 41 00 13
61 Zwischenstück für Wellenabdichtung
Pièce intercalaire pour garniture mécanique C 1-16 1-22 i 41 01 30
Espaciador para cierre mecânico
Stopring - Stop ring
62 Stopring 1-16 1-22 i 0 12,8/0 10,8 x 1 41 00 35
Bague d'arrêt - Anillo retenedor
3-6 3-6 A-2
Afstandsbøsning 7-12 7-12 A-3
B 0 15/0 13 x 22,35 41 00 65
Spacing pipe 14-16 14-16 A-4
Distanzhülse 19-22 A-5
64
Douille entretoise 3-6 3-6 A-2
Casquillo separador C
7-12 7-12 A-3 0 15/0 13x26 41 01 43
14-16 14-16 A-4
19-22 A-5
1 1 1
2-6 2-6 2
Afstandsbøsning B 7-12 7-12 3 015/0 13x11,35 - 41 00 63
Spacing pipe 14-16 14-16 4
64a Distanzhülse 19-22 5
Douille entretoise 2-6 2-6 1
Casquillo separador 7-12 7-12 2
C 0 15/0 13 x 15,0 41 01 42
14-16 14-16 3
19-22 4
Afstandsbøsning
Spacing pipe
64c Distanzhülse C 1-16 1-22 1 0 15/0 13 x 17,5 40 00 35
Douille entretoise
Casquiilo separador
Holder til tætningsring
Retainer for neck ring
65 Halter für Spaltring 1-16 1-22 A 41 00 89
Support pour bague d'étanchéité
Soporte para anillo de junta
DK Delliste
GB
D
F
E
Parts list
Teilliste
Liste de pièces
Lista de piezas
CRN 4
Modell "| Variantencode 0 Laufradanzahl Q
Modelo Côdigo de variante Numéro de rodetes
Anzahl pro Pumpe (A = Anzahl der Laufräder) ^ Zusâtzl. Informationen 5 Teilnummer . fi
Nombre par pompe (A = Nombre de roues mobiles) Informations suppl. No. de réf. **
Numéro por bomba (A = Numéro de rodetes). Informaciones supl. No. de ped.
Benævnelse
r
Pos.
Description
Benennung
1 2 \ 4 5 6
Dénomination
Spændeskive - Washer
66 1-16 1-22 i 0 15,5/0 8,5 x 1,0 41 00 26
Spannscheibe
66a 1-16 1-22 4 0 24/0 13 ID 31 03
Rondelle - Arandela
Låsemøtrik - Lock nut
67 Gegenmutter 1-16 1-22 1 YRM8 ID 20 61
Contre-écrou - Contratuerca
Afstandsbøsning - Spacing pipe 1 1 1 0 15/0 12,7 x 16 41 00 70
69 Distanzhülse 7 7 1
0 15/0 12,7 x 27 41 00 62
Douille entretoise - Casquillo separador 14 14 2
Skiltesæt - Nameplate kit - Schildersatz
76 Jeu de plaque d'identification 1-16 1-22 1 30 97 00
Juego de plaça de identificaciôn
Inddækning - Pump head cover
77 Kopfstückeinlage 1-16 1-22 1 1)
Cuvette separative - Copa divisoria
Gummibøsning
Rubber bush
78 Gummibuchse 1-16 1-22 1 1)
Douille en caoutchouc
Casquillo de caucho
O-ring - O-ring
98 O-Ring ... EPDM 1-16 1-22 1 0 25 x 2,0 1)
Bague-0 - Anillo tôrico
Gevindstuds - Threaded socket
Gewindestutzen 1-16 1-22 2 R 1 1/4" 41 00 79
Raccord fileté - Racor fileteado
99
Svejsestuds - Welding socket
Schweißstutzen 1-16 1-22 2 DN32 41 00 96
Raccord à souder - Racor para soldar
inkl. gevindstuds
with threaded socket A 41 99 11
1-16 1-22 R 1 1/4"
Y
V 41 99 05
C
99a Y
2Ss
t
f
«S
avec raccord à souder
A
V
1-16 1-22 DN32
41 99 12
41 99 04
con racor para soldar
C)-nng-O-ring E p D M
A 1-16 1-22 1 0 16,3 x 2,4 ID 12 88
100 C
V 1-16 1-22 1 0 16,3 x 2,4 ID 22 31
EJaque-0 - Anillo tôrico
C)-ring-O-ring EprjM
A 1-16 1-22 1 0 17,86 x 2,62 4)
102 C
V 1-16 1-22 1 0 17,86 x 2,62 4)
E5aque-0 - Anillo tôrico
Tætningsring øverste Hårdmetal
Upper seal ring Tungsten carbide
5) Oberer Dichtungsring 1-16 1-22 1 Hartmetall 4)
103 Carbure de tungstène
Bague d'étanchéité supérieure
Anillo de junta superior Carburo de tungsteno
Tætningsring nederste Hårdmeta!
Lower seal ring Tungsten carbide
5) Unterer Dichtungsring 1-16 1-22 1 Hartmetall 4)
104 Bague d'étanchéité inférieure Carbure de tungstène
Anillo de junta inferior Carburo de tunqsteno
C)-ring- O-ring E p m
A 1-16 1-22 1 0 11,5x4,3 4)
107 C
vlton V 1-16 1-22 1 0 11,5x4,3 4)
E3aque-0 - Anillo tôrico
Fjeder - Spring
108 Feder 1-16 1-22 1 4)
Ressort - Muelle
Medbringer øverste
Upper seal driver
111 Oberer Mitnehmer 1-16 1-22 1 4)
Toc d'entraînement supérieur
Pieza de arrastre suDerior
Medbringer nederste - Lower seal driver
112 Unterer Mitnehmer 1-16 1-22 1 4)
Toc d'entraînement inf. - Pieza de arraste inf.
DK Delliste
GB Parts list
D Teüliste
F Liste de pièces
E Lista de piezas

Modeli • "f Variantencode O Laufradanzahl Q
Modelo Côdiqo de variante Numéro de rodetes
Anzahl pro Pumpe (A = Anzahl der Laufräder) Æ Zusâtzl. Informationen K Teilnummer R
Numéro por bomba (A = Numéro de rodetes) Informaciones supl. No. de ped.
Benævnelse
Pos. ~ - - ...... —_—

Description
., . —. _^^_ —_
—. _ _ —_. ... .
1
....
2 i
* 4 5 6
Benennung
Dénomination (2) (3) 60 Hz 50 Hz
Flange komplet, Flange complete
Descripciôn
6) Flansch komplett A 1-16 1-22 41 99 13
200 Bride complète, Brida compléta V 1-16 1-22 41 99 14
Spændering, damping ring
201 Spannring 1-16 1-22 i 41 01 32
Bague de serrage, Anillo de apriete
Pakfladering - Gasket ring
202 Dichtungsring 1-16 1-22 i 41 01 33
Baaue de joint - Anillo de empaauetadura
Låsering - Lock ring
203 Verschlußring 1-16 1-22 i 41 01 40
Baque de blocaqe - Anillo de bloqueo
C)-ring - O-ring - O-Ring EPDM A 1-16 1-22 i 0 42 x 4,0 ID 32 25
Eaque-0 - Anillo tôrico Viton V 1-16 1-22 i 0 42 x 4,0 ID 32 26
Fundament for pos. - Base for pos.
6) Fundament für Pos. 56 1-16 1-22 i 41 99 15
205 Socle pour pos. - Base para DOS.
Indgår i topstykke komplet, pos. 2a. Se tabel A. Anvendes til pos. 28a.
Is included in pump head complete, pos. 2a. See table A. Is used for pos. 28a.
1) Ist im Kopfstück komplett, Pos. 2a, enthalten. Siehe Tabelle A. 2) Wird für Pos. 28a verwendet.
Fait partie de la tête de pompe complète, pos. 2a. Voir le tableau A. Est utilisé pour pos. 28a.
Forma parte del cabezal de bomba completo, pos. 2a. Ver la tabla A. Se utiliza para pos. 28a.
3) .
Pumper mærket model B
Løber med nav til model B er udgået. I stedet anvendes løber uden nav til model C. Ændringen vedrørende løberskift fra model B til model C vil
medføre, at følgende dele samtidig skiftes til model C: Pos. 50a, 61, 64, 64a og 64c (se Dellisten). NB: Udboringen i øverste ledeapparat, pos. 50a,
skal til model C være ø 19,6 mm. Delnummer ændres ikke p.g.a. pumpens modelændring.
Pumps marked model B
The impeller with hub for model B has been left out of production. The impeller without hub for model C is used instead. When an impeller for
model C is fitted instead of the impeller for model B, the following parts for model C must be fitted too: Pos. 50a, 61,64,64a and 64c (see Parts List).
Note: The bore in the top guide vane, pos. 50a, for model C must be ø 19.6 mm. The part number remains unchanged.
Pumpen, die mit Modell B markiert sind
Laufrad mit Nabe für Modell B ist aus der Produktion genommen worden. Laufrad ohne Nabe für Modell C wird statt dessen verwendet. Wird ein
Laufrad für Modell C statt eines Laufrades für Modell B montiert, müssen die folgenden Teile für Modell C auch verwendet werden: Pos. 50a, 61,
64, 64a und 64c (siehe Teilliste). Achtung: Die Bohrung im obersten Leitapparat, Pos. 50a, für Modell C soll ø 19,6 mm betragen. Die Teilnummer
verbleibt unverändert.
Pompes marquées modèle B
La roue mobile avec moyeu pour modèle B a été supprimée de la production. A sa place la roue mobile sans moyeu pour modèle C est utilisée.
Si une roue mobile pour modèle C est utilisée au lieu de la roue mobile pour modèle B, les pièces suivantes pour modèle C doivent être utilisées:
Pos. 50a, 61, 64, 64a et 64c (voir Liste de Pièces). Attention: Le passage de l'aube de guidage supérieure, pos. 50a, pour modèle C doit être de ø
19,6 mm. Le numéro de référence reste inchangé.
Bombas marcadas modelo B
El rodete con cübo para modelo B ha sido suprimido de la producciôn. En su lugar se utiliza el rodete sin cubo para modelo C. Si se utiliza un
rodete para modelo C en lugar del rodete para modelo B, las piezas siguientes para modelo C deben utilizarse también: Pos. 50a, 61, 64, 64a y
64c (ver Lista de piezas). Nota: El agujero de los elementos de guia superiores, pos. 50a, para modelo C debe ser de ø 19,6 mm. El numéro de
pedido se queda inalterado.
4)
Se servicesæt side 11.
See service kits on page 11.
Siehe Servicesätze auf Seite 11.
Voir jeux de service à la page 11.
Ver juegos de servicio de la pagina 11.
5)
Tætningsfladerne smøres med silikoneolie, delnummer VO 17 00 38.
Lubricate the seal faces with silicone oil, part number VO 17 00 38.
Dichtungsflächen mit Silikonöl, Teilnummer VO 17 00 38, bestreichen.
Lubrifier les faces d'étanchéité avec huile de silicone, no. de réf. VO 17 00 38.
Lubricar las superficies de contacta con aceite de siiicona, no. de ped. VO 17 00 38.
6)
Ved montering af flanger, pos. 200, skal fundament, pos. 205, anvendes.
Use the base, pos. 205, when the flanges, pos. 200, are fitted.
Bei der Montage der Flansche, Pos. 200, soll das Fundament, Pos. 205, verwendet werden.
Au montage des brides, pos. 200, il faut utiliser le socle, pos. 205.
Al montar las bridas, pos. 200, utilizar la base, pos. 205.
10
DK Servicesæt
CRN 4
GB Service kits
D Servicesätze
F Jeux de service
E Juegos de servicio
Servicesæt — Service kits

Servicesätze
Jeux de service — Juegos de servicio
Benævnelse Løberantal Delnummer
Description Number of impellers Part number
Benennung Anzahl der Laufräder Teilnummer
Denomination Nombre de roues mobiles No. de réf.
Descripciôn Numero de rodetes No. de oed.
Akseltætning komplet for model B-C
Shaft seal complete for models B-C
Wellenabdichtung komplett für Modell B-C 1-22 98 51 67
Garniture mécanique complète pour les modèles B-C
Cierre mecânico completo para los modelos B-C
Akseltætning komplet og pakningssæt for model B-C
Shaft seal complete and gasket kit for models B-C
Wellenabdichtung komplett und Dichtungssatz für Modell B-C 1-22 98 52 05
Garniture mécanique complète et jeu de joints pour les modèles B-C
Cierre mecânico completo y juego de empaquetaduras para los modelos B-C
Løber og afstandsbøsning for model B-C
Impeller and spacing pipe for models B-C
Laufrad und Distanzhülse für Modell B-C 1-22 41 52 32
Roue mobile et douille entretoise pour les modèles B-C
Rodete y casquillo separador para los modelos B-C
Servicesæt for model B
1-6 41 52 23
Service kits for model B
Servicesätze für Modell B 7-12 41 52 24
Jeux de service pour le modèle B
14-22 4152 25
Jueqos de servicio para el modelo B
Servicesæt for model C
1-6 41 52 29
Service kits for model C
Servicesätze für Modell C 7-12 41 52 30
Jeux de service pour le modèle C
14-22 41 52 31
Juegos de servicio para el modelo C
Servicesæt består af: - Servicekits consist of:

Servicesätze bestehen aus:
Jeux de service consistent en: — Jueqos de servicio consister! en:
Delnummer/stk.
1) Part number/pieces
Teilnummer/Stück
Pos. No. de réf./pièces
No. de ped./piezas
98 51 67 98 52 05 41 52 32 41 52 23 41 52 24 41 52 25 41 52 29 41 52 30 41 52 31
4a 41 52 03 1 2 4 1 2 4
37 41 00 34 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
45 41 00 38 5 10 18 5 10 18
47a 41 01 21 1 2 4 1 2 4
49 41 52 53 2
60 41 00 48 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
61 41 01 30 1 1 1
64 41 01 43 2 4 9 17
64a 41 01 42 1 2 4
64c 40 00 35 1 1 1
65 41 00 89 5 10 18 5 • 10 18
66 41 00.26 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
67 ID 20 61 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
41 00 70 1 1
69
41 00 62 1 1 1 1
ID 12 88 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
100
2) ID 22 31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
102
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
103 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
104 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
107
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
108 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1)
Tekst til pos. nr.: Se dellisten. - Texts for pos. Nos.: See parts list. - Texte für Pos. Nr.: Siehe Teilliste. - Textes pour les nos. de pos.: Voir liste
de pièces. - Textos para los nos. de pos.: Ver lista de piezas.
2)
Anvendes til pumper med variantkode A-V-A. — Is used for pumps with the variant code A-V-A. — Wird für Pumpen mit Variantencode A-V-A
verwendet. - Est utilisé pour les pompes avec le code de variante A-V-A. - Se utiliza para las bombas con el côdigo de variante A-V-A.
Tegning til servicesæt, se side 18 - Drawing lor service kits, see page 18 - Zeichnung für Servicesätze, siehe Seite 18 - Dessin pour jeux de
service, voir la page 18 - Dibujo para juegos de servicio, ver la pagina 18.
11
Serviceværktøj
Service tools
Servicewerkzeuge
Outils de service
Herramientas de servicio
Specialværktøj
Special tools
SpezialWerkzeuge
Outils spéciaux
Herramientas especiales
Benævnelse Antal Suppl. oplysninger Delnummer

Description Number Suppl. information Part number
Pos. Benennung Anzahl Zusätzl. Informationen Teilnummer
Dénomination Nombre Informations suppl. No. de réf.
Description Numero Informaciones supl. No. de ped.
Modholderklods for demontering
Shaft holder for dismantling - - -
A Wellenhalter für Demontage 1 SV 02 37
Porte-arbre pour démontage
Suietador del eie para desmontaie
Dom for demontering af aksel
Punch for dismantling of shaft
B Dom für Demontage der Welle 1 SV 02 38
Poinçon pour démontage de l'arbre
Punzôn para desmontaie del eie
Aftrækker for tætningsring
Pullerfor neck ring
C Auszieher für Spaltring 1 SV 02 39
Arrache-bague d'étanchéité
Extractor para anillo de iunta
Holder for aksel til montering
Shaft holder for assembly
D Wellenhalter für Montage 1 SV00 40
Porte-arbre pour montage
Sujetador del eie para montaie
Standardværktøj
Standard tools
Standardwerkzeuge
Outils standard
Herramientas standard
Ringgaffelnøgle for pos. 28

1 M6-NV10mm SV 00 83
1 M8-NV13mm SV 00 55
E ninnnaholcnhiiiri-ol ft'ir Pnr „ P"P/._
1 M10-NV17mm SV 00 55
Llave combinada para pos. 1 M12-NV19mm SV 00 54
T-nøgle for pos.
Tee key for pos. 1 M6 - NV 5 mm SV 01 24
F T-Schlüssel für Pos. 9 1 M8 - NV 6 mm SV 00 50
Clef à T pour pos. 1 M10-NV8mm SV 00 51
Llave a T para pos.
Værktøj for tilspændingsmomenter

Tools for torques
Werkzeuge für Anzugsmomente
Outils pour couples de serrage
Herramientas para pares de apriete
Momentnøgle D a x Db D a x Db
Torque wrench y—-d^ 1 4-20 Nm 9x12 SV 02 92
G Drehmomentschlüssel < / * ^ ^ ^
Clef dynamométrique ^jp^-^ 1 20-100 Nm 9x12 SV 02 69
Llave dinamorhétrica
Stjernenøgle for pos. Da x Db D a x Db
Rinp spanner forpos. j 28 1 M6 x NV 10 mm 9 x 12 SV 03 10
H Ringschlüssel für Pos. & 28-67 1 M8 x NV 13 mm 9 x 12 SV 02 94
Clef polygonale pour pos. er 28 1 M10xNV17mm 9 x 1 2 SV 02 70
Llave estrella acodada para pos. 28a-36-36a 1 M12xNV19mm 9 x 1 2 SV 02 71
Unbrakotopnøgle for pos. De x Dd D c x Dd
Socket spanner with inside hexagon for pos. ' 1 M6 x NV 5 mm %" x %" SV 02 96
1 Werkzeug mit Innensechskant für Pos. Fl 9-J 1 M8xNV6mm % " x % " SV 02 97
Clef à tire-fonds avec hexagone intérieur pour pos W 1 M10 x NV 8 mm 1/2" x Va" SV 02 98
Llave de tope con hexâqono interior para pos. "
Knarre for pos. Da x D b D a x D b x D c x Dd
Ratchet spanner for pos. dSP
J Knarre für Pos. ^ß 1 1 9 x 12 x y 2 " x y 2 " SV 02 95
Clef à cliquet pour pos. \
Llave de carraca para pos. De x Dd
12
DK Tegning til serviceværktøj Tilspændingsmomenter
GB
D
F
E
Drawing for service tools
Zeichnung für Servicewerkzeuge
Dessin pour outils de service
Dibujo para herramientas de servicio
Torques
Anzugsmomente
Couples de serrage
Pares de apriete
CRN 4
Tilspændingsmomenter
Torques
Anzugsmomente
Couples de serrage
Pares de apriete
Benævnelse Suppl. oplysninger Delnummer Moment
Description Suppl. information Part number Torque
Pos. Benennung Zusätzl. Informationen Teilnummer Anzugsmoment.
Dénomination Informations suppl. No. de réf. Couple de serrage
Descripciôn Informaciones supl. No. de ped. Par de apriete
Unbrakoskrue
Allen screw M6X20 ID 13 81 13 Nm (1,3 kpm)
1) Inbusschraube M8x25 ID 22 01 31 Nm (3,1 kpm)
9 Vis de fixation M10 x 25 ID 13 70 62 Nm (6,2 kpm)
Tomillo Allen
Sætskrue M6x20 ID 05 59
Set screw 5Nm(0,5 kpm)
1) Sechskantschraube M6x25 ID 07 44
28 Vis de blocage M8x20 ID 01 56 12 Nm (1,2 kpm)
Tornillo de fijaciôn M8x25 ID 05 60
Sætskrue
Set screw
1) Sechskantschraube M12x40 ID 06 20 30 Nm (3,0 kpm)
28a Vis de biocage
Tornillo de fiiaciôn
Møtrik
1) Nut M12 ID 01 22 40 Nm (4,0 kpm)
36 Mutter
1) Ecrou M12 ID 01 22 30 Nm (3,0 kpm)
36a Tuerca
Møtrik
Nut
2) Mutter M8 ID 20 61 12Nm(1,2kpm)
67 Ecrou
Tuerca
1)
Smøres med gevindpasta THREAD-EZE, delnummer SV 99 97 (0,5 I).
Lubricate with thread paste THREAD-EZE, part number SV 99 97 (0.5 I).
Bestreichen mit Gewindepaste THREAD-EZE, Teilnummer SV 99 97 (0,5 I).
Lubrifier avec pâte pour filets THREAD-EZE, no. de réf. SV 99 97 (0,5 I).
Lubricar con pasta para filetés THREAD-EZE, no. de ped. SV 99 97 (0,5 I).
2)
Smøres med Olium-Zea (majsolie), delnummer SV 99 99 (11).
Lubricate with Olium-Zea (maize oil), part number SV 99 99 (1 I).
Bestreichen mit Olium-Zea (Maisöl), Teilnummer SV 99 99 (1 I).
Lubrifier avec Olium-Zea (huile de maïs), no. de réf. SV 99 99 (11).
Lubricar con Olium-Zea (aceite de malz), nö. de ped.'SV 99 99 (11). •
13
DK Monteringsrækkefolge for mellemkamre og løbere
GB Order of assembly for intermediate chambers and impellers
D Montagereihenfolge für Zwischenkammern und Laufräder
F Ordre de montage pour les chambres intermédiaires et les roues mobiles
E Orden de montaje para las câmaras intermedias y los rodetes
Tabellen illustrerer pumpens opbygning ved anvendelse af symboler.

The assembly of the pump is illustrated in the table by symbols.
Die Montage der Pumpe ist in der Tabelle durch Symbole illustriert.
Le montage de la pompe est illustré dans le tableau par des symboles.
El montaje de la bomba esta ilustrado en la tabla por simbolos.
Eksempel: Til CRN 4-40 anvendes følgende symboler: Pos. 49-4-64 Se tegning side 15.
Example: For CRN 4-40, the following symbols are used: See drawing on page 15.
Beispiel: Für CRN 4-40 werden die folgenden Symbole verwendet: 1x Pos. 49 - 4a - 64a - 47a Siehe Zeichnung auf Seite 15.
Exemple: Pour la CRN 4-40, les symboles suivants sont utilisés: Voir le dessin à la page 15.
Ejemplo: para la CRN 4-40, se utilizan los simbolos siguientes: 1x Pos. 49 - 64c Ver el dlbujo de la pagina 15.
CRN 4 -
20/1 20 30 40 50 60 8O/7 8 0 100

rfîi
Monteringsrækkefølge
Order of assembly
Montagereihenfolge
Ordre de montage
Orden de montaje
Mellemkammer med leje, pos. 4a, er fra og med pumpe nr. 8314 placeret som vist i tabellen. I pumper leveret før uge 14,1983, kan lejeplaceringen
ændres i henhold til tabellen.
From pump No. 8314, the intermediate chamber with bearing, pos. 4a, is positioned as shown in the table. The position of the bearings in pumps
delivered before week 14,1983, can be changed according to the table.
Ab Pumpe Nr. 8314 ist die Zwischenkammer mit Lager, Pos. 4a, wie in der Tabelle gezeigt angebracht. Die Stellung der Lager in Pumpen, die vor
Woche 14,1983, geliefert worden sind, kann nach der Tabelle geändert werden.
De la pompe no. 8314, la chambre intermédiaire avec palier, pos. 4a, est placée comme le montre le tableau. La position des paliers dans les
pompes livrées avant la semaine 14,1983, peut être changée selon le tableau.
Desde la bomba no. 8314 la cåmara intermedia con cojinete, pos. 4a, esta colocada como muestra la tabla. La posiciôn de los cojinetes en
bombas suministràdas antes de la semana 14 de 1983 puede ser aiterada segun la tabla.
Delnumre og benævnelser, se dellisten. - For part numbers and descriptions, see parts list, - Für Teilnummern und Benennungen, siehe Teilliste.
- Pour les numéros de référence et les dénominations, voir la liste de pièces. - Para los numéros de pedido y las desoripciones, ver la lista de
piezas.
14
DK Monteringsrækkefølge for mellemkamre og løbere
GB
D
F
E
Montagereihenfolge für Zwischenkammern und Laufräder
Ordre de montage pour les chambres intermédiaires et les roues mobiles
Orden de montaje para las cämaras intermedias y los rodetes
CRN 4
-28a
15
DK Snittegning
GB Sectional drawing
D Schnittzeichnung
F Dessin coupe
E Piano seccionado
j
CRN 4-160/14
50 b
16
oo
V\T\
DK Tegning til delliste, model C, og servicesæt
GB Drawing for parts list, model C, and service kits
D Zeichnung für Teilliste, Modell C, und Servicesätze
F Dessin pour liste de pièces, modèle C, et jeux de service
E Dibujo para lista de piezas, modelo C, y juegos de servicio
-28a
205
18
Målskitser
Dimensional sketches
Maßskizzen
Croquis d'encombrement
Croquises de dimensiones
CRN 4
0 128-
•r-042-i \-
—fr 0 53
—I : h—©19,6
— © 103
-0 111
•0 103 45-
r I
©40,3-
"1 -—©50,6-
27
4a
©103-
5a
•ø 95 - 3
49- 15
~1 -o 103-
I—©40
-Dc265-
- © 230-
I
- © 130 -
-De 165-
M1
N1
2a-
Måltabel
Table of dimensions
Maßtabelle
Tableau de dimensions
Tabla de medidas
Delnummer Dimension
Part number Dimension 10a-
Pos. Teilnummer Dimension
No. de réf. Dimension
No. de ped. Dimension
N1-M1
41 50 31 0 70 - 0 85
2a 41 50 32 0 80-0 100
41 50 33 0 95-0 115
41 50 34 0 110-0 130
41 50 52 0130 - 0165
R1 - S x T
41 00 41 0 14-0 12x51
10a
4100 43 0 19-012x51
41 00 45 0 24 - 0 12 x 68
41 00 47 0 28-012x68
41 01 15 0 38-012x90
Ret til ændringer forbeholdes.
Subject to alterations.
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten.
Nous nous réservons tout droit de modifications.
Todos los datos técnicos estân sujetos a modificaciones.
GRUNDFOS International a/s • DK-8850 BJERRINGBRO

DENMARK • PHONE + 456681400 • TELEX 60731 gfos dk GRUNDFO
CR8
Flertrins in-line pumpe
Multistage in-line pump
Mehrstufige Inlinc-Pumpe 50/60 Hz 1/3'
Pompe multicellulaire 'in line'
Bomba multicelular en linea
Delliste — Demontering og montering

Parts list — Dismantling and assembly
Teilliste — Demontage und Montage
Liste de pièces — Démontage et montage
Lista de piezas — Desmontaje y montaje
L.
V7 00 04 12 10 91
Repl. V7 00 04 12 10 89 12 GRUNDFOS'
Indholdsfortegnelse
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table des matières
Tabla de materias
#
Indholdsfortegnelse Side
Table of contents Page
Inhaltsverzeichnis . Seite
Table des matières Page
Tabla de materias Pagina
Typenøgle Model / Variant

Pump key Model / Variant
Typenschlüssel Modell / Variante 3
Identification Modèle / Variante
Clave de tipos Modeïo/Variante . _ __
Pumpe uden motor
Pump without motor
Pumpe ohne Motor 4
Pompe sans moteur
Bomba sin motor
Delliste e
O
Parts list
Teilliste l .
Liste de pièces Q
if
Lista de piezas
Tilspaendingsmomenter
Torques
Anzugsmomente 10
Couples de serrage
Pares de apriete
Servicesæt
Service kits
Servicesätze 11
Kits de maintenance
Kits de mantenimiento
Serviceværktøj Tegning til serviceværktøj
Service tools Drawing for service tools
Servicewerkzeuge Zeichnung für Servicewerkzeuge 12-13
Outils de dépannage Dessin pour outils de dépannage
Herramientas de montaje Dibujo para herramientas de montaje
Monteringsrækkefølge for mellemkamre og løbere
Montagereihenfolge für Zwischenkammern und Laufräder 14-15
Orden de montaje para las câmaras intermedias y los impulsores
Målskitser Snittegning
Dimensional sketches Sectional drawing
Maßskizzen Schnittzeichnung 16-17
Croquis d'encombrement Dessin en coupe
Croquises de dimensiones Piano seccionado
Tegning til delliste / Servicesæt
Drawing for parts list / Service kits
Zeichnung für Teilliste / Servicesätze 18
Dessin pour liste de pièces / Kits de maintenance
Dibujo para lista de piezas / Kits de mantenimiento
Tegning til demontering og montering
Drawing for dismantling and assembly
Zeichnung für Demontage und Montage 19
Dessin pour démontage et montage
Dibujo para desmontaje y montaje
Demontering og montering on
Dismantling and assembly
Demontage und Montage i
Démontage et montage 25
Desmontaje y montaje
DK Typenøgle
GB Pump key
D
F
E
Typenschlüssel
Identification
Clave de tipos
CR8
TYPENØGLE Variantkode
PUMP KEY Variant code
TYPENSCHLÜSSEL Variantencode
IDENTIFICATION Code de variante
CLAVE DE TIPOS Côdigo de variante
(1) (2) (3)
CR 8 - 2 0 / 1 X A - A - A
Typerække
Pump range
Baureihe .
Série
Serie
Nominel ydelse i m3/h
Nominal flow rate in m3/h
Nennförderstrom in m3/h
Débit nominal en m3/h
Caudal nominal en m3/h
Trinantal ( = løberarital) x 10
Number of stages ( = number of impellers) x 10
Anzahl der Stufen ( = Anzahl der Laufräder) x 10
Nombre d'étages ( = nombre de roues mobiles) x 10
Numero de etapas (= numéro de impulsores) x 10
Antal løbere - anvendes kun, hvis der er færre løbere end kamre
Number of impellers - is only used if the pump has fewer impellers than chambers
Anzahl der Laufräder - wird nur angewendet, wenn die Pumpe weniger Laufräder als
Kammern hat
Nombre de roues mobiles - est seulement utilisé si la pompe a moins de roues mobiles que
chambres
Numéro de impulsores - se utiliza solamente si la bomba tiene menos impulsores que
câmaras
Kode for specialprodukt
Code for special product
Code für Spezialprodukt
Code pour produit spécial
Côdigo para producto especial
Kode for fysiske dimensioner
Code for physical dimensions
Code für physische Abmessungen
Code pour dimensions physiques
Côdigo para dimènsiones fisicas
Kode for materialer
Code for materials
Code für Werkstoffe
Code pour matériaux
Côdigo para materiales
Kode for akseltætning
Code for mechanical shaft seal
Code für Wellenabdichtung
Code pour garniture mécanique
Côdigo para cierre mecânico
Model/Variant - Model/Variant
Modell/Variante
Modèle/Variante - Modelo/Variante
Dellisten er gældende for pumper mærket model A med variantkoder:

This parts list applies to pumps marked model A with the variant codes: A-A-A / F-A-A / N-A-A
Diese Teilliste gilt für Pumpen markiert Modell A mit den Variantencodes:
Cette liste de pièces concerne les pompes marquées modèle A avec les codes de variante: A-V-A / F-V-A / N-V-A
Esta lista de piezas se apllca a las bombas marcadas modelo A con los cödigos de variante:
Hvis der i dellisten ikke er angivet noget bogstav i kolonnerne "model" og "variantkode", indgår delen i, ovennævnte pumper.
II no letter is stated in the columns "model" and "variant code" of the parts list, the part is used in the above pumps.
Falls kein Buchstabe in den Kolonnen "Modell" und "Variantencode" der Teilliste angegeben ist, wird das Teil in den obigen Pumpen verwendet.
S'il n'est pas indiqué une lettre dans les colonnes "modèle" et "code de variante" de la liste de pièces, la pièce est utilisée pour les pompes
susmentionnées.
Si no esta indicada una letra en las columnas "modelo" y "côdigo de variante" de la lista de piezas, la pieza se utiliza para las bombas arriba
mencionadas.
#
SS gg 3 33 SS SS
J
gs s 33
§g S
!S S
8 g S o
CO
CO
3
Hi lf
jjjj;
i l åi-g«.s
— "C * O O (O CO O SSS SS
C 3 0) 0)
aal
> - CO
CO I
8 S 8 8 88 o o 88 8 8 888
CD CD ' SSS SS SS SS SS S SSS 88SS o o SSS SS SS S S
~~> T >
3 en
io LO
33 3 333
CM CM
• t f •>>•
î'Ull SS s S SS SSS
§ Ô S 8 88 8 g o
o
LO LO LO LO
W IO U5 888 8 818 SISU? LO
1O
3 3 3 3 CM
t
s SS 18
!tl!i: 8 LO LO
S 8 LO
CO :SS
1
C T3 <" > > B : CM
LL L L U- U .
CO CO CO CO CO co CO
> > > > > > >
CO
8 8 8 i g Si
13 > CO c
ü Q. CO > o o o o LO O O
IXQ-Ü CM" CM" COCO
;p to lO IO O
Ï co" eaco"
<- O >- 3 CO
lo
O c Oo
^-E i o <B a>
CO CO CO
co co co
3 ~
c 3O I» <»
o»
O) <D <D CO • o. a. a. "T T.
o. a a Q.J3
E E E EE
3 3 3 OO
o. a. o. a. m
îii** s s s
^ m o u. iii
a (s
DK Delliste
GB
CR 8
Parts list
D Teilliste
F Liste de pièces
E Lista de piezas

Modell
Modèle
1 Variantencode
Code de variante 2 Laufradanzahl
Nombre de roues mobiles 3
Modelo Côdigo de variante Numero de impulsores
Anzahl pro Pumpe (A = Anzahl der Laufräder)
Nombre par pompe (A= Nombre de roues mobiles)
4 Zusätzl. Informationen
Informations suppl. 5 Teilnummer
No. de réf. 6
Numero por bomba (A = Numero de impulsores) Informaciones supl. No. de ped.
Benævnelse
Description t
Pos. Benennung
Dénomination
1 2 4 5 6
Descripciön (1) (2) (3) 60 Hz 50 Hz
Mellemflange M1 - N1 M2 - N2
Adapter flange 8-12 14-20 i 0 265-0 230 - 0 215-0 130 34 00 16
1 Zwischenflansch
Bride intermédiaire
Brida intermedia 14 i 0 300-0 250 - 0 215-0 180 34 00 14
M3 - N3
Topstykke 1 i 85 0 70 42 00 02
Pump head 1 2-3 i 100 0 80 42 00 04
2 Kopfstück Single-phase 3 i 115 0 95 42 00 06
Tête de pompe 2-3 4-6 i 115 0 95 42 00 06
Cabezal de bomba 4-6 8-12 i 130 0 110 42 00 08
8-14 14-20 i 215 0180 33 00 06
Mellemkammer øv.
Top intermediate chamber
3 Oberste Zwischenkammer 1-14 1-20 i 33 50 18
Chambre intermédiaire supérieure
Câmara intermedia superior
Mellemkammer uden tætningsring
Intermediate chamber without neck ring
3a Zwischenkammer ohne Spaltring 2-14 2-20 i 42 50 06
Chambre intermédiaire sans bague d'étanchéité
Câmara intermedia sin anillo de junta
uden ledeapparat
without guide vanes
r 1 1 i 42 00 15
4
Asa--
I
iîhambre intermédiaire
-r™5
„„PJÜ! 3-8 3-8 A-2
Câmara intermedia ~ ^ 10-14
10-14 A-S 42 50 02
complète
compléta 16-20 A-A
Mellemkammer med leje 1-8 1
1-8
intermediate chamber with bearing
4a Zwischenkammer mit Lager 10-14 10-14 2 42 50 04
Chambre intermédiaire avec palier
16-20 3
Câmara intermedia con coiinete
Fodstykke
A
Base 1-8 1-12 1 42 00 12
N
6 Fußstück
Socle F 1-14 1-20 1 42 00 10
Base
Stift (rotationslås)
Pin (stop pin)
6a Stift (Sperrzapfen) 1-14 1-20 1 0 3x23 31 06 07
Goupille (broche d'arrêt)
Pasador (pasador de bloqueo)
<Skærm 1 1-3 2 66x119 48 00 24
(
7 îchutzschirm Single-phase 3 2 90x119 33 00 92
E
2-14 4-20 2 90x119 33 00 92
[teiilla protectora del acoplamiento
1 0 14/0 16 x 51 mm 48 50 01
Kobling komplet 1 2-3 0 19/0 16x51 mm 48 50 02
Coupling complete Single-phase 3 0 24/0 16 x 68 mm 48 50 03
8 Kupplung komplett 2-3 4-6 0 24/0 16 x 68 mm 48 50 03
Accouplement complet 4-6 8-12 0 28/0 16 x 68 mm 48 50 04
Acoplamiento completo 8-12 14-20 0 38/0 16 x 90 mm 32 90 38
14 0 42/0 16x105 mm 33 9011
l Jnbrakoskrue
1 1-3 4 M6X20 ID 08 91
r
9 In n o n r r i r h r f n n t r r h , h p bingie-pnase 3 4 M8 x 25 ID 09 92
\/is à six pans creux 2-12 4-12 4 M8X25 ID 09 92
14 14-20 4 M10x25 ID 09 42
1fornillo con hexâqono interior
Cylindrisk stift
Shaft pin
10 Zylinderstift 1-14 1-20 1 05x26 31 01 92
Goupille cylindrique
Pasador cilindrico
DK Delliste
GB Parts list
D Teilliste
F Liste de pièces
E Lista de piezas

Modeli 1 Variantencode O Laufradanzahl Q
Modelo Côdigo de variante Numéro de impulsorés
Number per pump (A=Number of impellers) Suppl. information Part number
Anzahl pro Pumpe (A=Anzahl der Laufräder) A Zusätzi. Informationen K Teilnummer R
w
Numero por bomba (A=Numero de impulsorés) Informaciones supl. No. de ped.
Benævnelse
Description
Pos. Benennung -
Dénomination
-
-1 2 t
\ 4 — 5 6
1 2 0 14/0 16 x 51 mm 48 00 02
Koblingshalvpart 1 2-3 2 0 19/0 16x51 mm 48 00 04
Coupling half Single-phase 3 2 0 24/0 16 x 68 mm 48 00 06
10a Kupplungshälfte 2-3 4-6 2 0 24/0 16x68 mm 48 00 06
Demi-accouplement 4-6 8-12 2 0 28/0 16 x 68 mm 48 00 08
Mitad de acoplamiento 8-12 14-20 2 0 38/0 16 x 90 mm 32 01 62
14 2 0 42/0 16 x 105 mm 33 0011
med gevind
A Rp 1 1/2 32 00 54
threaded
mit Gewinde 1-8 1-12 2
filetée
N Rp2 32 00 45
roscada
Flange med gevind
Rp 1 1/2 PN 16 ID 12 41 .
12 Flange threaded
Flansch mit Gewinde F 1-10 1-12 2
12b Bride filetée
RP2PN16 42 00 41
Brida roscada
svejse
DN40 PN25 ID 34 80
for welding
zum Schweißen F 1-14 1-20 2
à souder
DN 50 PN40 42 00 40
para soldar
med gevind
Rp 1 1/2 PN 16 42 99 02
threaded
mit Gewinde F 1-10 1-12
1) Flangesæt
filetée
12a Flange set Rp 2 PN 16 42 99 04
roscada
Flanschensatz
svejse
12c Jeu de bride DN 40 PN 25 42 99 01
for welding
Juego de brida
zum Schweißen F 1-14 1-20
à souder
DN 50 PN 40 42 99 03
para soldar
Rørprop
18 Pipe plug 1-14 1-20 1 R3/4 ID 02 62
Stopfen
19 Bouchon de tuyau R 1/4 ID 03 39
F 1-14 1-20 2
Tapôn roscado R3/8 ID 03 40
1-14 1-20 R1/2 34 01 79

Tømmeprop
Drain plug
25 Entleerungsstopfen
for luftautomatik
Bouchon de vidange . ,
for aut0matic air control
Tapôn de vaciado
für Luftwart 1-14 1-20 R1/2 42 50 34
pour insuf air automatique
para dûspositivo de aire
1 1 4 M16x165mm = L 42 40 02
—J 2 2 4 M16x165mm = L 42 40 02
3 3 4 M16x195mm = L 42 40 03
4 4 4 M16 x 225 mm = L 42 40 04
£Støttebolt 5 5- 4 M16 x 255 mm = L 42 40 05
Sitaybolt 6 6 4 M16 x 285 mm = L 33 40 04
26 SStehbolzen L 8 8 4 M16x345mm = L 42 40 08
Càoujon 10 10 4 M16 x 405 mm = L 42 40 10
E•spârrago 12 12 4 M16 x 465 mm = L 33 40 08
14 14 4 M16x525mm = L 42 40 14
16 4 M16x585mm = L 42 40 16
18 4 M16x645mm = L 33 40 12
20 4 M16x705mm = L 42 40 20
1 4 M6x20 ID 07 40
Sætskrue 1 2-3 4 M6x25 ID 07 43
Single-phase 3 4 M8x20 ID 01 70
Set screw
Sechskantschraube 2-3 4-6 4 M8x20 ID 01 70
28
4-6 8-12 4 M8x25 ID 01 71
Vis de blocage
Tornillo de fijaciôn 8-14 14-20 4 M12X30 ID 09 47
8-12 14-20 4 M12X25 ID 09 46
28a
14 4 M16x45 ID 09 48
DK Delliste
CR 8
GB Parts list
D Teilliste
F Liste de pièces
E Lista de piezas
Model •. Variantkode Løberantal

Modell
Modèle
1 Variantencode
Code de variante
2 Laufradanzahl
Nombre de roues mobiles
3
Modelo Côdigo de variante Numéro de impulsores
Anzahl pro Pumpe (A=Anzahl der Laufräder)
Nombre par pompe (A=Nombre de roues mobiles)
4 Zusätzl. Informationen
Informations suppl.
5 Teilnummer
No. de réf. 6
Numero por bomba (A= Numéro de impulsores) Informaciones supl. No. de oed.
Benævnelse
Description
e
Pos. Benennung
Dénomination
1 2 4 5 6
Sætskrue
35 A 2
Set screw
Sechskantsch raube 1-8 1-12 M12x45 ID 01 82
Vis de blocage
35a Tornillo de fiiaciôn N 2
Maskinbolt
35 Bolt and nut 4
Bolzen F 1-14 1-20 M16X60 ID 12 60
Boulon
35a 4
Perno
Møtrik
Nut
36 Mutter 1-14 1-20 4 M16 ID 09 52
Ecrou
36a Tuerca 14 4 M16 ID 09 52
Pakning
Gasket
37 Dichtung 1-14 1-20 2 0 170/0 160 x 0,5 33 00 32
Joint
Junta
Pakning
Gasket
38 Dichtung 1-14 1-20 1 0 30/0 21 x 1 34 00 48
Joint
Junta
Pakning
39 Gasket A 1-8 1-12 2 122 x 60 x 2 42 00 39
Dichtung N 1-8 1-12 2 124 x 80 x 2 32 01 20
39a Joint F 1-14 1-20 2 a 92/0 49 x 2 ID 25 82
Junta
Indløbsdel
Suction interconnector
44 Einlaufteil 1-14 1-20 1 42 50 08
Entretoise
Cåmara de aspiraciön
Tætningsring
Neck ring
45 Spaltring 1-14 1-20 ' A 0 67/0 52,8 x 1 42 00 29
Bague d'étanchèité
Anillo de junta
Leje, hârdmetal 1-8 1
1-8
Bearing, tungsten carbide
47a Lager, Hartmetall 10-14 10-14 2 33 00 85
Bague, carbure de tungstène
16-20 3
Anillo. carburo de tunasteno
Løber komplet
Impeller complete
49 Laufrad komplett 1-14 1-20 A 42 50 00
Roue mobile complète
Impulsor completo
1 1 1 0 16 x 176 mm = L 42 60 02
-,—îa 2 2 1 0 16 x 176 mm = L 42 60 02
3 3 0 16 x 206 mm = L 42 60 03
Aksel komplet
ffl
h 4
5
4
5
0
0
16x236 mm
16x266 mm
=
=
L
L
42 60 04
42 60 05
Shaft complete 6 6 0 16 x 296 mm = L 42 60 06
51 Welle komplett
Arbre complet
Eje completo
L
1 8
10
12
8
10
12
0
0
0
16 x 356 mm
16x416 mm
16x476 mm
=
=
=
L
L
L
42 60 08
42 60 10
42 60 12
14 14 1 0 16 x 536 mm = L 42 60 14
16 1 0 16 x 596 mm = L 42 60 16
W 18
20
1
1
0 16x656 mm = L 42 60 18
0 16x716 mm = L 42 60 20
DK Delliste
GB Parts list
D Teilliste
F Liste de pièces
E Lista de piezas

Modeli "I Variantencode O Laufradanzahl Q
Modelo Cödigo de variante Numero de impulsores
Anzahl pro Pumpe (A = Anzahl der Laufräder) Æ Zusätzl. Informationen K Teilnummer fi
Nombre par pompe (A =, Nombre de roues mobiles) Informations suppl. No. de réf.
Numero por bomba (A=Numero de impulsores) Informaciones supl. No. de ped.
Benævnelse
Description
Pos. Benennung
Dénomination 1 2 i
y 4 5 6
Descripciôn (1) I (2) (3) 60 Hz 50 Hz
1 1 i 115 mm = L 42 45 02
2 2 i 115mm = L 42 45 02
3 3 i 145 mm = L 42 45 03
—ø170— 4 4 i 175 mm = L 42 45 04
£ vøb
6 6 i 235 mm = L 33 45 04
C)uter sleeve
55 l\/lantel |_
8 8 i 295 mm = L 42 45 08
10 10 355 mm = L 42 45 10
Cîhemise
C;ubierta exterior 12 415 mm = L 33 45 08
12 415 mm = L 33 45 28
14 14 475 mm - L 42 45 14
16 535 mm = L 42 45 16
18 i 595 mm = L 33 45 12
>
20 i 655 mm = L 42 45 20
O-ring EPDM 1-14 1-20
A i 0 5,3 x 2,4 mm ID 21 42
O-ring
57 O-Ring,
Joint torique 1-14 i
NBR 150 V 1-20 0 5,3 x 2,4 mm ID 15 67
Anillo tôrico
Tallerkenfjeder
Disc spring
60 Tellerfeder 1-14 1-20 i 42 00 14
Ressort à disque
Mueile de disco
Medbringer
Seal driver
61 Mitnehmer 1-14 1-20 i 33 00 01
Toc d'entraînement
Pieza de arrastre
Stopring
Stop ring
62 Stopring 1-14 1-20 i 0 15x1,6 mm 33 00 57
Bague d'arrêt
Aniilo retenedor
Afstandsbøsning
3-8 3-8 A-2
Spacing pipe
64 Distanzhülse 10-14 10-14 A-3 0 21,5/ø 17,5 x 19 mm 33 00 29
Douille entretoise
Casquillo separador 16-20 A-4
Afstandsbøsning 1
2-8 2-8
Spacing pipe
64a Distanzhülse 10-14 10-14 2 ø21,5/ø 17,5x5 mm 42 00 30
Douille entretoise
Casquiilo separador 16-20 3
Holder for tætningsring
Retainer for neck ring
65 Halter für Spaltring 1-14 1-20 A 0 71,5/0 69,7x5,6 mm 42 00 27
. Support pour bague d'étanchéité
Soporte para anillo de iunta
Spændeskive
66 1-14 1-20 1 M12 33 00 75
Washer
Unterlegscheibe
Rondelle
66a 1-14 1-20 4 0 17/0 30 ID 31 04
Arandeia
Møtrik
Nut
67 Mutter 1-14 1-20 1 M12 ID 23 23
Ecrou
Tuerca
Afstandsbøsning 1 1 1 0 21,5/0 17,5x40 mm 42 00 33
Spacing pipe
69 Distanzhülse
Douille entretoise
2-14 2-20 1 0 21,5/0 17,5x24 mm 42 00 32
Casquillo separador
Skiltesæt
Nameplate set
76 Schildersatz 1-14 1-20 1 30 97 00
Jeu de plaque d'identification
Jueqo de plaça de identificaciön
DK Delliste
GB Parts list
D
F
E
Teilliste
Liste de pièces
Lista de piezas
CR8
Modell 1 Variantencode O Laufradanzahl Q
Modelo Côdigo de variante Numéro de imoulsores
Number per pump (A= Number of impellers) Suppl. information Part number
Anzahl pro Pumpe (A = Anzahl der Laufräder) A Zusätzl. Informationen R Teilnummer R
v
Nombre par pompe (A=Nombre de roues mobiles) Informations suppl. No. de réf.
Numéro por bomba (A=Numéro de impulsores) Informaciones supi. No. de ped.
Benævnelse
Description
f
Pos. Benennung
Dénomination 1 2 J 4 5 6
C A 1-14 -1-20 i 0 22 x 2,75 mm ID 17 98
C
102 C
Joint torique ....
V 1-14 i
Vlton 1-20 0 22 x 2,75 mm ID 23 39
/ Vnillotôrico
Tætningsring øv.
2)
Upper seal ring
103 Oberer Dichtungsring hårdmetal 1-14 1-20 i 16mm 98 02 40
2) Tætningsring ned. carbure J£g«™

104 SeÄgsring carburo de tungsteno 1-14 1-20 i 16 mm 98 02 04
Bague d'étanchèité inférieure
Anillo de iunta inferior
107
as
C
C
c
A 1-14 1-20 i ø15x5 ID 22 26
Joint torique .... V i 0 15x5

Vlton 1-20 ID 23 40
/^nillotôrico
Fjeder
Spring
108 Feder 1-14 1-20 i 98 02 63
Ressort
Muelle
Medbringer øv.
Upper seal driver
111 Oberer Mitnehmer 1-14 1-20 i 98 02 93
Toc d'entraînement supérieur
Pieza de arrastre superior
Medbringer ned.
Lower seal driver
112 Unterer Mitnehmer 1-14 1-20 i 98 02 94
Toc d'entraînement inférieur
Pieza de arrastre inferior
Flangesæt består af 1 stk. flange + pakning + tilhørende bolte.

The flange set includes one flange, one gasket and bolts and nuts.
1) Der Flanschensatz besteht aus einem Flansch, einer Dichtung und Bolzen. ,
Le jeu de bride consiste en une bride, un joint et boulons.
El juego de brida consiste en una brida, una junta y pernos.
Ved monteringen smøres hârdmetalringenes tætningsflader med silikoneolie, type V0 17 00 38, eller tilsvarende.
Before assembly, lubricate the seal faces of the tungsten carbide rings with silicone oil, type V0 17 00 38, or a similar type of oil.
2) Vor der Montage die Gleitflächen der Hartmetallringe mit Silikonöl, Typ V0 17 00 38, oder ähnlichem Öl bestreichen.
Avant le montage, lubrifier les faces d'étanchêité des bagues en carbure de tungstène avec l'huile de silicone,
type V0 17 00 38, ou similaires.
Antes del montaje, lubricar las superficies de cierre de los anillos de carburo de tungsteno con el aceite dé silicona,
tipo V0 17 00 38, o correspondiente aceite.
DK Tilspændingsmomenter
GB Torques
D Anzugsmomente
F Couples de serrage
E Pares de apriete
Tilspændingsmomenter — Torques
Anzugsmomente
Couples de serrage — Pares de apriete
Benævnelse Suppl. oplysninger Delnummer Moment
Description Suppl. information Part number Torque
Pos. Benennung Zusätzl. Informationen Teilnummer Anzugsmoment
Dénomination Informations suppl. No. de réf. Couple de serrage
Descripciôn Informaciones supl. No. de ped. Par de apriete
Unbrakoskrue
1) M6x20 ID 08 91 13 Nm (1,3 kpm)
Hexagon socket head screw
9 Innensechskantschraube M8 x 25 ID 09 92 31 Nm (3,1 kpm)
Vis à six pans creux
Tornillo con hexågono interior M10 x 25 ID 09 42 62 Nm (6,2 kpm)
Sætskrue M6X20 ID 07 40 5 Nm (0,5 kpm)
1) Set screw M6x25 ID 07 43
28 Sechskantschraube M8x20 ID 01 70
Vis de blocage 12 Nm (1,2 kpm)
M8x25 ID 01 71
Tornillo de fiiäciön M12X30 ID 09 47 30 Nm (3,0 kpm)
Sætskrue
1) Set screw
28a Sechskantschraube M12X25 ID 09 46 30 Nm (3,0 kpm)
Vis de blocage
Tornillo de fiiacion
Møtrik M16 ID 09 52
1)36 100 Nm (10 kpm)
Nut
1)36a Mutter M16 ID 09 52 40 Nm (4,0 kpm)
Ecrou
2)67 M12 ID 23 23 40 Nm (4,0 kpm)
Tuerca
Smøres med gevindpasta THREAD-EZE, delnummer SV 99 97 (0,5 I).

Lubricate with thread paste THREAD-EZE, part number SV 99 97 (0.5 I).
1) Bestreichen mit Gewindepaste THREAD-EZE, Teilnummer SV 99 97 (0,5 I).
Lubrifier avec pâte pour filets THREAD-EZE, no. de réf. SV 99 97 (0,5 I).
Lubricar con pasta para filetés THREAD-EZE, no. de ped. SV 99 97 (0,5 I).
Smøres med olie, type BONDERLUBE 403/3, delnummer SV 99 95 (11).

Lubricate with oil, type BONDERLUBE 403/3, part number SV 99 95 (1 I).
2) Bestreichen mit Öl, Typ BONDERLUBE 403/3, Teilnummer SV 99 95 (1 I).
Lubrifier avec huile, type BONDERLUBE 403/3, no. de réf. SV 99 95 (1 I).
Lübricar con aceite, tipo BONDERLUBE 403/3, no. de ped. SV 99 95 (11).
10
DK Servicesæt
GB Service kits
D
F
E
Servicesätze
Kits de maintenance
Kits de mantenimiento
CR8
1
Servicesæt - Service kits
Servicesätze
Kits de maintenance - Kits de mantenimiento
Benævnelse Løberantal Delnummer
Description Number of impellers Part number
Benennung Anzahl der Laufräder Teilnummer
Dénomination Nombrede roues mobiles No. de réf.
Descripciôn Numéro de impulsores No. de ped.
Akseltætning komplet
Shaft seal complete
Wellenabdichtung komplett 1-20 98 52 01
Garniture mécanique complète
Cierre mecânico completo
Akseltætning komplet/pakningssæt
Shaft seal complete and gasket kit
Wellenabdichtung komplett und Dichtungssatz 1-20 33 97 01
Garniture mécanique complète et kit de joints
Cierre mecânico completo y kit de junta
Serv icesæt 1-8 42 98 01
Serv ice kits
Serv icesätze 10-14 42 98 02
Kits de maintenance
Kits de mantenimiento 16-20 42 98 03
Servicesæt består af: - Service kits consist of:

Servicesätze bestehen aus:
Kits de maintenance consistent en: — Kits de mantenimiento consisten en:
1) Delnummer/stk. - Part number/pieces
Teilnummer/Stück
Pos.
No. de réf./pièces — No. de ped./piezas
98 52 01 33 97 01 42 98 01 42 98 02 42 98 03
4a 42 50 04 1 2 3
37 33 00 32 2 2 2 2 2
38 34 00 48 1 1 1 1
42 00 39 2 2 2
39 32 01 20 2 2 2
ID 25 82 2 2 2
45 42 00 29 8 12 17
CO
47a 33 00 85 1 2
ID 21 42 1 1 1 1
57
2) ID 15 67 . 1 1 1 1
60 42 00 14 1 1 1 1
61 33 00 01 1 1 1 1
62 33 00 57 1 1 1
64 33 00 29 1 2 3
64a 42 00 30 1 2 3
65 42 00 27 6 12 17
66 33 00 75 1 1 1 1
67 ID 23 23 1 1 1 1
69 42 00 32 1 1 1
102
ID 17 98 1 1 1 1 1
2) ID 23 39 1 1 1 1 1
103 98 02 40 1 1 1 1 1
104 98 02 04 1 1 1 1 1
107
ID 22 26 1 1 1 1 1
2) ID 23 40 1 1 1 1 1
108 98 02 63 1 1 1 1 1
111 98 02 93 1 1 1 1 1
112 98 02 94 1 1 1 1 1
Tekster til positionsnumre: Se dellisten.

Texts for position numbers: See parts list.
1) Texte für Positionsnummern: Siehe Teilliste.
Désignations des numéros de position: Voir liste de pièces.
Textos para ios numéros de posiciôn: Ver lista de piezas.
Anvendes til pumper med variantkode A-V-A / F-V-A / N-V-A.

Is used for pumps with the variant codes A-V-A / F-V-A / N-V-A.
2) Wird für Pumpen mit den Variantencodes A-V-A / F-V-A / N-V-A verwendet.
Est utilisé pour les pompes avec les codes de variante A-V-A / F-V-A / N-V-A.
Se utiliza para las bombas con los côdigos de variante A-V-A / F-V-A / N-V-A.
I
Tegning til servicesæt, se side 18.
Drawing for service kits, see page 18.
Zeichnung für Servicesätze, siehe Seite 18.
Dessin pour kits de maintenance, voir page 18.
Dibujo para kits de mantenimiento, ver pagina 18.
11
DK Serviceværktøj
GB Service tools
D Servicewerkzeuge
F Outils de dépannage
E Herramientas de montaje
Specialværktøj - Special tools

SpezialWerkzeuge
Outils spéciaux - Herramientas especiales
Benævnelse Antal Suppl. oplysninger Delnummer
Description Number Suppl. information Part number
Pos. Benennung Anzahl Zusätzl. Informationen Teilnummer
Dénomination Nombre Informations suppl. No. de réf.
Descripciôn Numero Informaciones supl. No. de ped.
Modholderklods for demontering
Shaft holder for dismantling
Wellenhalter für Demontage SV 02 87
Porte-arbre pour démontage
Suietador del eje para desmontaje
Dorn for demontering äfäksel
Punch for removing the shaft
Dorn für Demontage der Welle SV 02 86
Poinçon pour démontage de l'arbre
Punzön para desmontaje del eje
Holder for aksel for montering
Shaft holder for assembly
Wellenhalter für Montage SV 00 40
Porte-arbre pour montage
Suietador del eje para montaie
Aftrækker for tætningsring
Puller for neck ring
Auszieher für Spaltring SV 02 39
Arrache-bague d'étanchéité
Extractor para anillo de junta
Standardværktøj — Standard tools
Standardwerkzeuge
Outils standard - Herramientas standard
19 NV 11 SV 01 45
Ringgaffelnøgle for pos. 18 NV 17 SV 00 56
Ring/open-end spanner for pos. 28 M6 - NV 10 SV 00 83
Ringgabelschlüssel für Pos. 28 M8 - NV 13 SV 00 55
Clef plate/à œil pour pos. 28-28a-67 M12-NV19 SV 00 54
Dave combinada para pos. 28a-35-35a-36-36a M16 - NV 24 SV 01 22
25 NV 27 SV 00 84
T-nøgle for pos. M6- NV 5 SV 01 24
Tee key for pos.
T-Schlüssel für Pos. M8- NV 6 SV 00 50
Clef en T pour pos.
Llave en T para pos. M10-NV8 SV 00 51
Værktøj for tilspaendingsmomenter - Tools for torques
Werkzeuge für Anzugsmomente
Outils pour couples de serrage - Herramientas para pares de apriete
Momentnøgle D a x Db D a x Db
Torque wrench 4-20 Nm 9x12 SV 02 92
Drehmomentschlüssel
Clef dynamométrique 20-100 Nm 9 x 12 SV 02 69
Llave dinamométrica 40-200 Nm 14 x 18 SV 04 00
Stjernenøgle for pos. DaxOb 28 M6-NV10 9x12 SV 03 10
Ring spanner for pos.
28 M8-NV 13 9x12 SV 02 94
Ringschlüssel für Pos.
Clef polygonale pour pos. 28-28a-67 M12-NV 19 9 x 12 SV 02 71
36-36a M16-NV24 14x18 SV 05 24
Llave estrella acodada para pos.
Unbrakotopnøgle for pos. D c x Dd M6-NV5 Vz" x SV 02 96
Socket spanner with inside hexagon for pos.
M Werkzeug mit Innensechskant für Pos. 9-N M8-NV6 SV 02 97
Clef à tire-fonds avec hexagone intérieur pour pos.
Llave de tope con hexàgono interior para pos. M10-NV 8 Va" X Va" SV 02 98
Knarre for pos. D a x D b x D c x Dd
Ratchet spanner for pos.
Knarre für Pos. M 9 X 12 X Va" X Va" SV 02 95
Clef à cliquet pour pos.
Llave de carraca para pos.
12
DK Tegning til serviceværktøj
GB Drawing for service tools
D Zeichnung für Servicewerkzeuge
F Dessin pour outils de dépannage
E Dibujo para herramientas de montaje
H K
M N
13
D Montagereihenfolge für Zwischenkammern und Laufräder
F Ordre de montage pour les chambres intermédiaires et les roues mobiles
E Orden de montaje para las camaras intermedias y los impulsores
Tabellen illustrerer pumpens opbygning ved anvendelse af symboler.

The assembly of the pump is illustrated in the table by symbols.
Die Montage der Pumpe ist in der Tabelle durch Symbole illustriert.
Le montage de la pompe est illustré dans le tableau par des symboles.
El montaje de la bomba esta ilustrado en la tabla por simbolos.
1x = Pos. 62 - 61
Eksempel: Til CR 8-40 anvendes følgende symboler: Se tegning side 15.
Example: For CR 8-40, the following symbols are used: 1x = Pos. 69 - 3a - 49 See drawing on page 15.
Beispiel: Für CR 8-40 werden die folgenden Symbole verwendet: Siehe Zeichnung auf Seite 15.
Exemple: Pour la CR 8-40, les symboles suivants sont utilisés: 2x = Pos. 6 4 - 4 - 4 9 Voir le dessin à la page 15.
Ejemplo: Para la CR 8-40, se utilizan los simbolos siguientes: Ver el dibujo de la pagina 15.
1x = Pos. 64a - 4a - 47a - 49
* 61
i 62
Monteringsrækkefølge
Order of assembly
Montagereihenfolge
Ordre de montage
Orden de montaje
A mærkede positionsnumre anvendes ikke til CR 8-20/1.

Position numbers marked A are not used for CR 8-20/1.
Die mit A markierten Positionsnummern werden nicht für CR 8-20/1 verwendet.
Les numéros de position marqués A ne sont pas utilisés pour la CR 8-20/1.
Los numéros de posiciôn marcados A no se utilizan para la CR 8-20/1.
Delnumre og benævnelser, se dellisten. - Part numbers and descriptions, see parts list. - Teilnummern und Benennungen, siehe Teilliste.
Numéros de référence et dénominations, voir liste de pièces. - Numeros de pedido y descripciones, ver lista de piezas.
14
D
F
E
Montagereihenfolge für Zwischenkammern und Laufräder
Orden de montaje para las cåmaras intermedias y Ios impulsores
CR8
28 CR8-40
—26
35a
12b
35
15
DK Målskitser Snittegning
GB Dimensional sketches Sectional drawing
D Maßskizzen Schnittzeichnung
F Croquis d'encombrement Dessin en coupe.
E Croquises de dimensiones Piano seccionado
*
Målskitser — Dimensional sketches
Maßskizzen
Croquis d'encombrement - Croquises de dimensiones
i^
M3 -i
N3 -i
—«as
D-
I 4a-4
-0145
44
Snittegning - Sectional drawing Fodstykke — Base

Schnittzeichnung Fußstück
Dessin en coupe - Piano seccionado Socle - Base
CR 8 - 20/1 CR8-xxx F-A-A
F-V-A
-12a
Ikke pos. angivne dele, se snittegning side 17.

Parts without position numbers, see sectional drawing on page 17.
Teile ohne Positionsnummern, siehe Schnittzeichnung auf Seite 17.
Pièces sans numéros de position, voir dessin en coupe à la page 17.
Piezas sin numéros de posiciôn, ver piano seccionado de la pagina 17.
16
DK Sniltegning
GB
D
F
E
Sectional drawing
Schnittzeichnung
Dessin en coupe
Piano seccionado
. ,
CR8
-8
4a--
44_i_
V/////////////////////
17
DK Tegning til delliste / Servicesæt
GB Drawing lor parts list / Service kits
D Zeichnung für Teilliste / Servicesätze .
F Dessin pour liste de pièces / Kits de maintenance
E Dibujo para lista de piezas / Kits de mantenimiento
35a
18
DK Tegning til demontering og montering
CR8
GB Drawing for dismantling and assembly
D Zeichnung für Demontage und Montage
F Dessin pour démontage et montage
E Dibujo para desmontaje y montaje
35a
19
Demontering og montering
Demontage und Montage
Démontage et montage
GRUNDFOS centrifugalpumpe, type CR 8, er en flertrins in-line Modholderkiods, pos. A, monteres og fastspændes i skruestik-
pumpe. Hvis pumpen er beskadiget eller tilstoppet, så en de- ken. Pumpestammen monteres i modholderklodsen med
montering af pumpen er påkrævet, følges nedenstående anvis- gevindenden opad. Dorn for demontering, pos. B, pasættes ak-
ning. selens gevind.
Positionsnumre henviser til "Tegning til demontering og monte- Vær opmærksom på, at mellemkammeret passer i recessen på
ring" og "Serviceværktøj". modholderklodsen, og at akselen kan passere uhindret gennem
Henvisninger til afsnit i " ' , se indholdsfortegnelsen. og nedenud af modholderklodsen.
Det første mellemkammer, der skal afmonteres, er altid et mel-
DEMONTERING lemkammer med leje, pos. 4a. Se endvidere "Monteringsræk-
kefølge for mellemkamre og løbere".
Beskyttelsesskærme, pos. 7, vippes fri af topstykket med en
skruetrækker. Unbrakoskruer, pos. 9, kobling, pos. 8, og cyl. Med én hammer drives dornen ned gennem løbernavet. Delene,
stift, pos. 10, afmonteres. der frigøres af akselen, aftages. Løber, mellemkammer, lejering
og afstandsbøsning. Processen gentages, indtil akselen går
Sætskruer, pos. 28a, løsnes og aftages. Motoren (inkl. mellem- gennem og nedenud af modholderklodsen, pos. A.
flange - 5,5-11 kW) er nu fri af pumpen og kan aftages.
Møtrikker, pos. 36, afmonteres. Topstykket, pos. 2, løsnes med Vær opmærksom på, at akselen ikke beskadiges ved fald, når
et let slag på kanten. Topstykket med stationær akseltætnings- den drives fri af sidste løber og medbringer, pos. 61.
del, pos. 102 og 103, aftages. Svøb, pos. 55, løftes ovenud af Er stopringen, pos. 62, beskadiget, afmonteres denne ved at
pumpen. Bølgefjeder/tallerkenfjeder, pos. 60, og mellemkam- vippe den ud af recessen og trække den ned over og fri af spli-
mer øv., pos. 3, aftages. nen (mod gevindenden på akselen).
Vær opmærksom på, at tætningsring, pos. 104, ikke tåler slag Indløbsdel, pos. 44, vippes op og fri af fodstykket, pos. 6, med to
eller stød. skruetrækkere. Pakning, pos. 37, i fodstykkets reces fjernes.
Tætningsring, pos. 104, O-ring, pos. 107, medbringer, pos. 111, Stationær akseltætningsdel, pos. 102 og 103, trykkes nedenud
fjeder, pos. 108, og medbringer, pos. 112, trækkes ovenud af af topstykket med en nylondorn el.lign. :
akselen. Pumpestammen løsnes fra indløbsdelen, pos. 44, med
et let slag af en gummihammer og løftes ovenud og fri af fod- Vær opmærksom på, at stationær akseltætningsdel ikke tåler
stykket. slag eller stød.
Akselen fastholdes med en skruetrækker isat stifthullet, mens Tætningsring, pos. 45, afmonteres ved at vippe holderen, pos.
møtrik, pos. 67, løsnes. Møtrik og spændeskive, pos. 66, aftages. 65, op og fri af mellemkammeret med aftrækker, pos. D.
MONTERING Gevindet på akselen smøres med olie, type BONDERLUBE. Del-

nummer, se "Tilspændingsmomenter".
Før monteringen påbegyndes, må alle dele være rengjorte og
kontrollerede for evt. fejl/slitage. Spændeskive, pos. 66, og møtrik, pos. 67, monteres og spændes
til det angivne moment, se "Tilspændingsmomenter".
Dele, der ikke er fejlfrie eller ikke overholder nedenstående mål
pga. slitage, erstattes af nye dele. Skruestikken løsnes, og pumpestammen løftes ovenud af mon-
teringsholderen.
For lejering, pos. 47a, og leje i mellemkammer, pos. 4a, må
diameterforskellen maksimalt være 0,4 mm. Pumpestammen med den glatte akseltap opad monteres og
trykkes ned over og i indgreb med indløbsdelen i fodstykket.
Møtrik for aksel, pakninger og diverse O-ringe bør altid udskif-
tes ved eftersyn. Medbringer ned., pos. 112, monteres ned over akselen med
medbringertappene opad. Fjeder, pos. 108, monteres. Medbrin-
Løberen skal gå let i tætningsringen. Er tolerancen (slør) for stor ger øv., pos. 111, monteres med skålen til O-ring, pos. 107, opad.
mellem tætningsring og løber, udskiftes den del, der er slidt. O-ringen fugtes med vand og trykkes ned over akselen til med-
Tætningsringen, pos. 45, placeres oven på mellemkamme- bringeren.
ret/indløbsdelen, hvorefter holderen, pos. 65, trykkes ned over Vær opmærksom på, at stifthullet ikke beskadiger O-ringen, og
tætningsringen og i indgreb med mellemkammeret/indløbsde- at tætningsringene, pos. 103 og 104, ikke tåler slag eller stød.
len.
Tætningsring, pos. 104, monteres. Pos. 104, 111 og 112 drejes
Tætningsringen må kunne bevæges frit (sideværts) mellem hol- således, at de ved sammentrykning af fjederen går i indgreb
deren og mellemkammeret. med hinanden. Efter sammentrykningen ai fjederen skal denne
NB: I mellemkammer, pos. 3a, skal der ikke monteres tætnings- presse tætningsringen, pos. 104, op til neutral stilling.
ring. Mellemkammer øv., pos. 3, og bølgefjeder/tallerkenfjeder, pos.
O-ringen, pos. 102, og recessen i topstykket til tætningsring, 60, monteres.
pos. 103, fugtes med vand. O-ringen monteres ind på tætnings- Svøb, pos. 55, monteres i fodstykket. Husk pakning, pos. 37, i
ringen. fodstykket.
Vær opmærksom på, at øv. tætningsring, pos. 103, ikke tåler Før topstykket, pos. 2, monteres, kontrolleres, at pakning, pos.
slag eller stød. 37, og stationær akseltætningsdel er på plads.
Tætningsringen trykkes med fingrene i recessen på topstykket. Tætningsfladerne på tætningsringene, pos. 103 og 104, smøres
Pakning, pos. 37, fugtes med vand og lægges i recessen på top- med silikoneolie, type VO 17 00 38.
stykket.
Kun tætningsfladerne må smøres.
Er stiften (rotationslâs), pos. 6a, i fodstykket deformeret, isættes
der ny stift. Topstykket påsættes pumpen med spædeproppen, pos. 18, i den
ønskede retning.
Pakning, pos. 37, og indløbsdel, pos. 44, monteres i fodstykket.
Tætningsringen, pos. 45, skal vende opad. Støtteboltenes gevind smøres med THREAD-EZE. Delnummer,
se "Tilspændingsmomenter". Møtrikker, pos. 36, monteres og
Indløbsdelen drejes, indtil stiften, pos. 6a, i fodstykket går i spændes diagonalt til angivne moment, se Tilspændingsmo-
indgreb med hullet i indløbsdelen, hvorefter indløbsdelen tryk- menter".
kes i bund mod fodstykket.
Motor (inkl. mellemflange - 5,5-11 kW) monteres. Motoren drejes
Monteringsholder, pos. C, monteres i skruestikken. Aksel, pos. til den ønskede klemkasseposition. Skruer, pos. 28a, smøres
51, monteres i holderen, og skruestikken spændes. Gevinden-
med THREAD-EZE og spændes diagonalt. Moment for tilspæn-
den på akselen skal vende opad, og den modsatte ende skal
ding, se "Tilspændingsmomenter".
være glat med underkant af monteringsholder.
Stift, pos. 10, isættes hullet i akselen. Kobling, pos. 8, monteres,
Stopring, pos. 62, monteres i recessen på akselen. og unbrakoskruerne, pos. 9, smøres med THREAD-EZE, før de
Det videre monteringsforløb til og med sidste løber, se "Monte- isættes koblingen og spændes let. Delnummer, se Tilspæn-
ringsrækkefølge for mellemkamre og løbere". dingsmomenter".
20
DK Demontering og montering
CR8
GB Dismantling and assembly
D Demontage und Montage
F Démontage et montage
E Desmontaje y montaje
Kontrollér, at afstanden imellem koblingshalvparterne er ens i Kontrollér, at afstanden imellem koblingshalvparterne er ens i
begge sider. begge sider, og at pumpen kan drejes i koblingen. Går pumpen
Pumpestammen løftes i topstilling med en kraftig skruetrækker stramt eller står fast, foretages ny justering.
el.lign, indsat under,koblingen. Vær opmærksom på, at motor- Beskyttelsesskærme, pos. 7, monteres og trykkes på plads i
akselen ikke løftes. topstykket.
Fra topstilling sænkes pumpestammen 1-1,5 mm, og unbrako-
skruerne spændes parvis (samme side). Moment for tilspæn- Pumpen er nu færdigmonteret og kan afprøves for tryk og vand-
ding, se "Tilspændingsmomenter". mængde i henhold til gældende datablad.
The GRUNDFOS centrifugal pump, type CR 8, is a multistage Place the shaft holder, pos. A, in a vice and tighten it. Place the
in-line pump. If it is necessary to dismantle the pump, either pump body in the shaft holder with the threaded shaft end
because it is choked or damaged, please follow the instructions pointing upwards. Screw the punch for dismantling, pos. B, on
below. the threaded shaft end.
Position numbers, see "Drawing for dismantling and assembly" Make sure that the intermediate chamber is positioned in the
and "Service Tools". recess of the shaft holder and that the shaft can pass freely
through and underneath the shaft holder.
References to paragraphs in " ", see table of contents.
The first intermediate chamber to be removed is always an in-
termediate chamber with bearing, pos. 4a. See "Order of as-
DISMANTLING sembly for intermediate chambers and impellers".
Remove the coupling guards, pos. 7, using a screwdriver. Re- Drive the punch down through the impeller hub by means of a
move the hexagon socket head screws, pos. 9, the coupling, hammer. Remove the free parts from the shaft: Impeller, inter-
pos. 8, and the shaft pin, pos. TO. mediate chamber, bearing ring and spacing pipe. Repeat the
procedure until the shaft passes through the shaft holder, pos.
Slacken and remove the set screws, pos. 28a. The motor (with A.
adapter flange - 5.5-11 kW) is now free and can be removed.
Take care not to damage the shaft when it is driven free of the
Remove the nuts, pos.'36. Loosen the pump head, pos. 2, with a last impeller and the driver, pos. 61.
light blow on the lower edge. Lift off the pump head with sta-
tionary shaft seal half, pos. 102 and 103. Lift off the outer sleeve, If the stop ring, pos. 62, is damaged, push it out of the recess and
pos. 55. Remove the corrugated spring/disc spring, pos. 60, and pull it free of the spline (towards the threaded end of the shaft).
the top intermediate chamber, pos. 3. Push the suction interconnector, pos. 44, out of the base, pos.
The seal ring, pos. 104, must not be exposed to blows'or knocks. 6, using two screwdrivers. Remove the gasket, pos. 37, from the
recess of the base.
Pull the seal ring, pos. 104, the O-ring, pos. 107, the driver, pos.
111, the spring, pos. 108, and the driver, pos. 112, off the shaft. Prise the stationary shaft seal half, pos. 102 and 103, out of the
Loosen the pump body from the suction interconnector, pos. 44, pump head by means of a nylon punch or a similar tool.
with a light blow of a rubber mallet and lift it off the base. The stationary shaft seal half must not be exposed to blows or
knocks.
Hold the shaft by means of a screwdriver inserted in the shaft
pin hole while the nut, pos. 67, is slackened. Remove the nut and Free the neck ring, pos. 45, by pushing up the neck ring retainer,
the washer, pos. 66. pos. 65, by means of the puller, pos. D.
ASSEMBLY Fit the gasket, pos. 37, and the suction interconnector, pos. 44,
in the base. The neck ring, pos. 45, must point upwards.
Before assembly, clean and check all parts. Parts which are
defective or do not comply with the measurements mentioned Turn the suction interconnector until the pin, pos. 6a, in the base
below due to wear should be replaced by new parts; engages with the hole in the suction interconnector. Press the
suction interconnector home against the base.
The permissible, maximum difference betweenthe diameters of
the bearing ring, pos. 47a, and the bearing in the intermediate Place the shaft holder, pos. C, in the vice. Place the shaft, pos.
chamber, pos. 4a, is 0.4 mm. 51, in the shaft holder and tighten the vice. The threaded end of
the shaft must be uppermost, and the opposite end must be flush
Nut for shaft, gaskets and O-rings should always be replaced with the lower edge of the shaft holder.
when the pump is overhauled.
Fit the stop ring, pos. 62, in the recess of the shaft.
The impeller must fit into the neck ring. If the tolerance (clear-
ance) between neck ring and impeller is too big, replace the Continue the assembly up to and including the last impeller. See
worn part. "Order of assembly for intermediate chambers and impellers".
Place the neck ring, pos. 45, on the intermediate chamber/suc- Lubricate the thread of the shaft with oil, type BONDERLUBE.
tion interconnector. Then place the neck ring retainer, pos. 65, Part number, see "Torques".
on the neck ring and press it until it engages with the interme- Fit the washer, pos. 66, and the nut, pos. 67, and tighten it to the
diate chamber/suction interconnector. torque stated, see "Torques".
It must be possible to move the neck ring freely (sideways) be- Slacken the vice and lift the pump body off the shaft holder.
tween the retainer and the intermediate chamber. Fit the pump body with the smooth shaft end pointing upwards
Note: No neck ring is fitted in the intermediate chamber, pos. 3a. and press it down so that it engages with the suction intercon-
nector in the base.
Moisten the O-ring, pos. 102, and the recess of the pump head,
which holds the seal ring, pos. 103, with water. Fit the O-ring to Push the lower driver, pos. 112, over the shaft with the driving
the seal ring. dogs pointing upwards. Fit the spring, pos. 108. Fit the upper
driver, pos. 111, with the cup for the O-ring, pos. 107, pointing
The upper seal ring, pos. 103, must not be exposed to blows or upwards. Moisten the O-ring with water, fit it to the shaft and
knocks. press it home on the driver.
Press the seal ring home in the recess of the pump head using Make sure that the O-ring is not damaged on the shaft pin hole
fingers only. and that the seal rings, pos. 103 and 104, are not exposed to
blows or knocks.
Moisten the gasket, pos. 37, with water and position it in the re-
cess of the pump head. Fit the seal ring, pos. 104. Turn the pos. 104, 111 and 112 com-
pressing the spring until the parts engage with each other. The
If the pin (stop pin), pos. 6a, in the base is deformed, fit a new spring will then press the seal ring, pos. 104, upwards to a neu-
pin. tral spring position.
21
Fit the top intermediate chamber, pos. 3, and the corrugated Fit the shaft pin, pos. 10, in the shaft. Fit the coupling, pos. 8.
spring/disc spring, pos. 60. Lubricate the hexagon socket head screws, pos. 9, with
THREAD-EZE. Part number, see 'Torques". Fit the hexagon
Fit the outer sleeve, pos, 55, in the base. Do not forget the gas-
socket head screws, tighten and leave loose.
ket, pos. 37, in the base.
Before fitting the pump head, pos. 2, check that the gasket, pos. Check that the gaps either side of the coupling halves are equal.
37, and the stationary shaft seal half are positioned correctly. Raise.the pump body as far as possible by means of a large
Lubricate the seal faces of the seal rings, pos. 103 and 104, with screwdriver or a similar tool inserted underneath the coupling.
silicone oil, typé VO 17 00 38. Take care not to raise the motor shaft.
Lubricate the seal faces only. Lower the pump body 1-1.5 mm from its top position and tighten
the hexagon socket head screws two and two (same side), see
Fit the pump head to the pump body with the priming plug, pos. 'Torques".
18, in the required position.
Check that the~gaps either side of the coupling halves are equal
Lubricate the threads of the staybolts with THREAD-EZE, see and check the pump by turning the coupling. If the pump is tight
"Torques". Replace the nuts, pos. 36, and tighten diagonally to or it cannot be rotated, a further adjustment should be carried
the torque stated, see "Torques". out.
Fit the motor (with adapter flange - 5.5-11 kW). Turn the motor to Spring the two coupling guards, pos. 7, into place.
the required terminal box position. Lubricate the screws, pos.
28a, with THREAD-EZE. Fit the screws and tighten diagonally, The pump is now assembled. Check the head and flow and
see "Torques". compare the results with the data sheet.
Die GRUNDFOS Kreiselpumpe, Typ CR 8, ist eine mehrstufige Wellenhalter, Pos. A, in einen Schraubstock spannen. Pumpen-
Inline-Pumpe. Ist Demontage der Pumpe entweder infolge welle in den Wellennalter so stecken, daß der Gewindewellen-
Verstopfung oder infolge Schäden notwendig, bitte die foi-; zapfen nach oben zeigt. Dorn für Demontage, Pos. B, auf das
genden Anweisungen befolgen. Gewinde der Welle schrauben.
Positionsnummern, siehe "Zeichnung für Demontage und Mon- Es Ist darauf zu achten, daß die Zwischenkammer in den Rezeß
tage" und "Servicewerkzeuge". des Wellenhalters einrastet, und daß die Welle durch/unter den
Wellenhalter ungehindert passieren kann.
Hinweise auf Abschnitte in " ", siehe Inhaltsverzeichnis.
Die erste Zwischenkammer, die demontiert werden soll, ist im-
mer eine Zwischenkammer mit Lager, Pos. 4a. Siehe ''Mon-
DEMONTAGE tagereihenfolge für Zwischenkammern und Laufräder".
Schutzschirme, Pos. 7, mit einem Schraubendreher abhebein. Dorn mit einem Hammer durch die Laufradnabe treiben. Die
Innensechskantschrauben, Pos. 9, Kupplung, Pos. 8, und Zylin- gelösten Teile abziehen: Laufrad, Zwischenkammer, Lagerring
derstift, Pos. 10, demontieren. und Distanzhülse. Verfahren wiederholen, bis die Welle durch
den Wellenhalter, Pos. A, passiert.
Schrauben, Pos. 28a, herausschrauben. Motor (einschließlich
Es ist darauf zu achten, daß die Welle nicht beschädigt wird,
Zwischenflansch - 5,5-11 kW) von der Pumpe abheben. wenn sie aus dem letzten Laufrad und Mitnehmer, Pos. 61, aus-
Muttern, Pos. 36, abschrauben. Kopfstück, Pos. 2, durch einen getrieben wird.
leichten Schlag lösen. Kopfstück mit stationärer Wellenabdich- Falls der Stopring, Pos. 62, beschädigt ist, ist er mit einem
tungshälfte, Pos. 102 und 103, abziehen. Mantel, Pos. 55, ab- Schraubendreher aus dem Rezeß auszuhebeln und frei der
ziehen. Gewellte Feder/Tellerfeder, Pos. 60, und oberste Zwi- Vielnut (in Richtung Gewindewellenzapfen) zu ziehen.
schenkammer, Pos. 3, abnehmen.
Einlaufteil, Pos. 44, mit zwei Schraubendrehern aus dem
Der Dichtungsring, Pos. 104, verträgt keine Schläge oder Stöße. Fußstück, Pos. 6, aushebeln. Dichtung, Pos. 37, vom Rezeß des
Fußstückes entfernen.
Dichtungsring, Pos. 104, O-Ring, Pos. 107, Mitnehmer, Pos. 111,
Feder, Pos. 108, und Mitnehmer, Pos. 112, von der Welle ab- Stationäre Wellenabdichtungshälfte, Pos. 102 und 103, mit
ziehen. Pumpenkörper durch einen leichten Schlag mit einem einem Nylondorn oder einem ähnlichen Werkzeug aus dem
Gummihammer vom Einlaufteil, Pos. 44, lösen. Pumpenkörper Kopfstück drücken.
vom FuSstück abziehen. Die stationäre Wellenabdichtungshälfte verträgt keine Schläge
Schraubendreher ins Stiftloch einführen und festhalten, wäh- oder Stöße.
rend die Mutter, Pos. 67, losgeschraubt wird. Mutter und Halter, Pos. 65, mit dem Auszieher, Pos. D, von der Zwischen-
Unterlegscheibe, Pos. 66, abnehmen. kammer lösen. Spaltring, Pos. 45, abnehmen.
MONTAGE O-Ring, Pos. 102, und den Rezeß des Kopfstückes für den Dich-
tungsring, Pos. 103, mit Wasser anfeuchten. O-Ring auf den
Vor der Montage alle Teile reinigen und prüfen. Teile, die defekt Dichtungsring montieren.
sind oder wegen Verschleiß die untenstehenden Maße nicht
erfüllen, müssen durch neue ersetzt werden. Der obere Dichtungsring, Pos. 103, verträgt keine Schläge oder
Stöße.
Der maximal zulässige Unterschied zwischen dem Durchmes-
ser des Lagerringes, Pos. 47a, und dem des Lagers in der Zwi- Dichtungsring mit den Fingern in den Rezeß des Kopfstückes
drücken. Dichtung, Pos. 37, mit Wasser anfeuchten und in den
schenkammer, Pos. 4a, ist 0,4 mm.
Rezeß des Kopfstückes legen.
Mutter für die Welle, Dichtungen und O-Ringe müssen immer bei
Falls der Stift (Sperrzapfen), Pos. 6a, im Fußstück deformiertet,
Überholung der Pumpe ausgewechselt werden. ist er gegen einen neuen Stift auszuwechseln.
Das Laufrad muß in den Spaltring passen. Falls die Toleranz Dichtung, Pos. 37, und Einlaufteil, Pos. 44, in das Fußstück mon-
(Spiel) zwischen Spaltring und Laufrad zu groß ist,'das abge- tieren. Der Spaltring, Pos. 45, muß nach oben zeigen.
nutzte Teil auswechseln.
Einlaufteil drehen, bis der Stift, Pos. 6a, im Fußstück ins Loch
Spaltring, Pos. 45, auf die Zwischenkammer/das Einlaufteil ledes Einlaufteils einrastet. Einlaufteil gegen Fußstück drücken.
gen. Halter, Pos. 65, über den Spaltring legen und so drücken,
daß er in die Zwischenkammer/das Einlaufteil einrastet. Wellenhalter, Pos. C, in den Schraubstock spannen. Welle, Pos.
51, in den Wellenhalter stecken und den Schraubstock spannen.
Der Spaltring muß frei (seitwärts) zwischen Halter und Zwi- Der Gewindeweilenzapfen muß nach oben zeigen, und der
schenkammer bewegt werden können. entgegengesetzte Wellenzapfen muß auf gleichem Niveau mit
der unteren Kante des Wellenhalters sein.
Achtung: Kein Spaltring wird in die Zwischenkammer, Pos. 3a,
montiert. Stopring, Pos. 62, in den Rezeß der Welle einlegen.
22
Weitere Montage bis einschließlich des letzten Laufrades vor- Die Dichtungsflächen der Dichtungsringe, Pos. 103 und 104, mit
nehmen, siehe "Montagereihenfolge für Zwischenkammern und Silikonöl, Typ VO 17 00 38, bestreichen.
Laufräder". Nur die Dichtungsflächen bestreichen.
Gewinde der Welle.mit Öl, Typ BONDERLUBE, bestreichen. Kopfstück auf den Pumpenkörper mit dem Einfüllstopfen, Pos.
Teilnummer, siehe "Anzugsmomente". 18, in der gewünschten Stellung montieren.
Unterlegscheibe, Pos. 66, und Mutter, Pos. 67, montieren und bis Die- Gewinde der Stehbolzen mit THREAD-EZE bestreichen.
zum angegebenen Anzugsmoment anziehen, siehe "Anzugs- Teilnummer, siehe "Anzugsmomente". Muttern, Pos. 36, auf-
momente". setzen und kreuzweise bis zum angegebenen Anzugsmoment
fest anziehen, siehe "Anzugsmomente".
Schraubstock lösen und Pumpenkörper aus dem Wellenhalter
nehmen. Motor (einschließlich Zwischenflansch - 5,5-11 kW) montieren.
Motor zur gewünschten Klemmkastenstellung drehen. Schrau-
Pumpenkörper mit dem glatten Wellenzapfen nach oben mon- ben, Pos. 28a, mit THREAD-EZE bestreichen und kreuzweise
tieren und in Eingriff mit dem Einlaufteil im Fußstück bringen. anziehen, siehe "Anzugsmomente".
Unteren Mitnehmer, Pos. 112, auf die Welle stecken. Die Zylinderstift, Pos. 10, in die Welle einsetzen. Kupplung, Pos. 8,
Mitnehmerzapfen müssen nach oben zeigen. Feder, Pos. 108, montieren. Innensechskantschrauben, Pos. 9, mit THREAD-EZE
montieren. Oberen Mitnehmer, Pos. 111, montieren. Die Schale bestreichen. Teilnummer, siehe "Anzugsmomente". Schrauben
für den O-Ring, Pos. 107, muß nach oben zeigen. O-Ring mit in die Kupplung einsetzen und leicht anziehen.
Wasser anfeuchten, ihn auf die Welle stecken und gegen den
Mitnehmer drücken. Prüfen, daß der Abstand zwischen den Kupplungshälften auf
beiden Seiten gleich ist.
Es ist darauf zu achten, daß der O-Ring durch das Loch der
Welle nicht beschädigt wird. Die Dichtungsringe, Pos. 103 und Pumpenkörper mit einem großen Schraubendreher oder einem
104, vertragen keine Schläge oder Stöße. ähnlichen Werkzeug zum oberen Anschlag heben. Schrauben-
dreher unter die Kupplung einsetzen. Motorwelle nicht heben.
Dichtungsring, Pos. 104, montieren. Pos. 104, 111 und 112 so
Von der höchsten Stellung den Pumpenkörper 1-1,5 mm senken
drehen, daß sie beim Zusammendrücken der Feder ineinander
und die Innensechskantschrauben paarweise (dieselbe Seite)
einrasten. Nach Zusammendrücken der Feder wird diese den
fest anziehen, siehe "Anzugsmomente".
Dichtungsring, Pos. 104, zur Normalstellung zurückpressen.
Prüfen, daß der Abstand zwischen den Kupplungshälften auf
Oberste Zwischenkammer, Pos. 3, und gewellte Feder/Teller- beiden Seiten gleich ist und daß die Kupplung gedreht werden
feder, Pos. 60, montieren. kann. Falls die Pumpe schwergängig ist oder fest sitzt, muß eine
Mantel, Pos. 55, in das Fußstück montieren. Dichtung, Pos. 37, neue Justierung durchgeführt werden.
im Fußstück nicht vergessen. Schutzschirme, Pos. 7, montieren.
Vor der Montage des Kopfstückes, Pos. 2, prüfen, daß die Dich- Die Pumpe ist jetzt fertig zusammengebaut. Förderstrom und
tung, Pos. 37, und die stationäre Wellenabdichtungshälfte kor- Förderhöhe messen und mit den berechneten Daten verglei-
rekt montiert sind. chen.
La pompe centrifuge GRUNDFOS, type CR 8, est une pompe que l'extrémité filetée de l'arbre soit orientée vers le haut. Vis-
multicellulaire 'in line'. S'il est nécessaire de démonter ia pom- ser le poinçon pour démontage, pos. B, sur l'extrémité filetée
pe, soit par suite d'encrassement, soit à cause de dégâts, le de f'arbre.
démontage est effectué selon les instructions ci-dessous.
Veiller à ce que la chambre intermédiaire se positionne dans la
Numéros de position, voir "Dessin pour démontage et montage" rainure du porte-arbre et que l'arbre puisse passer librement
et "Outils de dépannage". par/sous le porte-arbre.
Références aux paragraphes entre " ", voir table des matières. La première chambre intermédiaire à démonter est toujours
une chambre intermédiaire avec palier, pos. 4a. Voir "Ordre de
DEMONTAGE montage pour les chambres intermédiaires et les roues mobi-
les".
Basculer les écrans de protection, pos. 7, de la tête de pompe
à l'aide d'un tournevis. Démonter les vis à six pans creux, pos. Chasser le poinçon par le moyeu de la roue mobile à l'aide d'un
9, l'accouplement, pos. 8, et la goupille cylindrique, pos. 10. maillet. Enlever les pièces qui sont dégagées de l'arbre: Roue
mobile, chambre intermédiaire, bague de palier et douille
Démonter les vis de blocage, pos. 28a. Retirer le moteur (avec entretoise. Répéter ce procédé jusqu'à ce que l'arbre passe par
bride intermédiaire - 5,5-11 kW) de la pompe. le porte-arbre, pos. A.
Démonter les écrous, pos. 36. Dégager la tête de pompe, pos. Veiller à ce que l'arbre ne soit pas endommagé lorsqu'il est-
2, d'un petit coup sur le bord. Enlever la tête de pompe avec la dégagé de la dernière roue mobile et du toc o"entraînement,
moitié fixe de la garniture mécanique, pos. 102 et 103. Retirer la pos. 61.
chemise, pos. 55. Enlever le ressort ondulé/ressort à disque,
pos. 60, et la chambre intermédiaire supérieure, pos. 3. Si la bague d'arrêt, pos. 62, est endommagée, basculer celle-ci
de la rainure à l'aide d'un tournevis et la retirer vers le filetage
La bague d'étanchéité, pos. 104, ne supporte pas les coups et de l'arbre.
chocs.
Extraire l'entretoise, pos. 44, du socle, pos. 6, à l'aide de deux
Enlever la bague d'étanchéité, pos. 104, le joint torique, pos. tournevis. Enlever le joint, pos. 37, de la rainure du socle.
107, le toc d'entraînement, pos. 111, le ressort, pos. 108, ét le toc
d'entraînement, pos. 112. Dégager le corps de pompe de Extraire la moitié fixe de la garniture mécanique, pos. 102 et
l'entretoise, pos. 44, d'un petit coup de maillet en caoutchouc 103, de la tête de pompe à l'aide d'un poinçon en nylon ou d'un
et le retirer du socle. outil similaire.
Maintenir l'arbre à l'aide d'un tournevis introduit dans le trou La moitié fixe de la garniture mécanique ne supporte pas les
de goupille d'arbre lors du desserrage de l'écrou, pos. 67. En- coups et chocs.
lever l'écrou et la rondelle, pos. 66.
Dégager la bague d'étanchéité, pos. 45, en basculant le support,
Placer le porte-arbre, pos. A, dans un étau et serrer celui-ci. pos. 65, de la chambre intermédiaire à l'aide de l'arrache-
Placer le corps de pompe dans le porte-arbre de manière à ce bague d'étanchéité, pos. D.
MONTAGE La différence maximale admissible entre le diamètre de la ba-

gue de palier, pos. 47a, et celui du palier de la chambre inter-
Avant le montage, nettoyer et contrôler toutes les pièces. Les médiaire, pos. 4a, est de 0,4 mm.
pièces qui sont défectueuses ou ne répondent pas aux mesures
ci-dessous par suite d'usure doivent être remplacées par de Lors de la vérification, il faut toujours remplacer l'écrou pour
nouvelles pièces. l'arbre, les joints et les joints toriques.
23
II faut que la roue mobile s'adapte à la bague d'étanchéité. Si la Monter le joint torique sur l'arbre et le presser à fond contre le
tolérance (le jeu) entre la bague d'étanchéité et la roue mobile toc d'entraînement.
est trop grande, remplacer la pièce usagée. Veiller à ce que le joint torique ne soit pas endommagé par le
Placer la bague d'étanchéité, pos. 45, sur la chambre trou de l'arbre. Les bagues d'étanchéité, pos. 103 et 104, ne
intermédiaire/l'entretoise. Placer le support, pos. 65, sur la ba- supportent pas les coups et chocs.
gue d'étanchéité et le positionner avec la chambre intermé- Monter la bague d'étanchéité, pos. 104. Presser les pos. 104,111
diaire/l'entretoise. et 112 de manière à ce que les pièces s'enclenchent. Quand la
Il doit être possible de mouvoir la bague d'étanchéité librement bague d'étanchéité, pos. 104, est pressée à fond, le ressort
(de côté) entre le support et la chambre intermédiaire. pressera la bague d'étanchéité en haut à la pression du ressort
neutre.
Attention: La bague d'étanchéité n'est pas montée dans la
chambre intermédiaire, pos. 3a. Monter la chambre intermédiaire supérieure, pos. 3, et le res-
sort ondulé/ressort à disque, pos. 60.
Mouillera l'eau le joint torique, pos. 102, et la rainure de la tête
Monter la chemise, pos. 55, dans le socle. Ne pas oublier le
de pompe pour la bague d'étanchéité, pos. 103. Monter le joint
joint, pos. 37, dans le socle.
torique sur la bague d'étanchéité.
Avant de monter la tête de pompe, pos. 2, il faut contrôler que
La bague d'étanchéité supérieure, pos. 103, ne supporte pas les le joint, pos. 37, et la moitié fixe de la garniture mécanique sont
coups et chocs. montés correctement.
Presser à la main la bague d'étanchéité dans la rainure de la Lubrifier les faces d'étanchéité des bagues d'étanchéité, pos.
tête de pompe. Mouiller à l'eau le joint, pos. 37, et le placer dans 103 et 104, avec huile de silicone, type VO 17 00 38.
la rainure de la tête de pompe.
Seulement lubrifier les faces d'étanchéité.
Si la goupille (broche d'arrêt), pos. 6a, dans le socle est défor-
mée, monter une nouvelle goupille. Monter la tête de pompe sur le corps de pompe avec le bouchon
d'amorçage, pos. 18, dans la position désirée.
Monter le joint, pos. 37, et i'entretoise, pos. 44, dans le socle.
Enduire le filetage des goujons de THREAD-EZE. Numéro de
La bague d'étanchéité, pos. 45, doit être orientée vers le haut.
référence, voir "Couples de serrage". Monter les écrous, pos.
Retourner I'entretoise de manière à ce que la goupille, pos. 6a, 36, et les serrer diagonalement au couple de serrage indiqué,
dans le socle se positionne dans le trou de I'entretoise. Ensuite voir "Couples de serrage".
presser I'entretoise à fond contre le socle. Monter le moteur (avec bride intermédiaire - 5,5-11 kW). Tour-
Placer le porte-arbre, pos. C, dans l'étau. Monter l'arbre, pos. ner le moteur à la position désirée de la boîte à bornes. Enduire
51, dans le porte-arbre et serrer l'étau. L'extrémité filetée de les vis, pps. 28a, de THREAD-EZE. Monter et serrer les vis dia-
l'arbre doit être orientée vers le haut, et l'extrémité opposée gonalement, voir "Couples de serrage".
doit être au même niveau que le bord inférieur du porte-arbre. Placer la goupille, pos. 10, dans l'arbre. Monter l'accouplement,
Monter la bague d'arrêt, pos. 62, dans la rainure de l'arbre. pos. 8. Enduire les vis à six pans creux, pos. 9, de THREAD-EZE.
Numéros de référence, voir "Couples de serrage". Monter les
Continuer le montage jusqu'à la dernière roue mobile incluse, vis dans l'accouplement et serrer légèrement.
voir "Ordre de montage pour les chambres intermédiaires et les
roues mobiles". Contrôler que les écarts des deux côtés des demi-accouple-
ments sont égaux.
Lubrifier le filetage de l'arbre avec huile, type BONDERLUBE.
Lever le corps de pompe jusqu'à sa position supérieure à l'aide
Numéro de référence, voir "Couples de serrage".
d'un grand tournevis ou d'un outil similaire introduit sous l'ac-
Monter la rondelle, pos. 66, et l'écrou, pos. 67, et le serrer au couplement'. Ne pas lever l'arbre moteur.
couple de serrage indiqué, voir "Couples de serrage". Abaisser le corps de pompe de 1 à 1,5 mm de sa position supé-
Enlever le corps de pompe du porte-arbre. rieure et serrer les vis à six pans creux deux à deux (même cô-
té), voir "Couples de serrage".
Monter le corps de pompe (avec l'extrémité lisse de l'arbre
orientée vers le haut) de manière à ce qu'il se positionne dans Contrôler que les écarts des deux côtés des demi-accouple-
I'entretoise dans le socle. ments sont égaux et qu'il est possible de tourner l'accou-
plement. Si la pompe oppose une résistance ou ne tourne pas,
Monter le toc d'entraînement inférieur, pos. 112, de manière à il faut ajuster encore une fois.
ce que les emboîtements soient orientés vers le haut. Monter- le
ressort, pos. 108. Monter le toc d'entraînement supérieur, pos. Remonter les écrans de protection, pos. 7.
111, de manière à ce que la cuvette pour le joint torique, pos. La pompe est maintenant remontée. Contrôler la pression et le
107, soit orientée vers le haut. Mouiller le joint torique à l'eau. débit et comparer les résultats avec les données techniques.
La bomba centrifuga GRUNDFOS, tipo CR 8, es una bomba El anillo de junta, pos. 104, no ha de exponerse ni a golpes ni a
multicelular en linea. Si es necesario reparar la bomba porque choques.
esta atascada'o averiada, sirvanse seguir las instrucciones a Quitar del eje el anillo de junta, pos. 104, el anillo torico, pos.
continuaciôn. 107, la pieza de arrastre, pos. 111, el muelle, pos. 108, y la pieza
Numeros de posiciôn, ver "Dibujo para desmontaje y montaje" de arrastre, pos. 112. Aflojar el cuerpo de bomba de la câmara
de aspiraciôn, pos. 44, con un pequeno golpe de un martillo de
y "Herramientas de montaje". caucho. Retirar el cuerpo de bomba de la base.
Referencias a apartados entre " ", ver tabla de materias. Sujetar el eje por medio de un destornillador insertado en el
agujero del pasador del eje y aflojar la tuerca, pos. 67. Quitar la
DESMONTAJE tuerca y la arandela, pos. 66.
Colocar el sujetador para el eje, pos. A, en un torniilo de banco
Quitar la rejilla protectora del acoplamiento, pos. 7, por medio
y apretar éste. Colocar el cuerpo de bomba en el sujetador para
de un destornillador. Desmontar los tornilios con hexâgono in- el eje de modo que el extremo roscado del eje apunte hàcia
terior, pos. 9, el acoplamiento, pos. 8, y el pasador cilfndrico, arriba. Atornillar el punzôn para desmontaje, pos. B, sobre el
pos. 10. extremo roscado del eje.
Quitar los tornilios de fijaciôn, pos. 28a. Retirar el motor (con Poner cuidado para que la câmara intermedia encaje en la ca-
brida intermedia - 5,5-11 kW) de la bomba. vidad del sujetador y que el eje pueda pasar libremente
porfdebajo del sujetador para el eje.
Quitar las tuercas, pos. 36. Aflojar el cabezal de bomba, pos. 2,
con un pequeno goipe sobre su borde. Quitar el cabezal de La primera câmara intermedia a desmontar siempre es una câ-
bomba con la mitad fija del cierre mecânico, pos. 102 y 103. Re- mara intermedia con cojinete, pos. 4a. Ver "Orden de montaje
tirar la cubierta exterior, pos. 55, de la bomba. Quitar el muelle para las cåmaras intermedias y los impulsores".
ondulado/muelle de disco, pos. 60, y la câmara intermedia su- Impulsar el punzôn por el cubo del impulsor por medio de un
perior, pos. 3. martillo. Quitar las piezas que estån soltadas del eje: Impulsor,
câmara intermedia, anillo de cojinete y casquillo separador.
24
Demontage et montage
Repetir el procedimiento hasta que el eje påse por el sujetador •Empujar la mitad fija del cierre mecânico, pos. 102 y 103, del
para el eje, pos. A. cabezal de bomba por medio de un punzön de nylon o de una
Poner cuidado para que el eje no sea averiado cuando es sol- herramienta parecida.
tado del ultimo impulsor y de la pieza de arrastre, pos. 61.
La mitad fija del cierre mecânico no ha de exponerse ni a gol-
Si el anillo retenedor, pos. 62, estå averiado, bascularlo de la pes ni a choques.
cavidad por medio de un destornillador y retirarlo (hacia el ex-
tremo roscado del eje). Bascular el soporte, pos. 65, de la cåmara intermedia por medio
Bascular la cåmara de aspiraciön, pos. 44, de la base, pos. 6, del extractor, pos. D. Quitar el anillo de junta, pos. 45.
por medio de dos destornilladores. Quitar la junta, pos. 37, de
la càvidad de la base.
MONTAJE Montar la pieza de arrastre inferior, pos. 112, sobre el eje de

modo que las levas de la pieza de arrastre apunten hacia arri-
Antes del montaje, limpiar y comprobar todas las piezas. Las ba. Montar el muelle, pos. 108. Montar la pieza de arrastre su-
piezas que estån defectuosas o no corresponden a las medidas perior, pos. 111, de modo que la copa para el anillo tôrico, pos.
abajo mencionadas a causa de uso deben ser reemplazadas 107, apunte hacia arriba. Humedecer el anillo tôrico con agua y
por otras nuevas. montarlo sobre el eje. Prensar el anillo a fondo contra la pieza
La diferencia maxima admisible entre el diâmetro del anillo de de arrastre.
cojinete, pos. 47a, y el del cojinete en la cåmara intermedia, Asegurarse de que el anillo tôrico no se estropee por el agujero
pos. 4a, es de 0,4 mm. del eje. Los anillos de junta, pos. 103 y 104, no han de exponerse
A la verificaciôn, siempre es necesario reemplazar la tuerca ni a golpes ni a choques.
para el eje, las juntas y los anillos tôricos. Montar el anillo de junta, pos. 104. Girar las posiciones 104,111
El impulsor debe encajar en el anillo de junta. Si la tolerancia y 112 prensando ei muelle de modo que las piezas se acoplen.
(el juego) entre el anillo de junta y el impulsor es demasiado Cuando el anillo de junta estå apretado a fondo, el muelle debe
grande, reemplazar la pieza desgastada. poder empujarlo hacia arriba a una presiôn de muelle neutral.
Situar el anillo de junta, pos. 45, sobre la cåmara interme- Montar la cåmara intermedia superior, pos. 3, y el muelle
dia/cåmara de aspiraciön. Colocar el soporte, pos. 65, sobre el ondulado/muelle de disco, pos. 60.
anillo de junta y prensarlo a fondo de modo que se acople con
la cåmara intermedia/cåmara de aspiraciön. Montar la cubierta exterior, pos. 55, en la base. No olvidar la
junta, pos. 37, en la base.
Debe ser posible mover el anillo de junta libremente (de cos-
tado) entre el soporte y la cåmara intermedia. Antes de montar el cabezal de bomba, pos. 2, asegurarse de
que la junta, pos. 37, y la mitad fija del cierre mecânico estén
Nota: No se monta un anillo de junta en la cåmara intermedia, colocadas correctamente.
pos. 3a.
Lubricar las superficies de cierre de los anillos de junta, pos.
Humedecer con agua el anillo tôrico, pos. 102, y la cavidad del 103 y 104, con el aceite de siiicona, tipo VO 17 00 38.
cabezal de bomba para el anillo de junta, pos. 103. Montar el
anillo tôrico sobre el anillo de junta. Solamente lubricar las superficies de cierre.
El anillo de junta superior, pos. 103, no ha de exponerse ni a Montar el cabezal de bomba sobre el cuerpo de bomba con el
golpes ni a choques. tapôn de ilenado, pos. 18, en la posiciôn deseada.
Prensar con los dedos el anillo de junta en la cavidad del cabe- Untar los espårragos con THREAD-EZE. Numero de pedido, ver
zal de bomba. Humedecer con agua la junta, pos. 37, y colocarla "Pares de apriete". Montar las tuercas, pos. 36, y apretarlas
en la cavidad del cabezal de bomba. diagonalmente al par de apriete indicado, ver "Pares de aprie-
Si ei pasador (pasador de bloqueo), pos. 6a, en la base estå te".
deformado, montar un nuevo pasador. Montar el motor (con brida intermedia - 5,5-11 kW). Girar el mo-
Montar la junta, pos. 37, y la cåmara de aspiraciön, pos. 44, en tor a la posiciôn deseada de la caja de bornes. Untar los torni-
la base. El anillo de junta, pos. 45, debe dar hacia arriba. llos, pos. 28a, con THREAD-EZE, montar y apretarlos diago-
nalmente, ver "Pares de apriete".
Girar la cåmara de aspiraciön hasta que el pasador, pos. 6a, en
la base encaje en el agujero de la cåmara de aspiraciön. Apre- Montar el pasador, pos. 10, en el eje. Montar el acoplamiento,
tar la cåmara de aspiraciön a fondo contra la base. pos. 8. Untar los torniilos con hexågono interior, pos. 9, con.
THREAD-EZE. Numero de pedido, ver "Pares de apriete". Colo-
Colocar ei sujeiador para el eje, pos. C, en el tornillo de banco. car los tornillos en el acoplamiento y apretarlos ligeramente.
Colocar el eje, pos. 51, en el sujetador y apretar el tornillo de
banco. El extremo roscado del eje debe apuntar hacia arriba y Asegurarse de que la distancia entre las dos mitades de aco-
el extremo opuesto debe estar en el mismo piano que el borde piamiento es la misma en ambos lados.
inferior del sujetador para el eje.
Levantar .el cuerpo de bomba a su posiciôn mås eievada por
Montar el anillo retenedor, pos. 62, en la cavidad del eje. medio de un gran destornillador o. de una herramienta parecida
Continuar el montaje hasta el ultimo impulsor inclusive, ver insertado debajo del acoplamiento. No levantar el eje del motor.
"Orden de montaje para las câmaras intermedias y los impul- Bajar el cuerpo de bomba de 1 a 1,5 mm de su posiciôn mås
sores". elevada y apretar los tornillos con hexågono interior de dos en
Lubricar la rosca del eje con aceite, tipo BONDERLUBE. Numé- dos (mismo lado), ver "Pares de apriete".
ro de pedido, ver "Pares de apriete". Asegurarse de que la distancia entre las dos mitades de aco-
Montar la arandela, pos. 66, y la tuerca, pos. 67, y apretar la plamiento es la misma en ambos lados y que es posible girar
tuerca al par de apriete indicado, ver "Pares de apriete". el acoplamiento. Si la bomba opone una resistencia o no puede
girarse, hay que ajustar otra vez.
Quitar ei cuerpo de bomba del sujetador para el eje.
Montar la rejilla protectora del acoplamiento, pos. 7.
Montar el cuerpo de bomba con el extremo liso del eje hacia
arriba y prensarlo hasta que se acople con la cåmara de aspi- Ahora la bomba estå montada. Comprobar la presiôn y el cau-
raciön en la base. dal y comparar los resultados con los datos técnicos.
Ret til ændringer forbeholdes.

Subject to alterations.
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten.
Nous nous réservons tout droit de modifications.
Nos reservamos el derecho a modificaciones. -
25
#
GRUNDFOS A/S . DK-8850 Bjerringbro. Denmark

Telephone: + 45 86 6814 00 . Telefax: + 45 86 68 4517 GRUNDFOS'
NIJHUIS
INSTALLATION, OPERATION
AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
PUMPTYPE
VNC1-125420
FOR
NWB 171
PUMPSERIALNUMBER(S)
44623 / 44624
CONCERNING NIJHUIS PROJECT
165700
FOR
DESMI PUMPS
AND
FOR
PUMPTYPE
VNC1-125420
PUMPSERIALNUMBER(S)
44623-24
CONCERNING PROJECT
NEW BUILT 171

OF
DESMl
NUSXJ
FOREWORD
This manual contains directions and instructions for the installation, commissioning, operation
and maintenance of your pump. The key to a long operating life of your pump is to comply with
a carefully planned maintenance schedule. A pump operating under heavy working conditions
will require more attention than one operating under ideal conditions. Nijhuis Pompen B.V.
designs pumps in such a way that, with a minimum of idle time, simple inspections can be
carried out, maintenance programmes can be fulfilled and components can be replaced.
Nijhuis Pompen B.V. has several designs of pumps available for various applications. Due to this
fact, it is possible that the illustrations shown in this manual do not exactly represent the design
of your pump. The intentions is, however, to present a visualisation of a particular situation.
ISO 9001
The specifications for quality assurance during the design, development, production, installation
and maintenance are specified in the international standard ISO 9001.
Nijhuis Pompen B.V. has been granted the certificate according to ISO 9 0 0 1 .
TESTING
Each pump is tested in the test installation at Nijhuis Pompen B.V. The results of these tests are
also included in the manual.
NIJHUIS SERVICES
All after sales services are controlled by Nijhuis Services. This profit centre is a division of
Nijhuis Pompen B.V. and covers the following activities:
- Installation - Repairs/reconditioning
- Commissioning - Sale of spare parts
- Maintenance - Advice and support
For enquiries and further information please contact the address given below.
Please quote the type of pump and the serial number of the pump.
MANUFACTURER'S ADDRESS
Nijhuis Pompen B.V.
Parallelweg 4
P.O. box 102
7100 AC Winterswijk
The Netherlands
Telephone : + 31 543 547474

Facsimile : + 31 543 547475
CONTENTS
NUHXTCS
1. CONSTRUCTION 5
2. INSPECTION & STORAGE 6

2.1. Inspection 6
2.2. Storage 6
3. INSTALLATION 7
3.1. General i
3.2. Transport i
3.3. Foundations 8
3.4. Positioning the pump on the foundation 9
3.5. Piping io
3.6. Alignment 12
4. COMMISSIONING THE PUMP 13

4.1. Prior to commissioning ... 13
4.2. Commissioning 13
4.3. During operation 14
4.4. Problems during operation 14
4.5. To stop 14
5. MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION 15

5.1. General 15
5.2. Pump 15
6. MECHANICAL SEAL INSTRUCTIONS 17

6.1. General 17
6.2. Assembly instructions 17
7. DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY is

7.1. Disassembly sequence 18
7.2. After disassembly 18
7.3. Assembly 19
CONTENTS
MXXBUIS
8. APPENDIX 20
NÏJECXJ1S
1. CONSTRUCTION
Pumptype: VNC1
Pump housing: The pump housing is of a volute design. Within the pump, the liquid speeds
are diminished. This restricts wear to the minimum. By removing the electrical
motor and the pump pedestal, access can be gained to the inside of the pump
for inspection purposes. The inlet and outlet flanges can stay in place. The
outlet flange can be fitted in 3 positions, at varying angles of 9 0 ° . 'O'-rings
are used as seals between the pump housing, suction cover and stuffing box
or seal cover.
Impeller: Balanced in accordance with ISO 1940/1, class G 6,3.

The impeller has a single sided entry and, through the use of relief apertures,
the axial thrust on the impeller and the bearings is reduced.
Pump shaft: The pump shaft is protected by the shaft sleeve, upon which is fitted the
shaft sealing. The shaft sleeve is provided with an 'O'-ring seal and is locked
in position by the impeller key. The use of a tapered shaft end simplifies
removal of the impeller. The pump shaft and the bearings are enclosed in a
bearing housing, whereby very rapid replacement of the shaft and bearings as
a unit is made possible.
Sealing rings: The pump is provided with sealing rings in the pumphousing and the cover of
stuffing box or the seal cover, (with closed impellers).
Stuffing box: In general, the stuffing box contains packing rings. Various versions are,
however, possible such as, for example, packing rings with a lantern ring and
flushing water connection. Instead of packing rings, the stuffing box can con-
tain a mechanical seal.
Bearing: The pump is fitted with groove ball bearings. A spray ring, situated at the
pump side of the bearing, protects the bearing against spray water. Grease is
frequently used as lubricant for the bearings.
PUMP INSTRUCTIONS, PAGE 5

2. INSPECTION & STORAGE
Correct installation of the pump will result in a minimum in "down-time". "Down-time" refers to
the time required for subsequent periodic maintenance or the replacement of components.
Before commencing the installation, it is recommended that the following points are referred to.
2.1. Inspection
Upon receipt of the pump, inspect for damage and check that all ordered parts have arrived. It is
possible that some of the smaller components are packed separately.
All discrepancies should be immediately communicated to the company responsible for the
transportation and, also, to "Nijhuis Pompen B.V.".
2.2. Storage
Generally, the pump is delivered suitable for immediate installation. The method of delivery will
be in accordance with the conditions of delivery as specified in the sales contract.
The instructions given below refer only to the pump. Regarding the storage of the drive unit,
please refer to the manual issued by the relevant supplier/manufacturer.
2.2.1. Storage per a period of less than 3 months
If the pump is not to be installed immediately, it should be stored in a dry, dust-free area. The
pump flanges need to be closed, so that no foreign objects can enter the pump. Cover the pump
with plastic film.
2.2.2. Storage for a period exceeding 3 months
If the pump is to be stored for a lengthy period, it is recommended that the pump is protected in
the inside with conservation oil, e.g. Shell Ensis. This manual contains a list of recommended
oils and greases, and equivalent grades. Please refer to the index of the Appendix chapter. This
protective film of oil should, however, be removed before the pump is brought into commission.
It is also recommended that the pump shaft is rotated one quarter turn each month: this
prevents damage to the bearings and siezure of the rotating parts. If the pump is provided with
soft packing rings, these should be removed after storage. Renew the conservation oil every 12
months. Cover the pump with plastic foil.

3. INSTALLATION
3.1. General
A number of provisions should be considered when designing the premises in which the pump
(set) is to be installed. These are:
- The installation is carried out in a dry, well illuminated area.
- The unit is accessible from all sides, for inspection, maintenance and possible repairs.
- Sufficient hoisting facilities are available, with sufficient lifting power.

(Weight of the pump unit, or the components to be hoisted , are given in the
pumpspecifications)
- The suction pipe should be kept as short as possible, with a minimum of bends.
3.2. Transport
Movement of a horizontal pump - without drive unit - should only be with use of the hoisting
rings, or via the suction flange and the pump base, see figure 1. Otherwise, the pump can be
damaged. Movement of a vertical pump: see figure 2.
In all cases, never hoist via the pump shaft.
Figure 1 Figure 2

NUHUIS
Transport, continued
To facilitate hoisting of the pump, i.e. the pump with drive unit assembled on a common base
plate, hoisting tubes need to be passed through the pipes in the frame. The hoisting tubes can
be used to hoist the pump unit.
Figure 3
Warning : Never walk below the pump unit when hoisting.
3.3. Foundations
The pump unit should be installed on a sturdy foundation. Usual for such foundations are:
- A concrete foundation slab.
- A metal frame assembly.
A concrete foundation slab is most suitable, as distortion of such a slab is very unlikely. This
method is the most frequently used. The foundation should be designed and dimensioned
sufficient to carry the weight of the pump unit and, also, to fully absorb the vibrations that
occur when the pump is in full operation.
The pump should be brought into operation only after complete hardening of the concrete.

3.4. Positioning the pump on the foundation
The position of the anchor bolts are shown on the dimension drawings for the pump unit.
Place the pump unit in the correct position on wedges (or shims). Locate the wedges at four
corners under the base plate, as shown in figure 4. 6 or 8 sets of wedges are positioned below
pump units longer than 20 mtrs.
By adjusting the wedges, set the pump unit level. When doing so, adjust the height of the pump
unit so that there is a 20 - 40 mm gap between the base plate and the lower surface. Fit the
nuts to the anchor bolts and tighten these finger-tight.
The surface of the concrete base should be roughened, to ensure a good bonding surface for the
filler concrete. Construct a wooden shuttering for the foundation. The space between the
concrete base and the base plate can then be filled with free flowing cement mortar - shrink
free. Vibrate the mortar sufficiently to eliminate any air traps.
After sufficient hardening of the mortar, the anchor bolts can be tightened.
Subsequently, the adjustment should be checked for perfect accuracy, so ensuring that the
pump and motor are correctly aligned. Refer to chapter Alignment.
T
\T7
Figure 4

NIJEEUÏS
3.5. Piping
3.5.1. General
The pipes can be connected when the concrete foundation has hardened sufficiently and the
anchor bolts have been well tightened. To contribute to the trouble-free operation of the pump,
the following points should be observed during the fitting of the pipes.
The inside diameter of the flange packing rings should be at least as large as the inside
diameter of the piping. This to ensure that no interruptions occur in the flow path.
The pipes should be supported as closely as possible to the pump, so that the weight of
the pipes is not placed on the pump.
The pump and piping flanges should be placed exactly parallel and in correct alignment.
When connecting the flanges, no tension or pressure should be applied to the pump
flanges. It is recommended that compensation connections are included in the pipes, so
compensating for any deviations that may occur.
The flange bolts should be tightened gradually, crosswise..
3.5.2. Suction pipes CORRECT
A correctly positioned suction pipe

is very important for the correct
operation of a pump. Refer to figures
5a and 5b. After the fixture, check
the suction pipe against leakages.
Figure 5a
A. Pump.
B. Reducer.
# C. Suction pipe.
D. Pipe support.
E. Air trap.
INCORRECT
I
A | B c
i p.
i
i c--'"1—i
Keep the suction pipe as short and as straight i

i
t
i u
1 ^^
as possible. If bends are unavoidable, ensure
that they have asufficiently wide radius.
i
f
Figure 5b

Suction pipe, continued
Avoid bends close to the suction flange of the pump; these interrupt an even suction.
Care should be taken with the dimensioning of the pipes and connections, in accordance
with the pump capacity. So reducing the friction losses to a minimum.
If the suction pipe is larger than the pump suction flange, use should be made of an
eccentric reducer, so ensuring that no air remains in the piping.
3.5.3. Pressure pipes
The pressure pipes will be provided with a reverse flow valve, a stop-cock and in some cases a
reducer. Refer to figure 6.
The reverse flow valve protects the pump against a reverse flow of the liquid, as this would
cause the pump to rotate in the reverse direction when the pump was switched off. This
prevents damage to the pump. The reverse flow valve is situated between the pump and the
stop-cock.
If the diameter of the pressure pipe is larger than the pump flange, a concentric reducer
should be used.
A: Pump. E D O B A
B: Reducer.
C: Reverse flow valve.
^ \
\z. <~-
D: Stop-cock.
E: Pressure pipe.
F: Pipe support. WÊM,m.
Figure 6
3.5.4. Accessories
Fit the following connections:
- Air bleed outlet (at the highest point of the pump)
- Flushing connection to the packing gland
- Drain water connection from the packing gland
' - Drain connection from the pump housing
- Pressure lines for the manometers

3.6. Alignment
3.6.1. General
After positioning the pump unit on the foundations, and connecting the pipes, the installation
can be aligned. Frequently, horizontal pumps are supplied together with a drive unit on a single
base plate. The pump unit is, in such cases, already aligned, although the alignment can be
disturbed during transport and/or the fitting of the piping. Check, therefore, in all cases the
alignment and adjustment of the pump unit prior to it being commissioned.
Vertically installed pumps are frequently provided with a fitting flange into which an electrical
motor or gear box can be fitted. By using the fitting flange, the two components are automati-
cally aligned. Depending upon the size and installation it is possible that the electrical motor or
gear box are raised so far from the pump that an intermediate drive shaft (e.g. differential) is
needed to complete the drive connection.
If the pump is to be driven by a diesel motor, this motor will need to be positioned slightly lower
than the pump. When the diesel motor is started, a film of oil is created between the crank shaft
and the bearings. This lubrication lifts the crank shaft, depending upon the size of the diesei,
approx. 0.05 to 0.1 mm. Consideration to this will improve the quality of the alignment. This
compensation is not required for electrical motors, as the bearings are of a different type.
Correct alignment is very important.
Irrespective of the type of drive connection for the pump, the following points should always be
complied with:
- Parallel alignment of the shafts ; see par 8
- Concentricity of the shafts; see par 8
- Axial play between the two drive surfaces; see par 8
It is emphasized that the alignment needs to be done very accurately. Maintain, therefore, the
tolerances as given in the tables referring to the clutch specification manual. The Appendix gives
exact instructions regarding the alignment procedures.
An incorrectly aligned pump unit will result in e.g.:
- Heavier wear of both the motor bearings and the pump bearings, and to the coupling.
- Increase in noise level
- Increased vibration
- Lower efficiency
This will negatively influence the life of the pump.

3STIJHXJIS
4, COMMISSIONING THE PUMP
4.1. Prior to commissioning
Before starting the pump unit, it is advisable to check the entire installation. If necessary rinse
the pipes, or use temporary rinsing filters, if it is anticipated that any foreign objects could be
contained in the pipes.
Thoroughly check the entire installation.
Check that the motor is correctly connected. Refer to the manual for the motor.
Fit vacuum and pressures gauges to the pump or, if required,to the suction and pressure
pipes - as close as possible to the pump and at centre height.
Check that the reverse pressure valve is correctly adjusted.
Open the inlet valve and close the outlet valve.
Check that the inlet pipes and the pump are filled with the medium that is to be
pumped.
Check for correct direction of rotation. It is advisable that this is done with the motor
disconnected from the pump. The direction of rotation of the pump is shown by an
arrow on the pump housing.
Particularly when the pump is equipped with a mechanical seal, should the direction of
rotation be checked with the motor disconnected. The sealing surfaces must in this case
never run dry, as this would immediately damage the seal.
With pumps fitted with packing rings, a number of rotations is permitted during the
checking of the direction of rotation.
To determine the direction of rotation, one of the protective covers will need to be
removed temporarily. It is not permitted to enter the operational area of the pump during
the period that the cover is removed: danger. The protective cover should be replaced
immediately after checking the direction of rotation.
Check the shaft seals; it should be possible to turn the pump shaft by hand.
With pumps fitted with packing rings, the packing follower should be loosened a few
turns. Due to this, the amount of leakage water will increase when the pump operates.
This is necessary for running-in the packing.
Provisions should be made to catch the drain water via a drain pipe, otherwise the water
will drain onto the floor.
Check the flushing water connection on the packing gland. If use is made of a
separate flushing water supply unit, this should supply water before the pump is
started.
If so equipped, check the oil level of the bearings and/or the mechanical seal.
4.2. Commissioning
Start the pump.

NIJHUIS
The pump should start easily and operate without excessive vibration. If problems occur
when the pump is started or if excessive vibration occurs, the motor should immediately
be switched off, so that the cause can be located. Reference can be made to the trouble
shooting procedures, these are included in the Appendix.
Ensure that the pump does not operate with a greatly reduced capacity, or with the
outlet valve closed. In such cases, all the energy required to rotate the pump will be
transformed into heat. The temperature of the liquid in the pump may then reach boiling
point. The rotating parts will then lose their lubrication and their cooling, with drastic
consequences.
If the pump is equipped with shaft packing, this will require gradual tightening of the
packing follower. A leakage of 45 - 60 drops per minute is a correct measure. Leakage
water is necessary for lubrication and cooling of the shaft packing.
If the pump is equipped with a mechanical seal, a very slight leakage is permissible.
Check that the entire system is operating correctly.
It is advisable to check the bearing temperature at regular intervals. A temperature

increase of 50° to 60° is considered to be normal.
4.3. During operation

During operation, the pump should operate according to its characteristics, as these were the
basis for its selection and adjustment. The characteristics include the following specifications:
- Capacity
-Lift
- Power consumption
If the operating conditions change, the pump unit will require more attention. For example:
Pumping below freezing point

If, when the pump is idle, the ambient temperature can drop below freezing
point, the pump should be drained. To do this, remove the drain and vent
plugs from the bottom and top of the pump housing.
4.4. Problems during operation

The Appendix (8) section contains a list of possible defects and their probable causes. To
increase the speed and accuracy of reactions to possible problems, it is recommended that this
list is copied and displayed close to the pump.
If problems occur with the electrical motor or diesel motor, please refer to the relevant
manufacturer's documentation.
4.5. To stop
The closing instant of the valves/return valves should be adjusted such that no liquid flows back
into the pump when the pump is stopped.

NTJHTJIS
5. MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
5 . 1 . General
A carefully considered maintenance schedule is essential for optimal functioning of the pump
and installation. The maintenance level and frequency are partly determined by the objective, the
medium being pumped, ambient conditions and the load applied to the pump and installation.
Regular cleaning of the installation and the surrounding area will improve the quality and
efficiency of the maintenance work.
5.2. Pump
Daily
- Check the pump for: leakage, unusual noise, excess vibration.
Weekly
- Inspect the shaft sealing.
Packing: The quantity of leakage water should be sufficient to ensure correct

cooling and lubrication of the packing and shaft sleeve. Generally, 40 -
60 drops a minute is correct. When running at higher rpm, a greater
quantity of leakage water will be necessary. If necessary, vary the
quantity by adjusting the packing follower. If this adjustment has no
effect, the packing rings should be replaced. No leakage water leads
to wear of the shaft sleeve. Also, if fitted, check for a correct flow via
the flushing connections.
Mechanical Seal: Please refer to the manufacturer's instructions.
With oil lubrication: Check the oil level in the constant level oiler. Replenish as necessary.
Oil grade: Texaco R & O No. 32 or equivalent.
With flushing: Check that the flushing to the seal is sufficient.
- Check the bearing temperature.
Place a contact thermometer against the bearing housing and keep a close check on the
temperature. The stability of the temperature is frequently more indicative than the tempera-
ture readings. Generally, the temperature should not exceed 100°C. Excessively high
temperatures can be caused by insufficient lubrication, excessive lubrication, worn bearings
or incorrect alignment.

Pump, continued
Every 6,000 operating hours or after 1 year
Inspect the bearings. Remove all grease remains out of the bearings and bearing
housings. Rinse the components in cleaning spirit or acid free paraffin. Renew the oil or
grease.
Generally, a bearing temperature of 100°C should not be exceeded. At temperatures

exceeding 70°C accelerated ageing of the grease will occur. The greasing schedules will
need to be adapted to this. The entire open area in the bearing should be filled with
grease, and 30 to 50% of the open area in the bearing housing.
Grade of grease: Texaco Multifak EP 2 or equivalent.
Inspect, and replace as necessary:
- The packing rings or mechanical seal.
- The shaft sleeve(s).
Every 30,000 operating hours or after 5 years
Inspect, and replace as necessary:
- The bearings.
- The sealing ring(s).
- The impeller(s).
Regarding the maintenance and lubrication schedules for other components, such as transmissi-
on and drive systems, please refer to the user's manual issued by the relevant manufacturer.Re-
fer further to the index of the manual.
Please refer to the Appendix section for:
- Oil and grease specification lists, including equivalents.
- Maximum tightening torque for bolts and nuts.

ISTITHTCJIS
6. MECHANICAL SEAL INSTRUCTIONS

6.1. General
Mechanical seals are generally used when high demands are placed upon the shaft sealing.
Mechanical seals provide maximum closing, have a long life and require practically no
maintenance. The sealing is obtained by placing two opposing sealing rings against each other.
The surfaces of these rings are accurately machined thus leakage of fluid passing along the
contacting surfaces is minimized. The sealing surfaces are pressed together by means of a
spring. The stationary ring normally is the sealing ring, held in the seal cover. The rotaring ring
rotates with the pumpshaft and is usually known as the pressure side of the seal. Never allow
the seal to run dry when no lubrication and/or cooling is available. For proper use a lubricating
fluid in the seal chamber and a differential pressure between the two sides of the seal is
necessary. The stationary and rotary ring are enclosed in the seal cover and on the shaft by
means of o-rings or other flexible members. Either the spring or the pumped liquid provide the
necessary pressure on the flexible members.
6.2. Assembly instructions

Ensure that the seal chamber, inside which the mechanical seal is to be fitted, and the appropri-
ate areas of the shaft or the shaft sleeve are thoroughly cleaned prior to assembly.
When fitting the stationary reverse seal ring, ensure that the reverse seal is well enclosed by the
'O'-ring and does not tend to spring back. The assembly can be simplified by the use of soft
soap.
The sealing surfaces should be clean and free from grease. The use of grease on the sealing
surfaces is not advisable and, although a thin film of oil is allowed on the surfaces, it is best to
fit them perfectly dry.
With single mechanical seals, the sealing surfaces should be located directly below the flushing
connection. With dual mechanical seals with external flushing, the reverse flow should be such
that the liquid entry is located in the lower section of the sealing chamber - adjacent to one pair
of sealing rings - and the drainage occurs nearer to the top and close to the other pair of seals.
The pressure of the reverse flow in the sealing chamber should be approx. 1.5 to 2.0 bar higher
than the pressure of the liquid in the seal chamber.
Prior to starting the pump, or the opening of the intake valves in the suction and pressure pipes,
first apply the reverse flow of liquid. The temperature of the reverse flow of liquid must not
exceed 60°C.
For double mechanical seals, equipped with a quench' vessel (which is an atmospheric container,
filled with water or oil) a connection should be made from the space between the two mechani-
cal seals and the vessel.
The instructions given above emphasize that care should be taken when assembling mechanical
seals.
REFER ALSO TO THE INSTRUCTIONS GIVEN BY THE RELEVANT SEAL MANUFACTURER.

7. DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
VNC Execution : grease lubrication + mech.seal
Warning
Prior to commencing work on the pump unit, drain the pump housing and isolate the motor
from the main supply. During the work, ensure that it is impossible for anyone to fill the
pump or to start the motor.
It is advisable, during the dismounting of the pump, to lay aside the various components in a
systematic manner, so that the reassembly of the pump is simplified.
7.1» Disassembly sequence

The rotorgroup can be dismounted without removing the suction and discharge pipes. Begin
by disconnecting the e-motor and remove it, including the coupling halves.
Remove the motorbracket. If applicable move flushing pipe to the stuffingbox. Untighten the
nuts of the bearing bracket of the pumpbracket and remove the rotorgroup from the
pumpcasing. Place the rotorgroup carefully horizontal on wooden supports.
The wearring can stay in the pumpcasing. Disassemble the impellernut. Consequently the
impeller the impeller can can be disassembled. Because the impeller has a conic shaft
passage it can be disassemled easily by tapping firmly against it.
Consequently the seal cover can be taken out of the fitting recess, ensure that the seal does
not get damaged. Loosen the set screw and the clamp bolt, after which the complete
rotorgroup can be taken from the bearing bracket.
Subsequently the rotorgroup can be dismounted further, by taking of the impellerkey. After
which shaftslëeve and thrower will be removed. After dismounting of both bearing covers,
the bearings can be removed.
7.2. After disassembly

Protect all components against damage.
Clean the bearings with white spirit, acid-free parafin or another suitable cleaning agent.
Inspect the bearings and, if necessary, replace them. If replacement is not necessary, it is
advisable to treat the bearings immediately with oil or grease, so preventing any rust
occurring.
Inspect the shaft sleeves for wear. Replace if necessary.
Check the joint surfaces of the seal, and replace if necessary.
Check the play between the impeller and wearring, if necessary replace the wearring.
(Par 8 - curve)

Check the packingrinqs, o-rings etc. for damage and wear, replace if necessary.
NIJHUIS
Clean the joint surfaces of both pumphalves thouroughly and check the flange edges for
damage.
If it is not necessary to install the pump immediately, treat all plain surfaces with conserva-
tion-oil, e.g. Shell Ensis.
7.3. Assembly
Starting with the shaftgroup first fit the bearings to the pump shaft. Starting with the
bearings at the drive end. Heat the inner ring of the bearings up to 80° C. (not with an open
flame) and lubricate them with grease. Fit the bearings on the pumpshaft, tapping carefully
against the inner ring of the bearings. Fit the tab washer and the shaft nut. Ensure that the
lip of the tab washer is located in the recess in the shaft nut. Slide the bearing housing over
the shaft and tap the housing over the bearings. Then, heat the other bearing and slide it
into the pump shaft. Carefully tap the bearing inside the bearing housing. Then fill the
bearing with new grease. Apply a thin film of oil on the felt strips and fit the strips inside the
bearing housing covers. Slide distance bush against the bearing and secure the covers with
bolts.
After cleaning (degrease) and inspecting the sealing chamber, the joint surfaces and the
fitting recesses, slide the complete shaft section into the pump support.
Slide the grease thrower onto the pump shaft against the distance bush and lock the
thrower with a set screw, jnsert the "O"-ring in the shaft sleeve and slide the shaft sleeve
over the shaft and against the spray ring. Fit the impellerkey.
Mount the complete rotorgroup into the bearing housing (set screw and bolt are mounted at
the last stage).
Fit the sealing rings in the seal cover and position both in the fitting recess of the pump
support and fit the seal. Now mount the pump casing (do not forget the "O"-ring) when the
nuts are secured the seal cover will be fixed as well.
Please tighten the nuts crosswise.
Now position the impeller into the shaft and lock with the impellerkey. Ensure that the lip
of the tab washer is firmly against the impellemut, so that the nut cannot loosen.
Mount the suction cover. The rotorgroup can now be positioned. Ensure setscrew and bolt.
(By sliding the rotor, total axial play can be determined, the rotor has to be locked in the
centre).
Check that the pump shaft rotates freely. If not recheck the above instruction step by step.
If applicable, reconnect the flushing line to the seal cover.
When the pump has been assembled, recheck for certainty that all bolts are securely
tightened.

8. APPENDIX ISTUHTJIS
Oil and grease chart + equivalents
Maximum tightening torque
Trouble-shooting list

STIJETCJXS
Oil- / greaseüst
LUBRICATION OIL GREASE

ambient-temp. < ambient-temp. >
30° C 30° C
RECOMMEN- Texaco Regal Oil A R & 0 Regal Oil B R & 0 Multifak EP 2

DED (ISO VG 32) (ISO VG 46)
EQUIVALENT Shell Turbo Oil T 25 Turbo Oil T 29 Alvania EP 2
Mobil DTE Oil Light DTE Oil Medium Mobilux EP2 or

Mobil Grease
HP222
BP Energol TH 65-HB Energol TH 80-HB Energrease LS-EP 2
Esso Teresso 43 Teresso 46 Beacon EP 2
Castrol Perfecto T 32 Perfecto T 46 Spheerol EPL 2

Fina Bakola R & 0 32 Bakola R & 0 34 Marson EP L2
Gulf Gulfcrest 44 Gulfcrest 47 Crowngrease EP 2
Chevron OC Turbine Oil 32 OC Turbine Oil 46 Dura-Lith EP 2

Maximum tightening torques
Below list shows the maximum advised tightening torques for standard bolts and nuts according
the International Standard Organisation.
Quality 6.6 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9
Torque Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm
Nominal
threaddiameter
in m m .
8 16 30 33 41 50
10 33 58 66 82 98
12 57 102 114 143 171
14 91 162 182 227 273
16 142 252 281 355 426
18 195 247 391 488 586
20 111 492 551 693 830
22 311 670 753 941 1130
24 479 851 957 1196 1436
27 700 1245 1401 1750 2100
These tightening torques are only for common use. Sometimes it is advised to use other values.
This depends of course on the material used for the bolts and nuts. If there is any doubt, do not
hesitate to consult Nijhuis Pompen B.V.

Trouble-shoot list
MALFUNCTIONS FOR CAUSES, SEE NUMBERS.
A. No liquid delivered. 1-2-3-5-8-26-27-28-30-31-35

B. Not enough liquid delivered. 2-3-4-5-7-8-14-15-16-26-27-28-30-31-34-35
C. Not enough pressure. 2-7-8-14-15-16-28-34-35
D. Pump fails after start up. 1-2-3-4-5-6-27-30-35
E. Pump takes too much power. 7-8-9-11-12-14-15-18-21-22-32-34
F. Pump vibrates and is noisy. 1-5-8-9-10-11-12-13-14-15-19-20-22-23-24-
25-27-30-32
G. Stuffingbox is leaking excessively. 9-11-17-18-19-20-33
H. Too much wear of the packing-rings. 6-9-11-13-17-18-19-20-21-33
I. Too much wear of the bearings. 9-11-12-19-20-22-23-24-25
K. Pump is getting hot and/or stops. 9-12-13-19-20-22-23-24-25
L. Overloading of the electricmotor. 7-9-12-13-19-20-22-23-24-25-29-30-34
CAUSES OF THE MALFUNCTION
1. Pump and suction pipe not completely filled.

2. Gas or air is disentraining from the pumped liquid.
3. Air-pocket in the suctionpipe.
4. Air-leaking through the stuff ingbox.
5. Inlet of the suction pipe is not immersed deeply enough.
6. Flushing line is plugged.
7. Wrong direction of rotation.
8. Impeller is plugged.
9. Misalignment of the shafts.
10. Alignment pump - motor is not correct.
I1. The shaft is out of straight.
12. Rotating parts are rubbing against stationary parts.
13. Bearing are worn out.
14. The wearring(s), impeller(s) or wearplate(s) are worn out.
15. Impeller damage.
16. Casing gaskets damaged.
17. Shaft or shaft sleeve scored; packing damaged; running surface of M-seal damaged.
18. Packing not correctly inserted.
19. The shaft is turning eccentrically because of worn bearings or bad alignment.
20. Rotating parts are out-of-balance.
21. Stuffing box packing too tight. Therefore no liquid between shaft and packing.
22. Improper lubrication or not enough lubricant in the bearings.
23. Improper lubrication.
24. Bearings have become dirty or contaminated with solids.
25. Bearings coroded by moistry or water.
26. Discharge head is calculated too low.
27. The suction head is too high or the NPSH is to low.
28. Speed too low.
29. Speed too high.
30. Obstruction in suction line.
31. Obstruction in discharge line.
32. Pump is not running at its working point(s).
33. Incorrect kind of packing used.
34. The liquids-density is too low or the liquids-viscosity is too high.
35. The suction line is admitting air.

m NIJHTTTS

INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
Pump nr.: 44623 & 44624
Pump type VNC1-125.420

Order nr. 165740 '
10
Customer DESMI.. A/S E SMITHSKE
Purchase order
Project DESMI
Item/tag nr NO. 171
Required data Test data
Capacity 300 251 M3/h
Differential head 82 57.5 M.l.c.
Pumpspeed 1785 1495 R.p.m.
Shaft power 80 47 kW
Motor power 125 kW
Efficiency 75 %
NPSH required 4 M.l.c.
Ml
Performance test and acceptance criteria ace.: ISO 2548 CL.C.
Test results see PUMP PERFORMANCE TEST SHEET of above mentioned

pump nr(s).
Performance test executed by : M. Tolkamp
Performance.test witnessed by : Lloyds
Hydrostatic test of the pump

Test pressure 14 Bar
Test period 3 0 Minutes
Result No leakage
Hydrostatic test executed by M. Tolkamp
Hydrostatic test witnessed by Lloyds
Materials of the mainparts of the pump

Pumpcasing/covers : Brons 88.10.2
Pumpshaft(s) : R.V.S. 4122
Impeller(s) : Alu. Brons F60/F70
Column-pipes :
Pump is tested with water of 17 degrees Celsius.

Pump tested with the following equipment :
Equipment Driver Controller Gearbox
Make ABB
Type M2BA280 SMC
Serial nr. 3925917 & 3425053
Power 125 kW
Lloyds nr. 0000834 & 0000806
Date: 11-09-2000 above mentioned data reviewed and accepted:

Customer Authorised Inspector Nijhuis Q-C
Lloyds M. Tolkamp
1
l.OYD'S REGISTER r^ NIJHUISQ-c
R. Faith
D
5SSED .//' DATE
PUMP PERFORMANCE TEST SHEET
Pump nr.: 44623
Date : 4-SEP-2000
Order nr. 165740 Gégevens van AC-motor:

Pumptype VNC1-125.420 E 440 [Volt]
T
Impeller pattern nr. 837060 196.00 [Amp. ;
rotation CCW n = 1782 [rpm;
diameter [mm] 420 P 125.00 [kW]
width [mm] 18.0 P.F. = 0.880
Test Speed [rpm] 1495 Eff = 0.951
Curve nr. Trafo-fact = 2.000
Measured on suctionline = 150 [mm] and o n dischargeline = 125 [mm]

Q-H measurements
Mnr. Q [irT3/h] Hsuct [m] Hdisch [m] Hveloc [m] Hman [m]
1 251*00 1 .95 53.00 0.85 55.80
2 295.00 2 .35 47.20 .18 50.73
3 325.00 2 .75 42.00 .43 46.18
4 365.00 3 .25 33 .00 .80 38.05
5 200.00 1 .55 58 .20 .54 60.29
6 100.00 1 .00 62 .50 .14 63.64
7 50.00 0.85 62.00 .03 62.88
0.00 0.80 62.00 • 0.00 62.80
Q-P measurements and efficiency calculations
AC-electro motor. Additional factor = 1.000

Correctionfactor for power calculation = 1.902
Mnr. n [rpm] P-display [kW] P-shaft [kW] Pump eff.[%]
1 1495 26.70 50.78 75.1
2 28.40 54.01 75.5
3 1495 29.70 56.49 72.4
4 30.80 58.58 64.6
5 1496 23 .90 45.46 72.3
6 16.80 31.95 54.3
7 1499 13 .10 24.91 34.4
8 9.90 18.83 0.0
Q-cavitationlimit [m"3/h] Left: 0

Right: 3 65
Remarks s WE
The plotted curves have been recalculated from the
testspeed 1495 to 1780 [rpm]
LLOYD'S REGISTER
R. Feith
GVfrR+B-ED
DATE
Pump Impeller
type: VNCl-125.420 max./min, ; 429/355 curveno.:

I no. : 44623 rated • : 420*18 date : 04-09-00
'^m/tagno: 171 drawingno.: L837060 rpm. : 1495
sg. 1000 [kg/m •3J
en _,
, —
— —
— =
——
—
c=n
4-1
4-1 ^ ^
ro ^^
/tn -
--^
eu
•qn _
o
o.
,—
20 -
10 -
n
0 -
nr
rtf
c
<D ri»- —
o
M-
^- \
/
/
A
/
"i
80
70
0)
iZ
65
—^ .
o
60
55
50
45
\
40 O Vr V n ~> 1 s
i i L. 2 1 Ö
R Ta
h <
35
3R EV ev IfJ -j
Ff ^Pj, - n
IT IB D ) DA TF
f
30
//-
0 50 iOf 150 200 250 300 350 400
Capacity [m"3/h]
CD
INI
Nijhuis Pompen bv
CD
O p.o. box 102
(Ni
O) 7100 AC Winlerswijk - Holland Copyright reserved
Pump Impeller
"type: VNCl-125.420 max./min. : 4 2 9 / 3 5 5 curveno. :

! no. : 44623 rated : 420x18 date : 04-09-00
im/tagno: 171 draw ingno. : L 8 3 7 0 6 0 rpm. : 1780
c
5g. 100 0 Lkg /m 3
120 -r 1
.—. tnu .
C
[ kWatt
_ J
—
, -
^**
cD
c
Power
en
o
40 - .-*
20 -
0 -
Of (1
C
0) —
** —
" -nr—.
u
•rH
*+-
\
pr
/
/
/
/i
/
95
p- —
saanm
— —.
i—t
lo 85
ro
QJ
\ s
rt 80
(D
-U
O
\
•- 75
s
70 S
\
65
\
60 \
: V
10 Y r R RF R TF R
RR
R Fe h \
ÉF :E\J IE D f& ttp EC I2C
)
:L) u IL
50
it •0
>.
—^
- • - *
45
0 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640
Capacity [m"3/h]
CO
CM
Nijhuis Pompen bv
UO
O p.o. box 102
CN
O ) •-, 7100 AC . Winierswijk - Holland Copyright reserved
Electric driven pumpsets
PUMPTYPE VNC1-125.420 VNC1-125.420 VNC1-125.420

PUMP SERIAL NUMBER(S) 44623 / 44624 44625 / 44626 44627 I 44628
PROJECT NO. 165740 165745 165750
ITEM/TAGNO. 171 172 173
MACHINERY DIRECTIVE 89/392/EEC, AS AMENDED BY 91/368/EEC, 93/44/EEC AND 93/68/EEC

LOW- VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE EN-6Q204 AND EMC DIRECTIEVE 89/336/EEC, (92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC).
OTHER APPLICABLE
WE, NIJHUIS POMPEN, DECLARE THAT UNDER OUR SOLE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SUPPLY OF
THE MACHINERY DEFINED ABOVE, THE SAID MACHINERY IS IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL THE
DIRECTIVES AND REGULATIONS ESSENTIAL TO REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING HEALTH AND
SAFETY MENTIONED ABOVE.
SIGNED FOR MANAGING DIRECTOR:
L.Harbers 21-09-2000. Winterswijk NEDERLAND.

1 ofl
CERTIFICATE FOR PUMPS
LR Office Certificate number

Amsterdam - Sub Office Apeldoorn APE 0009175/1
Manufacturer Date
Nyhuis Pompen B.V. 27 Sep 2000
P.O. Box 102 Work's order number
7100 ACWinterswijk
Built under licence from (if applicable) Designer
Nijhuis Pompen B.V.
Client Intended for
Nijhuis Pompen B.V. Winterswijk DESMI 171
First date of inspection Final date of inspection
And 11-09-2000
This certificate is issued to the above Client to certify that the pump(s) described herein, were surveyed at the manufacturer's
works and that satisfactory hydraulic running tests were witnessed.
PARTICULARS
Manufacturer's designation Pump serial number(s)
End Suction Pump 44623
Rotating CCW 44624
Pump type Intended service

VNCI -125.420 Fire - And Gen. Serv. Pump
The pump(s) described herein comply with the requirements of Lloyd's Register's Rules and Regulations in connection with the
intended service.
HYDRAULIC TEST
Test pressure on pumping casing or cylinders (bar) Test pressure on steam cylinders (bar)
14
Test pressure on steam jackets (bar)
RUNNING TEST
Capacity delivered Number of double strokes or revs per minute
251 Resp 251 m3/h 1495 Resp 1495
Discharge pressure Total head
55.8 Resp. 56.22 M.L.C.
ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN PUMPS STEAM DRIVEN PUMPS
Volts Steam pressure (bar)

440 V
Amperes Exhaust pressure (bar/mm Hg)
196
Supply frequency (hertz)
60 Hz
IDENTIFICATION MARKS
Identification number (including office contraction code)
LR APE 0009175/1
T.P. (bar) Initials and date
14 RF 09/00
Remarks Signature - Surveyofto Lloyd's Register of Shipping

Ejector Equipment to be provided.
Converted Capacity 300 m3/lv Head
82 M.L.C. AT 1785 rpm.
R. Feith
FORM 1085 (10/94) Lloyd's Register of Shipping, registered office: 71 Fenchurch Street, London EC3M 4BS
. = THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO THE JJRMS AND CONDITIONS OVERLEAF

TERMS AND CONDITIONS
The following terms and conditions apply to all services pro- behalf of each of whom this notice is given) shall be under
vided by Lloyd's Register of Shipping (hereinafter referred liability or responsibility in negligence or otherwise how-
to as "LR"). soever to any person who is not a party to the agreement
with LR pursuant to which any certificate, statement, data
1. LR's services do not assess compliance with any standard or report is issued in respect of any information or advice
other than the applicable rules of LR, international con- expressly or impiiedly given by LR
ventions, and /or other standards agreed in writing by or any of its officers, employees or agents or in respect of
LR and the client. any omission or inaccuracy therein or in respect of any act
2. All invoices issued by LR must be paid by the client within or omission which has caused or contributed to any certi-
30 days of the date of the invoice. If any amount due to LR ficate, statement, data or report being issued with the
remains unpaid after the 30 days in which it is payable, information and advice it contains (if any). Nothing herein
LR shall be entitled to charge interest on such amount at a will create rights pursuant to the United Kingdom
rate of two percent (2%) above the London Interbank Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 in favour of
Offered Base Rate (LIBOR) or the equivalent in the coun- any person who is not a party to the contract with LR.
try where the client is based, whichever is the greater, from
10. No other document purporting to impose additional
that date until the date of actual payment, and to withhold
liability on LR, or any of its officers, employees or agents
any or all of its services until such time as payment of the
for the provision of LR's services will be effective unless
said amount, and the interest thereon, is received by LR.
presented to and signed by an authorised LR representati-
3. LR reserves the right to charge for any extra costs which ve.
are incurred as a result of delays, cancellations, postpone-
11. The client agrees that LR and any of its officers, employees
ments or suspensions resulting from the client's instructi-
or agents will be assureds under the client's relevant insu-
ons, lack of instructions or mistakes for which LR is not
rance and that full waiver of rights of subrogation are
responsible, or any requirements, alteration, amendment
provided by relevant underwriters to LR or any of its offi-
or change to the specification or scope of LR's services.
cers, employees or agents.
4. Unless stated to the contrary, the fees quoted for LR's
The following terms and conditions apply only to
services exclude all costs of re-inspection, abortive visits or
classification services provided and documents issued by LR:
the appraisal of drawing revisions. Such additional costs
will be .notified to the client as and when they occur and 12. Any damage, defect, breakdown or grounding, which
will be added to the contract price. could invalidate the conditions for which a class has been
assigned, is to be reported to LR without delay.
5. The contract shall continue in force unless terminated by
either LR or the client giving the other 30 days prior writ- 13. All repairs to hull, equipment and machinery which may
ten notice of termination. be required in order that a ship may retain her class are to
be carried out to the satisfaction of LR's surveyors. When
6. If for whatever reason the contract is terminated by either
repairs are effected at a port, terminal or location where '
LR or the client before completion of LR's services, LR's
the services of an LR surveyor are not available, the
charge for the services rendered will be calculated on a pro
repairs are to be surveyed by one of LR's surveyors at the
rata basis up to the date of termination. The addition of
earliest opportunity thereafter.
any reasonable costs directly attributed to early termina-
tion, and any amounts then due to LR will immediately 14. Plans and particulars of any proposed alterations to the
become payable in full. approved scantlings and arrangements of hull, equipment,
or machinery are to be submitted to LR for approval, and
7. Any dispute concerning the provision of LR's services
such alterations are to be carried out to the satisfaction of
and/or the contract under which such services are provi-
LR's surveyors.
ded is subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English
courts and will be governed by English law. 15. It is the responsibility of the Owner to ensure that all
surveys necessary for the maintenance of class are carried
8. In providing services, information or advice, neither LR
out at the proper time and in accordance with the instruc-
nor any of its officers, employees or agents warrant the
tions of LR.
accuracy of any information or advice supplied. Except as
set out herein, neither LR nor any of its officers, employees 16. LR gives timely notice to an Owner about forthcoming
or agents (on behalf of each of whom LR has agreed this surveys by means of Class Direct Live, a letter or a quar-
clause) shall be liable for any loss, damage or expense terly computer print-out The omission of such notice,
whatever sustained by any person due to any act, however, does not absolve the Owner from responsibility
omission or error of whatsoever nature and howsoever to comply with LR's survey requirements for maintenance
caused or allegedly caused by LR or by any of its officers, of class.
employees or agents or due to any inaccuracy of whatsoe-
ver nature and howsoever caused in any information or 17. "When the Regulations with regard to surveys on the hull,
advice given in any way whatsoever by or equipment or machinery have not been complied with and
on behalf of LR even if held to amount to a breach of war- the ship is thereby not entitled to retain class, the class will
ranty. Nevertheless, if the client uses LR's services or relies be suspended or withdrawn, at LR's discretion.
on any information or advice given by or on behalf of LR
18. When reported defects in the hull, equipment or
and suffers loss, damage or expense thereby which is pro-
machinery are found and the Owner fails to repair such
ved to have been due to any negligent act, omission
defects in accordance with LR's requirements, the class
or error of LR, its officers, employees or agents or any
will be suspended or withdrawn, at LR's discretion.
negligent inaccuracy in information or advice given by or
on behalf of LR, then LR will pay compensation to the 19. LR has the power to withhold or, if already granted, to
client for his proved loss up to but not exceeding the suspend or withdraw any class (or to withhold any certifi-
amount of fee (if any) charged by LR for that particular cate or report in any other case), in the event of non-
service information or advice. payment of any fee.
9. Neither LR, nor any of its officers, employees or agents (on
STUKLIJST/PARTLIST
TEKENING NR. 23709 A4 - 346117 A3 -TYPE VNC1-125420
NR. RFNIAMINf! DFSCRIPTION
1. Kogellagerhuis Bearing cartridge

2. Lagerdeksel Bearing cover
3. Lagerdeksel Bearing cover
4. Afwerpschijf Thrower
5. Ring Ring
6. Pompas Pumpshaft
7. Diepgroeflager Radial ball bearing
8. Diepgroeflager Radial ball bearing
9. Borgplaat Lockwasher
10. Lagermoer Bearing nut
11. Viltring Feltring
12. Viltring Feltring
13. Inlegspie Key
14. inlegspie Key
15. Tapbout Stud
16. Tapbout Stud
17. Stelschroef m.binn.zesk. Hexagonal socket set screw
41. Lagerstoel Bearing bracket

42. Stelschroef m.binn.zesk. Hexagonal socket set screw
43. Cil.kopschr.m.binn.zesk. Hexagonal head cap screw
51. Sealhuis Seal casing

52. Sealdeksel Seal cover
53. Dichtingsring Wearring
54. Stelring Positionning ring
55. Asbus Shaftsleeve
56. Burgmann Seal Mechanical seal
57. Zeskantsbout Hexagon bolt
58. Pijpnippel Nipple
59. O-ring O-ring
60. Olie reservoir Oil container
61. Sok Socket
62. Pijpnippel Nipple
63. O-ring O-ring
64. Simmerring Radial shaft seal
65. Stelschroef Hexagon socket set screw
66. Koppeling Pipe coupling
67. Leiding Piping
68. koppeling Pipe coupling
69. Rechte koppeling Coupling
70. Sluitring Lock washer
76. Pomphuis Pumpcasing

77. Inlaatdeksel Suctioncasing
78. Waaier Impeller
79. Dichtingsring Casing wearring
80. Waaiermoer Impeller nut
81. Borgplaat Lockwasher
82. "O"-ring "O"-ring
83. "O "-ring "O"-ring
84. Tapeind Stud
85. Zeskantmoer Hexagon nut
86. Tapeind Stud
87. Zeskantmoer Hexagon nut
88. Plug Hexagon head plug tapered
89. Onderlegring Lockwasher
90. Plug Hexagon head plug tapered
91. Onderlegring Lockwasher
o
\ \ \ WWW
>.\\\\\\\ \ \ J
y
m SAMENSTELLING.
Machinefabnek G.J. NIJHUIS bv Tek n 2
swijk Holland 237O9
-€3- [ rottwiAAT A2
60161162169
For untolerated dimensions: Roughness ace. to Trim sharp edges

Casting : ISO 8062 ISO 13(12 with: 0.5^ x 0,5*
Welded parts : ISO 2768-v Form qnd position toi. Fillet all undercuttings
Machined surfaces : ISO 2768-m according to NEN-ISO 1101 with R=0,2
*=unless otherwise indicat,
N I JZZX7ZS P O M P E N IQES D DRN.: P.B. CHK, APP.:
i D.D. 26-05-200C D.D. 26-05-200C D.D

P.0.B0X 102 3D-C00RJ D
ÜJ
tu z 7100 AC Winterswijk - Holland
ME10 (CAD) E] PROJECTION
o o z
in \D
\P O
II
u
DESCRIPTION:
SCALE 1:2
{/) ÜJ
Q
LU
LU CC
SEALGEDEELTE This document is our property and must not be copied
o o
CL h-
VNC1-125.420 without our written permission, and the contents
i M.P, M.P. DRN.

)5-09-200C30-08-200( DATE
REV.
BURGMANN MG1-G60
ORIGIN: MOdEL/ART.N0.
thereof must not be disclosed to any third party,
nor be used for any unauthorised purpose.
DWQ./ART.N0.
3.46.1.1Z L .
REV.
B
NIJHUIS
AND
FOR
PUMPTYPE
VDL1-30.45
FOR
NWB171
PUMPSERIALNUMBER(S)
44611 / 44612
CONCERNING NIJHUIS PROJECT
165700
FOR
DESMI PUMPS
This manual contains directions and instructions for the installation, commissioning, operation
and maintenance of your pump. The key to a long operating life of your pump is to comply with
a carefully planned maintenance schedule. A pump operating under heavy working conditions
will require more attention than one operating under ideal conditions. Nijhuis Pompen B.V.
designs pumps in such a way that, with a minimum of idle time, simple inspections can be
carried out, maintenance programmes can be fulfilled and components can be replaced.
Nijhuis Pompen B.V. has several designs of pumps available for various applications. Due to this
fact, it is possible that the illustrations shown in this manual do not exactly represent the design
of your pump. The intentions is, however, to present a visualisation of a particular situation.
ISO 9001
The specifications for quality assurance during the design, development, production, installation
and maintenance are specified in the international standard ISO 9001.
Nijhuis Pompen B.V. has been granted the certificate according to ISO 9 0 0 1 .
TESTTOG
Each pump is tested in the test installation at Nijhuis Pompen B.V. The results of these tests are
also included in the manual.
WIJHUIS SERVICES
All after sales services are controlled by Nijhuis Services. This profit centre is a division of
Nijhuis Pompen B.V. and covers the following activities:
-Installation -Repairs/reconditioning
-Commissioning -Sale of spare parts
-Maintenance -Advice and support.
For enquiries and further information please contact the address given below.
Please quote the type of pump and the serial number of the pump.
Nijhuis Pompen B.V.

Parallelweg 4
Post box 102
7100 AC Winterswijk
Holland
Telephone : + 3 1 543 547474

Facsimile : + 31 543 547475
Telex :44185 "
CONTENTS
. 5
iPECTION & STORAGE „ 6

Inspection •6
ie 6
7
7
7
3=3. Foundations 8
3.4. Positioning the pump on the foundation 9
3=5» Piping 9
io
...... 11
H
12
4.3* During operation 12
12
13
5.1, General 13
13
15
15
15
16
16
17
17
CONTENTS
20
Pomptype: VDL
The dome-shaped pump housing has been so designed that optimum functio-
ning of the pump is obtained when the entire (lower) pump housing is entirely
submerged. The pump housing is fitted to the bottom of the lift tube. 'O'-
rings are used as seals between the pump housing, suction cover and lift
tube.
impeller: Balanced in accordance with ISO 1940/1, class G 6,3.

The impeller is provided with relief apertures to reduce the axial thrust
sufficiently to comply with the required pressure for the pivot bearing.
Sealing rings: Many of the pumps are provided with two sealing rings per impeller (one at
front end, one at rear).
Shafts: In the area adjacent to the bearing bushes (intermediate bearings and pump
housing) and the shaft seal (stuffing box) the shaft is protected by shaft
sleeves.
Lift tube: The liquid drawn into the pump housing is forced upwards through the lift
tube. Also, the lift tube supports the intermediate bearings serving the
intermediate shafts. In pumps with freely rotating shafts, the intermediate
bearings are lubricated by the medium flowing up through the lift tube. In
pumps with an inner pipe, the intermediate bearings are lubricated via an
external supply.
Stuffing box: The stuffing box is located in the outlet bend and, in general, it encloses
packing rings. Various versions are however possible. Instead of packing
rings, the stuffing box can contain a mechanical seal.
THE OUTLET BEND IS SITUATED ABOVE THE PUMP FOUNDATION
Bearings: Drive shaft: Pivot bearing
Intermediate shaft and pumpshaft: Bearing bushes.
The pivot bearing is protected against water spray out of the stuffingbox. Oil
is used to lubricate the pivot bearing. The intermediate bearings are lubricated
either by the medium or by an external supply of liquid. These bearing bushes
can run dry for short periods without any wear occurring.
Depending upon the application, multiple pomp housings can be fitted.

VDL
Pump housing: The dome-shaped pump housing has been so designed that optimum functio-
ning of the pump is obtained when the entire (lower) pump housing is entirely
submerged. The pump housing is fitted to the bottom of the lift tube. 'O'-
rings are used as seals between the pump housing, suction cover and lift
tube.
Impeller: Balanced in accordance with ISO 1940/1, class G 6,3.

The impeller is provided with relief apertures to reduce the axial thrust
sufficiently to comply with the required pressure for the pivot bearing.
Sealing rings: Many of the pumps are provided with two sealing rings per impeller (one at
front end, one at rear).
Shafts: In the area adjacent to the bearing bushes (intermediate bearings and pump
housing) and the shaft seal (stuffing box) the shaft is protected by shaft
sleeves.
Lift tube: The liquid drawn into the pump housing is forced upwards through the lift
tube. Also, the lift tube supports the intermediate bearings serving the
intermediate shafts. In pumps with freely rotating shafts, the intermediate
bearings are lubricated by the medium flowing up through the lift tube. In
pumps with an inner pipe, the intermediate bearings are lubricated via an
external supply.
Stuffing box: The stuffing box is located in the outlet bend and, in general, it encloses
packing rings. Various versions are however possible. Instead of packing
rings, the stuffing box can contain a mechanical seal.
THE OUTLET EEWD IS SITUATED ABOVE THE PUWIF FOÜWDATSOM
Drive shaft: Pivot bearing
Intermediate shaft and pumpshaft: Bearing bushes.
The pivot bearing is protected against water spray out of the stuffingbox. Oil
is used to lubricate the pivot bearing. The intermediate bearings are lubricated
either by the medium or by an external supply of liquid. These bearing bushes
can run dry for short periods without any wear occurring.
Depending upon the application, multiple pump housings can be fitted.

Correct installation of the pump will result in a minimum in "down-time". "Down-time" refers to
the time required for subsequent periodic maintenance or the replacement of components.
Before commencing the installation, it is recommended that the following points are referred to.
Upon receipt of the pump, inspect for damage and check that all ordered parts have arrived. It is
possible that some of the smaller components are packed separately.
All discrepancies should be immediately communicated to the company responsible for the
transportation and, also, to "Nijhufs Pompera B.V.".
Generally, the pump is delivered suitable for immediate installation. The method of delivery will
be in accordance with the conditions of delivery as specified in the sales contract.
The instructions given below refer only to the pump. Regarding the storage of the drive unit,
please refer to the manual issued by the relevant supplier/manufacturer.
2.2.1. Storage per a period of Hess than 3 months
If the pump is not to be installed immediately, it should be stored in a dry, dust-free area. The
pump flanges need to be closed, so that no foreign objects can enter the pump. Cover the pump
with plastic film.
2.2.2. Storage for a period exceeding 3 months
If the pump is to be stored for a lengthy period, it is recommended that the pump is protected in
the inside with conservation oil, e.g. Shell Ensis. This manual contains a list of recommended
oils and greases, and equivalent grades. Please refer to the index of the Appendix chapter. This
protective film of oil should, however, be removed before the pump is brought into commission.
It is also recommended that the pump shaft is rotated one quarter turn each month: this
prevents damage to the bearings and siezure of the rotating parts. If the pump is provided with
soft packing rings, these should be removed after storage. Renew the conservation oil every 12
months. Cover the pump with plastic foil.

A number of provisions should be considered when designing the premises in which the pump
(set) is to be installed. These are:
- The installation is carried out in a dry, well illuminated area.
- The unit is accessible from all sides, for inspection, maintenance and possible repairs.
- Sufficient hoisting facilities are available, with sufficient lifting power.

(Weight of the pump unit, or the components to be hoisted , are given in the
pumpspecifications)
- The suction pipe should be kept as short as possible, with a minimum of bends.
A loose pump (with no drive unit) should only be moved in the manner shown in the illustrations
below. Otherwise, damage to the pump may occur.
A vertical pump should always be moved without drive unit.
In all cases, never hoist via the pump shaft.
•q
1
=—
Figure 1, vertical transport Figure 2, horizontal transport.

The pump unit should be installed on a sturdy foundation. Usual for such foundations are:
- A concrete foundation slab.
- A metal frame assembly.
The pump should be brought into operation only after complete hardening of the concrete.
A concrete foundation slab is most suitable, as distortion of such a slab is very unlikely. This
method is the most frequently used. The foundation should be designed and dimensioned
sufficient to carry the weight of the pump unit and, also, to fully absorb the vibrations that
occur when the pump is in full operation.
Before installation of the pump, the concrete foundation and base plate should be completed.
The description given below, together with figure 3, (cross-section of foundation) detail a
suitable solution for the execution of a pump foundation.
First, the concrete foudation should be prepared. The pump well should be sufficiently large to
allow plenty of space for the base plate. The surface of the concrete should be rough, so giving
a good bonding surface for the filler concrete.
1. Concrete foundation
2. Jacking bolts + filler shims
3. Anchors under base plate
4. Area that requires filling
with concrete.
Figure 3, cross-section of foundation
The base plate should be perfectly flat, as the pump cradle is assembled on this. This is
important to give the necessary stability. Threaded holes need to be provided for the jacking
bolts, and attach the anchor plates to the base plate. The location of the anchor plates is shown
on the dimensional drawing relating to the pump. These anchor plates carry the bolts that secure
the pump cradle to the base plate. Fit the jacking bolts, place the filler shims in concrete
foundation and position the base plate.
Adjust the base plate until it is exactly level, by adjusting the jacking bolts. This is very
important for the subsequent alignment. Especially for long, submerged pumps an accurate
alignment of the pump will greatly extend the life cycle of the pump. When adjusting the level of
the base plate, ensure that there remains a minimum gap of 50 mm between the concrete
foundation and the underside of the base plate.
Fill the remaining open area with free-flowing cement mortar - shrink free - ensuring that no air
traps occur.

3.4. Positioning the pump on the foundation
When the foundation is hard, the pump can be positioned. The assembly sequence is given in
the chapters: Appendix and Dismantling and assembly.
The anchor bolts should then be well tightened. Subsequently, the motor or gear box can be
attached to the pump.
The use of fitting flanges avoids the necessity for alignment adjustments.
3.5. Piping
3.5=1. General
The pipes can be connected when the concrete foundation has hardened sufficiently and the
anchor bolts have been well tightened. To contribute to the trouble-free operation of the pump,
the following points should be observed during the fitting of the pipes.
The inside diameter of the flange packing rings should be at least as large as the inside
diameter of the piping. This to ensure that no interruptions occur in the flow path.
The pipes should be supported as closely as possible to the pump, so that the weight of
the pipes is not placed on the pump.
The pump and piping flanges should be placed exactly parallel and in correct alignment.
When connecting the flanges, no tension or pressure should be applied to the pump
flanges. It is recommended that compensation connections are included in the pipes, so
compensating for any deviations that may occur.
The flange bolts should be tightened gradually, crosswise.
3.5.2. Pressure pi
The pressure pipe, leading from the pressure bend, will be provided with a reverse flow valve, a
stop-cock and in some cases a reducer. Refer to figure 5.
The reverse flow valve protects the pump against a reverse flow of the liquid, as this
would cause the pump to rotate in the reverse direction when the pump was switched
off. This prevents damage to the pump. The reverse flow valve is situated between the
pump and the stop-cock.

If the diameter of the pressure pipe is larger than the pump flange, a concentric reducer
should be used.
A: Pump.
B: Reducer.
C: Reverse flow valve.
D: Stop-cock.
E: Pressure pipe.
F: Pipe support.
Figure 5
3.5.3. Accessories
Fit the following connections:
- Air bleed outlet (at the highest point of the pump)
- Flushing connection to the packing gland
- Drain water connection from the packing gland
- Drain connection from the pump housing
- Pressure lines for the manometers
3.
3.6.1,
Vertically installed pumps are frequently provided with a fitting flange into which an electrical
motor or gear box can be fitted. By using the fitting flange, the two components are automati-
cally aligned. Depending upon the size and installation it is possible that the electrical motor or
gear box are raised so far from the pump that an intermediate drive shaft (e.g. differential) is
needed to complete the drive connection.
In general, the following applies:
A correct alignment is very important

* 4, COMMISSIONING THE PUMP
Before starting the pump unit, it is advisable to check the entire installation. If necessary rinse
the pipes, or use temporary rinsing filters, if it is anticipated that any foreign objects could be
contained in the pipes.
Thoroughly check the entire installation.
Check that the motor is correctly connected. Refer to the manual for the motor.
Fit vacuum and pressures gauges to the pump or, if required,to the suction and pressure
pipes - as close as possible to the pump and at centre height.
Check that the reverse pressure valve is correctly adjusted.
Depending upon the power curve, the outlet valve should be fully closed, partly open or
fully open.
Check the water level. There should be sufficient water above the inlet manifold.
Otherwise, air will be drawn into the system.
Check for correct direction of rotation. It is advisable that this is done with the motor
disconnected from the pump. The direction of rotation of the pump is shown by an
arrow on the pump housing.
Particularly when the pump is equipped with a mechanical seal, should the direction of
rotation be checked with the motor disconnected. The sealing surfaces must in this case
never run dry, as this would immediately damage the seal.
With pumps fitted with packing rings, a number of rotations is permitted during the
checking of the direction of rotation.
To determine the direction of rotation, one of the protective covers will need to be
removed temporarily. It is not permitted to enter the operational area of the pump during
the period that the cover is removed: danger. The protective cover should be replaced
immediately after checking the direction of rotation.
Check the shaft seals; it should be possible to turn the pump shaft by hand.
With pumps fitted with packing rings, the packing follower should be loosened a few
turns. Due to this, the amount of leakage water will increase when the pump operates.
This is necessary for running-in the packing.
Provisions should be made to catch the drain water via a drain pipe, otherwise the water
will drain onto the floor.
Check the flushing water connection on the packing gland. If use is made of a
separate flushing water supply unit, this should supply water before the pump is
started.
If so equipped, check the oil level of the bearings and/or the mechanical seal.

SERVICES
Start the pump.
The pump should start easily and operate without excessive vibration. If problems occur
when the pump is started or if excessive vibration occurs, the motor should immediately
be switched off, so that the cause can be located. Reference can be made to the trouble
shooting procedures, these are included in the Appendix.
Gradually open the outlet valve until the required flow is reached.
Ensure that the pump does not operate with a greatly reduced capacity, or with the
outlet valve closed. In such cases, all the energy required to rotate the pump will be
transformed into heat. The temperature of the liquid in the pump may then reach boiling
point. The rotating parts will then lose their lubrication and their cooling, with drastic
consequences.
If the pump is equipped with shaft packing, this will require gradual tightening of the
packing follower. A leakage of 45 - 60 drops per minute is a correct measure. Leakage
water is necessary for lubrication and cooling of the shaft packing.
If the pump is equipped with a mechanical seal, a very slight leakage is permissible.
Check that the entire system is operating correctly.
It is advisable to check the bearing temperature at regular intervals. A temperature

increase of 50° to 6 0 ° is considered to be normal.
During operation, the pump should operate according to its characteristics, as these were the
basis for its selection and adjustment. The characteristics include the following specifications:
- Capacity
- Lift
- Power consumption
The Appendix section contains a list of possible defects and their probable causes. To increase
the speed and accuracy of reactions to possible problems, it is recommended that this list is
copied and displayed close to the pump.
If problems occur with the electrical motor or diesel motor, please refer to the relevant
manufacturer's documentation.
E. To
The closing instant of the valves/return valves should be adjusted such that no liquid flows back
into the pump when the pump is stopped.

A carefully considered maintenance schedule is essential for optimal functioning of the pump
and installation. The maintenance level and frequency are partly determined by the objective, the
medium being pumped, ambient conditions and the load applied to the pump and installation.
Regular cleaning of the installation and the surrounding area will improve the quality and
efficiency of the maintenance work.
Daily
- Check the pump for: leakage, unusual noise, excess vibration.
Weekly
- Inspect the shaft sealing.
Packing: The quantity of leakage water should be sufficient to ensure correct

cooling and lubrication of the packing and shaft sleeve. Generally, 40 -
60 drops a minute is correct. When running at higher rpm, a greater
quantity of leakage water will be necessary. If necessary, vary the
quantity by adjusting the packing follower. If this adjustment has no
effect, the packing rings should be replaced. No leakage water leads
to wear of the shaft sleeve. Also, if fitted, check for a correct flow via
the flushing connections.
Mechanical Seal: Please refer to the manufacturer's instructions.
With oil lubrication: Check the oil level in the constant level oiler. Replenish as necessary.
Oil grade: Texaco Fl & O No. 32 or equivalent.
With flushing: Check that the flushing to the seal is sufficient.
- Check the bearing temperature.
Place a contact thermometer against the bearing housing and keep a close check on the
temperature. The stability of the temperature is frequently more indicative than the tempera-
ture readings. Generally, the temperature should not exceed 100°C. Excessively high
temperatures can be caused by insufficient lubrication, excessive lubrication, worn bearings
or incorrect alignment.

Pump, continued
Thrustbearing - Lube oil system
The thrustbearing (25) is connected to the ship's lube oil system through a 1,5 mm.
orifice (49). The lube oil used is: Texaco Doro AR30 with ambient temperature
of approx. 50°C.
The oil is drained to the sump through a 3/4" oil sight glass with spinner (66).
This assures a constant circulation of lube oil in the thrustbearing. For further
details we refer to "Performance test - Lube oil system".
The intermediate bearings in the Sift tube are lubricated by the medium being pumped.
If an inner pipe is used, the intermediate bearings are lubricated via an external flushing.
Regarding the maintenance and lubrication schedules for other components, such
as transmission and drive systems, please refer to the user's manuals issued by
the relevant manufacturer. Refer further to the index of the manual.
Please refer to the Appendix section for:
- Oil and grease specification lists, including equivalents.
- Maximum tightening torque for bolts and nuts.
Reverse rotation
One pump will be in reverse rotation during standby. During reverse rotation
the seal must be lubricated, otherwise it will be damaged. Customer should
provide a reverse rotation system by which lubrication of the seal is assured.
Reference page 2 of 2 of performance test report.

6.1. General
Mechanical seals are generally used in locations where high demands are placed on the sealing.
They provide maximum sealing, have a long life and require practically no maintenance. The
sealing is obtained by positioning a sealing ring against a reversed sealing ring, the surfaces of
which are very accurately ground to size, and holding these tightly together by one or more
springs. The sealing ring rotates together with the shaft, while the reverse sealing ring is held in
the seal cover. It is obvious that the very accurately machined sliding surfaces should never be
allowed to run dry. The mechanical seal, when in operation, must always be surrounded by
liquid, this providing the lubrication. The sealing ring and the reverse sealing ring are enclosed
on the shaft and in the cover respectively by 'O'-rings. A mechanical seal is incorporated in such
a way that the sealing liquid assists in applying pressure to the sealing surfaces. Usually, the
rotating components are located on the pressure side.
Ensure that the seal chamber, inside which the mechanical seal is to be fitted, and the appropri-
ate areas of the shaft or the shaft sleeve are thoroughly cleaned prior to assembly.
When fitting the stationary reverse seal ring, ensure that the reverse seal is well enclosed by the
'O'-ring and does not tend to spring back. The assembly can be simplified by the use of soft
soap.
The sealing surfaces should be clean and free from grease. The use of grease on the sealing
surfaces is not advisable and, although a thin film of oil is allowed on the surfaces, it is best to
fit them perfectly dry.
With single operation mechanical seals, the sealing surfaces should be located directly below the
flushing connection. With dual operation mechanical seals, the reverse flow should be such that
the liquid entry is located in the lower section of the sealing chamber - adjacent to one pair of
sealing rings - and the drainage occurs nearer to the top and close to the other pair of seals.
The pressure of the reverse flow in the sealing chamber should be approx. 1.5 to 2.0 bar higher
than the pressure of the liquid in the seal chamber.
Prior to starting the pump, or the opening of the intake valves in the suction and pressure pipes,
first apply the reverse flow of liquid. The temperature of the reverse flow of liquid must not
exceed 60°C.
The instructions given above emphasize that care should be taken when assembling mechanical
seals.
REFER ALSO TO THE INSTRUCTIONS GiVEiM BY THE RELEVANT SEAL WIANUFACTURER.

Subject: Cross-section drawing (general 343925), VDL1.
Oil lubrication + Mechanical seal.
Prior to commencing work on the pump unit, drain the pump housing and isolate the motor from
the mains supply. During the work, ensure that it is impossible for anyone to fill the pump or to
start the motor.
It is advisable, during the dismounting of the pump, to lay the various components aside in a
systematic order, so that the reassembly of the pump is simplified.
See also for the assembly sequence, the illustration in the Appendix
1.1 Dismantling sequence

First disconnect and remove the drive motor, including the coupling halves and key (19).
Remove all bolts and nuts securing the outlet flange to the pressure pipe. Next, remove plugs (45
+ 54) and drain the oil out of the bearing housing (4). Detach any lubrication and flushing lines.
Lift the pump vertically out of the pump well and lower the pump into a horizontal position, so
enabling further dismantling; This is, of course, dependant upon the vertical lifting space. If this is
insufficient, the pump will need to be dismantled in sections.
To do so first remove the nuts or bolts securing the pump to the base plate. Lift the entire pump
upwards, position a clamp underneath the outlet bend (1) and allow the pump to be lowered onto
this. Remove in sequence: the motor support (151), the 'V'-ring (23), the bearing cover (5) and the
distance bush (152). Prise open the lip on the tab washer (27) and remove the shaft nut (26)
together with the tab washer. Draw the carrier ring (11), the pivot- or thrust bearing (25) and the
oil retainer bush (12) from the drive shaft (7), and remove the oil drain line (50 - 53). With the aid
of the jacking bolts (29), remove the bearing housing (4). Unscrew set screw (40) and remove the
spray ring (10). Subsequently, the following can be removed: the sealcover (2), the mechanical seal
(3) if it is to be replaced (otherwise leave seal at it's place), Lock washer (13) and if applicable the
flushing connection to the seal, the key (20) and the shaft sleeve (8).
Again raise the pump and fit the clamp underneath the upper column pipe flange (113). Remove
nuts (36 + 37 + 38) and take off the outlet bend (1). If the pump is fitted with only one column
pipe, the entire pump can be lifted out of the pump well, providing there is sufficient vertical lifting
space. Lower the pump onto a horizontal position, ensuring that the shaft remains in the centre of
the column pipe.
!f the pump is provided with several column pipes, the dismantling should proceed is phases until
the last column pipe remains. Proceed as follows:
The column pipe (113) can now be removed after unscrewing the bolts and nuts (125 + 126).
Disassemble the shaft (7) out of the shaft coupling (120) by pushing the shaft coupling up the
outstanding shaft. Remove split ring (121). Carefully place the shaft on a wooden surface. Remove
key (123) and slide the intermediate bearing (111) and the shaft sleeve (119) off the shaft. The
next column pipe can now be removed. (Start at beginning of this section)
Note: During disassembly, support the outstanding shaft to avoid damage to the intermediate
bearing.
Note: Do not allow the keys, small washers and 'O'-rings to fall into the pump well.
Dismantling sequence, continued
Repeat the described sequence until the last column pipe is reached. Then, raise the final section
out of the pump well. This remaining section contains the pump housing (70) , the suction cover
(72) together with a possible suction grid. Lower this to a horizontal position.
Remove in sequence:
(If applicable) the suction grid

The suction cover (72)
The impeller bolt (87), impeller cone (78) and the split ring (79), and slide the impeller (73) off
the pump shaft (77).
The impeller key (85), the pump housing (70) and the saft sleeve (80).
If required, the wearring (75) can remain in the suction cover (72). If applicable, the wearring (76)
can also remain in the pump housing (70).
The pump shaft should be sufficiently supported during the dismantling.
1.2 After dismantling
Protect all components against damage.
Clean the bearing with white spirit, acid-free paraffin or another suitable cleaning agent. Dry
the bearing with clean and dry compressed air. Inspect the bearing and, if necessary,
replace it. If replacement is not necessary, it is advisable to treat the bearing immediately
with oil or grease, so preventing any rust occurring.
Clean the water-lubricated bearing bushses, using a dry cloth.
Inspect the shaft sleeves and bearing bushes for wear. Replace as necessary.
Check the play between the sealing ring(s) and the impeller(s).
Inspect the packing rings, 'O'-rings, etc. for wear or damage. Replace as necessary.
Inspect all components for rust or wear. Replace as necessary.
Thoroughly clean all join surfaces and inspect the fitting flange edges for damage. If the
pump is not to be reassembled immediately, treat all uncoated surfaces with a protective
film of preserving oil. E.g. Shell Ensis.
1.3 Assembly sequence
The pump section, a column pipe and the pump shaft can first be assembled horizontally alongside
the pump well. Proceed as follows:
Assembley sequence, continued
If removed, refit the wearring (75) in the suction cover (72) and, if applicable, fit the wearring (76)
in the pump housing (70). If applicable position the bearing bush (81) in the pump housing (70) and
place 'O'-rings (86 & 124) round the suction cover (72) and pump housing (70).
Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the 'O'-rings. Slide shaft sleeve (80) over the (impeller) shaft
(77) and secure the shaft sleeve with the impeller key (85). Keep the pump as horizontal and as still
as possible and slide the pump shaft through the pump. Support the end of the shaft.
Subsequently, fit the impeller (73), the split ring (79) and the impeller cone (78). Secure the
assembly with impeller bolt (87).
Lock the impeller bolt with a few drops of

'LOCHTE SCREW-iock' Mo. 225.
Secure the suction cover (72) against the pump housing, using nuts (89) anf studs (88). Position
the first column pipe against the flange of the pump housing and fix it with nuts (92). Do not forget
the 'O'-ring (124). Fit the shaft sleeve (119) and key (123) on the shaft, position bearing bush
(118) in the intermediate bearing (111), and slide this over the shaft sleeve into the fitting recess of
the column pipe. Place 'O'-ring (124) round the intermediate bearing. Clamp the intermediate
bearing temporarily against the column pipe. This is to support the shaft during the hoisting towards
the pump well. The rest of the assembly occurs vertically, and above the pump well.
Hoist the assembled unit and fit, if applicable, the suction grid, using clamping plates and nuts.
Allow the pump to lower into the pump well until the pump rests on the clamping tool (special
tool).
Fit the intermediate- or pumpshaft (7) in the shaft coupling (120) and fit this assembly onto the
(Impeller) shaft (77) using key (122) and split ring (121) Do not forget the 'O'-ring (124). Now
secure the column pipes together with bolts and nuts (125 & 126). Lower the pump, fit the clamp
underneath the upper column pipe flange and allow the pump to rest on this.
Repeat the above procedure until the last column pipe has been fitted.
First prepare the drive shaft (7). Fit the 'O'-ring (21), the shaft sleeve (8), key (20) and the tab
washer (13). Fix the tab washer with set screw (39).
The shaft sealing is fitted in the discharge head (1). If removed during dismantling, refit the 'O'-ring
(16). Place the discharge head (1) over the shaft (7) and assembel it onto the upper column pipe
(113) using nuts (37). The mechanical seal cavity requires cleaning before assembly. Fit mechanical
seal (3) after placing the distance rings (14 + 15) in the seal cavity and asure the tight setting.
Tighten the seal cover with nuts (34 + 35) hand tight.
Please refer to chapter 6 for assembly details for the mechanical seal.
if the pump is provided with a lantern ring and/or backing ring, position these on the shaft.
Slide the spray ring (10 + 40) over the shaft - do not fix the ring at this stage. The spray ring cannot
be adjusted and secured until the bearing housing (4) has been fitted. Connect the flushing line, if
applicable, to the stuffing box or sealchamber.
Assembley sequence, continued
Clean the oil level glass (42) and fit the glass in the bearing housing (4). Fit the bearing housing on
the discharge head (1) using bolts (29). Fit the oil drain lines (50 - 54) to the underside of the
bearing housing (4). Slide the oil retainer bush (12) over the shaft and into the bearing housing and
fit the lower ring of the pivot- or thrust bearing (25) in the bearing housing. Apply a thin coating of
grease to the lower ring and then, fit the pivot bearing on the lower ring. Place key (32).Position the
carrier ring (11) on the pivot bearing and fit the tab washer (27) and the shaft nut (26). Fit the
shaft nut hand tight on the thread!
Fit the motor support (151) on the discharge head (1), using bolts (153). Hoist the pump a little,
and remove the clamp. Allow the pump to lower onto the base plate and secure the pump with the
base bolts.
The pivot bearing requires no axial adjustment. Tightening of the shaft nut brings the shaft into the
correct position. Now secure this part of the assembly using the tab washers lip.
Secure the bearing cover (5) to the bearing housing (4), using bolts (30). Slide the spacer bush
(152) over the shaft and against the shaft nut. Fit the 'V'-ring (23) on the bush and fit the key (19).
Fill the bearing housing with oil and fit washer (46) and plug (45). Refer to APPENDIX for oil
grades. Adjust the spray ring (10) so that the upper side of the ring is level with the lower side of
the bearing housing. Secure the spray ring with set screw (40).
Check that the pump shaft rotates freely. If not, recheck the above instructions, step by step.
Fit the two halves of the coupling to the ends of the shafts and position the motor. Refer to the
manufacturer's instruction manual for the correct connection of the electrical motor.
Refer to the instruction manual from the coupling manufacturer for the adjustment of the gap
between the two sides of the coupling.
Fit the pressure pipe to the outlet bend. The pressure pipe should be supported sufficiently.
il-/
LUBRICATION O5L GREASE

ambient-temp. < ambient-temp. >
30° C 30° C
RECOMMEN- Texaco Regal Oil A R & 0 Regal Oil B R & 0 Multifak EP 2
DED (ISO VG 32) (ISO VG 46)
EQUIVALENT Shell Turbo Oil T 25 Turbo Oil T 29 Alvania EP 2

Mobil DTE Oil Light DTE Oil Medium Sovarex L 2
BP Energol TH 65-HB Energol TH 80-HB Energrease LS-EP 2
Esso Teresso 43 Teresso 47 Beacon EP 2
Castro! Perfecto T 32 Perfecto T 46 Spheerol EPL 2
Fi na Bakola R & 0 32 Bakola R & 0 34 Marson EP L2

Gulf Gulfcrest 44 Gulfcrest 47 Crowngrease EP 2
Chevron OC Turbine Oil 32 OC Turbine Oil 46 Dura-Lith EP 2

Below list shows the maximum advised tightning torques for standard bolts and nuts according
the International Standard Organisation.
Quality 6.6 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9
Torque Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm
Nominal
threathdiameter
in mm.
8 16 30 33 41 50
10 33 58 66 82 98
12 57 102 114 143 171
14 91 162 182 227 273
16 142 252 281 355 426
18 • 195 247 391 488 586
20 277 492 551 693 830
22 377 670 753 941 1130
24 479 851 957 1196 1436
27 700 1245 1401 1750 2100
These tightning-torques are only for commen use. Sometimes it is advised to use other values.
This depends of course of the used material for the bolts and nuts. If there is any doubt, do not
hesitate and consult Mijhuis Pompen B.V.

FOR CAUSES, SEE LUMBERS.
A. No liquid delivered. 1 -2-3-5-8-26-27-28-30-31-35

B. Not enough liquid delivered. 2-3-4-5-7-8-14-15-16-26-27-28-30-31-34-35
C. Not enough pressure. 2-7-8-14-15-16-28-34-35
D. Pump quits after start up. 1-2-3-4-5-6-27-30-35
E. Pump takes to much power. 7-8-9-11-12-14-15-18-21-22-32-34
F. Pump vibrates and is noisy. 1 -5-8-9-10-11-12-13-14-15-19-20-22-23-24-
25-27-30-32
G. Stuffingbox is leaking excessively. 9-11-17-18-19-20-33
H. To much wear of the packing-rings. 6-9-11-13-17-18-19-20-21-33
I. To much wear of the bearings. 9-11-12-19-20-22-23-24-25
K. Pump is getting hot and/or stops. 9-12-13-19-20-22-23-24-25
L. Overloading of the electricmotor. 7-9-12-13-19-20-22-23-24-25-29-30-34
CAUSES OF THE MALFUWCTiQN
1. Pump and suctionpipe not completely filled.

2. Gas or air is getting free from the pumped liquid.
3. Air-pocket in the suctionpipe.
4. Air-leaking through the stuffingbox.
5. Inlet of the suctionpipe is not immersed deeply enough.
6. Flushingline is plugged.
7. Wrong direction of rotation. • :
8. Impeller is plugged.
9. Misalignment of the shafts.
10. Alignment pump - motor is not correct.
11. The shaft is out of straight.
12. Rotating parts are running against stationairy parts.
13. Bearing are worn out.
14. The wearring(s), impeller(s) or wearplate(s) are worn out.
15. Impeller damage.
16. Casing gaskets damaged.
17. Shaft or shaftsleeve scored; packing damaged; running surface M-seal damaged.
18. Packing not correctly inserted.
m 19.
20.
The shaft is turning excentric by worn bearings or bad alignment.
Rotating parts are out-of-balance.
m 21.
22.
23.
Stuffingboxpacking to tight. Therefor no liquid between shaft and packing.
Improper lubrication or not enough lubricant in the bearings.
Improper lubrication.
24. Bearings has become filthy.
25. Bearings coroded by moistry or water.
26. Discharge head is calculated to low.
27. The suction head is to high or the NPSH is to low.
28. Speed to low.
29. Speed to high.
30. Obstruction in suction line.
31. Obstruction in discharge line.
32. Pump is not running at his working point(s).
33. Incorrect kind of packing used.
34. The liquids-density is to low or the liquids-viscosity is to high.
35. The suction line is leaking.

Figure 1, order of mounting vertical deepwell-pumps.

INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
Pump nr.: 44611 & 44612
Pump type VDL1-30.45

Order nr. 165710 ,.
Customer DESMI A/S DE SMITHSKE
Purchase order P050499-00-4
Project • DESMI
Item/tag nr . NO. 171
Required data Test data
Capacity : 1020 854 M3/h
Differential head : 58.6 41 M.l.C.
Pumpspeed : 1785 1494 R.p.m.
Shaft power : 192 kW
Motor power : 230 kW
Efficiency %
NPSH required M.l.c.
Performance test and acceptance criteria a c e : ISO 2548 CL.C.
( LUBE OIL PUMP)
Test results see PUMP PERFORMANCE TEST SHEET of above mentioned
pump nr(s).
Performance test executed by : M. Tolkamp
Performance test witnessed by : Lloyds Register
Hydrostatic test of the pump

Test pressure 13 Bar .-
Test period 3 0 Minutes
Result No leakage •
Hydrostatic test executed by M. Tolkamp
Hydrostatic test witnessed by Lloyds Register
Materials of the mainparts of the pump

Pumpcasing/covers : Gietijzer GG25
Pumpshaft(s) : R.V.S. 4122
Impeller(s) : Brons RG5
Column-pipes : Steel 37
Pump is tested with water of 17 degrees Celsius.

Pump tested with the following equipment:
Equipment : Driver Controller Gearbox
Make : ABB
Type : M2BA 315 MLAV1
Serial nr. : 3425162 /...63
Power : 23 0 kW
( 60 hz 1785 rpm)
Date: 04-08-2000 above mentioned data reviewed and accepted:

Customer Authorised Inspector Nijhuis Q-C
Lloyds Register M. Tolkamp
LLOYD'S REGISTER ©"Reviewed -Ace..
DVBRtPTED H" Witnessed ~Acc.
date : ~ZOoo
ûr „
1-171
Pump Impeller
type: VDL1-30.45 max./min. : 4 3 8 / 3 6 5 curveno.; 60375

no. : 44611 rated : 405*40 date ; 03-08-00
À e m / t a g n o : NO. 171 drawingno.: L837542 rpm. : 1785
sg.= B70 [kg/m" 3]
200
—— — ««—
77 180
--
ta
c£ 160
QJ
O 140
CL
120
-
100
A (
80
ne
nr () =====
C ——«. 1
eu
——* —
u
• rH
, " ^~
Cf
y
/
/
/
• A( /
À
85 -T //
u 80
1—1 • — .
• - -
b 75
to
eu
x:
70
i—i
\
Tota
65
\
60
\
\
55
1 f »Y n S FIF 1A. CT \
50
F . F ith \
/IE w jy D VE RH te )
45 m ) \
u m-•Ntl bL Mh U
S
——*y* L \
40
35
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
Capacity [m~3/h]
(M
Nijhuis Pompen bv
(O p.o. box 102
O
en 7100 AC Winterswijk - Holland Copyright reserved
Pump Impeller
type: V D L l - 3 0 . 4 5 max./min. : 4 3 8 / 3 6 5 cürveno. : 60375

no. ; 44611 rated ; 405M0 date : 03-08-00
)-5em/tagno: NO. 171 drawingno. : L 8 3 7 5 4 2 rpm. : 1493
sg.= 1000 [kg/m"3]
130
- 120 -^- •
+j
S
£, 110
y
c
QJ
g 100
a.
90
80
70 A f
r~\r
r\(
>•
c _ 'i i " • " "
eu
u s* \
~ir •rH
4 -
_ C /
/
zzr
A
r
/l
/
70
65
F)-a 60
.-' ta
eu
sz "*—.
— ~ -
I—I 55
(D
4J
O
50
\
45
s
40
\
\
35
! i T SF: r ïT E \
eit \
30 HF i
LH LJV - u \
S 1 WkC3 3b J JA fc 40 3
25 o
*^ ——
—-
1"
20
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
Capacity [m"3/h]
CD
(M
Nijhuis Pompen bv
(O
O p.o. box 102
(NI
O) 7100 AC Winierswijk - Holland Copyright reserved
Pump Impeller
type: VDL1-30.45 max./min. : 438/365 curveno.-. 60376

no. : 44612 rated : 405*40 date ; 03-08-00
\em/tagno: NO. 171 drawingno. ; L837542 rpm. ; 1785
sg.= 870 [kg/m"3]

200
180 -^BB;
ro
£ 160
^<
O)
2
^,
O
Q_
120 - Sa»—» g—••;,T
100
80 n
Of
nr (J
™ — —• •—
C
0) ——
u
-te •1-4
Rf
/
85
80
ro 75
•* m ~-^
Q)
70
(0
4-1
s
o
65
60
\
\
55
\
50
L .c »Y D S F!E G T ? \
. F ith \
45
LJ
-Ih i/Ib
i—i JLLL,
yvr
/ /'
1u H
Vb Htt +t
U •\ 1
»OL
\
40
1/
\
05
35
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
Capacity [nT3/h]
r Nijhuis Pompen bv
to p.o. box 102
o
(NI
O) 7100 AC Winierswijk - Holland Copyright reserved
Pump nr.: 44612
Date : 3-AUG-20 0 0
Order nr '. - 165710 Gegevens van AC-motor:

Pumptype VDL1-30.45 E 4409 [Volt]
Impeller pattern nr. 837542 I 357.00 [Amp. !
rotation CCW n = 1785 [rpm;
diameter {mm] : 405 P 230.00 [kW]
width [mm] : 40.0 P.F. =
Test Speed [rpm] : 1494 Eff = 0.963
Curve nr : 60376 Trafo-fact = 5.000
Measured on suctionline = 0 [mm] and on dischargeline = 300 [mm]
Q-H measurements.
Mnr. Q [rrT3/h] Hsuct [m] Hdisch [m] Hveloc [m] Hman [m]
1 854.00 1.00 40.00 0.57 41.57
2 1005.00 1.00 33.20 0.80 35.00
3 1156.00 1.00 25.30 1.05 27.35
4 750.00 1.00 43 .80 0.44 45.24
5 550.00 1.00 48.30 0.24 49.54
6 346.00 1.00 51.20 0.09 52.29
7 173.00 1.00 53.80 0.02 54.82 .
8 0.00 1.00 56.30 0.00 57.30

Number of stages [-] = 1.0000
Mnr. n [rpm] P-display [kW] P-shaft [kW] Pump eff. [%]
1 1494 25.30 121.82 79.4
2 25.60 123.26 77.7
3 1494 24.80 119.41 72.1
4 24.70 118.93 77.7
5 22.20 106.89 69.4
6 1496 19.00 91.48 53.9
7 16.90 81.37 31.8
8 1497 17.00 81.85 0.0
Q-cavitationlimit [m~3/h] Left: 0
Right: 1156
Remarks s Proj. W . E . Waaier 405 * 10'
LLOYD'S REGISTER
R. Feith
D R-evtewper""^ DVEFHHED
H WITNESSED I . DATE
Pump nr.: 44611
Date : 3-AUG-2000 '
Order nr. 165710 Gegevens van AC-motor:

Pumptype VDL1-30.45 E 440 [Volt]
Impeller pattern nr. 837542 I • • = 357.00 [Amp. ]
rotation CCW n = 1785 [rpm]
diameter [mm] 405 P 230.00 tkW]
width [mm] 40.0 P.F. =
Test Speed [rpm] 1493 Eff = 0.963
Curve nr. 60375 Trafo-fact = 5.000
Measured on suctionline = 0 [mm] and on dischargeline = 3 00 [mm]
Q-H measurements,
Mnr. Q [irT 3/h] Hsuct [m] Hdisch [m] Hveloc [m] Hman [m]
1 854.00 1.00 40.00 0.57 41.57
2 1004.00 1.00 33.00 0.79 34.79
3 1150.00 1.00 25.00 1.04 27.04
4 758.00 1.00 44.00 0.45 45.45
5 540.00 1.00 49.00 0.23 50.23
6 327.00 1.00 52.50 .0.08 53.58
7 174.00 1.00 54.50 0.02 55.52
8 0.00 1.00 56.00 0.00 57.00

Number of stages [-] = 1.000 0
Mnr. n [rpm] P-display [kW] P-shaft [kW] Pump eff.[%]

1 1494 25.20 121.34 79.7
2 25.50 122.78 77.5
3 1493 24 .70 118.93 71.2
4 24 .70 118.93 78.9
5 21.80 104.97 70.4
6 1496 18 .50 89.08 53.6
7 16 .50 79.45 33.1
8 1497 16.60 79.93 0.0
Q-cavitationlimit [m"3/h] Left: 0

Right: 1150
Remarks s Proj. W.E. Waaier 405 * 10'
LLOYD'S REGISTER
R. Feith
^ DVERH-HED
WITNESSED Jp DATE
Pump Impeller
type: VDL1-30.45 max./min. : 438/365 curveno. : 60376

no. ; 44612 rated ; 405x40 date : 03-08-00
jm/tagno: NO. 171 drawingno.: L837542 rpm. : 1494
;100 0 Ikg /m '3J

1
=
130 -y
^*- .—
i—i A on
C
wer [ kWatt
C3
y,
/
D
o •luu
a
90 -
/
80 -
70 - 4f A
S
>•
Of
c
eu
u *^
•w-i
M—
M—
-S€
70 -
u 65
i—I
Ja 60
'to
w 1
sz —
r-, 55
(D
• —
—.
O ^^
*- 50
45
\
s,
40
\
\
35
\
\
30 LL (T. 3 ECil D EP
R. "eit i \
25
L1H
J ,
y Jv 44i 4U b
E1 ! Rf ES SE '-7 JA h
-P
20
0
_u =?
200 400
f n
600
"0
800 1000 1200 1400 1600

Capacity [m"3/h]
(D Nijhuis Pompen bv
CM
<D
a p.o. box 102
c\s
ai 7100 AC Winlerswijk - Holland Copyright reserved
DECLÂRATIQgy QF CONFORMITY IIB
DESCRlPTiOM OF MACHfMERY
FUMPTYPE VDL1-3045 VDL1-3045 VDL1-3045

PUMP SERIAL NUMBER{S) 44611 / 44612 44613 / 44614 4 4 6 1 5 / 44616
PROJECT NO. 165710 165715 165720
ITEM/TAG. NUMBER 171 172 173
MACHINERY DIRECTIVE 89/392/EEC, AS AMENDED BY 91/368/EEC, 93/44/EEC AND 93/68/EEC.
N.A.
WE; NIJHUIS POMPEN, DECLARE THAT UNDER OUR SOLE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SUPPLY OF
THE PRODUCT DEFINED ABOVE, THE SAID PRODUCT IS IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL THE DIREC-
TIVES AND REGULATIONS ESSENTIAL TO REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING HEALTH AND SAFETY
MENTIONED ABOVE.
IT IS NOT ALLOWED TO SET THE PRODUCT IN OPERATION UNTIL THE MACHINERY WHERE IT IS
BUILD !N, IS ALSO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE DIRECTIVES AND REGULATIONS MENTIONED
ABOVE.
SIGNED FOR MANAGING DIRECTOR:
L.Harbers, 28-09-2000, Winterswijk NEDERLAND.

1 ofl
CERTIFICATE FOR PUMPS
LR Office Certificate number

Amsterdam - Sub Office Apeldoorn APE 0009132/1
Manufacturer Date
Nijhuis Pompen BV 21Aug2000
P.O. Box 102 Work's order number
7100 AC Winterswijk 165710
Built under licence from (if applicable) Designer
Nijhuis Pompen BV
Oient Intended for
Nijhuis Pompen BV Winterswijk Desmi A/S DE Smithske .
First date of inspection Final date of inspection
04-08-2000 04-08-2000
This certificate is issued to the above Client to certify that the pump(s) described herein, were surveyed at the manufacturer's
works and that satisfactory hydraulic running tests were witnessed.
PARTICULARS
Manufacturer's designation Pump serial number(s)
h Vertical turbine pump (CCW)
230 kW Nominal (motorpower)
44611
44612
Pump type Intended service

YDL 1-30.45 Lubricating Oil Pump
The pump(s) described herein comply with the requirements of Lloyd's Register's Rules and Regulations in connection with the
intended service.
HYDRAULIC TEST
Test pressure on pumping casing or cylinders (bar) Test pressure on steam cylinders (bar)
13 Bar
Test pressure on steam jackets (bar)
RUNNING TEST
Capacity delivered Number of double strokes or revs per minute
1020 m 3 /h 1785
Discharge pressure Total head
59.8 M.L.C. (AV)
ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN PUMPS STEAM DRIVEN PUMPS
Volts Steam pressure (bar)

440 V
Amperes Exhaust pressure (bar/mm Hg)
357
Supply frequency (hertz)
60 Hz
IDENTIFICATION MARKS
Identification number (including office contraction code)
LR APE 0009132/1-2
T.P. (bar) Initials and date
13 Bar RF 08/00
Remarks Signature - Surveyor to Lloyd's Register of Shipping
FORM 1085 (10/94) Lloyd's Register of Shipping, registered office: 71 Fenchurch Street, London EC3M 4BS
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OVERLEAF

TERMS AND CONDITIONS
The following terms and conditions apply to all services pro- behalf of each of whom this notice is given) shall be under
vided by Lloyd's Register of Shipping (hereinafter referred liability or responsibility in negligence or otherwise how-
to as "LR"). soever to any person who is not a party to the agreement
with LR pursuant to which any certificate, statement, data
1. LR's services do not assess compliance with any standard or report is issued in respect of any information or advice
other than the applicable rules of LR, international con- expressly or impliedly given by LR
ventions, and/or other standards agreed in writing by or any of its officers, employees or agents or in respect of
LR and the client. any omission or inaccuracy therein or in respect of any act
2. All invoices issued by LR must be paid by the client within or omission which has caused or contributed to any certi-
30 days of the date of the invoice. If any amount due to LR ficate, statement, data or report being issued with the
remains unpaid after the 30 days in which it is payable, information and advice it contains (if any). Nothing herein
LR shall be entitled to charge interest on such amount at a will create rights pursuant to the United Kingdom
rate of two percent (2%) above the London Interbank Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 in favour of
Offered Base Rate (LIBOR) or the equivalent in the coun- any person who is not a party to the contract with LR.
try where the client is based, whichever is the greater, from
10. No other document purporting to impose additional
that date until the date of actual payment, and to withhold
liability on LR, or any of its officers, employees or agents
any or all of its services until such time as payment of the
for the provision of LR's services will be effective unless
said amount, and the interest thereon, is received by LR.
presented to and signed by an authorised LR representati-
3. LR reserves the right to charge for any extra costs which ve.
are incurred as a result of delays, cancellations, postpone-
11. The client agrees that LR and any of its officers, employees
ments or suspensions resulting from the client's instructi-
or agents will be assureds under the client's relevant insu-
ons, lack of instructions or mistakes for which LR is not
rance and that full waiver of rights of subrogation are
responsible, or any requirements, alteration, amendment
provided by relevant underwriters to LR or any of its offi-
or change to the specification or scope of LR's services.
cers, employees or agents.
4. Unless stated to the contrary, the fees quoted for LR's
The following terms and conditions apply only to
services exclude all costs of re-inspection, abortive visits or
classification services provided and documents issued by LR:
the appraise1 of drawing revisions. Such additional costs
will be notified to the client as and when they occur and 12. Any damage, defect, breakdown or grounding, which
will be added to the contract price. could invalidate the conditions for which a class has been
assigned, is to be reported to LR without delay.
5. The contract shall continue in force unless terminated by
either LR or the client giving the other 30 days prior writ- 13. All repairs to hull, equipment and machinery which may
ten notice of termination. be required in order that a ship may retain her class are to
be carried out to the satisfaction of LR's surveyors. When
6. If for whatever reason the contract is terminated by either
repairs are effected at a port, terminal or location where
LR or the client before completion of LR's services, LR's
the services of an LR surveyor are not available, the
charge for the services rendered will be calculated on a pro
repairs are to be surveyed by one of LR's surveyors at the
rata basis up to the date of termination. The addition of
earliest opportunity thereafter.
any reasonable costs directly attributed to early termina-
tion, and any amounts then due to LR will immediately 14. Plans and particulars of any proposed alterations to the
become payable in full approved scantlings and arrangements of hull, equipment,
or machinery are to be submitted to LR for approval, and
7. Any dispute concerning the provision of LR's services
such alterations are to be carried out to the satisfaction of
and/or the contract under which such services are provi-
LR's surveyors.
ded is subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English
courts and will be governed by English law. 15. It is the responsibility of the Owner to ensure that all
surveys necessary for the maintenance of class are carried
8. In providing services, information or advice, neither LR
out at the proper time and in accordance with the instruc-
nor any of its officers, employees or agents warrant the
tions of LR.
accuracy of any information or advice supplied. Except as
set out herein, neither LR nor any of its officers, employees 16. LR gives timely notice to an Owner about forthcoming
or agents (on behalf of each of whom LR has agreed this surveys by means of Class Direct Live, a letter or a quar-
clause) shall be liable for any loss, damage or expense terly computer print-out. The omission of such notice,
whatever sustained by any person due to any act, however, does not absolve the Owner from responsibility
omission or error of whatsoever nature and howsoever to comply with LR's survey requirements for maintenance
caused or allegedly caused by LR or by any of its officers, of class.
employ_ees_Qr agentsor duetoany-inaccuracy-of-whatsoe^-—
ver nature and howsoever caused in any information or 17. When the Regulations with regard to surveys on the hull,
advice given, in any way whatsoever by or equipment or machinery have not been complied with and
on behalf of LR even if held to amount to a breach of war- the ship is thereby not entitled to retain class, the class will
ranty. Nevertheless, if the client uses LR's services or relies be suspended or withdrawn, at LR's discretion.
on any information or advice given by or on behalf of LR
18. When reported defects in the hull, equipment or
and suffers loss, damage or expense thereby which is pro-
machinery are found and the Owner fails to repair such
ved to have been due to any negligent act, omission
defects in accordance with LR's requirements, the class
or error of LR, its officers, employees or agents or any
will be suspended or withdrawn, at LR's discretion.
negligent inaccuracy in information or advice given by or
on behalf of LR, then LR will pay compensation to the 19. LR has the power to withhold or, if already granted, to
client for his proved loss up to but not exceeding the suspend or withdraw any class (or to withhold any certifi-
amount of fee (if any) charged b} LR for that particular cate or report in any other case), in the event of non-
service information or advice. payment of any fee.
<•). Neither LR, nor any of its officers, employees or agents (on
• • • « « *
STUKLIJST/PARTLIST
TEKENING NR. 343925 rev.D - TYPE VDL1-30.45
NR. BENAMING DFSORIPTION MATERIAL
1 Persbocht Discharge head Cast iron GG25

2 Sealdeksel Stuffingboxhousing Cast iron GG25
3 Mechanical seal - a Mechanical seal
4 Lagerhuis boven Thrustbearinghousing Cast iron GG25
5 Lagerdeksel Bearing cover Cast iron GG25
7 Aandrijfas Topshaft Ststeel 4122
8 Asbus Shaftsleeve Aisi 304
10 Spatring Thrower Aisi 304
11 Draagring Bearing retainingring Steel C45
12 Olieafsluitbus Oil throttling sleeve Carbonsteel 4 LM
13 Borgring Lockring Aisi 304
14 Borgring Lockring Aisi 304
15 Stelschroef Hexagon socket set screw Aisi 304
16 Pen Pin Aisi 304
19 Spie Key Steel C45
20 Spie Key Aisi 316 Ti
21 "O"-Ring - "O"-Ring Buna-N 70S
22 "O"-Ring - "O"-Ring Buna-N 70S
23 "V"-Ring "V"-Ring Nitr.Rubber
25 Tontaatslager ^» Thrust roller bearing
26 Asmoer Bearing nut
27 Borgring Lockring
29 Zeskantbout Hexagon bolt Quality 8.8
31 Pakking ring Packing Klingerit
35 Sluitring Lock washer Steel
36 Tapeind Stud Quality 5.6
37 Zeskantmoer Hexagon nut Quality 8
38 Sluitring Lock washer Steel
42 Oliestand kijkglas Oil level sight glass
43 Plug Plug Brass
44 Onderlegring Plain washer Copper
45 Plug Plug Brass
46 Onderlegring Plain washer Copper
47 Pijpnippel Nipple Steel galvanised
48 Flens Flange Steel
49 Orifice Orifice Aisi 304
51 Knie Elbow Cast iron galvanised
53 Sok Socket Cast iron galvanisée
54 Plug Plug Steel
55 Ontluchtingsnippel Vent nipple Steel
62 Sok Socket Cast iron galvanised
63 Haakse koppeling Elbow union Cast iron galvanised
DATUM OPMAAK • 22-09-94 DATUM AFDR / RF.VISIF : 2R-02-M UITRFRFVFN DOOR AFD TFCHNIFK B
Biz 1/1
Vervolg stuklijst
NR. RFNAMING DESCRIPTION MATERIAL
66 Kijkglas Sight glass

67 Rechte koppeling Union Cast iron galvanised
69 Plug Plug Steel
70 Pomphuis Pumpcasing Cast iron GG25
72 Zuigdeksel Suction cover Cast iron GG25
73 Waaier Impeller Bronze RG5
75 Dichtingsring Casing weaning Bronze RG7
76 Dichtingsring Casing weaning Bronze RG7
77 Pompas Pumpshaft St.Steel4122
78 Dop Cap Aluminium Bronze F60/F70
79 Ring 2/2 Ring 2/2 Aisi 304
80 Asbus Shaftsleeve Aisi 304 (nitrated)
81 Lagerbus Bearing bush Railko NF22
86 "O"-Ring "O"-Ring Buna-N 70S
111 Tussenlager Bearing spider Cast iron GG25

113 Standpijp Column pipe Steel
118 Lagerbus Bearing bush Railko NF22
119 Asbus Bearing sleeve Aisi 304 (nitrated)
120 Koppelbus Shaft coupling Aluminium Bronze F60/F70
121 Ring 2/2 Ring 2/2 Aisi 304
124 "O"-Ring "O"-Ring Buna-N 70S
151 Motorstoel Motor bracket Cast iron GG25

152 Afstandbus Spacing bush Aisi 304
180 Haakse koppeling Union elbow Steel galvanised

184 Bocht Bend Cast iron galvanised
185 T-stuk Tee Cast iron galvanised
187 Bocht Bend Cast iron galvanised
nATI IM DPMAÅK : 22-na-94 DATUM AFDR./ REVISIE : 28-02-01 UlTGEGEVFtsj DOOR AFD.TECHNIEK Biz 2/2
CERTIFIED DIMENSIONS
E-MOTOR DIMENSIONS INDICA TIVE
DIRECTION OF ROTA TION: C.C.W. facing shafiend of pump
FLANGES CONNECTIONS
645 Generally in accordance with: A (gauge) G1/2"
ISO 2084 B (oil supply) 1/2"
DISCHARGE NP10 C (venting) 63/4'
D (oil drain) G1/2"
0 445
FRONT VIEW
OIL SUPPL Y 1/2

AIR VENT G3/4\
OIL DRAIN 3/4'
TOP VIEW
725
For untolerated dimensions: Roughness ace. to Trim sharp edges

Casting : ISO 8062 ISO 1302 with; 0,5 x 0,5*
Welded parts : ISO 2768-v Form and position toi. Fillet all undercuttings
Machined s u r f a c e s : ISO 2768-m according to NEN-ISO 1101 with R=0,2
*=unless otherwise indicat.
NIJHUIS POMPEN P.LIST • DRN.: M.S. CHK.: APP.:
ACC.DWQ.NO. D.D. 13-08-1999 D.D. 16-08-1999 D.D

P.O.BOX 102
7100 AC Winterswijk - Holland ME10 (CAD) PROJECTION
i- o
DESCRIPTION:
Bu i l
SCALE 1:20
OUTLINE DRAWING
CO
LU
This document is our property and must not be copied

VDL1-30.45 without our written permission, and the contents
thereof must not be disclosed to any third party,
nor be used for any unauthorised purpose.
DRN.
DATE ORIGIN: MODEL/ART.NO. DWQ./ART.NO. REV.
REV. 3.4.55.75, 3.45.8.69,.

54 Desmi Pumps

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

54 Desmi Pumps

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

z

>ModuIar Pumps ] f ' DESMI

Vertical Incline centri1|!^äl,;i

< Vertical.in-line.centrifugal pump with •'" -

DESMI offers a wide range of pumps and pump systems.

Internal Gear Pumps for Industry . '

DESMI is a modern company with many years of experience. Centrifugal,

SHIPYARD: ODENSE STÅLSKIBSVÆRFT A/S

NEW BUILDING: 171

Cap. Motor Pump

VNC1-125420 Fire/G.S. 300/100 82/90 1780 125

NSL80-265/D02 Add. Fire 72 90 3550 43. 196928

SL250-330/D-G2-K-P Ballast 500 25 1775 65 196934-1/2

QT2-250 Heeling 400 16 1750 65

CR8-50 Air Cooler Drain 14 50 3500 -3

NSL200-415/A02 F.W.Reefer Cooling 623 45 1775 125 197015-1/2

SL150-330/A-G2-K-P F.W. Cooling HT. 360 30 1775 55 196996-1/2

VDL1-3045 Lub. Oil M.E. 1020 50 . 1800 230

NSL80-215/D02-K-P S.W.f.FW Generator 70 50 3505 17,5 196953

S Tlrtonea *1*7i rir\r>

SHIPYARD: ODENSE STÅLSKIBSVÆRFT A/S

NEW BUILDING: 171

TYPE: NSL80-265/D02-K-P PARTS LIST No.: 673175-01-03-02-01

POS. No.: 05.14.02.001 QUANTITY: 1

PUMP No.: 196928

Capacity: 72 m3/h x 90 mWC x 3550 rpm

Electric motor: ABB - M2BA200MLB-2 - 43 kW

Impeller diameter: 0226 mm

Pump casing and rear cover: Bronze

This instruction includes the following pages:

NSL monobloc instruction No. T1380

H:\Dokumontor\lnotb. Odonoo 171 .doo

SHIPYARD: ODENSE STÅLSKIBSVÆRFT A/S

NEW BUILDING: 171

TYPE: SL250-330/D-G2-K-P PARTS LIST No.: 654644-01-01-02

POS. No.: 05.16.01.001/002 QUANTITY: 2

PUMP No.: 196934-1/2

Capacity: 500 m3/h x 25 mWC x 1775 rpm

Electric motor: ABB - M2BA 225SMC-4 - 65 kW

Impeller diameter: ø256 mm

Pump casing and rear cover: Bronze

This instruction includes the following pages:

SL monobloc instruction No. T1423

SHIPYARD: ODENSE STÅLSKIBSVÆRFT A/S

NEW BUILDING: 171

TYPE: DSL300-320/D-F-P PARTS LIST No.: 654670-01-02-02

POS. No.: 05.23.09.001 QUANTITY: 1

PUMP No.: 196958-1

Capacity: 1228/850 m3/h x 20/8,5 mWC x 1785/1190 rpm

Electric motor: ABB - M2BA 280SMB-4/6 - 90/30 kW

Impeller diameter: 0286 mm

Pump casing and rear cover: Bronze

Bearings - manual, paragraph 11.4

This instruction includes the following pages:

DSL instruction No. T1429

SHIPYARD: ODENSE STÅLSKIBSVÆRFT A/S

NEW BUILDING: 171

TYPE: DSL300-320/D-F-P PARTS LIST No.: 654670-01-02-01

POS. No.: 05.23.09.002/003 QUANTITY: 2

PUMP No.: 196958-2/3

Capacity: 1228/850 m3/h x 20/8,5 mWC x 1785/1190 rpm

Electric motor: ABB - M2BA280SMB-4/6 - 90/30 kW

Impeller diameter: ø286 mm

Pump casing and rear cover: Bronze

S Tlrtonea 17i rir\r>